guide micro station v7 1

User Guide

DAA004450-1/0003

MicroStation/J®

TrademarksAccuDraw, Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation,MicroStation/J, MicroStation MasterPiece, MicroStation Modeler,MicroStation PowerDraft, MicroStation Review, MicroStation SE,MicroStation Vault, PowerScope, QuickVision, SmartLine, andTeamMate are registered trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a servicemark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.

Java™ and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarksor registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. inthe U.S. and other countries.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo, Distiller, Exchange,and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

Other brands and product names are the trademarks oftheir respective owners.

United States Patent Nos. 5,815,415 and 5,784,068.

Copyrights©2000 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.IGDS file formats ©1981-1988 Intergraph Corporation.Intergraph Raster File Formats ©1993 Intergraph Corporation.Portions ©1992-1994 Summit Software Company.Portions ©1992-1997 Spotlight Graphics, Inc.Portions ©1993-1995 Criterion Software Ltd. and its licensors.Portions ©1992-1998 Sun MicroSystems, Inc.Portions © Unigraphics Solutions, Inc.Icc ©1991-1995 by AT&T, Christopher W. Fraser, and DavidR. Hanson. All rights reserved.Portions ©1997–1999 HMR, Inc. All rights reserved.Portions ©1992–1997 STEP Tools, Inc.Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine ©1993 Wintertree Software Inc.Unpublished – rights reserved under the copyright laws of theUnited States and other countries. All rights reserved.

MicroStation/J User’s Guide

MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents

1. Placing Elements in 2D

Setting the Active Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1What are element attributes? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1Element symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13Line Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

Line style modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17General Procedure — To use a custom line style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18

Activating line style modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19Standard line styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21

Level symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21Other element attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26

Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28

Linear Elements tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29Place SmartLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30Place Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36Place Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37Place Stream Line String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40Place Point or Stream Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42Construct Angle Bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44Construct Minimum Distance Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–45Construct Line at Active Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–46Ellipses tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47Place Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48Place Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–51Polygons tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54Place Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55Place Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–57Place Orthogonal Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59Place Regular Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60Points tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63Setting the Active Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–64Place Active Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65

MicroStation/J User’s Guide i

Table of Contents

Construct Active Points Between Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–67Project Active Point Onto Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–68Construct Active Point at Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–69Construct Active Points Along Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–71Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–72Arcs tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–74Place Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–75Place Half Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77Place Quarter Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78Modify Arc Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–79Modify Arc Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80Modify Arc Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81Using the Select Settings Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83General Procedure — To work with drawing settings groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84Other categories of settings groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84

Scale settings groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85Working units settings groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85

2. Drafting Aids

Using Tentative Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1Snapping tentative points to elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2

Snap Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2Snap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2Snap Mode override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4Effect of Snap Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6Locate Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9Snapping to cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10Element keypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10

AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13A simple example of using AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13Learning AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17Activating AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17AccuDraw’s compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18

The origin point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19The drawing plane indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19The X/Y axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20

AccuDraw’s drawing plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21Drawing plane coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21

The AccuDraw window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22AccuDraw’s window and the input focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23

AccuDraw’s Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23

ii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Working with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24General Procedure for Using AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25Previewing and constraining data points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26AccuDraw and the Popup Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26

Performing simple operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27Advanced uses of the popup calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–28How AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30Tolerance shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31Previous distance recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–33Recalling previous values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34Settings manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34

AccuDraw’s keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34AccuDraw defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36Create, edit and delete shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36

General Procedure — To activate a keyboard shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–37Smart Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38X and Y locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40Distance lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41Angle lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–42

Unit roundoffs and their effect on AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43Distance roundoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43Angle roundoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–44

Moving the AccuDraw compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45The floating origin option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45

AccuDraw and the tentative point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45Tentative points and drawing plane orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–46

AccuDraw’s drawing plane orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47Rotating the drawing plane axes in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48Dynamically rotating the drawing plane axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48Rotation-sensitive tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48The Rotate Quick keyboard shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48

Using shortcut snap modes with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50The AccuDraw-enhanced Nearest snap mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–50Setting the keypoint snap divisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51

AccuDraw’s Effect on Various Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51AccuDraw and the Place Circle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51AccuDraw and the Place Arc tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52AccuDraw and the Place Ellipse tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53AccuDraw and the Place Block tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53AccuDraw affects most tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54

AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54Complete List of AccuDraw Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–58Using the Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61

Using Grid Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64

MicroStation/J User’s Guide iii

Table of Contents

Precision Input Key-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65Syntax notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68

Measure tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–69Measure Distance ........................................................................................................... 2–70Measure Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73Measure Angle Between Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74Measure Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–75Measure Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76Measure Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81Mass Properties window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–82Basic properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–85

3. Manipulating and Modifying Elements

Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1Element Selection tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3PowerSelector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5Manipulating and Modifying Selected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11Specialized Manipulation and Modification Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15Identifying elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16

Using the Fence to Manipulate and Modify Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16Specifying which elements are in the fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17

Manipulations on many elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20Optimized fence clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20Special fence manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21

Fence tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23Place Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24Modify Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28Manipulate Fence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29Delete Fence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33Manipulate tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38Move Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51Align Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53Construct Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55Change Attributes tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59

iv MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Change Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61Change Element to Active Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62Change Element to Active Fill Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63Modify Line Style Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–65CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–66Change Multi-line to Active Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–67Match Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–68SmartMatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69Match tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–70Match Text Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–72Match Multi-line Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73Match Dimension Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–74Match Curve Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–75Match Surface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–76Drop tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77Drop Complex Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79Drop Line String/Shape Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80Drop Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–81Drop Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82Drop Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83Drop Associative Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–84Drop Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–85Drop Dimension Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–86Modify tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–87Modify Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–89Delete Part of Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–100Extend Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101Extend Two Elements to Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102Extend Element to Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103Trim Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–104IntelliTrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–105Insert Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110Delete Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112Construct Circular Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113Construct Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115Element Level Manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116

4. Using Cells

Working with Cell Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2Creating and Editing Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6Placing Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9

MicroStation/J User’s Guide v

Table of Contents

Controlling the level on which cells are placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11Shared cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11

What is a shared cell? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12Reasons to use shared cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12

Cells tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13Place Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14Place Active Cell Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16Select and Place Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18Define Cell Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20Identify Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20Place Active Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21Replace Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22Hatching and Patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26

Controlling the display of patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26Placing patterns in the design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27Associative patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–28Snappable patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29Excluding areas inside a patterned area from patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29Cells used for patterning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29

Pattern cells supplied with MicroStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–30Guidelines for creating pattern cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31

Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31Patterns tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32Hatch Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33Crosshatch Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40Pattern Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41Linear Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49Show Pattern Attributes ................................................................................................ 4–52Match Pattern Attributes .............................................................................................. 4–52Delete Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53Dimension-driven Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53

5. Reference Files

Using Reference Design Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1Attaching reference design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

Attachments using saved views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4Making portable reference file attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7Helping locate “lost” attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9Attaching remote reference files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11Reference File Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11

Working with attached reference design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13Identifying reference design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25

vi MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Modifying attachment information from the system command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25Merging reference design files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27

Using Reference Raster Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–34Raster image types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35

Monochrome (1-bit) imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35Mapped (4- or 8-bit) color imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35Full (24-bit) color, mapped or RGB imagery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36

Raster image file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36A sample reference raster file application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36Reference raster files and the Reference Files dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–37Reference raster file attachment settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–37Attaching reference raster files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38Manipulating reference raster files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–42

Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–42Resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–44Erasing part of a reference raster file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–45

Plotting reference raster files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46Adjusting the File Update Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46

6. Advanced 2D Drafting Techniques

Permanently Grouping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1Using complex chains and complex shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2Using groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3Using graphic groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3

Putting “Holes” in Solid Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5Fillets tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5Construct Parabolic Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6Groups tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8Drop Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9Create Complex Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11Create Complex Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14Create Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16Add to Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20Drop from Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21Group Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22Using Multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23

General Procedure — To define a multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25Compatibility with previous versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29

Multi-line Joints tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30Construct Closed Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32

MicroStation/J User’s Guide vii

Table of Contents

Construct Open Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33Construct Merged Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34Cut Single Component Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35Cut All Component Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36Construct Closed Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37Construct Open Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38Construct Merged Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39Construct Corner Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40Uncut Component Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41Multi-line Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42Move Multi-line Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43Edit Multi-line Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45Associating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46

Elements that can be associated with other elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46Associating shared cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47Associating multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47

Isometric Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48Isometric tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50Place Isometric Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–51Place Isometric Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–52Using Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–54

Point curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55B-spline curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55

Methods by which the curve is calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–56B-spline curve attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–58Special-purpose 2D B-spline tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59

Composite curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59Bézier curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–60

Creating any conceivable curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–60General Procedure — To place a pre-defined curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61General Procedure — To define a curve’s formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63Dimensionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–64Function format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–64Deriving a curve from an existing curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–65

B-spline Curves tool frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–66Create Curves tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–68Place B-spline Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–69Create Curve by Tangents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–77Place Composite Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–80Construct Interpolation by Arcs .................................................................................... 6–83Place Conic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–85Place Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–86Place Helix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–88

viii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Offset Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–89Extract Surface Rule Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–90Curve Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93Curve Calculator dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–95Modify Curves tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–100Change to Active Curve Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–102Reduce Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103Extend Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–105Change Element Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–106Convert Element to B-spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–107Blend Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–108Drop B-spline Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–110Flatten Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–111Evaluate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–114Selecting Elements Based on Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120

General Procedure — To use Attributes as Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122ACS tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–125Define ACS (Aligned with Element) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126Define ACS (By Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126Define ACS (Aligned with View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–127Rotate Active ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–128Move ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129Select ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130

Setting working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131Digitizing tablet partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131Placing monument points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–133Tools for digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134Panning while digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134

7. 3D Design and Modeling

Basic 3D Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2Design cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2View volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3

Display Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4Standard views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5

2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5Orthogonal views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6Isometric views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7

View coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8

MicroStation/J User’s Guide ix

Table of Contents

Perspective projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8Viewing a 3D Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8

3D viewing procedures that are similar to 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9Fitting views in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9Rotating views in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9Panning in views in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10

3D-specific viewing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11Using saved views in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11

3D View Control tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14Change View Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15Set Display Depth .......................................................................................................... 7–16Set Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19Show Display Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22Show Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23Change View Rotation .................................................................................................... 7–23View Rotation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27Render . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32Navigate Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–353D Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48

Open 3D elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48Non-planar line strings and curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49Helixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49

Primitive surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50Cone and cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51

Extruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52Free-form (NURBS) surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–533D Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54

Drawing in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54Placing elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54

Specifying whether an element encloses volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55Using AccuDraw in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55

The AccuDraw window in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56Orienting the drawing plane in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56

Precision input key-ins in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–613D data points and 3D tentative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–613D auxiliary coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61

ACS Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62Using AccuDraw with auxiliary coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65

x MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Table of Contents

Other ways of working with auxiliary coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66Manipulating and modifying elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–69

Selecting elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70Identifying existing elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70Using the fence in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71

SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71Settings that affect SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72

SmartSolids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72Surface Rule Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72

Locate By Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–73Use Optimized Fence Clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75Exporting visible edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76

3D Main tool frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–763D Primitives tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–77Place Slab ........................................................................................................................ 7–78Place Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–81Place Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83Place Cone ....................................................................................................................... 7–87Place Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88Place Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–903D Construct tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–92Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93Construct Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–97Extrude Along Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–100Shell Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–103Thicken to Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1063D Modify tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–108Modify Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–109Remove Faces and Heal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–111Construct Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–114Construct Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–116Construct Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–119Cut Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–121Fillet Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–125Chamfer Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1273D Utility tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–130Align Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–131Change SmartSolid Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–135Extract Face or Edge Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–137Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–138Surface Modeling tool frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–140Create Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–141Construct Surface by Section or Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–143

MicroStation/J User’s Guide xi

Table of Contents

Construct Surface by Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145Place Free-form Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146Construct Skin Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–151Sweep Along Two Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–152Construct Helical Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–155Construct Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–158Modify Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–159Construct Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–161Project Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–164Convert 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–167Construct Stitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–168Change Normal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–169Modify Trim Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170Change to Active Surface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–172Split Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–173Extend Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–174Reduce Surface Poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–175Fillet Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–177Fillet Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–178Blend Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–179Blend Surface Between Rail Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1813D Queries tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–182Evaluate Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183Using Cells in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187

Creating 3D cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187Patterning in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–188

xii MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Placing Elements in 2D

In this chapter, you will find procedures concerning basic 2D elementplacement operations in MicroStation, including:

• Setting the Active Element Attributes (see page 1-1)

• Using Tools in the Linear Elements tool box (see page 1-29)

• Using Tools in the Ellipses tool box (see page 1-47)

• Using Tools in the Polygons tool box (see page 1-54)

• Using Tools in the Points tool box (see page 1-63)

• Using Tools in the Arcs tool box (see page 1-74)

• Using the Select Settings Window (see page 1-82)

Setting the Active Element AttributesWhen you place an element, the design plane locations of the datapoints used to draw the element are stored in the design file. Inaddition, a number of element attributes are stored.

What are element attributes?

Element attributes include the following:

• level

• color

• line weight

• line style

• fill type and color (for closed elements)

MicroStation/J User’s Guide 1–1

Placing Elements in 2DElement symbology

Attributes are determined by settings. For example, while the ActiveColor is set to red, the color attribute of newly placed elements is red.

Changing an active setting has no effect on previously placedelements.1 However, you can change any attribute of a previouslyplaced element to the corresponding active setting with the ChangeElement Attributes tool (see page 3-61) .

Element symbology

These attributes compose what is called element symbology:

• color

• line weight

• line style

• fill color (for closed elements)

1 An exception is that the corresponding attribute (for example, color) of each

selected element is changed, as well as the active setting, when you change the

setting (for example, Active Color) using the Primary Tools tool box or the Element

Attributes dialog box. See “Selecting Elements”.

1–2 MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Placing Elements in 2DLevel

Level

“LV” denotesthe Active

Level

Each element in a design is on one of 63 levels, which are numbered1 through 63 and can also be given names.

The level on which new elements are placed with most tools isthe Active Level. The Active Level is the same level in all views,and elements residing upon it are always displayed in all views.The level number to which the Active Level is set is shown inthe Primary Tools tool box; the level name (if any) to which theActive Level is set is shown in the status bar.

You can set up a level structure to make it easy to manipulate thedisplay of various levels and groups of levels and save the levelstructure in a separate file to make it easier to use with other designs. .

For information about changing an element’s level and makinga copy of an element on another level, see Element LevelManipulations on page 3-116.



To apply an existing level structure to the design1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.

The Level Manager dialog box opens.

2. From the Options menu, choose Level Names.

The Level Names dialog box opens.

3. From the dialog box’s File menu, choose Open.

The Open Level Structure dialog box opens.

4. In the Files list box, select the level structure file.

5. Click the OK button.

6. In the Level Names dialog box, click the Done button.

7. (Optional) — To prevent the level structure from having tobe reapplied the next time the design file is opened, chooseSave Settings from the File menu.



Alternative method — To apply an existinglevel structure to the design1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Names.


2. From the dialog box’s File menu, choose Open.

The Open Level Structure dialog box opens.

3. In the Files list box, select the level structure file.



6. (Optional) — To prevent the level structure from having tobe reapplied the next time the design file is opened, chooseSave Settings from the File menu.

To name a level1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


2. From the Options menu, choose Level Names.


3. Click the Add button.

The Level Name dialog box opens. If a level is selected, thedefault level number in the Number field is one greaterthan the number of the selected level.

4. In the Level Name dialog box, enter the level numberof the desired level.

Drawing levels are numbered 1 through 63. You cannot change



those numbers, but you can give each level a unique name.

5. In the Name field, key in a name of 16 or fewer characters.

6. (Optional) — In the Comment field, key in a commentof 32 or fewer characters.



9. (Optional) — To prevent the named level assignmentfrom being lost when the design file is closed, chooseSave Settings from the File menu.

Alternative method — To name a level1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Names.


2. Click the Add button.

The Level Name dialog box opens. If a level is selected, thedefault level number in the Number field is one greaterthan the number of the selected level.

3. In the Level Name dialog box, enter the level numberof the desired level.

Drawing levels are numbered 1 through 63. You cannot changethose numbers, but you can give each level a unique name.

4. In the Name field, key in a name of 16 or fewer characters.

5. (Optional) — In the Comment field, key in a comment



of 32 or fewer characters.



8. (Optional) — To prevent the named level assignmentfrom being lost when the design file is closed, chooseSave Settings from the File menu.

To sort the levels shown in the Level Namesdialog box’s list box1. From the Level Names dialog box’s Sort menu, choose Sort.

The Sort Criteria dialog box opens. The default criteria are:

Top Priority — Level Number.

Second Priority — Level Name.

Third Priority — Comment.

2. From the Sort Criteria dialog box’s Top Priority option menu,choose the primary criterion for sorting the levels.

The options include Level Number, Level Name,Comment, and Group Name.

3. (Optional) — From the Sort Criteria dialog box’s SecondPriority option menu, choose the criterion for sorting multiplelevels that meet the Top Priority criterion.

The options available are the three criteria not chosenin the Top Priority option menu.

4. (Optional) — From the Sort Criteria dialog box’s Third Priorityoption menu, choose the criterion for sorting multiple levels thatmeet both the Top Priority and Second Priority criteria.

The options available are the two criteria not chosen either in the



Top Priority option menu or in the Second Priority option menu.


To set the Active Level by number or name1. In the Primary Tools tool box, press on the Level

option menu button.2

Level optionmenu and

map

The option menu opens. It is a level map. The Active Levelis indicated with a highlighted circle.

2. While pressing the Data button, drag over the levelmap to the desired level.

If the pointer is over a named level, the level name isdisplayed beneath the level map.

3. Release the Data button when the pointer is on the desiredlevel, as indicated by a circle.

Alternative method — To set the ActiveLevel by number or name1. In the status bar, click the Active Level field.

The Set Active Level dialog box opens. If any level names aredefined and Display Levels is set to Names in the Operationcategory of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace menu >Preferences), the dialog box contains a list box for selecting thedesired level by name. Otherwise, the dialog box contains a

2 If you change the Active Level using the tool box or the Element Attributes dialog box,

the levels of selected elements (see “Selecting Elements”) are also changed.



level map for selecting the desired level by number.

Set ActiveLevel (by

name) dialogbox

Set ActiveLevel (bynumber)

dialog box

2. In the list box or level map, select the desired level.


Alternative method — To set the ActiveLevel by number or name1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.

The Element Attributes dialog box opens.

2. Press on the Level option menu button.

The option menu opens. It is a level map. The Active Levelis indicated with a highlighted circle.

3. While pressing the Data button, drag over the levelmap to the desired level.

If the pointer is over a named level, the level name is



displayed beneath the level map.

4. Release the Data button when the pointer is on the desiredlevel, as indicated by a circle.

To set the Active Level by number1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


2. (If necessary) Select the Numbers tab.

The Numbers tab page opens, displaying a level map. Thenumber highlighted by a circle is the Active Level. The whitenumbers denote levels that contain elements (only true for thelevel map in the Level Manager dialog box).

3. Double-click a level number to set it as the Active Level.

The Apply button behaves as if it has been clicked aftera level number is double-clicked.



Alternative method — To set the ActiveLevel by number1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Display.

The View Levels dialog box opens.

View Levelsdialog boxwith level

map

2. (If necessary) From the View Levels dialog box’s Displaymenu, choose Level Numbers.

The View Levels dialog box displays the level map. The numberhighlighted by a circle is the Active Level.

3. Double-click a level number to set it as the Active Level.

The Apply button behaves as if it has been clicked aftera level number is double-clicked.

Alternative method — To set the ActiveLevel by number1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File.

The Design File Settings dialog box opens.

2. In the Category list box, select Element Attributes.

3. In the Level field, key in the number of the desired level.




Alternative method — To set the ActiveLevel by number1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.


2. In the Level field, key in the number of the desired level.

To set the Active Level by name1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


LevelManager

dialog boxwith the

Names tabdisplayed

2. Select the Names tab.

A list of named levels (and unnamed levels, if Show Unnamedis turned on) is shown in the list box.

3. Double-click a level or select it and click the Active buttonto make it the Active Level.


Placing Elements in 2DColor

Alternative method — To set the ActiveLevel by name1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Display.

The View Levels dialog box opens.

2. From the dialog box’s Display menu, choose Level Names.

A list of named levels (and unnamed levels, if Show Unnamedis turned on) is shown in the list box.

View Levelsdialog boxwith level

names

3. Double-click a level or select it and click the Active buttonto make it the Active Level.

To set the Active Level with a key-in1. Key in LV=<level_number | level_name>.

Color

MicroStation stores the Active Color and the color attributeof each element as a value in the 0-255 range. To display anelement in color, MicroStation looks in the active color table forthe color that corresponds to the element color value. You can


Placing Elements in 2DColor

modify colors in the active color table.

The active color table is depicted graphically in MicroStation asa 16 × 16 palette of colored tiles called a color palette.

You can also change the colors in the active design file by attaching adifferent color table to it. The attached color table is automaticallyactivated each time the design file is reopened. Each seed design filesupplied with MicroStation has a color table already attached.

Color tables are stored as independent files. The active color table canbe saved to a file for future attachment to any design file.

For more information about working with color tables, see Color Tables.

To set the Active Color1. In the Primary Tools tool box, press on the colored tile

at the extreme left, and drag across the color paletteto select the desired color.3

Color Palette

3 If you change the Active Color using the tool box or the Element Attributes dialog box,

the colors of selected elements (see “Selecting Elements”) are also changed.


Placing Elements in 2DLine Weight

Alternative method — To set the Active Color1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.

The Element Attributes dialog box opens.4

2. If you know the number of the desired color, key itinto the Color field.

3. Otherwise, press on the colored tile to the right and drag acrossthe color palette to select the desired color.

Alternative method — To set the Active Color1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File.



3. If you know the number of the desired color, key itinto the Color field.

Otherwise, press on the colored tile to the right and drag acrossthe color palette to select the desired color.

For information about setting the Active Fill Color, see Fill on page 1-26.

Line Weight

MicroStation stores the Active Line Weight and the line weightattribute of each element as a value in the 0-31 range.

To set the Active Line Weight1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Weight option menu,

choose the desired line weight value.5

4 If you change the Active Color using the tool box or the Element Attributes dialog box,

the colors of selected elements (see “Selecting Elements”) are also changed.5 If you change the Active Line Weight using the tool box or the Element Attributes settings

box, the line weights of selected elements (see “Selecting Elements”) are also changed.


Placing Elements in 2DLine Weight

Line Weight optionmenu

Alternative method — To set the ActiveLine Weight1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.


2. If you know the number of the desired line weight,key it into the Weight field.

Otherwise, choose the desired line weight from the optionmenu to the right of the Weight field.

Alternative method — To set the ActiveLine Weight1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File.



3. If you know the number of the desired line weight,key it into the Weight field.

Otherwise, choose the desired line weight from the optionmenu to the right of the Weight field.


Placing Elements in 2DLine Style

Line Style

A line style definition can specify the following:

• A stroke pattern composed of dash strokes and gapstrokes of varying lengths.

• Small drawings called point symbols at varying intervals.

Line style definitions are customizable. The default set of line stylesin the Line Styles dialog box is intended as a sample. In most cases,line styles should be set up by a site or project manager.

Some ofthe sampleline styles

supplied inMicroStation’s

sampleworkspaces

(not to scale)

Line style modifiers

Line style modifiers or overrides allow some characteristicsof a line style to be modified as elements are placed withoutrequiring separate line style definitions.

Modifiers are available for the following stroke patternand stroke attributes:

• Origin and end widths. These modifiers are applied to eachstroke and can be used to create wide or tapered elements.

• Stroke pattern shift.



In addition, a Scale Factor modifier is available. This modifier isapplied to all length values in the line style definition.

General Procedure — To use a custom line style

1. Set the Active Line Style. See To set the Active LineStyle on page 1-19.

2. Activate any desired line style modifiers. See Activatingline style modifiers on page 1-19.

3. Place elements with the Active Line Style and any active modifiers.

To set the Active Line Style1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Style option menu,

choose the desired line style. 6

Line Styles optionmenu

Alternative method — To set the Active Line Style1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Style option

6 The Line Style option menu has items that correspond to the most recently active custom

line styles (up to four) and the eight numbered Standard line styles.



menu, choose Custom.

The Line Styles dialog box opens.

2. In the list box, double-click the name of the desired line style.orIn the list box, select the name of the desired line style, and clickthe large button at the bottom of the dialog box on which a sampleof the selected line style is displayed. (To make the large buttonvisible, you must first turn on the Show Details check box.)

Alternative method — To set the Active Line Style1. In the Key-in window, key in ACTIVE STYLE <style_name>

or LC=<style_name>.

Activating line style modifiers

Line style modifiers are activated in the Line Styles dialog box. Thelarge button in the dialog box shows the line style selected in the listbox with active modifiers applied. (To make the large button visible,you must first turn on the Show Details check box.)

The New User interface does not let you activate line style modifiers.

To override the starting or ending widthfor each dash stroke in elements placedwith the Active Line Style1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Style option





2. Turn on Show Details.

3. (Optional) — To set the start width, turn on Origin, and key inthe desired width, in master units, in the Origin field.

4. (Optional) — To set the ending width, turn on End, and key inthe desired width, in master units, in the End field.

Line Styles settingbox with Show

Details on

To apply a scale factor to all displayablecharacteristics of the Active Line Style1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Style option




3. Turn on Scale Factor, and key in the desired scale factorin the Scale Factor field.

To shift or adjust stroke patterns differently thanspecified in the Active Line Style definition1. From the Primary Tools tool box’s Line Style option


Placing Elements in 2DLevel symbology




3. To shift stroke patterns relative to the beginning of elements orelement segments, choose Distance from the Shift option menu,and key in the shift distance, in master units, in the Distance field.orTo adjust stroke patterns such that a fraction of the first strokesin stroke patterns are displayed at the start and end of elementsor element segments, choose Fraction from the Shift option menu,and key in the fraction, in decimals, in the Fraction field.

While the Change Element Attributes (see page 3-61) tool is usedto adjust the line style modifiers of an existing element as a set,the Modify Line Style Attributes (see page 3-65) tool in the ChangeAttributes tool box can be used to adjust individual line style modifiers.

Standard line styles

Standard line styles (also known as line codes), numbered 0-7,are based on output device coordinates, and therefore are nottruly WYSIWYG (“what-you-see-is-what-you-get”), as are customline styles. Hence, it is recommended that you use customline styles instead of standard line styles.

Level symbology

Each element in a design file has its own symbology. To make it clearerwhich elements are on a particular level, you can define an alternativesymbology for all elements on a level. You can then display theelements with their “normal” symbology or with the level symbology.



To copy a level symbology definition fromanother design file1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


LevelManager

dialog boxwith the

Symbologytab displayed

2. Select the Symbology tab.

3. From the Options menu, choose Import Symbology.

The Import Level Symbology dialog box opens.

4. Select the design file from which you want to copy thelevel symbology definition.


The list box in the Symbology tab page updates toshow the copied definition.



Alternative method — To copy a level symbologydefinition from another design file1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Symbology.

The Level Symbology dialog box opens.

2. From the dialog box’s File menu, choose Import.

The Import Level Symbology dialog box opens.

3. Select the design file from which you want to copy thelevel symbology definition.


The list box in the Level Symbology dialog box updatesto show the copied definition.

To define level symbology “from scratch”1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Symbology.


2. For each attribute (color, [numbered] line style, or line weight)to be set, turn on the attribute under the Settings group.

3. Adjust the desired controls.

The Color, Style, and Weight controls are similar to those inthe Element Attributes dialog box. For information aboutusing those controls, see To set the Active Color on page 1-15



and To set the Active Line Weight on page 1-16.

4. In the list box, select a level or a range of levels andclick the Apply button.

(To select a range of levels, select a level at one end of the range andthen select the level at the other end while pressing the �Shift� key.)

Alternative method — To define levelsymbology “from scratch”1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Symbology.


2. For each attribute (color, [numbered] line style, or line weight)to be set, turn on the attribute under the Settings group.


The Color, Style, and Weight controls are similar to those inthe Element Attributes dialog box. For information aboutusing those controls, see To set the Active Color on page 1-15and To set the Active Line Weight on page 1-16.

4. In the list box, select a level or a range of levels andclick the Apply button.


To display elements using level symbology1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Symbology.


2. For each level attribute (color, line weight, or line style) to bedisplayed in place of the elements’ own attributes, turn onthe corresponding check box under Overrides.

3. Click OK.

4. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press �Ctrl-B�).or



From any view window’s control menu, choose View Attributes.

The View Attributes dialog box opens.

5. From the View option menu, choose the desired view.

6. Turn on the Level Symbology attribute.

7. Click Apply or All.

8. (Optional) — If necessary, update the open views.

Alternative method — To display elementsusing level symbology1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Symbology.



3. Click OK.

4. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press �Ctrl-B)�.or


Placing Elements in 2DOther element attributes



5. From the View option menu, choose the desired view.

6. Turn on the Level Symbology attribute.


8. (Optional) — If necessary, update the open views.

Other element attributes

In addition to level, color, line weight, and line style,elements have these attributes:

• Fill (none, opaque, or outline)

• Class (primary or construction)

• The area attribute determines whether a closed element is a solidor a hole (see Putting Holes in Solid Elements on page 6-5).

Fill

The fill attribute applies only to closed elements such as circles,ellipses, and polygons. Closed elements completely enclosethe area within their boundaries.

Top: Opaquefill; Bottom:Outline fill

By default, a closed element is displayed in a wireframe view by linesin the Active Color that outline the area occupied by the element.The area of the element inside the outline is transparent.

A closed element is filled when the area within its outline is displayed



as a solid area of color. The color is determined by the Active FillColor. When an element is opaque, it is displayed as a solid shapeof the Active Color. In that case, the lines outlining the elementare not discernible since the “fill” has the same color.

In any view, opaque and filled elements are displayed as outlinesunless the Fill view attribute is on for that view. In other words,turning off Fill in a view hides the “fill.”The effects of the fill attribute and the Fill view attributeare summarized in this table:

Fill Type Fill on Fill off

None No fill displayed No filldisplayed

Opaque Element “filled” withcolor of the element

No filldisplayed

Outline Element filled withActive Fill Color

No filldisplayed

A series of lines or a closed line string can also enclose an area.However, MicroStation treats neither as a shape. Therefore,neither can be assigned an area or fill attribute.

To set the Active Fill Type and Color1. Select a tool in the Polygons tool box.

2. From the Fill Type option menu in the Tool Settings window,choose None, Opaque, or Outline.

3. If you know the number of the desired color, key itinto the Fill Color field.

Otherwise, press on the colored tile to the right of the Fill Colorfield and drag across the color palette to select the desired color.

To turn Fill on or off in a view1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press �Ctrl-B�).

or





2. From the View option menu in the settings box,choose the desired view.

3. Click the Fill check box.


To change the fill type and color of an element, use the Change Elementto Active Fill Type tool (see page 3-63) in the Change Attributes tool box.

Class

By convention, elements with the class attribute of Construction areused as drawing aids. For example, you might place a constructionelement in a particular location as an element to “snap” otherelements to, but you would not plot the construction element whenthe design is complete. The elements that are actually part of thedesign usually have the class attribute of Primary.

To set the Active Class1. From the Element menu, choose Attributes.

The Element Attributes Settings dialog box opens.

2. From the Class option menu, choose Primary or Construction.

Alternative method — To set the Active Class1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File.



3. From the Class option menu, choose Primary or Construction.



Placing Elements in 2DLinear Elements tool box

Linear Elements tool box

The tools in the Linear Elements tool box are used toplace linear elements.

To Select in the Linear Elementstool box

Place a line, line string, shape,arc, or circle or a combinationthereof as a complex element.

Place SmartLine (see page 6-80)

Place or construct a line.

Place Line (see page 1-36)

Place a multi-line.

Place Multi-line (see page 1-37)

Place a stream line string(primarily for tracing imageswhen digitizing).

Place Stream Line String(see page 1-40)

Place a point curve or astream curve.1

Place Point or Stream Curve(see page 1-42)

Construct a line that bisectsan angle.

Construct Angle Bisector(see page 1-44)


Placing Elements in 2DPlace SmartLine

To Select in the Linear Elementstool box

Construct a line between twoelements at their closest points.

Construct Minimum DistanceLine (see page 1-45)

Construct a line at Active Angle

Construct Line at Active Angle(see page 1-46)

1 Point curves are the traditional MicroStation curve element type (9). Stream

curves are used primarily for tracing images when digitizing.

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX LINEAR OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Place SmartLine

Used to place a chain of connected line segments and arc segmentsas individual elements or as a single line string, shape, circle,complex chain, or complex shape element.

Rounded vertices can be created by allowing the tool to automaticallyplace an arc tangent to two adjacent line segments. You can also roundbetween two arc segments, or between an arc segment and a linesegment. If a rounded vertex cannot be created, a sharp one is createdinstead. (This is often a more convenient [though less versatile] way ofplacing an arc than directly drawing one as a segment.)



Tool Setting Effect

SegmentType

Sets the type of segment.

Lines—Sets line segments

Arcs—Sets arc segments

Vertex Type Sets the type of vertex.

• Sharp

• Rounded

• Chamfered

If after snapping to the first vertex pointand before accepting it, you change VertexType, the new setting applies only to the finalvertex. (For information about snapping, seeUsing Tentative Points on page 2-1.)

RoundingRadius

(with Vertex Type set to Rounded) If on, setsthe arc radius for a rounded vertex. If aftersnapping to the first vertex point and beforeaccepting it, you change Round Radius, thenew setting applies only to the final radius.

ChamferOffset

(with Vertex Type set to Chamfered) Setsthe two distances required to define achamfer. Chamfer Offset requires that thetwo chamfer distances be equal (from thetheoretical intersection point).

JoinElements

If off, places segments as individualelements and also

• eliminates the option to close thechain (Closed Element) upon snappingto the first vertex point.

• allows individual segments to havedifferent symbologies.

Toggling this setting affects previouslydefined segments in the chain.



Tool Setting Effect

ClosedElement

If on, accepting a tentative point snappedto the first vertex point closes the element.Otherwise, accepting such a tentative pointdoes not close the element.

Area (with Closed Element on) Sets the ActiveArea — Solid or Hole

Fill Type (with Closed Element on) Sets theActive Fill Type

• None (no fill)

• Opaque (filled with Active Color)

• Outlined (filled with Fill Color)

Fill Color (with Closed Element on) Sets the colorwith which the element is filled

• If Fill Type is Opaque, the Active Color

• If Fill Type is Outlined, the fill colorcan be different from the Active Color

RotateAccuDrawto segments

(in SmartLine Placement Settings) If on,after you enter line segments, AccuDrawtypically rotates its compass such that thex-axis aligns with the line that you justplaced. Instead of turning off AccuDraw’s“context sensitivity” feature which wouldstop this aligning behavior in all the tools,the Rotate AccuDraw to segments settingaffects only the Place SmartLine tool.

Always startin line mode

(in SmartLine Placement Settings) If on,when you select the Place SmartLinetool, the segment type normally defaultsto “Lines,” despite the last segment typeused. If off, AccuDraw uses the lastsegment type that you used.



To place a chain of connected line segmentsand arc segments1. Select the Place SmartLine tool.

2. From the Segment Type option menu, choose the segment type.

3. If this is the first segment, enter a data point toposition the first vertex.

4. Enter data points to define the segment (follow the promptsin the status bar), snapping if necessary to previouslydefined segments. (For information about snapping, seeUsing Tentative Points on page 2-1.)

SegmentType

Enter data points to Similar to

Lines Define endpoints ofsegments.

None

Arcs Define center.Define sweep angle.2

Place Arc(see page1-75)

2 To change the direction of an arc — from counterclockwise to clockwise, for

example — swing the pointer around in the desired direction.

5. To define another segment of the same type, return to step4. If you snap to the first segment but are not completinga shape or complex shape, turn off Closed Element beforeaccepting the tentative point.orTo choose a different type of segment, return to step 2.orTo complete a line, line string, arc, or complex chain, Reset.orTo complete a shape, circle, or complex shape, snap to the first



vertex point, and accept the tentative point.

The following table explains illustrations of the Place SmartLinetool starting at the top left and moving clockwise.

A Constructing a line string by setting Segment Type to Lines,Vertex Type to Sharp, and entering data points 1 and 2.

B Setting Vertex Type to Rounded and Rounding Radius to 3.00causes the active vertex (at the location of data point 2) to berounded with an arc. (If the data points entered do not allowa round of the specified radius, a sharp vertex is created.Only one vertex at a time is affected by the vertex settings.)

C Setting Vertex Type to Chamfered and Chamfer Offset to 3.00.



D After setting Vertex Type back to Rounded and enteringdata point 3, Segment Type is set to Arcs, and data point4 is entered to define the arc center. The direction ofthe arc (clockwise or counterclockwise) is determinedby swinging the pointer past the starting point. (TheVertex Type setting is disregarded.)

E After entering data point 5 to complete the arc segment,setting Segment Type back to Lines and snapping a tentativepoint to the starting point tentatively closes the element.To continue without closing the element, turn off CloseElement prior to accepting the tentative point. (While thetentative point is active it is possible to change the vertexsettings of the final vertex without affecting other vertices —here they are set to Rounded and 1.50. It is also possibleto turn on Fill and change other tool settings related toclosed elements while the tentative point is active.)

Key-in: PLACE SMARTLINE

To choose SmartLine Placement Settings, click the arrow in thelower right corner of the tool settings window.

Place SmartLine is designed to be used with the versatile drafting aid,AccuDraw. See AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool on page 2-54.

To negate the last data point — before Resetting (or otherwisecompleting the placement procedure) — without affecting previouslydefined segments, choose Undo from the Edit menu. (Choosing Undoafter completing the procedure negates the entire chain.)


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Line

To combine contiguous open elements of any type into a complexchain (open) or complex shape (closed), use the Create ComplexChain tool (see page 6-11) or Create Complex Shape tool (seepage 6-14) in the Groups tool box. (With Join Elements turnedon, Place SmartLine automatically places multiple segmentsdefined with it as a single element.)

Place Line

Used to place or construct a line.

Tool Setting Effect

Length If on, sets the length in working units.

(Active)Angle

If on, constrains the line to the Active Angle,which can be keyed in here as well.

To place a line1. Select the Place Line tool.

2. Enter a data point to define one endpoint.

3. If necessary, enter a data point to define the other endpoint.


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Multi-line

Place Line.Clockwise from top

left: Unconstrained,with Length

“L” constrained,with Angle “AA”

constrained, withboth Length and

Angle constrained.

Key-in: PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED | ANGLE

Place Multi-line

Used to place a planar multi-line.

The active multi-line definition is set in the Multi-lines settings box,which is opened by choosing Multi-lines from the Element menu.

Place By Then the workline is

Illustration

Work Line At offset position0,0 as definedin the activemulti-linedefinition (in theillustrations, theposition of thedashed line).



Place By Then the workline is

Illustration

Center Adjusted to bemidway betweenthe outermostcomponent lines.If there is acomponent lineat the center,the work line issuperimposedon it.

Maximum Adjusted to besuperimposed onthe componentline with themaximum Offset.1

Minimum Adjusted to besuperimposed onthe componentline with theminimum Offset.a

1 Illustrations show pointer when drawing from left to right. Thus,

the top component line has a positive Offset, and the bottom two

component lines have negative Offsets.

Tool Setting Effect

Length If on, sets segment length, in working units.

(Active)Angle

If on, constrains the multi-line to the ActiveAngle, which can be keyed in here as well.



Tool Setting Effect

Place By Sets the work line’s position in the multi-linewhen placed and how the component linesare offset (see table above). The work line’sposition can be changed between placementsof individual segments. Placing a multi-linein this manner, however, prevents youfrom using Association Lock to associatevertices with other elements.1

AssociationLock

If on, and Snap Lock (see page 2-2) is on, anyvertex in a multi-line can be associated toanother element by snapping to that element.(For information about snapping, see “UsingTentative Points” on page 2-1.)

1 When a multi-line in the design is selected, the handles are placed on the work

line. If the Match All Element Settings tool in the Change Attributes tool box

is used to make the active multi-line definition match that of the multi-line

in the design, the work line is assigned the offset 0,0.

To place a multi-line1. Select the Place Multi-line tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the beginning of the multi-line.

3. Continue entering data points to define other vertices.

4. To complete an open multi-line, Reset.orTo complete a closed multi-line, click the Close Elementbutton or key in CLOSE ELEMENT.

In the latter case, the multi-line is closed at the location of the


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Stream Line String

first vertex, and this vertex has a corner joint.

Place Multi-line. Left: Resetting after entering data point 4 tocomplete an open multi-line. Right: Clicking the Close Elementbutton after entering data point 4 to complete a closed multi-line.

Key-in: PLACE MLINE CONSTRAINED

To change a multi-line’s attributes to the active multi-line definition,use the Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool (see page3-67) in the Change Attributes tool box.

The Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30) contains specializedtools for working with multi-lines.

Place Stream Line String

Used to place a stream line string — primarily for tracing images whenDigitizing (see page 6-130) . Many vertices can be defined withouthaving to enter a large number of individual data points.

The movement of the pointer is sampled, and data points arerecorded based on the tool settings:


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Stream Line String

Tool Setting Effect

Delta Sets the minimum distance, in workingunits, between sampled points.

Tolerance Sets the maximum distance, in workingunits, between recorded data points.

Angle Sets the angle, in degrees, that whenexceeded, causes the last sampled pointto be recorded as a data point.

Area Sets the area that, when exceeded, causes asampled point to be recorded as a data point.

To place a stream line string1. Select the Place Stream Line String tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the origin.

3. Move the pointer. A stream of data points is enteredwithout pressing the Data button.

4. Reset to end the line string.

Key-in: PLACE LSTRING STREAM

A line string element can have a maximum of 101 vertices. Ifmore than 101 vertices are defined, a complex chain consistingof one or more line string elements is created.

The tool settings can also be set in the Design File Settings box(Settings menu > Design File…), in the Stream category.

To place a stream curve, use the Place Point or Stream


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Point or Stream Curve

Curve tool (see page 1-42) .

Place Point or Stream Curve

Used to place a point or stream curve.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how the curve is defined.

Point—Traditional MicroStation curve:“Flat” between the first and second andnext-to-last and last data points entered.In many cases, B-splines are more accurateand easier to manipulate.

Stream—Primarily for tracing images whendigitizing. Many vertices can be definedwithout having to enter a large number ofindividual data points. The movement ofthe tablet cursor is sampled and data pointsare recorded based on the Active StreamDelta, Tolerance, Angle, and Area.

Non-planar If on and Method is set to Point, a space curvecan be placed (the active design must be 3D).

Delta If Method is Stream, sets the minimumdistance, in working units, betweensampled points.

Tolerance If Method is Stream, sets the maximumdistance, in working units, betweenrecorded data points.


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Point or Stream Curve

Tool Setting Effect

Angle If Method is Stream, sets the angle, indegrees, that when exceeded, causes the lastsampled point to be recorded as a data point.

Area If Method is Stream, sets the area that,when exceeded, causes a sampled point tobe recorded as a data point.

To place a point curve1. Select the Place Point or Stream Curve tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Point.

3. Enter a data point to define the curve’s beginning.

4. Enter a second data point for the first curve segment.

5. Enter a data point to complete the first curve segment.

6. Enter additional data points to add segments to the curve.

7. Reset to end the curve.

Placing a point curve


Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Angle Bisector

To place a stream curve1. Select the Place Point or Stream Curve tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Stream.


4. Move the pointer. A stream of data points is enteredwithout pressing the Data button.

5. Reset to end the curve.

Key-in: PLACE CURVE ICON | POINT | STREAM

A curve element can have 3 to 97 vertices. If more than 97vertices are defined, a complex chain consisting of one ormore curve elements is created.

The tool settings Delta, Tolerance, Angle, and Area can also beset in the Design File Settings dialog box (Settings > DesignFile…), in the Stream category.

To place a stream line string, use the Place Stream LineString tool (see page 1-40) .

Construct Angle Bisector

Used to construct a line that bisects an angle definedby three data points.

To construct an angle bisector1. Select the Construct Angle Bisector tool.

2. Enter a data point to define one endpoint of the angle


Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Minimum Distance Line

that is to be bisected.

3. Enter a second data point to define the vertex of the angle.

4. Enter a third data point to define the second endpoint of the angle.

Construct AngleBisector

Key-in: CONSTRUCT BISECTOR ANGLE

Construct Minimum Distance Line

Used to construct a line between two elements at their closest points.

To construct a minimum distance line1. Select the Construct Minimum Distance Line tool.

2. Enter a data point to identify the first element. See“Identifying elements” on page 3-16.

3. Enter a data point to identify the second element.

4. Accept the line.


Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Line at Active Angle

Construct MinimumDistance Line

Key-in: CONSTRUCT LINE MINIMUM

Construct Line at Active Angle

Used to construct a line that intersects a line segment (line orsegment of a line string or shape) at the Active Angle.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets when the intersection is defined.

From Point—The intersection is definedwhen the element being intersected isidentified (step 2 (see page 1-47) ).

To Point—The intersection is defined by thesecond data point (step 3 (see ) ).

Active Angle Sets the angle, measured counter-clockwisefrom the intersected line segment, atwhich the line is constructed.

Length If on, the length is constrained to the valuethat is keyed in the field.


Placing Elements in 2DEllipses tool box

To construct a line that intersects a linesegment at the Active Angle1. Select the Construct Line at Active Angle tool.

2. Identify the element to intersect.

If the Method is From Point, this data point definesthe intersection.

3. Enter a data point.

If Length is off, this data point defines the length.

If the Method is To Point, this data point defines the intersection.

Construct Line at Active Angle (“AA” denotes the Active Angle).Top Left: Method: From Point Length not constrained. TopRight: Method: To Point Length not constrained. BottomLeft: Method: From Point Length constrained. Bottom Right:Method: To Point Length constrained.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT LINE AA 1 | 2 | 3 | 4

Ellipses tool box

The tools in the Ellipses tool box are used to placeellipses (including circles).


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Circle

To Select in the Ellipses tool box

Place a circle.

Place Circle (see page 1-48)

Place an ellipse, preciselypositioning the center and oneend of the primary axis.

Place Ellipse (see page 1-51)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ELLIPSES OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Place Circle

Used to place a circle.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method by which the circle is placed.

Center—position by center.

Edge—position by three data pointson the circumference.

Diameter—position by diameter’s endpoints.

Area Active Area — Solid or Hole.

Fill Type Active Fill Type — None (no fill), Opaque(filled with Active Color), or Outlined(filled with Fill Color).



Tool Setting Effect

Fill Color Sets the color with which the circle is filled.

• If Fill Type is Opaque, the Active Color.

• If Fill Type is Outlined, the fill colorcan be different from the Active Color.

Diameter If on, sets the diameter, in working units(if Method is set to Center or Edge). Toinstead set the radius, choose Radius fromthe adjacent option menu.

To place a circle by its center1. Select the Place Circle tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Center.

3. Enter a data point to define the center.

4. If Diameter (or Radius) is off, enter a data point to define the radius.

Place Circle, withMethod set to Center.

Left: Diameter on;Right: Diameter off.



To place a circle by defining three pointson its circumference1. Select the Place Circle tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Edge.

3. Enter a data point on the circumference.

4. Enter a second data point on the circumference.7

5. If Diameter (or Radius) is off, enter a third data pointon the circumference.

Place Circle, withMethod set to Edge.

Left: Diameter on;Right: Diameter off.

To place a circle by its diameter1. Select the Place Circle tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Diameter.

3. Enter a data point to define one endpoint of a diameter.

4. Enter a second data point to define the other endpointof the diameter.

7 If Diameter is on and the pointer is moved to a location that cannot be on the

circle, the dynamic display of the circle disappears.


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Ellipse

Place Circle, withMethod set to

Diameter

Key-in: PLACE CIRCLE ICON

Key-in: PLACE CIRCLE �CENTER | EDGE | DIAMETER�

CONSTRAINED

Place Ellipse

Used to place an ellipse.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method by which the ellipse is placed.

Center—position by the center and oneend of the primary axis.

Edge—position by both ends of theprimary axis.

Primary If on, sets the primary axis radius.1

Secondary If on, sets the secondary axis radius.

Rotation If on, sets the rotation of the primary axisrelative to the view x-axis.



Tool Setting Effect

Area Sets Active Area — Solid or Hole.


Fill Color Sets the color with which the ellipse is filled.



1 If both Primary and Secondary are on, the primary and secondary axes

are parallel to the view x- and y-axes, respectively.

To place an ellipse by center and edge1. Select the Place Ellipse tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Center.


If Primary, Secondary, and Rotation are on, the ellipse is placed.

4. If necessary, enter a data point.

Constraintson

Data point defines the following

None Ellipse rotation and primary axis radius.

Rotation Primary axis radius.

Primary Secondary axis radius.



5. If necessary, enter a third data point.

If Secondary is off, it defines the secondary axis radius.

Place Ellipse, with Method set to Center. Left: All constraints off.Right: All constraints on. Primary axis, denoted by “P.” Secondaryaxis, denoted by “S.” Rotation angle, denoted by “θ.”

To place an ellipse by edge points1. Select the Place Ellipse tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Edge.

3. Enter a data point to define one end of the primary axis.

If Primary, Secondary, and Rotation are on, the ellipse is placed.

4. If necessary, enter a second data point to define anotherpoint on the ellipse.

If either of these combinations of constraints are on,the ellipse is placed:

Primary or Secondary, and Rotation

Primary and Secondary

If the pointer is moved to a point that cannot be on an ellipse thatincludes the points defined in steps 3 or 4, the dynamics disappear.

5. If necessary, enter a third data point to define the otherend of the primary axis.


Placing Elements in 2DPolygons tool box

Place Ellipse, with Method set to Edge. Left: All constraintsoff; Data points 1, 2, and 3 must be entered clockwise. Right:All constraints on. Primary axis, denoted by “P.” Secondaryaxis, denoted by “S.” Rotation angle, denoted by “θ.”

Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE ICON

Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE �CENTER | EDGE� CONSTRAINED

Polygons tool box

The tools in the Polygons tool box are used to placeplanar polygonal shapes.

To Select in the Polygons tool box

Place a rectangular shape.

Place Block (see page 1-55)

Place a polygonal shape.

Place Shape (see page 1-57)


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Block

To Select in the Polygons tool box

Place a shape with each segmenteither perpendicular or parallel toall other segments in the shape.

Place Orthogonal Shape(see page 1-59)

Place a regular polygon (one withall sides and angles the same).

Place Regular Polygon (seepage 1-60)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX POLYGONS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Rectangular solids can be drawn in 3D with the Place Slab tool(see page 7-78) , or can be generated from a planar closed elementwith the Extrude tool (see page 7-93) .

Place Block

Used to place a block (rectangular shape).

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how the block’s orientation is determined.

Orthogonal—Block is orthogonal to the viewin which the first data point is entered.

Rotated—Orientation is defined witha data point (step 3).



Placing Elements in 2DPlace Block

Tool Setting Effect


Fill Color Sets the color with which the block is filled.



To place a rectangular shape1. Select the Place Block tool.

2. Enter a data point to define one corner.

3. If Method is set to Rotated, enter a data point todefine the orientation.

4. Enter a data point to define the corner that isdiagonal from the first.

Place Block. Left:Method set to

Orthogonal; Right:Method set to

Rotated.

Key-in: PLACE BLOCK ICON

Key-in: PLACE BLOCK ORTHOGONAL | ROTATED

In 3D, if the second data point is placed at a different depth than thefirst point, the block is rotated about the x-axis of the view such that thediagonal corner is placed at the second data point. In other words, thefirst data point defines the depth for one horizontal segment of the block


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Shape

and the second data point defines the depth for the opposite segment.

MicroStation does not have a “Place Square” tool. However, anyof these methods can be used to place a square:

• Use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) and AccuDraw. SeeAccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool on page 2-54.

• Use the Place Blocktool (see page 1-55) and AccuDraw.

• Use the Place Regular Polygon tool (see page 1-60) withthe number of edges set to 4.

Place Shape

Used to place a polygonal shape by entering a series of datapoints to define the vertices.

Tool Setting Effect

Length If on, sets segment length, in working units.

(Active)Angle

If on, constrains sides to the Active Angle,which can be keyed in.



Fill Color Sets the color with which the shape is filled.


• If ill Type is Outlined, the fill color canbe different from the Active Color.


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Shape

To place a polygonal shape1. Select the Place Shape tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the first vertex.

3. Continue entering data points to define the other vertices.

4. To close the shape, enter a data point at the locationof the first vertex.orClick the Close Element button.orKey in CLOSE ELEMENT.

Place Shape

Key-in: PLACE SHAPE CONSTRAINED

The Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) in the Linear Elements toolbox, particularly when used in conjunction with AccuDraw, affordsmore flexibility for placing polygonal shapes than Place Shape. SeeAccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool on page 2-54.

A shape element can have 3 to 100 vertices. To place a complexshape with over 100 vertices, use the Place SmartLine tool (seepage 6-80) in the Linear Elements tool box.

In 3D, the Place Shape tool forces the shape vertices to be planar. Ifnon-planar data points are entered, the vertices of the shape are forced


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Orthogonal Shape

to a plane defined by the first three non-colinear vertices.

Place Orthogonal Shape

Used to place a non-rectangular shape in which each segment iseither perpendicular or parallel to all other segments.

Tool Setting Effect


Fill Type Active Fill Type — None (no fill), Opaque(filled with Active Color (see page 1-13) ),or Outlined (filled with Fill Color).




To place an orthogonal shape1. Select the Place Orthogonal Shape tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the first vertex.

3. Enter a data point to define the orientation and second vertex.

4. Continue to enter data points to define the other vertices.

5. Close the shape by entering the last data point at thelocation of the first vertex.


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Regular Polygon

Place OrthogonalShape

Key-in: PLACE SHAPE ORTHOGONAL

A shape element can have 3-100 vertices. To place a “shape”with over 100 vertices, use the Place SmartLine tool (see page6-80) in the Linear Elements tool box.

In 3D, the Place Orthogonal Shape tool forces the shape vertices to beplanar. If non-planar data points are entered, the vertices of the shapeare forced to a plane defined by the first three non-colinear vertices.

Place Regular Polygon

Used to place a regular polygon — a shape with 3–100 equallength sides and equal angles at each vertex. For example, asquare is a four-sided regular polygon.



Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how a polygon is positioned in the design.

Inscribed—Polygon is inscribed in animaginary circle. If the Radius is keyed in,one vertex is placed at center’s right.

Circumscribed—Polygon is circumscribedin an imaginary circle. If the Radiusis keyed in, the midpoint of one side isplaced at center’s right.

By Edge—One edge is defined graphically.

Edges Sets the number of edges (3–100).

Radius If a non-zero value is keyed in, determines theinscribing or circumscribing circle’s radius.

If zero, the radius is defined with a data point.



Fill Color Sets the color with which the polygon is filled.



To place a regular polygon with theradius keyed in1. Select the Place Regular Polygon tool.

2. In the tool settings window’s Radius field, key in a non-zero value.

3. Set Method to Inscribed or Circumscribed.


5. (Optional) — Repeat step 4 to place an additional polygon.



Place RegularPolygon with Radius

keyed in. Methodis Inscribed (left),

Circumscribed(right).

To place a polygon with the radiusdefined graphically1. Select the Place Regular Polygon tool.

2. In the tool settings window’s Radius field, key in 0.

3. Set Method to Inscribed or Circumscribed.


5. Enter a data point to define the radius of the imaginary circle,the polygon’s rotation, and one vertex.

6. Return to step 4 to place additional polygons or Reset.

Place RegularPolygon with the

Radius definedby a data point.

Method is Inscribed(left), Circumscribed

(right).


Placing Elements in 2DPoints tool box

To place a polygon by defining an edge1. Select the Place Regular Polygon tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to By Edge.

3. Enter a data point to define one vertex.

4. Enter a data point to define the other vertex of that edge.

Place RegularPolygon, By Edge.

Key-in: PLACE POLYGON ICON

Key-in: PLACE POLYGON INSCRIBED | CIRCUMSCRIBED| EDGE

Points tool box

The tools in the Points tool box are used to place the Active Point(see Setting the Active Point on page 1-64).

An active point is used as a reference or monument point in the designplane. It can consist of a cell from the attached cell library, a textcharacter, a symbol, or a line with no (zero) length (a “point” element).

The Active Angle for placement is set in the Design File Settingsdialog box (Settings menu > Design File…). The Active Scale for cellplacement is also set in the Design File Settings dialog box. The


Placing Elements in 2DSetting the Active Point

Active Font, Text Height, and Text Width for character placementare set in the Text dialog box (Element menu > Text).

To Select in the Points tool box

Place the Active Point.

Place Active Point (seepage 1-65)

Construct equally spaced ActivePoints tween two data points.

Construct Active Points BetweenData Points (see page 1-67)

Place the Active Point on anelement at the point closestto the data point.

Project Active Point OntoElement (see page 1-68)

Construct a point at anintersection

Construct Active Point atIntersection (see page 1-69)

Construct a specified number ofActive Points along an elementbetween two data points.

Construct Active Points AlongElement (see page 1-71)

Construct the Active Point on anelement at a keyed in distance.

Construct Active Point atDistance Along Element(see page 1-72)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX POINTS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Setting the Active PointIn the Tool Settings window of the tools in the Points tool box,


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Active Point

the Active Point Type is set as follows.

Point Type The Active Point is

Element A zero-length line (point element).

Character The character (or symbol if the Active Font is asymbol font) specified in the Character field at the:• Active Font, Height and Width, which are set

in the Text dialog box (opened by choosingText from the Element menu).

• The Active Angle.

Cell The Active Point Cell at the Active Angleand Active Scale.

To designate a zero-length line as the Active Point1. From the Point Type option menu, choose Element.

To designate a character as the Active Point1. In the Character field, key in the character.

To designate a cell as the Active Point1. Key in the cell name in the Cell field (or use the Cell Library dialog

box, which is opened by choosing Cells from the Element menu).

Place Active Point

Used to place the Active Point.


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Active Point

Tool Setting Effect

Point Type Sets the Active Point type:

Element—A zero-length line.

Character—A character.

Cell—A cell

Character If the Active Point Type is Character,the character or symbol.

Cell If the Active Point Type is Cell, theActive Point Cell.

To place the Active Point1. Select the Place Active Point tool.

2. Enter a data point to position the Active Point.

3. Continue to enter data points to place the same Active Point.

Place Active Point.AA denotes the Active

Angle

Key-in: PLACE POINT

For information about setting the Active Point, see Setting


Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Active Points Between Data Points

the Active Point” on page 1-64.

Construct Active Points Between Data Points

Used to construct a number of equally spaced Active Pointsbetween two data points.

Tool Setting Effect

Point Type Sets the Active Point Type:



Cell—A cell.

Character If the Active Point Type is Character,the character.


Points Sets how many Active Points are constructed.

To construct Active Points between data points1. Select the Construct Active Points Between Data Points tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the location of the first Active Point.

3. Enter a second data point to define the location ofthe last Active Point.

The remaining Active Points are equally spaced betweenthe two data points.

4. Continue from step 3 to enter additional Active Points from thelast data point entered, or Reset to return to step 2.


Placing Elements in 2DProject Active Point Onto Element

Construct ActivePoints Between Data

Points.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT BETWEEN

For information about setting the Active Point, see “Settingthe Active Point” on page 1-64.

Project Active Point Onto Element

Used to construct the Active Point on an element at thepoint closest to the data point.

Tool Setting Effect




Cell—A cell.




Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Active Point at Intersection

To project the Active Point onto an element1. Select the Project Active Point Onto Element tool.

2. Identify the element. See “Identifying elements” on page 3-16.

3. Enter a data point to project the Active Point—that is, place iton the element at the point closest to the data point.

Project Active PointOnto Element.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT PROJECT


Construct Active Point at Intersection

Used to construct the Active Point at the intersection of two elements.


Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Active Point at Intersection

Tool Setting Effect




Cell—A cell.



To construct an Active Point at an intersection1. Select the Construct Active Point at Intersection tool.

2. Identify the first element close to the desired point of intersection.See “Identifying elements” on page 3-16.

3. Identify the second element.

4. Accept the construction.

Construct ActivePoint at Intersection.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT INTERSECTION

For information about setting the Active Point, see “Setting


Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Active Points Along Element


Construct Active Points Along Element

Used to construct the Active Point a specified number of times alongan element between two data points. The distance along the elementbetween each instance of the Active Point is the same.

Tool Setting Effect




Cell—A cell.


Cell If Active Point Type is Cell, the ActivePoint Cell.

Points Sets how many Active Points are constructed.

To construct Active Points along an element1. Select the Construct Active Points Along Element tool.

2. Identify the element to define one end of the segment on which toconstruct Active Points. See “Identifying elements” on page 3-16.

3. Enter a data point to define the other end of the segment.


Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Active Point at Distance Along Element

Construct ActivePoints Along

Element.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT ALONG


Construct Active Point at DistanceAlong Element

Used to construct the Active Point on an element at a keyed-inDistance from where the element is identified.

Tool Setting Effect




Cell—A cell.



Placing Elements in 2DConstruct Active Point at Distance Along Element

Tool Setting Effect


Distance Sets the distance along the element fromthe point identified in step 2 at which theactive point is constructed.

To construct the Active Point at a distancealong an element1. Select the Construct Active Point at Distance Along Element tool.

2. Identify the element at the point from which to measure thedistance. See “Identifying elements” on page 3-16.

3. Enter a data point to define the direction in which toconstruct the Active Point.

Construct ActivePoint at Distance

Along Element.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT POINT DISTANCE

For information about setting the Active Point, see “Setting


Placing Elements in 2DArcs tool box


Arcs tool box

The tools in the Arcs tool box are used to place and modify arcs.

To Select in the Arcs tool box

Place a circular arc.

Place Arc (see page 1-75)

Place an elliptical arc with asweep angle of 180 .

Place Half Ellipse (seepage 1-77)

Place an elliptical arc with asweep angle of 90 .

Place Quarter Ellipse (seepage 1-78)

Modify a circular arc’s radius,sweep angle, and center.

Modify Arc Radius (seepage 1-79)

Extend or shorten an arc’slength (sweep angle).

Modify Arc Angle (see page 1-80)

Lengthen or shorten an axisof an arc.

Modify Arc Axis (see page 1-81)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ARC OFF | ON | TOGGLE

To modify a circular arc’s radius (or both axes of an ellipticalarc), without changing the center or sweep angle, use the


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Arc

Element Selection tool (see page 3-3) .

Place Arc

Used to place a circular arc.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Two options for Method:

Center—position by an endpoint, the center,and a point that defines the sweep angle.

Edge—position by three points on the arc edge.

Radius If on, sets the radius.

Start Angle If on, sets the angle between an imaginaryline between the center and the arc’sbeginning and the view’s x-axis.

Sweep Angle If on, sets the arc’s sweep angle.

To place an arc by its center1. Select the Place Arc tool.

2. Set Method to Center.

3. Enter a data point to define the arc’s beginning, from whichthe arc extends counterclockwise.orIf Radius, Start Angle, and Sweep Angle are all on, enter a datapoint to define the arc’s center and place the arc.

4. If necessary, enter a data point.

If Radius and Start Angle are on, this data point defines thearc’s sweep angle and places the arc.

If Sweep Angle is on, this data point defines the arc’s


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Arc

center and places the arc.

Otherwise, this data point defines the arc’s center.

5. If necessary, enter a data point to define the arc’s sweepangle and place the arc.

Place Arc, withMethod set to Center.Left: All constraints

off. Right: Allconstraints on.

Radius, denoted by“R.” Start Angle,denoted by “ST.”

Sweep Angle,denoted by “SW.”

To place an arc defined by three points1. Select the Place Arc tool.

2. Set Method to Edge.

3. Enter a data point to define the arc’s beginning.

If Radius, Start Angle, and Sweep Angle are all on, the arc is placed.

4. If necessary, enter a second data point to define a point on the arc.

5. If necessary, enter a third data point to define theendpoint and sweep angle.


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Half Ellipse

Place Arc, withMethod set to Edge.Left: All constraints

off. Right: Allconstraints on.

Radius, denoted by“R.” Start Angle,denoted by “ST.”

Sweep Angle,denoted by “SW.”

Key-in: PLACE ARC ICON

Key-in: PLACE ARC �CENTER | EDGE� CONSTRAINED

To dynamically change the direction of a circular arc while placing it byits center point, use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) .

Place Half Ellipse

Used to place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 180 .

To place a half ellipse1. Select the Place Half Ellipse tool.

2. Enter a data point to define one end of the primary axis.

3. Enter a second data point at a point on the ellipse.

4. Enter a third data point to define the other end of the primary axis.


Placing Elements in 2DPlace Quarter Ellipse

Place Half Ellipse

Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE HALF

Place Quarter Ellipse

Used to place an elliptical arc with a sweep angle of 90 .

To place a quarter ellipse1. Select the Place Quarter Ellipse tool.


3. Enter a second data point to define the orientation of an axis.

4. Enter a third data point to define the other endpoint.


Placing Elements in 2DModify Arc Radius

Place QuarterEllipse.

Key-in: PLACE ELLIPSE QUARTER

Modify Arc Radius

Used to modify the radius, sweep angle, and center of a circulararc. The endpoints do not move.

To modify an arc’s radius1. Select the Modify Arc Radius tool.

2. Identify the arc.

3. Enter a data point to redefine the radius, sweep angle, and center.

Modify Arc Radius.


Placing Elements in 2DModify Arc Angle

To modify an arc’s radius without changingthe center or sweep angle1. Select the Element Selection tool.

2. Select the arc.

3. Drag the midpoint handle to define the new radius.

Key-in: MODIFY ARC RADIUS

To modify an arc’s radius with greater precision, use the ModifyElement tool (see page 3-89) in conjunction with AccuDraw.See Arc modifications on page 3-93.

Modify Arc Angle

Used to extend or shorten the length (sweep angle) of an arc.

To modify an arc’s sweep angle1. Select the Modify Arc Angle tool.

2. Identify the arc close to the end to modify.

3. Enter a data point to lengthen or shorten the arc.

Alternative method — To modify an arc’ssweep angle1. Select the Element Selection tool.

2. Select the arc.

3. Drag the endpoint handle(s) to lengthen or shorten the arc.


Placing Elements in 2DModify Arc Axis

Modify Arc Angle.At left, shorteningthe arc. At right,

lengthening the arc.

Key-in: MODIFY ARC ANGLE

To modify an sweep angle with greater precision, use the ModifyElement tool (see page 3-89) in conjunction with AccuDraw.See Arc modifications on page 3-93.

Modify Arc Axis

Used to lengthen or shorten an axis of an arc.

To modify an arc’s axis1. Select the Modify Arc Axis tool.

2. Identify the arc near the axis to modify.

3. Enter a data point to redefine the axis.

Modify Arc Axis


Placing Elements in 2DUsing the Select Settings Window

Key-in: MODIFY ARC AXIS

If the sweep angle is less than 90 , only one axis can be modified.

Using the Select Settings WindowTo streamline the drawing of real world objects and promoteconsistency with project drawing standards, you can use the SelectSettings window. This window enables you to adjust the activesettings and select a drawing tool with a click or two, therebybypassing the dialog boxes and tool boxes.

(Default) SelectSettings window

(Docked) SelectSettings window

(Large) SelectSettings window(Options > Large

Dialog)

Some setup is required to use the Select Settings window:


Placing Elements in 2DComponents

settings groups must be defined, based on the project’s drawingstandards, and stored in settings files. This is typically doneby the site or project manager.

To open an existing settings file1. From the Settings menu, choose Manage.

The Select Settings window opens. The default settings file, asdisplayed in the Select Settings window’s title bar, is "styles.stg".

2. From the window’s File menu, choose Open.

The Open Existing Settings File dialog box opens.

3. Select a settings file (a file with the extension .stg) and click OK.

To open a remote settings file1. From the Settings menu, choose Manage.

The Select Settings window opens.

2. From the window’s File menu, choose Open URL.

The Select Remote Settings File dialog box opens. Thecontrols in this dialog box are analogous to those in theSelect Remote Design File dialog box.

3. In the URL field, specify the path to the remote settings file.

4. (Optional) — Adjust any other settings necessary.

5. Click OK.

Components

Within a drawing settings group, settings are furthergrouped into components. Like the parent settings group,the components are typically named for real world objects.These are the types of components:


Placing Elements in 2DOther categories of settings groups

Component Type Used to place

Linear Lines, arcs, ellipses, line strings,shapes, curves, complex chains,or complex shapes

Text Text

Cell Cells

Point Points

Area Pattern Pattern cells

Dimension Dimensions

Multi-line Multi-lines

General Procedure — To work with drawingsettings groups

1. From the Settings menu, choose Manage.

The Select Settings window opens. The drawing settings groups inthe open settings file are listed in the Group list box.

2. In the Group combo box, select a group.

3. In the Component combo box, select a component.

The active settings are set to those of the component.If the component definition specifies a key-in, thecorresponding tool is selected.

4. Place an element.

5. Place another element using the same settings (return to step 4).or

Select a different component (return to step 3).or

Select a different group (return to step 2).

Other categories of settings groups

There are other categories of settings groups, which can beselected from dialog boxes that are opened from the SelectSettings window’s Categories menu.



Scale settings groups

A scale settings group specifies plotting units relative to designmaster units. Scale settings groups are optionally used:

• In conjunction with Cell, Active Point, and Area Patterndrawing settings group components, to scale cells whileplacing them. See Using Cells on page 4-1.

• In conjunction with Text and Active Point drawingsettings components, to control the sizing and spacingof text while placing it.

To select (and activate) a scale settings group1. From the Settings menu, choose Manage.

The Select Settings window opens.

2. From the Category menu, choose Scale.

The Select Scale dialog box opens.

3. In the list box, select the desired group.


Activating a scale settings group cannot have an effect on theactive scale factors until you select a Cell drawing component (oran Active Point or Area Pattern component that specifies a cell).Similarly, activating a scale settings group cannot have an effecton the active text settings until you select a Text component (or anActive Point component that specifies a text character).

Working units settings groups

A working units settings group consists of Working units settings.Working units settings groups are used in conjunction with Cell,Active Point, and Area Pattern drawing settings group componentsto scale cells while placing them. See Using Cells on page 4-1.

Selecting a working units settings group adjusts the active design file’sworking units settings in the same manner as using the controls in theWorking Units category of the Design File Settings dialog box.


Drafting Aids

In this chapter, you will find out how to use the numerous 2Ddrafting aids in MicroStation, including:

• Using Tentative Points (see page 2-1)

• Using AccuDraw (see page 2-13)

• Using the Grid (see page 2-61)

• Precision Input Key-ins (see page 2-65)

• Using the Tools in the Measure tool box (see page 2-69)

Using Tentative PointsA tentative point is a form of graphic input that is used to:

• Preview the location of the next data point. Accepting thetentative point location enters the data point there.

• Define a point of reference for entry of the next data point.

It is also possible to snap a tentative point to an existing element(put it directly on the element). Tentative point snapping helpsyou accurately construct new elements that are either connectedto existing ones or precisely related to existing ones.

Using snaps, for example, you can:

• Place a line from the exact end point of an existing elementto the midpoint of another.

• Place a line perpendicular or parallel to another line.

• Place a circle tangent to an arc or a B-spline curve.

• Place a cell at the centroid of a shape (see Using Cells on page 4-1).


Drafting AidsSnapping tentative points to elements

Snapping tentative points to elements

Snapping is affected by the Snap Lock settings. There arethree basic Snap Lock settings: the snap on/off toggle, theSnap Mode, and the Snap Mode override.

Snap Lock

If the Snap Lock toggle is off, tentative points do not snap to elements.

Snap Mode

When Snap Lock is on, how a tentative point snaps to an elementis set by the Snap Mode (unless an override is active).

The Snap Mode (or Snap Mode override) is indicated in the status bar.

To set the Snap Mode1. From the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu (or the pop-up



Locks menu in the status bar), choose Full.

The Locks dialog box opens.

2. From the Snap Mode option menu, choose the desired snap mode.

Alternative method — To set the Snap Mode1. From the Settings menu’s Snaps sub-menu (or the pop-up

Snaps menu in the status bar), choose Button Bar.

The Snap Mode button bar opens.

2. In the button bar, click the desired snap mode.

The active Snap Mode’s button is highlighted with speckled gray.



Alternative method — To set the Snap Mode1. Place the pointer in any view.

2. Hold down the �Shift� key.

3. Click (or press) the Tentative button. (To find the location of theTentative button on your system’s graphic input device, see “Usingthe Mouse or Digitizing Tablet” in the Setup Guide.)

The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. A diamond is displayedto the left of the active Snap Mode.

4. (While still holding down the �Shift� key), choose thedesired Snap Mode by clicking it (or drag the pointer toit and release the Tentative button).

5. Release the �Shift� key.

Alternative method — To set the Snap Mode1. Place the pointer in the Snap Mode field located on the status bar.

2. Click (or press) the Data button.

The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. A diamond is displayedto the left of the active Snap Mode.

3. While holding down the �Shift� key, choose the desired Snap Modeby clicking it (or drag the pointer to it and release the Data button).


The Snap Modes button bar is dockable and resizable.

Snap Mode override

You can override the Snap Mode for a single snap by choosing aSnap Mode override. The override mode is effective only for the next



operation; it is similar to a “single-shot” tool selection. After youhave snapped a tentative point (or Reset), the override is cancelledand the active Snap Mode becomes effective again.

To set the Snap Mode override1. From the Settings menu’s Snaps sub-menu, choose the

desired Snap Mode override.

A check mark is displayed to the left of the Snap Mode override.

Alternative method — To set the SnapMode override1. From the Settings menu’s Snaps sub-menu (or the pop-up

Snaps menu in the status bar) Button Bar.

The Snap Mode button bar opens.

2. In the button bar, select the desired Snap Mode override.

The Snap Mode override’s button is highlighted with dark grey;the Snap Mode’s button remains highlighted with speckled gray.

Alternative method — To set the SnapMode override1. Place the pointer in any view.

2. Hold down the �Shift� key.

3. Click (or press) the Tentative button.

The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens. If a Snap Mode overrideis already in effect, a diamond-shaped mark is displayed tothe left of the override and a square is displayed to the left ofthe active Snap Mode. Otherwise, the diamond-shaped markis displayed to the left of the active Snap Mode.


5. Choose the desired Snap Mode override by clicking it (or dragthe pointer to it and release the Tentative button).



Alternative method — To set the SnapMode override1. In the status bar, click the Snap Mode indicator.

The pop-up Snap Modes menu opens.

2. Choose the desired Snap Mode override by clicking it (or dragthe pointer to it and release the Data button).

Effect of Snap Modes

With Snap Lock on, when you enter a tentative point on ornear an element, the following occurs:

Snap Mode:1 Tentative point snaps to:

Nearest

Point on the element nearestto the pointer.

Keypoint

The nearest of the Element keypoints(see page 2-10) on the element.This is the most generally usefulof the snap modes.

Midpoint

Midpoint of the segment of the elementclosest to the pointer. (For an ellipticalarc, the tentative point snaps to thepoint on the arc at half the sweepangle, as opposed to the point athalf the arc distance.)

Center

Center of elements (such as circles,arcs, text, and so on) with centers.Centroid of other elements, includingshapes, line strings, and B-splines.




Origin

Origin of a cell or text, centroid ofa B-spline, the first data point in adimension element, or the first vertex ofa line, multi-line, line string, or shape.

Bisector

Midpoint of an entire line string,multi-line, or complex chain, ratherthan to the midpoint of the closestsegment. It also snaps to the midpointof a line or arc. (For an elliptical arc, thetentative point snaps to the point on thearc at half the arc distance, as opposedto the point at half the sweep angle.)

Intersection

Intersection of two elements. (Twotentative points are required, althoughmore can be used.) The first tentativepoint snaps to one element, and thatelement is highlighted. The secondtentative point snaps to anotherelement, and the two segments usedto find the intersection of the twoelements are displayed in dashedlines. (If the two elements do notactually intersect, but projections of theelements would intersect, the segmentsinclude projections of the elements tothe intersection.) You can continuesnapping until the desired intersectionis found; the last two tentative pointsdefine where the intersection snap lies.




Tangent

An existing element — the edge of theelement being placed is constrainedto be tangent to an existing element.The tentative point dynamically slidesalong the element to maintain thetangency as you move the pointer tofinish placing the element.

Tangent From

An existing element — the edge of theelement you are placing is constrainedto be tangent to an existing element.The tentative point does not movedynamically as you move the pointer,but is locked in place.

Perpendicular

An existing element — the line youare placing is constrained to beperpendicular to the element — thetentative point slides dynamicallyalong the element in order to maintainthe perpendicularity as you move thepointer to finish placing the element.

PerpendicularFrom

An existing element — the line youare placing is constrained to beperpendicular to the element at thetentative point. The tentative pointdoes not move dynamically as you movethe pointer, but is locked in place.




Parallel

An existing element, but does not definea point through which the line youare placing will pass. Instead, whenyou accept the tentative point, the lineyou then place is parallel to the line towhich the tentative point was snapped.

Through Point

Element keypoints and defines apoint through which the elementyou are placing (or an extrapolationof it) must pass.

Point On

To nearest element, as follows: Whenentering second or later data point,constrains the next data point tolie on it (if it is a closed element)or anywhere on the line on which itlies (if it is a linear element). Whenentering first data point, constrainsthe element being placed to extend tothat element (or the line on which itlies) from the second data point.

1 Or override.

Locate Tolerance

How close the pointer must be to an element to snap a tentativepoint to it depends upon the Locate Tolerance, a user preferencethat is adjustable in the Operation category of the Preferencesdialog box (Workspace menu > Preferences).



Snapping to cells

A cell is a small drawing — usually of a frequently-used or complexsymbol, notation, or detail — created in MicroStation. (See UsingCells on page 4-1.) To snap to the origin of a cell, set the SnapMode to Origin. When the Snap Mode is not set to origin, tentativepoints snap to component elements within the cell. For example,when the Snap Mode is Keypoint and you press the Tentative buttonwhile the pointer is near a line in a cell, the tentative point willsnap to a keypoint on the line, not the origin of the cell.

Element keypoints

Keypoints are regularly-spaced points in an element to which atentative point will snap when the Snap Mode (or override) isset to Keypoint. The number of keypoints on each segment of alinear element (line, line string, or shape) is one greater than theSnap Lock Divisor setting. If Snap Lock Divisor is 2 (as in allseed files supplied with MicroStation), keypoints are as shown inthe figure. The midpoint of a linear element is a keypoint onlyif the Snap Lock Divisor is an even number.

For text, the keypoint is determined by the justificationattribute. That attribute and others specific to text elementsare described in Text Labels.

Elementkeypoints (with

Snap LockDivisor set to2 and the text

element lefttop justified).

Clockwise fromthe upper left:Arc, arc, line,

line string, text,ellipse, shape,

and point curve.



To enter a tentative point to preview a data point1. Position the pointer on the location at which you plan

to enter a data point.

2. Press the Tentative button. (To find the location of the Tentativebutton on your system’s graphic input device, see “Using theMouse or Digitizing Tablet” in the Setup Guide.)

The tentative point coordinates are shown in the status bar.Large crosshairs are displayed. The intersection of the linesin the crosshairs marks the location of the tentative point. Ifyou snap to an element, the element is highlighted.

To accept a tentative point’s location andenter a data point there1. Position the pointer in any view but not on an element.

2. Press the Data button.

To enable snapping1. From the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu (or the pop-up



2. Turn on Snap Lock.

To change the number of element keypointson each element segment1. From the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu (or the pop-up



2. Set Snap Lock Divisor to a value one less than thedesired number of keypoints.

For example, to create element keypoints on the endpointsand the first, second, and third quarter points of elementsegments, set Snap Lock Divisor to 4.



To snap a tentative point to an elementat a keypoint1. Enable snapping to keypoints. See To enable snapping on page

2-11 and To set the Snap Mode on page 2-4.

2. Position the pointer on or near the desired keypoint.

3. Press the Tentative button. (To find the location of the Tentativebutton on your system’s graphic input device, see “Using theMouse or Digitizing Tablet” in the Setup Guide.)

If the tentative point successfully snaps to the element,the element is highlighted.

To snap a tentative point to an element at apoint other than a keypoint1. Enable snapping to points on elements other than

keypoints. See To enable snapping on page 2-11 and Toset the Snap Mode on page 2-4.

2. Position the pointer on or near the desired point.

3. Press the Tentative button.

If the tentative point successfully snaps to the element,the element is highlighted.

To snap a tentative point to an element when morethan one element lies at the desired snap point1. Enable snapping. See To enable snapping on page 2-11.

2. Position the pointer on or near the desired point.


Of the elements at the desired snap point, a tentative pointwill snap to the element that was placed in the designearliest. That element is highlighted.

4. (Optional) — If the desired element was not snapped to(highlighted), press the Tentative button again.

Of the remaining elements at the desired snap point (theones to which a tentative point has not snapped), a tentative


Drafting AidsAccuDraw

point snaps to the element that was placed in the designearliest. That element is highlighted.

5. (Optional) — Repeat step 4 until the desired element is highlighted.

To enter a tentative point for reference1. Position the pointer on the desired reference point.


Alternative method — To enter a tentativepoint for reference1. Snap a tentative point to an existing element on or near

the desired reference point. See Snapping tentativepoints to elements on page 2-2.

AccuDrawAccuDraw is a drafting aid that evaluates such parameters as yourcurrent pointer location, the previously entered data point, the lastcoordinate directive, the current tool’s needs, and any directiveyou have entered via either keyboard shortcuts or AccuDrawoptions. AccuDraw then generates the appropriate precisioncoordinates and applies them to the active tool.

A simple example of using AccuDraw

To help you understand what AccuDraw does, following is a descriptionof a simple design session using AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine tool(see page 6-80) . The task presented is the creation of a simple bracket.


Drafting AidsA simple example of using AccuDraw

The designsubject isa simple

bracketwith the

importantdimensions

and featuresnoted.

With AccuDraw activated (Start AccuDraw tool in the Primary Toolstool box), select the Place SmartLine tool in the Linear Elements toolbox. When you enter your first data point for the lower left corner ofthe bracket, AccuDraw displays a square or circular shaped “compass.”

TheAccuDraw

compassappears

wheneverAccuDraw isactive and adata point is

placed.

Next, you need to draw the left edge of the bracket. As you move thedynamic line around the view window nothing interesting happensuntil you get close one of the axes of the AccuDraw compass, in thiscase the Y axis. When AccuDraw senses the axis, the line snaps orindexes to it. While the axis is highlighted you can key in a number forthe vertical distance, in this case, 2 inches. Don’t worry about tellingAccuDraw the direction, it has already figured that out and placed theinput focus (where the key-in data will appear) in the correct field, inthis case the Y field. Entering a data point results in what you’d expect,a line segment oriented along the vertical axis exactly two inches long.

The start ofthe bracket’s

left edge withits 2 inch

measurementcourtesy ofAccuDraw.



At this point the AccuDraw compass moves to the end point of theline you just placed. Moving the dynamic line segment around, itacts as before. This time you need to place the line with a fixedlength of 1.25 inches in the horizontal direction. To accomplishthis you move the dynamic line so that it snaps onto the positivehorizontal axis, key in 1.25, and enter a data point.

The bracket’stop edgeis taking

shape as theindexed line

is placedalong the

horizontalaxis.

The next part of the bracket involves going off at a 30 degree anglefor a given distance. Pressing the Space bar changes the AccuDrawcompass to its polar mode (indicated by a circular compass). Entering30 degrees in the Angle field and 1.75 inches in the Distance field locksthe line in the right direction. A data point confirms the new location.

The notchappears

next withthe Polarcompassoriented

along thenew line.

Note how the compass orients along the 30 degree line. Thisillustrates AccuDraw’s context sensitivity. AccuDraw providesa method for associating coordinate information with respect toexisting elements. To place the half inch line at a right angle tothe 30 degree line only requires indexing to the appropriate axisand a key-in of 0.5. A data point does the rest.



The notchis nearing

completion.

The bracket’s notch is now complete. All that remains is the completionof the bracket’s right edge. Currently, however, the compass is stillrotated to the 60 degree angle of the notch and not the horizontaldirection you need. To override the context nature of AccuDrawyou press T to orient the compass to the top plane (the default).Pressing the Space bar brings up the rectangular compass. Indexing,again, to the X axis and keying in 2 inches followed by a data pointlocks the final known dimension of the bracket.

A quickpress of the�T� key andAccuDraw

orients itselfto the screen’sx and y axes.

To “close out” the bracket’s bottom edge, you use the smart axislocking feature of AccuDraw. Moving the pointer down the Y axis youpress �Return� for the smart lock feature. Recognizing that you areindexed along Y axis, AccuDraw locks the Y direction but allows youto move up and down this axis. A tentative point on the beginningpoint of the bracket (the Place SmartLine tool allows you to snapto an element under construction) followed by a data point locatesthe lower right corner of the bracket. A final tentative point anddata point on the origin of the bracket completes the job.


Drafting AidsLearning AccuDraw

A tentativepoint on the

origin ofthe bracket

results in thedashed index

line.

Learning AccuDraw

The preceding was a very simple example of AccuDraw in action.There is much more to this drafting aid. AccuDraw has beendesigned with ease of use and a certain intuitive feel to it. As withany drafting aid, you need to try it out first. As you get the hangof it, the various options begin to make sense.

In the following sections, the user interface features ofAccuDraw are presented followed by the settings and directivesthat control its operations.

Activating AccuDraw

By default, when MicroStation is started, AccuDraw isnot active. Once AccuDraw is activated, all drawing toolsutilize it for dynamic data input.

To activate AccuDraw1. In the Primary Tools tool box, select the Start AccuDraw tool.

The AccuDraw window opens.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw’s compass

Normally, the AccuDraw compass does not appear until you enterthe first data point after selecting a tool. AccuDraw’s behaviorchanges slightly with tools that utilize dynamics before the first datapoint. The Place Text and Place Active Cell tools are examples ofsuch tools. Instead of “waiting” for the first data point to displaythe compass, AccuDraw activates the compass at the last data pointlocation. In this way, you can place the element with respect to thislocation by using any of AccuDraw’s relative directives.

AccuDraw also affects operations like placing text or cells in anotherway. When you place a string of text with AccuDraw active, its initialorientation will be along the current AccuDraw drawing plane. Inother words, when you have a Front-oriented drawing plane (seeAccuDraw’s drawing plane on page 2-21), the text will be orientedalong the front axis regardless of the view orientation.

AccuDraw will not activate when it would conflict with other tools— for instance, during fence placement and element selectionoperations, dimensioning, and so on.

Although most users will activate and use AccuDraw during the entiredesign session, there may be times when its actions might interferewith the current operation. For this reason, AccuDraw can be turnedoff. MicroStation ’s tools return to their non-AccuDraw operation.

To deactivate AccuDraw1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �Q�.

Close the AccuDraw window.

AccuDraw’s compass

The most recognizable feature of AccuDraw is its compass. Onlyvisible when AccuDraw is active and has control of MicroStation’scoordinate input, the compass acts as both a status indicatorand a focus for input from the user.



AccuDrawcompass.

Left:Rectangular

coordinatesystem.

Right: Polarcoordinate

system.

Compass animation when you rotate the drawing plane isapproximately the same speed regardless of the speed of your machine.

The origin point

At the center of the compass is the origin point. The origin is thefocal point of all AccuDraw operations. As various AccuDraw optionsare selected their functions operate from the origin point.

This last point is important. All AccuDraw directives (distancekey-ins, keyboard shortcuts, etc.) operate in conjunction with thecompass. In most cases, the compass is located at the last entered datapoint. In addition, there are AccuDraw directives that allow you tomove the compass to entirely different locations without actuallygenerating a new data point, not unlike a tentative point.

The drawing plane indicator

Surrounding the origin point is the drawing plane indicator. Its primarypurpose is to show the current orientation of AccuDraw’s drawingplane (see page 2-21) and the current coordinate system in effect. Whenthe plane appears as a dashed rectangle, the rectangular coordinatesystem (X,Y) is in effect. When the plane appears as a dashed circlethen the polar coordinate system (Distance, Angle) is active.

When working in a 2D design file the drawing plane portionof the compass functions simply as an indicator of the currentcoordinate system. However, in 3D, the drawing plane becomesa much more valuable tool. Because the AccuDraw drawingplane can be oriented along any plane in 3D space, AccuDraw’s



drawing plane indicator determines where your data points willappear with respect to the rest of the drawing.

You can explicitly locate the origin to the current pointer location ortentative point using a keyboard shortcut (the �O� key).

The X/Y axes

The final part of the AccuDraw compass are the two axes.Oriented at right angles to one another, these axes representthe drawing plane x and y axes.

To differentiate between the two axes each is color coded. Bydefault, the positive or +X axis is displayed in red while thepositive or +Y axis is green in color. If these colors don’t suityou or are hard to discern, you can change the colors of theseaxes via the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.

To change the color of the AccuDraw X or Yaxis graphic indicator mark1. With AccuDraw active, open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box

by pressing G followed by S (Get Settings) .

2. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box’s Display section,click the X Axis or Y Axis button. (The button colorindicates the current setting.)

The Modify Axis Color dialog box opens. Its controls areidentical to those in the Modify Color dialog box (see Toindividually modify a color in the Building Custom Projectschapter of the Administrator’s Guide).

3. Select the desired color.


As you will learn later, the X/Y axes and the drawing plane indicatorsare also used to indicate the drawing plane’s orientation in 3D.Under 2D the compass only shows the rotation of the drawing planearound the view axis similar to the Active Angle.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw’s drawing plane

AccuDraw’s drawing plane

The drawing plane is central to AccuDraw. As you work, AccuDraworients this drawing plane based on a number of factors including cuesfrom the active tool, the last placed coordinate, and key AccuDrawsettings. This is known as context sensitive operation.

For instance, when you use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) ,the orientation of the AccuDraw compass changes as you enter datapoints. Because Place SmartLine was designed to take advantage of thecontext-sensitive nature of AccuDraw, the tool cues AccuDraw to rotatethe axis of the plane to the angle between the last two data points.

PlaceSmartLine

controls theorientation ofthe compass.

You can override this feature via the AccuDraw Settings dialogbox (Operation section: Context Sensitivity check box off) inwhich case, the compass maintains the traditional view axesorientation (+X to the right, +Y straight up).

Drawing plane coordinate systems

Drawing plane coordinate systems

AccuDraw’s drawing plane supports two different coordinatesystems. This echoes MicroStation’s normal support forrectangular and polar coordinate values:


Drafting AidsThe AccuDraw window

• Rectangular, for specifying distances along the drawingplane axes. It appears as a square indicator.

• Polar, for specifying distances and angles relative to theorigin. It appears as a circular indicator.

To switch between Rectangular and Polarcoordinate systems1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �space bar�.

Alternative method — To switch betweenRectangular and Polar coordinate systems1. From the Settings menu, choose AccuDraw.

With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �G�, �S�.

The AccuDraw Settings dialog box opens.

2. From the Type option menu, choose Polar or Rectangular.

The AccuDraw window

AccuDraw has its own window called the AccuDraw window. Thissmall window contains the data entry fields and axis lock buttonsfor the currently active coordinate system.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw’s Settings dialog box

AccuDraw’s window and the input focus

When AccuDraw is active it becomes part of the input focus ordercontrolled by the �Esc� key. The focus order toggles betweenthe AccuDraw window and the Tool Settings window unlessthe Key-in window is open. In this case, the input focus cyclesfrom the AccuDraw window through the Tool Settings windowto the Key-in window. Pressing �Shift-Esc� reverses the cycle,moving the focus from the Key-in window through the ToolSettings window to the AccuDraw window.

This is important to remember as no AccuDraw keyboard shortcutswork unless focus is in the AccuDraw window. Fortunately, after everydata point or tentative point, the focus is forced to the AccuDrawwindow where it remains until you press the �Esc� key.

The AccuDraw window initially comes up floating just like any otherwindow. However, it can be docked to either the top or bottomedge of the MicroStation application window.

AccuDrawwindow docked

along thebottom edge of

the applicationwindow.

Docking the AccuDraw window has the advantage of minimizingits intrusion into the working area of your drawing. As with thefloating window version, the fields found in the docked versionchange depending on whether you are in polar or rectangular modeand whether you are in a 2D or 3D design file.

AccuDraw’s Settings dialog box

Many aspects of AccuDraw’s behavior are specified using the controlsin the AccuDraw Settings dialog box. A few have already beenmentioned (context sensitivity, axis display colors).


Drafting AidsWorking with AccuDraw

To open the AccuDraw Settings dialog box1. From the Settings menu, choose AccuDraw.

orWith the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �G�, �S�.

For information about other AccuDraw settings not coveredelsewhere in this chapter, see “AccuDraw” in the Settings Menuchapter of the on-line Reference Guide.

Working with AccuDrawAccuDraw is controlled from a variety of sources. You can influenceit through the use of one- and two-key sequences called keyboardshortcuts. Drawing tools, themselves, can influence AccuDraw’soperation. Finally, AccuDraw itself maintains a number of userselectable options via the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.

AccuDraw supports a large number of options. However, all of theseoptions can be placed into one of three major AccuDraw functions:

• Previewing and constraining data points


Drafting AidsGeneral Procedure for Using AccuDraw

• Locating the AccuDraw compass

• Orienting AccuDraw’s drawing plane

The following discussion is organized along these three basicoperations. In most instances, you will use a combination of all threetypes of AccuDraw operations to accomplish your design goal.

AccuDraw may be employed in a variety of different situations—with standard drawing and manipulation tools, or using moreadvanced approaches, such as with the Place SmartLine tool (seepage 6-80) and the Modify Element tool (see page 3-89) . In eithercase, AccuDraw employs the same general procedure:

General Procedure for Using AccuDraw

1 . (Optional) Locate the drawing plane origin. See Theorigin point on page 2-19.

2 . Select the desired tool.

3 . Enter a data point (or tentative point) to activate dynamics.

4 . Relocate the drawing plane origin. See The originpoint on page 2-19.

5 . Rotate the drawing plane axes. See AccuDraw’s drawingplane orientation on page 2-47.

6 . Set the type of drawing plane coordinate system. See Drawingplane coordinate systems on page 2-21.

7 . Preview and constrain the next data point. See Previewingand constraining data points on page 2-26.

8 . Enter the data point.

Most users will utilize a mix of AccuDraw options throughout thedesign process. The key to working with AccuDraw is understandinghow it interacts with the active tool and the current data point.

Many drawing tools are optimized for use with AccuDraw. See


Drafting AidsPreviewing and constraining data points

AccuDraw’s Effect on Various Tools on page 2-51.

AccuDraw is particularly useful when employed in 3D.

Previewing and constraining data points

AccuDraw lets you preview and constrain pending data point locations.In response to your input in the AccuDraw window, dynamic updatein view windows lets you visualize the results.

You have the flexibility, though, to unconstrain a pending data point atany time. It is only when you actually enter a data point that you arecommitted to the values in the AccuDraw window and their results.

AccuDraw and the Popup Calculator

With the popup calculator, you can perform mathematicaloperations on the values displayed in some MicroStation textfields, and the values adjust accordingly.

This feature is documented here as it works with AccuDraw,its use is extendable to other controls. Active Scale and ActiveAngle fields currently support it.The popup calculator is supported as follows:

Dialog Box Fields

AccuDraw window XYZ

(various) Active Angle

(various) Active Scale

To use the popup calculator1. With the input focus in a field that supports popup


Drafting AidsAccuDraw and the Popup Calculator

calculation, type any of the following:

+, -, *, /, =

2. Type a value or expression to complete the calculation.

Press �Return�, enter a data point, or click outside thepopup calculator to accept the calculated value. Press�Esc� if you want to reject the value.

Generatinga calculated

value (bytyping “2+1”).

Performing simple operations

The popup calculator allows you to perform calculations on measuredvalues (snap to an element, then multiply the distance, for example), orto simply type in the entire equation, e.g. “5.23 + 1.34.”

Not only does the popup calculator eliminate the need to usea physical calculator, you may notice that with the “+” and “-”operators, you do not have to reposition AccuDraw’s origin tomove relative to a snapped or keyed-in offset.

The calculator is designed to be very efficient, to work seamlesslywith AccuDraw, and to be entirely “keyboard-driven,” allowing theuser to keep the mouse in the view window rather than requiringyou to click in the dialog box. Also, the calculator works in a“per-keystroke” manner — the result of the calculation is expressedboth numerically and graphically with every keystroke typed.

The popup calculator is “format aware,” as it accepts expressionsin feet and inches or degrees-minutes-seconds, if appropriate.Obviously you cannot multiply feet times feet, so the calculatorproperly adjusts to interpret this type of string.

When performing operations on a measured value, the popup calculatoralways operates on the underlying precise value, rather than the string



which is truncated to whatever coordinate readout you have. Thisdynamic value displays at the bottom of the popup calculator.

Creating arelative offset(by snapping

then typing“+2” when the X

field has inputfocus).

You may notice that sometimes pressing +, -, or / does not bring up thecalculator, but is interpreted by AccuDraw as either an explicit positiveor negative, or as a fraction. The rule with the “+” and “-” operatorsis: If the value is locked or a tentative point is active, the calculatordisplays. If you type something like “3 3/8,” the “/” is interpretedas part of a fraction because of the space. If you simply type “3/8,”AccuDraw uses the calculator but the result will be the same as 3divided by 8, or the fraction 3/8. To enter “1 foot and 3/8 inches” youmust type a space (“1: 3/8”) so the value is not misinterpreted as“1 foot 3 inches, divided by 8.” “1+:3/8” would also work.When entering planar data points (not polar coordinates), thereare some special procedures to prevent unexpected results. SinceAccuDraw interprets values as negative when the cursor is pointedin the negative direction, the calculator, when appropriate, prependsthe entered expression with a minus sign. This results in theexpression “5+2” always being interpreted properly as the distance7, even though “5+2” is actually -3. This prevents the user fromhaving to think about positive and negative.

Advanced uses of the popup calculator

You can use the popup calculator to enter complex expressions,including multiple operators, parentheses, and C expressions(“sin(30)”, “tcb->actangle”). Parentheses do not have to be



matched to have a valid string.

If you type =, the popup calculator replaces the existing AccuDrawvalue rather than operating upon it. In this case the resultdynamically updates in the original field, rather than having afield of its own on the popup. This is rarely needed for simpleoperations, but can be useful for complex expressions.

You can use thecompact popup

to replacevalues with

expressions thatdo not contain asimple operator.

You can also enter and save variables. Although you cannotsave them to a file, and there is no graphical user interface, thisfunctionality can still be exceptionally useful. By default, the onlysaved variable is “pi.” The variable can then be entered within anyexpression using the calculator. To use the variable directly asa distance or angle, type “=<variable name>.”

Enteringa complexexpressionincluding

parentheses anda user-defined

variable.

To save variables1. Type “<popcalc variable save <name> <value>.”

The value may be entered as a complex expression, if desired. Thevalue is optional; if none is supplied, it uses the last value used bythe calculator (thus allowing the use of measured values).



To show variables1. Type “popcalc variable show name.”

The name is optional; if none is supplied, all variablesto a message print to a dialog box.

To delete variables1. Type “popcalc variable delete name.”

Finally, there is a special variable, “$,” that represents the startingvalue, whether measured or typed into AccuDraw’s field. Forinstance, if you measure a distance with AccuDraw and thenwant one over that distance, you can simply type “=1/$.” Or, forexample, to get 12 squared, type “12*$.”

How AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement

When active, AccuDraw reacts to pointer movement bytrying to anticipate your intent.

As you move the pointer, the fields in the AccuDraw windowautomatically update to reflect the drawing plane coordinatesof the current pointer location (expressed as either relativex, y, and z offsets, or as a distance and an angle) with respectto the location of the AccuDraw compass.

Furthermore, the AccuDraw window’s input focus automaticallyadjusts, based on the general direction of the pointer movement:As you move the pointer in the same direction as either drawingplane axis the focus moves to the field that you would use toprecisely locate the data point along that axis.



Tolerance shortcut

The More AccuDraw Settings dialog box has a setting for indexingtolerance (instead of using Locate Tolerance (see page 2-9) fromthe Workspace > Preferences dialog box—although by default theyare the same: 10 pixels). You can also set this with a key-in (andtherefore a shortcut or function key): ACCUDRAW SETTINGSINDEXTOL [NUM], where [num] is the number of pixels rangingfrom 1 to 100. This is useful when you want to do detailed workwithout it getting pulled to the axes or last distance.

When the pointer is within the Tolerance of an axis of the displayedAccuDraw compass the pointer snaps to that axis. At this point,the dynamic element is considered indexed to that axis.

Index highlightalong a drawing

plane axis.

The effect of these behaviors is to make it as easy as possible for you toapply constraints and specify precision when previewing a data point.

To enter rectangular coordinates using AccuDraw1. Enter the first data point.

As you move the dynamic line, AccuDraw shifts its key-infocus to the X or Y field depending on which axis the pointeris closest to. (If the Polar compass is visible, press �spacebar� to switch to Rectangular coordinates.)

Keying ina precisedistance

along thex-axis.

2. When the focus is on the X field, type the desired X value.

3. With the dynamic dashed line identifying the locked condition



from the X axis visible, move the pointer up the Y axis.

The distance required to cause this focus on the Y axis isthe same as the Locate Tolerance (see page 2-9) associatedwith identifying an element and is selectable in theWorkspace > Preferences dialog box.

4. Type the Y value desired.

AccuDraw responds by setting the endpoint of the newelement and displays fixed, dashed lines extending fromthe X and Y axes of the compass.

5. Enter a data point to accept the location.

Pressing �Return� overrides the locked axes and returnsthe pointer to the free dynamic state.

When working with Polar coordinates, AccuDraw does notautomatically shift the focus from the Distance and Angle fields likeit does with the X and Y fields in Rectangular coordinates. Instead,you must navigate between these two fields to enter precise values.This is easily done using the Tab or down arrow keys.

However, when it comes to entering angular values AccuDraw does tryto help you out by not requiring a negative value when you want togo off in the “opposite” direction from an axis. Simply by moving thepointer to the opposite quadrant from the positive angle, AccuDrawmoves the dynamic element in the negative direction.

To enter a polar coordinate using AccuDraw1. Enter the first data point.

If the Rectangular compass appears, press �space bar�to switch to Polar coordinates.

2. Type a distance value in the Distance field. If the input focus is onthe Angle field press the �Tab� or �down arrow� key first.

AccuDraw will lock the length of the dynamic element to this



value. You can rotate this dynamic element around.

3. Press the �Tab� or down arrow key.

The input focus will shift to the Angle field.

4. Type the desired angle.

or

Press the �A� key to lock in the angle at the current pointer location.

5. Enter a data point to accept the coordinate entry.

Previous distance recall

Another example of how AccuDraw tries to help you is its previousdistance feature. As you place elements in your design file,AccuDraw keeps track of the distance between your last twodata points. Known as the Previous Distance, AccuDraw usesthis distance as a hint for your next data point.

Think of previous distance as a radius length from the compassorigin. When you move the pointer within the Tolerance (seeLocate Tolerance on page 2-9) distance to this radius, AccuDrawdisplays a small tangent line called the previous distanceindicator, and locks the pointer to this point.

Previousdistance

indicator.

As you keep the pointer within the Tolerance (see Tolerance shortcuton page 2-31) distance of this previous distance, AccuDraw will keepit locked. This, of course, only works with Polar coordinates. If youare using Rectangular coordinates, the previous distance only workswhen you are indexed to either drawing plane axis.

A data point will result in an offset distance from yourlast data point precisely the same as the distance betweenyour previous two data points.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw’s keyboard shortcuts

This “lock” on feature is not hard to override. Just continue draggingthe pointer until it is outside the Tolerance (see Tolerance shortcuton page 2-31) and the previous distance lock disengages.

Recalling previous values

AccuDraw stores all entered values for its X, Y, Distance, and Anglefields for recall as needed. When in the X, Y, or Distance fields,pressing the �PgUp� key recalls the last distance value enteredin any of these fields. Pressing �PgUp� again recalls the next tolast entered value and so on. You should note that the X, Y, andDistance fields share a common value buffer but that Angular datais stored separately. This means you can enter a value in the Xfield, for instance, change the input focus to Y, and by pressing�PgUp�, enter the same value as placed in the X field.

Settings manipulation

Several commands that were added previously operated as togglesto manipulate a setting, such as turning context sensitivity on oroff. These commands now force the setting either on or off. So forinstance, for context sensitivity, key in: ACCUDRAW SETTINGSCONTEXTSENS ON. If you enter it without trailing “on” or “off,”it still behaves as a toggle. This is most useful for such thingsas macros, although you may want them that way in a functionkey/shortcut. This also applies to floating origin, auto pointplacement, axis indexing and distance indexing. (Note: the on/offoption does not show up in the Key-in window.)

AccuDraw’s keyboard shortcuts

Although AccuDraw tries to anticipate your next move it cannotalways predict your intentions. AccuDraw therefore includes a widevariety of single and double character command directives knownas the keyboard shortcuts. By pressing the appropriate key, youdirect AccuDraw to perform a specific operation. AccuDraw is thedefault input focus in most cases, you can just type in the shortcutwithout having to consider where the input focus is.



Popups confirm single letter shortcuts below the focused inputfield. This function is not only useful to confirm the key-ins but isalso excellent for training purposes or demos to illustrate whichkey is being pressed. It also serves to communicate that theshortcut is received via AccuDraw’s input fields.

Two letter shortcuts appear attached to the focused input field,and confirm the action through the temporary appearance ofthe shortcut dialog box. The pop-down list adjacent to theinput field illustrates where the shortcut comes from, therebymaking it easy to “follow the action.”

The following is a list of the more common keyboard shortcuts:

Key Effect

�?� Opens the AccuDraw Shortcuts window.

�Return� Smart Lock• In Rectangular coordinates, locks

X to 0 if the pointer is on thedrawing plane y-axis or Y to 0 ifthe pointer is on the x-axis.

• In Polar coordinates, locks Angleto 0 , 90 , -90 , or 180 if thepointer is on a drawing planeaxis or otherwise locks Distanceto its last entered value.

�space bar� Switches between Rectangular andPolar coordinates.



Key Effect

�O� Moves the drawing plane origin to thecurrent pointer position. This can alsobe used to explicitly activate AccuDrawbefore you enter a data point.

�X� Toggles the lock status for the X value.

�Y� Toggles the lock status for the Y value.

�D� Toggles the lock status for theDistance value.

�A� Toggles the lock status for theAngle value.

For the complete list, see Complete List of AccuDrawKeyboard Shortcuts on page 2-58.

AccuDraw defaults

There is a command to set the shortcuts back to the defaults, andone to reread the shortcuts file. The latter is useful if you want tochange the file manually without exiting MicroStation. It could alsobe useful if you would like to alter the shortcuts programmatically(for example, with MDL or BASIC) with more control than waspreviously possible. Key-ins: ACCUDRAW SHORTCUTS DEFAULTand ACCUDRAW SHORTCUTS READFILE.

Create, edit and delete shortcuts

• Pressing Delete in any of the text fields in the AccuDrawwindow allows you to edit the string. Of course you can stilluse it to delete a selection set when appropriate.

• If shortcut.txt file cannot be written or read, youget an error message.

• You can delete a shortcut by highlighting it in the shortcutsdialog box and pressing Delete.

• When you create a new shortcut, it follows the highlighted one,rather than always putting it at the end of the list.

• When you create a new shortcut or edit an existing one, a



message box appears informing you if the shortcut is a duplicateor conflicts with an existing one (for instance, F and FS). Youcan still create it if you want to (which is often convenient ifyou want to edit the other one later), but if you click No, itreturns you to the Edit/New Shortcut dialog box.

General Procedure — To activate akeyboard shortcut

1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, simply press thekeyboard key(s) that corresponds to the shortcut you wish to use.

If the first typed letter is, by itself, a valid shortcut,the shortcut activates.

Otherwise, the AccuDraw Shortcuts window opens. Thewindow lists the available shortcuts. Typing the secondletter activates the shortcut.

To review a listing of the availableAccuDraw shortcuts1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the �?� key.

The AccuDraw Shortcuts window opens.

To activate a single-letter shortcut from theAccuDraw Shortcuts window1. Press the key that corresponds to the desired shortcut.

orIn the list box, select the desired shortcut and click the Run button.



To activate a two-letter shortcut from theAccuDraw Shortcuts window1. After pressing the first letter of the sequence, press the

desired key to identify the second letter.orIn the list box, select the desired shortcut and click the Run button.

Smart Lock

One of the first keyboard shortcuts you’ll use is Smart Lock. Similar inoperation to striking a line along a T-square, Smart Lock is invoked bypressing the �Return� key. Depending on where the pointer is locatedat the time you select Smart Lock one of two things will occur:

• If the pointer is oriented closer to the X axis of the compass,the pointer will lock to the X axis.

• If the pointer is oriented closer to the Y axis of the compass,the pointer will lock to the Y axis.

You know the pointer is locked on an axis when the dynamic linehighlights. Pressing the �Return� key again deactivates Smart Lockand releases the dynamic line back to free motion.

To constrain the pending data point to adrawing plane axis1. Position the pointer near the desired axis. (When the pointer

is on an axis, a highlighted line is displayed from the drawingplane origin to the pointer location.

Positioning thepointer on a drawing

plane axis on x-axis(above), on y-axis

(below).



2. Press the �Return� key.

Smart Lock is engaged. Its effect is to constrain thepending data point to the axis.

Constrainingthe pending

data pointalong x-axis.



Constrainingthe pending

data pointalong y-axis.

You can now constrain the pending data point to a precise distancealong the axis using the following procedures or by simplysnapping a tentative point to an element or monument point andaccepting the tentative point as the data point location.

To disengage Smart Lock and unconstrain the pending data point,press �Return� again. The �Return� key toggles Smart Lock.

Snapping toconstrain thepending data

point to aprecise distancealong the x-axis.

Smart Lock will not lock when you are entering coordinatevalues into the AccuDraw X or Y fields. Instead, AccuDrawreturns the dynamic element to free motion.

X and Y locks

You can force AccuDraw to lock the current distance along anaxis by activating the �X� or �Y� keyboard shortcut. AccuDrawresponds by locking the dynamic line to the chosen axis at thecurrent pointer distance from the origin point of the compass.The focus of complement axis AccuDraw data field becomes



the focus for your next keyboard entry.

AccuDraw automatically switches its coordinate system torectangular in response to the X or Y lock.All X and Y values entered are relative to the plane of theprevious element segment.

To override this, AccuDraw provides an option in its settingscalled Context Sensitivity. Turning this off forces AccuDraw tostay oriented to the drawing’s XY axes.

Distance lock

The �D� shortcut locks the distance from the compass originpoint to the current location of the pointer. The input focusautomatically shifts to the Angle field.

To interactively enter the distance of thedynamic element1. In the AccuDraw window’s Distance field (Polar coordinates),

type the distance, in working units (MU:SU:PU).

The pending data point is automatically constrained; this isindicated by the check box next to the Angle field. Dynamicupdate occurs in response to each keystroke.

Alternative method — To interactively enterthe distance of the dynamic element1. Move the pointer away from the drawing plane origin until the

desired distance is displayed in the AccuDraw window’s Distancefield. As the pointer is moved, the displayed distance is roundedoff to the increment specified by the Distance setting (if the settingis turned on) in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box (see page 2-23) ).

2. Press the �D� key.



Angle lock

The �A� shortcut sets the angle portion of the polar drawing plane.AccuDraw sets the angle to the current position of the pointer.

To interactively lock the angle of adynamic element1. In the AccuDraw window’s Angle field (Polar coordinates),

type the angle, in degrees.

The pending data point is automatically constrained; this isindicated by the check box next to the Distance field. Dynamicupdate occurs in response to each keystroke.

Alternative method — To interactively lockthe angle of a dynamic element1. Move the pointer around the drawing plane origin until the desired

angle is displayed in the AccuDraw window’s Angle field. Asthe pointer is moved, the displayed angle is rounded off to theincrement specified by the Angle setting (if the setting is turnedon) in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box on page 2-23).

2. Press the �A� key.

The Angle value automatically switches to the “opposite”angle if the pointer position dictates.

Angle valueautomatically

switches tothe “opposite”

value.


Drafting AidsUnit roundoffs and their effect on AccuDraw

Angle valueautomatically

switches tothe “opposite”

value.

Unit roundoffs and their effect on AccuDraw

Although the X/Y and Angle fields can be set by typing in keyvalues, AccuDraw also supports a roundoff feature that can forcethe new data point to a multiple of a set value. AccuDraw’s UnitRoundoff can be set in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.

Distance roundoff

When you enable the Distance field in Unit Roundoff, AccuDrawacts as if there is an invisible grid in effect. However, the DistanceRoundoff is always calculated from the current compass location.In addition, you can override this value by typing in a coordinatein the AccuDraw window at any time.

To round off the distance values displayed in theAccuDraw window as the pointer moves1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box’s Distance field, key in the

desired increment, in working units (MU:SU:PU).


Drafting AidsUnit roundoffs and their effect on AccuDraw

To cancel distance roundoff1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, turn off the check

box to the right of the Distance field.

Angle roundoff

The Angle Unit Roundoff is useful for locking elements alongspecific axes. For instance, setting the Angle Roundoff to 30degrees assures that all elements placed will occur along one of thenormal isometric drawing axes. As with the Distance field, youcan override this value by directly entering the angle you desirein the Angle field of the AccuDraw window.

Drawingin progress

showingAccuDraw

window withangle locked

to 30 .

To round off the values displayed in the AccuDrawwindow’s Angle field as the pointer moves1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box’s Angle field, key

in the desired increment, in degrees.

Keyed-in values and snapped tentative points override roundoff.

To cancel angle roundoff1. In the AccuDraw Settings dialog box, turn off the check

box to the right of the Angle field.


Drafting AidsMoving the AccuDraw compass

Moving the AccuDraw compass

By default, AccuDraw places its compass at the last data pointlocation. There are, however, times when you need to take overcontrol of the AccuDraw compass. Tentative point operations cantake better advantage of AccuDraw’s capabilities when you “unlock”the compass and place it wherever needed. The following covershow you do this and some interesting ways in which AccuDrawcan be used to accomplish otherwise difficult operations.

The floating origin option

Before you can move the compass you need to release the AccuDrawcompass origin. This is done with the “O” keyboard shortcut.AccuDraw will then do one of two things:

• If the compass is currently not visible it will appearat the last data point location.

• If the compass is visible it will relocate to the currentpointer location.

The only exception is if there is a tentative point active. SeeAccuDraw and the tentative point on page 2-45.

In either case, this occurs regardless of the tool or operation currentlyselected. This last point is important to recognize. AccuDraw isconsidered a non-modal feature in that you don’t have to be in apredetermined part of a procedure in order for it to operate.

The most common use for a relocated origin point for the compassis to index the element under construction from an existing point.For instance, if you want to locate the corner of a block a specifieddistance from a given location the relocated origin point.

AccuDraw and the tentative point

Creating precision offsets is a fundamental function of thedesign process. AccuDraw performs this important functionby utilizing tentative points.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw and the tentative point

The key to using AccuDraw and the tentative point is the Set Originfunction (the �O� keyboard shortcut). When there is a tentativepoint present, pressing the �O� key results in the relocation ofthe compass to the tentative point location.

AccuDraw enters a dynamic tentative point mode where you canmanipulate the final data point location in a number of ways:

• Enter coordinate data using the AccuDraw window.

• Use a second tentative point and various locks (X/Y orD/A) to interactively set the offset.

This latter technique is useful when you need to set anoffset from two elements.

To create an offset from two elements1. With a tool active, enter a tentative point at the key

point of the first element.

2. Press the �O� key.

The compass will appear at the tentative point location.

3. Tentative point on the keypoint of the second element.

4. Press the �X� or �Y� key.

AccuDraw responds by locking the dynamic line to the appropriateaxis but at the offset from the first tentative point to the second one.

5. Enter another tentative point to “lock” the other axis ofthe tentative compass location.orEnter a data point to set the second axis value.

AccuDraw relocates the initial compass to the new indirectlyderived location. From here you can continue the useof the current drawing tool.

Tentative points and drawing plane orientation

If you snap to a linear element while AccuDraw is active,switching to Polar coordinates (pressing the �space bar�) alignsthe drawing plane with the linear element.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw’s drawing plane orientation

Snapping to alinear elementand switching

to Polarcoordinates.

AccuDraw’s drawing plane orientation

AccuDraw orients the drawing plane in accordance with the CoordinateSystem Rotation setting in the AccuDraw Settings dialog box:

CoordinateSystemRotation

Definition

Top (default) Orients compass to match top view(in 2D same as View).

Front Orients compass to match frontview (3D only).

Side Orients compass to match sideview (3D only).

View Orients compass to current view axes.

Auxiliary Orients compass to last definedauxiliary coordinate system (seeRotate Auxiliary).

Context A temporary orientation affected by anumber of factors including the currenttool, the previous data points andthe “RQ” keyboard shortcut.



Rotating the drawing plane axes in 2D

Along with the standard drawing plane orientations, the rotation of thedrawing plane axes can be altered using keyboard shortcuts. In 2D,you are limited to rotating AccuDraw’s drawing plane about the viewaxis. This matches the same restriction placed on rotating views in 2D.

Dynamically rotating the drawing plane axes

The AccuDraw drawing plane axes can be dynamicallyrotated at any time.

When the first letter of the rotate sequence (R) is pressed, theAccuDraw Shortcuts window automatically opens and displays all thevalid “R” choices. Then typing the remaining portion of the sequence(Q) effectively chooses the Rotate Quick entry in the shortcuts window.The shortcuts window is then automatically dismissed.

Rotation-sensitive tools

Depending on the tool in use, dynamically rotating the drawing planeaxes yields slightly different results. For example, consider the scenarioof placing a block (rectangle) with the Place Block tool (see page 1-55) .

Once the drawing plane axes are rotated, the block’s mainaxis is constrained to this axis.

Contrast this to the effect when using the Place Line tool (see page1-36) : The drawing plane axes rotate, and while dynamic readoutis a function of the newly rotated system, the tool itself remainsavailable to dynamically place the line wherever desired.

The Rotate Quick keyboard shortcut

The Rotate Quick (�R�, �Q�) shortcut allows you to change theorientation of the drawing plane only for the current data point,after which it is returned to the previous orientation.



To quickly rotate the drawing plane axes1. With AccuDraw dynamics active, press �R�, �Q�.

The drawing plane indicator spins freely about its origin, thex-axis following the movement of the screen pointer.

2. Enter a data point to accept the specified rotation.

The use of the previously selected tool continues.

For example, suppose you are using the Place Line tool (see page1-36) to start a construction and wish to align the drawing planeaxes with the new line. After establishing the drawing plane origin(with the first data point of the line), pressing �R�, �Q� allows thedrawing plane axes to be interactively rotated.

Dynamicallyrotating the

drawing planeaxes.

Placing the line.

Keyboard shortcuts are available to rotate the drawing planecoordinate system 90 about an individual axis (“RZ”) or to alignit with the design plane axes (“T”) or view axes (“V”).When working in a 3D environment, AccuDraw’s axes rotation takes


Drafting AidsUsing shortcut snap modes with AccuDraw

on a very important role in the design process. This is discussedin Using AccuDraw in 3D (see page 7-55) .

Using shortcut snap modes with AccuDraw

AccuDraw provides a few keyboard shortcuts to morepopular tentative point snaps:

• “N” — Nearest

• “C” — Center

• “I” — Intersect

These shortcuts work the same as selecting the snap from thestatus bar with the exception of Nearest.

The AccuDraw-enhanced Nearest snap mode

With AccuDraw disabled, when you snap to an element with theNearest snap, MicroStation enters the tentative point at the point onthe element closest to the pointer. With AccuDraw active, this changesa bit. When the pointer is constrained by either X, Y, Distance, orAngle Lock, and an element is snapped using Nearest snap mode,AccuDraw will attempt to produce a tentative point at the nearestpoint on the element that also satisfies AccuDraw’s lock.

In many cases the effect is similar to that when using the ExtendElement to Intersection tool (see page 3-103) . In the case where thereis no point on the snapped element that satisfies AccuDraw’s lock,the snapped point will simply appear at the point on the elementclosest to the pointer. This point will then be projected onto thehypothetical line or circle determined by AccuDraw’s lock.

Nearest snapwith Place

SmartLine toolconstrained by

an angle.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw’s Effect on Various Tools

Setting the keypoint snap divisor

Although not technically a snap mode, there is one additionalshortcut associated with tentative point snaps: the snap divisorsetting. Invoking it with the “K” keyboard shortcut results in theappearance of the Keypoint Snap Divisor dialog box.

AccuDraw’s Effect on Various ToolsAlthough much of AccuDraw’s operation is global in nature, it doeshave sometime subtle effect on individual tools. As you learn touse AccuDraw you will find that it can be used as a substitutefor many individual tool settings. The following discussionprovides some insights into this feature.

The Place SmartLine tool is specially designed to exploit AccuDraw’scapabilities. See AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool on page 2-54.

AccuDraw and the Place Circle tool

A simple tool like Place Circle can benefit from AccuDraw in anumber of ways. First, when you place a circle you can explicitlyset the diameter of the circle by turning on the Diameter toolsetting and entering a value. However, with AccuDraw activethis can be done with fewer keystrokes.

Once you’ve placed the circle’s origin point all you have to do is typein the radius value. AccuDraw automatically locks the circle tothat value indicated by the locked dynamic circle. It really doesn’tmatter which drawing coordinate system is active.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw and the Place Arc tool

UsingAccuDraw toplace a circle

by center.

To place a second circle of equal radius is also easy. UsingAccuDraw’s previous distance feature, the circle will temporarilylock to the previous radius allowing you to enter the seconddata point. This does require two data points for all remainingcircles, so if you are placing numerous fixed diameter circles youmay want to use the Diameter tool setting.

AccuDraw and the Place Arc tool

Almost no other tool has as many settings as does the Place Arc (seepage 1-75) tool. AccuDraw can be used to simplify this tool’s operation.By using the polar coordinate plane you can easily specify radiallengths and sweep angles just by typing them in via AccuDraw.

UsingAccuDraw toplace an arc

by center.

This is one case where AccuDraw’s context sensitive orientationis good for incremental angle setting and View or other rotations


Drafting AidsAccuDraw and the Place Ellipse tool

are good for setting an absolute sweep angle.

AccuDraw and the Place Ellipse tool

When you place an ellipse without AccuDraw you specify a centerpoint, the primary axis and radius, and a point through whichthe ellipse will pass. You can do this by selecting the variousoptions in the Tool Settings window or use AccuDraw to setthese values in a more user-friendly manner.

When you enter that first center point, AccuDraw’s effect becomesnoticeable. The second data point still defines the major axis, but nowyou can specify both the radius and angle using the AccuDraw windowsimply by entering the radius and angle or dynamically positioning it.

UsingAccuDrawto place an

ellipse bycenter and

edge.

Now, because the AccuDraw compass orients itself along the axis of theellipse under construction, the secondary axis is automatically lockedso you can simply enter the value or position the pointer and data point.

AccuDraw and the Place Block tool

AccuDraw can be used with the Place Block tool to place a blockwith specific dimensions and at a specific angle.

With the Rotated method you can specify the angle and X length ofthe block using the polar drawing plane. Once the base of the blockhas been defined, AccuDraw orients the compass along this base.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw affects most tools

At this point, you can switch to rectangular mode (space bar) andlock in the Y distance by simply entering its dimension.

UsingAccuDraw toplace a block.

AccuDraw affects most tools

The tools just described were selected to illustrate how AccuDrawworks with even the simplest tools to provide additional capabilitiesor easier access to options over non-AccuDraw operation. AccuDrawactually affects the operation of most MicroStation tools and even hasthe potential to work with third-party application software.

AccuDraw and the Place SmartLine ToolThe Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80) is used to automaticallyplace a complex chain or shape containing a dynamically specifiedcollection of segments and vertices. This tool is designed to beused in conjunction with AccuDraw. The main benefits of usingAccuDraw with Place SmartLine are as follows:

• The drawing plane origin automatically moves to thelocation of a newly defined vertex.

• The drawing plane automatically rotates to align with a newlydefined segment. This allows tangent and perpendicularsegments to be easily defined.


Drafting AidsAccuDraw and the Place SmartLine Tool

• When defining an arc segment, the drawing plane coordinatesystem automatically switches to Polar.

To define an arc segment tangent to theprevious segment1. With AccuDraw active and Place SmartLine selected, set

the tool setting Segment Type to Arcs.

The drawing plane coordinate system automaticallyswitches to Polar, and the arc’s center point and sweepangle are dynamically displayed.

Switchingthe Place

SmartLineSegment Type

to Arcs.

2. Move the pointer toward the drawing plane axis that isperpendicular (that is, at 90 ) to the previous segment.

When the pointer is close to the axis, the arc radius



position dynamically aligns with it.

Defining thecenter point.

3. Enter a data point to define the center point for the arc.

4. Enter a data point to define the arc’s sweep angle andcomplete the segment definition.

Defining the sweepangle.

The arc’s sweep angle can be defined in either direction —clockwise or counterclockwise.

To define a semi-circular arc segment1. With AccuDraw active and Place SmartLine selected, set

the tool setting Segment Type to Arcs.

The drawing plane coordinate system automaticallyswitches to Polar, and the arc’s center point and sweepangle are dynamically displayed.

2. Enter a data point to define the first arc endpoint.



Defining the first arcendpoint.

3. Move the pointer to the drawing plane axis that is parallel(that is, at 0 ) to the first endpoint.

Defining the centerpoint.

4. Enter a data point to define the center point for the arc.

5. Move the pointer such that it is again parallel to the first endpoint.

When the pointer aligns with the axis, a semi-circulararc is dynamically displayed.

Aligning thepointer withthe drawingplane x-axis.


Drafting AidsComplete List of AccuDraw Keyboard Shortcuts

6. Enter a data point to complete the segment definition.

You can also easily define semi-circular arc segments by quarters of theAccuDraw drawing plane. Simply align the pointer to the desired axis.

Complete List of AccuDraw Keyboard ShortcutsThe following table lists each keyboard shortcut and its effect.Additional information about the effect of individual keyboard shortcutsis presented in the general discussions of AccuDraw procedures.

Key Effect

�?� Opens the AccuDraw Shortcuts window.

�~� Bumps an item in the tool settings dialog box(shortcut is ~, usually right under the �Esc�key—there is no need to press the �Shift� key). Itfinds the first enabled item in the tool settingsdialog box that is a toggle button or an optionbutton, and either toggles it or bumps it tothe next valid value. For instance, if you aredrawing a smartline and the focus is in theAccuDraw window, you can just press the �~�

key and it switches to arcs without moving thefocus from the AccuDraw window.Key-in: ACCUDRAW BUMP TOOLSETTING.

�Return� Smart Lock• In Rectangular coordinates, locks X to 0 if

the pointer is on the drawing plane y-axisor Y to 0 if the pointer is on the x-axis.

• In Polar coordinates, locks Angle to 0 ,90 , -90 , or 180 if the pointer is ona drawing plane axis or otherwise locksDistance to its last entered value.

�space bar� Switches between Rectangular and Polarcoordinates.

�O� Moves the drawing plane origin to thecurrent pointer position.



Key Effect

�X� Toggles the lock status for the X value.

�Y� Toggles the lock status for the Y value.

�Z� Toggles the lock status for the Z value (see UsingAccuDraw in 3D (see page 7-55) ).

�D� Toggles the lock status for the Distance value.

�A� Toggles the lock status for the Angle value.

�L� Locks the current index state. If an axis ordistance is not indexed, indexing is disabled. Onthe other hand, if an axis or distance is indexed, itis locked. The effect is temporary, lasting until adata point is entered or the shortcut is run again.This is useful if you need to index to one axisbut not the other, or simply to enter a data pointvery close to an axis but not on the axis.

�N� Activates Nearest snap mode.

�C� Activates Center snap mode.

�I� Activates Intersect snap mode.

�K� Opens the Keypoint Snap Divisor dialogbox, which is used to set the Snap Divisorfor keypoint snapping.

�R�, �Q� Used to quickly and temporarily rotate thedrawing plane. The procedure is described in TheRotate Quick keyboard shortcut (see page 2-48) .

�R�, �A� Used to permanently rotate the drawing plane.Because it rotates the current ACS, this rotationwill still be active after the tool in use is exited.If on, the tool setting Use Current Origin causesthe drawing plane origin to be used as the x-axisorigin, thereby eliminating the need to enter anextra data point. Of course, in many cases it isdesirable to be able to define the x-axis origin at adifferent location than the drawing plane origin.

�R�, �X� Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its x-axis (seeOrienting the drawing plane in 3D on page 7-56).

�R�, �Y� Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its y-axis (seeOrienting the drawing plane in 3D on page 7-56).



Key Effect

�R�, �Z� Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its z-axis.

�E� Rotates between three main planes: top, front, andside (3D only). This also works when your originalplane is an ACS or context rotation, so you do nothave to use RX, RY to rotate to a 90 plane.

�F� Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes ina standard Front view (see Orienting the drawingplane in 3D on page 7-56). Pressing this key asecond time restores context-sensitive rotation.

�S� Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes ina standard Right view (see Orienting the drawingplane in 3D on page 7-56). Pressing this key asecond time restores context-sensitive rotation.

�T� Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axesin a standard Top view. Pressing this key a secondtime restores context-sensitive rotation.

�V� Rotates the drawing plane to align with theview axes. Pressing this key a second timerestores context-sensitive rotation.

�W�, �A� Saves the drawing plane alignment as an ACS.

�G�, �A� Retrieve a saved ACS.

�P� Opens the Data Point Key-in dialog box forentering a single data point. See PrecisionInput Key-ins on page 2-65.

�M� Opens the Data Point Key-in dialog box forentering multiple data points. See PrecisionInput Key-ins on page 2-65.

�G�, �K� Opens (or moves focus to) the Key-in window(same as choosing Key-in from the Utilities menu).

�G�, �S� Opens (or moves focus to) the AccuDrawSettings dialog box (same as choosing AccuDrawfrom the Settings menu).

�G�, �M� Opens the More AccuDraw Settings dialogbox (same as clicking the More button inthe AccuDraw dialog box).


Drafting AidsUsing the Grid

Key Effect

�G�, �T� Moves focus to the tool settings window.

�Q� Deactivate AccuDraw.

Keyboard shortcuts are not case sensitive.

Using the GridThe grid consists of evenly-spaced points in the design plane. It is avisual measurement and alignment aid at certain magnifications.

The spacing between grid points and spacing between gridreferences (highlighted grid points — every 12th point, forexample) are collectively known as grid units. Grid unit settingsare specific to a design file. The appropriateness of grid unitsettings for a design task is related to the size of the design,working units, and the required precision.

When used in conjunction with Grid Lock, the grid can assist inaccurate placement of elements (see Using Grid Lock on page2-64). However, the grid can be an impediment to efficientlyusing AccuDraw (see page 2-13) .



To set up grid units1. From the Settings menu, choose Design File.


2. In the Category list box, select Grid.

Controls for adjusting grid unit settings are displayed.

Design FileSettings

dialogbox (Gridcategory).

Grid Mastermeans thenumber of

grid pointsper masterunit. Grid

Referencemeans thenumber of

grid pointsbetween grid

references.

3. In the Grid Master field, enter the distance (in Workingunits) between points in the grid.

4. In the Grid Reference field, enter the number of gridpoints between grid references.

5. From the Grid Configuration option menu, choose one of these:

Configura-tion

For grid points laid out as follows

Orthogonal Along lines perpendicular to designplane x-axis and y-axis



Configura-tion

For grid points laid out as follows

Isometric Along lines at 30 from design planex-axis and y-axis

Offset Rows offset by half the distance betweenhorizontal grid points

6. In the Grid Aspect field, key in the ratio between the distancebetween grid points along the design x-axis and the distancebetween grid points along the y-axis.

In the Isometric configuration, this ratio is fixed.


To turn on or off the display of the grid in a view1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press �Ctrl-B�).

orFrom any view window’s control menu, choose View Attributes.


2. From the View Number option menu, choose thenumber of the desired view.

3. Turn Grid off or on.

4. Click Apply.


Drafting AidsUsing Grid Lock

To turn on or off the display of the grid in all views1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes (or press �Ctrl-B�).

orFrom any view window’s control menu, choose View Attributes.


2. Turn Grid off or on.

3. Click All.

Using Grid Lock

When Grid Lock is on, all data points and tentative points areforced to fall precisely on a point in the grid.

To set Grid Lock1. From the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu (or the pop-up

Locks menu in the status bar) choose Full.



Drafting AidsPrecision Input Key-ins

2. Turn Grid Lock on or off.

Alternative method — To set Grid Lock1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu (or the pop-up Locks

menu in the status bar), turn on Grid.

Precision Input Key-insPrecision input is a method of entering data points with thekeyboard. Using this method, you can specify the exact locationof a data point by specifying any of the following:

• design plane coordinates, the distances along the x-axis and y-axisfrom the global origin, which has the coordinates “0,0.”

• distance and angle relative to the view x-axis, from the mostrecently entered tentative point or data point.

• distances, along the design plane axes, from the most recentlyentered tentative point or data point.

• distances, along the view axes, from the most recentlyentered tentative point or data point.

Using AccuDraw to enter data points is generally superiorto using precision input key-ins.The Data Point Key-in dialog box is used to enterprecision input key-ins.

To open the Data Point Key-in dialog box toenter a single precision input key-in1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �P�.

After you enter the key-in, the dialog box automatically closes.



To open the Data Point Key-in dialog box toenter multiple precision input key-ins1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �M�.

After you enter a key-in, the dialog box remains open.

Although key-ins can be entered in the Key-in window, it iseasier to use the dialog box. The dialog box has an option menufor choosing the type of key-in (for example, DX=). When youenter the key-in, its type becomes the default.

Locks do not affect data points entered with precision input.The following table summarizes precision input key-ins:

Key-in AlternateKey-in

Distancefrom

Along

POINTABSOLUTE

XY= Design planeorigin

Design planeaxes

POINTDELTA

DL= Last tentativeor data point

Design planeaxes

POINTVDELTA

DX= Last tentativeor data point

View axes

POINTDISTANCE

DI= Last tentativeor data point

Relative toview x-axis

For more information about precision input key-ins, see Precisioninput key-ins in 3D (see page 7-61) .

To enter a data point at specific coordinatesin the design plane1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT



ABSOLUTE x,y or XY=x,y

X and Y are the x- and y-coordinates, respectively.

Absolute.“GO” denotes

the GlobalOrigin; xd

and yd denotethe design filex- and y-axes.

AccuDraw does not provide a means for entering a datapoint in this manner.

To enter a data point at a distance from thelast tentative point or data point and anglerelative to the view x-axis1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT

DISTANCE d,θ or DI=d,θ

d is the distance from the most recently entered tentative point ordata point and θ is the angle relative to the view x-axis.

Relative. “P”denotes the

last dataor tentative

point, xv theview x-axis,

and θ theangle.

To enter a data point at distances along thedesign plane axes from the last tentativepoint or data point1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT


Drafting AidsSyntax notes

DELTA x,y or DL= x,y

X and Y are the distances along the design plane x-and y-axes, respectively.

Distance.“P” denotes

the last dataor tentative

point; xd andyd the design

file x- andy-axes.

To enter a data point at distances along the viewaxes from the last tentative point or data point1. In the Data Point Key-in dialog box, key in POINT

VDELTA x,y or DX=x,y

X and Y are the distances along the view x-axis andy-axis, respectively.

Distance.“P” denotes

the last dataor tentative

point; xv andyv the view x-

and y-axes.

Syntax notes

The syntax of precision input key-ins includes provisionsfor the following:

• Specifying the view in which the data point is entered. The viewnumber optionally follows the last coordinate, distance, or angle.For example, the key-in XY=,,1 enters a data point atthe global origin of the design plane in View 1. The


Drafting AidsMeasure tool box

equivalent key-in in 3D is XY=,,,1.

• Entering multiple data points. A number following a “|”character at the end of a precision input key-in indicates howmany data points to enter. (The default is 1.)For example, the key-in DL=15|3 enters three data pointsat incremental distances of 15 master units from the lasttentative point or data point.AccuDraw does not provide a means for entering multipledata points in this manner.

• An omitted value in a precision input key-in is assumed to be 0.For example, the key-in DL=,5:4 is equal to DL=0,5:4.

Measure tool box

The tools in the Measure tool box are used to performmeasuring operations.

To Select in the Measure tool box

Measure the distance(s) alongan element.orMeasure the cumulative distancefrom a data point.orMeasure the perpendiculardistance between an elementand a data point.orMeasure the minimum distancebetween two elements.

Measure Distance (seepage 2-70)

Measure the radius of a circle,circular arc, cone, or cylinder,or the axes of an ellipse orelliptical arc. Measure Radius (see page 2-73)

Measure the angle betweentwo lines.

Measure Angle Between Lines(see page 2-74)


Drafting AidsMeasure Distance

To Select in the Measure tool box

Measure the length of an element.

Measure Length (see page 2-75)

Measure the area and perimeterof a shape, ellipse, or complexshape and to analyze massproperties. Measure Area (see page 2-76)

Measure the volume enclosed byan element or a set of elementsand to analyze mass properties.

Measure Volume (see page 2-81)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MEASURE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

To ensure accurate measurements, snap to the reference elementsand points when using measuring tools. For information aboutsnapping, see Using Tentative Points on page 2-1.

Measure Distance

Used to measure distance.



Distance To measure

Between Points Cumulative distance from an origin.

Along Element Along an element1

from an origin.

Perpendicular Perpendicular distance between anelement1 and a data point.

MinimumBetween

Minimum distance between twoelements.1

1 Line, line string, multi-line, arc, ellipse, shape, curve, B-spline curve,

complex chain, or complex shape.

To measure the cumulative distancefrom an origin1. Select the Measure Distance tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Between Points.

3. Enter a data point to identify the origin (the pointfrom which to measure).

4. Enter a second data point.

The distance between that point and the origin isdisplayed in the status bar.

5. Enter another data point(s). The cumulative distancefrom the origin is displayed.orReset to return to step 3.

To measure the distance along an element1. Select the Measure Distance tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Along Element.

3. Identify the element at the origin (the point from which to measure).

4. Enter a data point to define a point along the element. The distancefrom the origin along the element is displayed in the status bar.

If the element is closed, this data point defines the direction



(clockwise or counterclockwise) in which measurements are made.

5. Enter a data point(s). The distance along the element fromthe origin is displayed in the status bar.orReset to return to step 3.

To measure perpendicular distance froman element1. Select the Measure Distance tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Perpendicular.

3. Identify the element.


The perpendicular distance between the element and this pointis displayed in the status bar. A temporary “line” is displayedas a visual aid but is not placed in the design.

5. Enter another data point(s) to define other perpendicularmeasurements.

6. If the element is a line string, shape, curve, complex chain,or complex shape, the distance is measured perpendicularto the segment identified in step 2.orReset to return to step 3.

To measure the minimum distancebetween elements1. Select the Measure Distance tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Distance to Minimum Between.

3. Identify the first element.


5. Accept the elements.

The minimum distance between the elements is displayed inthe status bar. A temporary “line” is displayed as a visual


Drafting AidsMeasure Radius

aid but is not placed in the design.

Key-in: MEASURE DISTANCE ALONG | MINIMUM |PERPENDICULAR | POINTS

To construct a minimum distance line between two elements,use the Construct Minimum Distance Line tool (see page 1-45)in the Linear Elements tool box.

Measure Radius

Used to measure:

• The radius of a circle or circular arc.

• The radius of a cone or cylinder.

• The primary and secondary axes of an ellipse or elliptical arc.

• The radius of a circular segment or axes of an ellipticalsegment of a complex chain or complex shape.


Drafting AidsMeasure Angle Between Lines

To measure an element’s radius1. Select the Measure Radius tool.

2. Identify the element or segment.

3. Accept the element.

The measurement is displayed in the status bar.

Key-in: MEASURE RADIUS

To dimension an element’s radius, use the Dimension Element tool.

Measure Angle Between Lines

Used to measure the angle between two lines or segments ofa line string, shape, or multi-line. If the identified lines donot intersect, an intersection point is computed to serve asthe vertex of the measured angle.


Drafting AidsMeasure Length

To measure the angle between two lines1. Select the Measure Angle Between Lines tool.

2. Identify the first line.

3. Identify the second line.

4. Accept the lines.

The angle measurement is displayed in the status bar.

Key-in: MEASURE ANGLE

Measure Length

Used to measure the length of an element(s) and to analyze massproperties. For a closed element or a surface, the length of theperimeter or wireframe geometry is measured.

Tool Setting Effect

Tolerance(%)

When measuring curves, the maximumpercentage of the distance between the truecurve and the approximation used to measure.A low Tolerance makes the measurementmore accurate but increases calculation time.

MassProperties

If on, the Mass Properties window (see page2-82) displays the mass property analysis.

DisplayCentroid

If on, a graphic crosshair that representsthe center of mass for the measuredelement(s) is displayed.


Drafting AidsMeasure Area

To measure the length of an element(s)1. Select the element(s).

2. Select the Measure Length tool.

The length is displayed in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on,the mass properties are displayed in the Mass Properties window.

Alternative method — To measure thelength of an element(s)1. Select the Measure Length tool.



The length is displayed in the status bar. If MassProperties is on, the mass properties analysis is displayedin the Mass Properties window.

Key-in: MEASURE LENGTH

Measure Area

Used to measure area and perimeter.



Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the area that is measured.

Element—Area of one closed element1

(its Area attribute must be Solid).2

Fence—Area enclosed by the fence.

Intersection—Area bounded by the intersectionof two or more closed planar elements.

Union—Area bounded by the union of twoor more closed planar elements.

Difference—Area bounded by the differencebetween two or more closed planar elements.

Flood—Area enclosed by elements thateither touch one another or whose endpointsfall within the Maximum Gap.3

Points—Planar area with its vertices definedby a series of data points.

Tolerance(%)

For curves, sets the maximum percentageof the distance between the true curve andthe approximation used to measure. A lowTolerance makes the measurement moreaccurate but increases calculation time.

MassProperties

If on, the mass property analysis is displayedin the Mass Properties window (see page 2-82) .

DisplayCentroid

If on, a graphic crosshair that representsthe measured element’s center ofmass is displayed.

LocateInteriorShapes

(When Method is set to Flood) If on, thearea enclosed by the bounding elements iscalculated, minus the area of any closedelements inside the bounding area.

Max(imum)Gap

(When Method is set to Flood) Sets thelargest distance allowed between consecutiveelements. If zero, the elements mustconnect to bound an area.



1 Planar area of shape, ellipse, complex shape. For 3D surfaces or solids,

the total surface area in all dimensions.

2 An element’s Area attribute is changed with the Change Element to

Active Area tool in the Change Attributes tool box.

3 Somewhat akin to the “flood fill” tool in many paint programs. In

3D, restricted to coplanar elements.

To measure the area and perimeter of one element1. Use the Element Selection tool (see page 3-3) to select the element.

2. Select the Measure Area tool.

3. In the tool settings window, set Method to Element.


The element’s area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in masterunits are displayed in the status bar.

Alternative method — To measure the areaand perimeter of one element1. Select the Measure Area tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Element.


The element’s area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units aredisplayed in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the massproperties analysis is displayed in the Mass Properties window.

To measure the area defined by a fence1. Use the Place Fence (see page 3-24) tool to place a fence.


3. In the tool settings window, set Method to Fence.

4. Accept the fence contents.

The fence’s area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units aredisplayed in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the massproperties analysis is displayed in the Mass Properties window.



To measure the area of the intersection orunion of closed elements1. Select the Measure Area tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Intersection or Union.

3. Identify one element.

4. Identify another element(s).

As you accept each successive element, the edges that donot serve as the basis for the area to measure are hidden.The resulting area is highlighted.

If the elements do not overlap, the following occurs,depending on the Method:

Method If elements do not overlap, then

Intersection “Elements do not intersect” is displayed.

Union Each element is highlighted.

5. After you accept the last element, Reset to finish (orselect a different tool).

The area (A=) in square master units of the intersection orunion is displayed in the status bar. If the elements overlap, theperimeter (P=) is also displayed. If Mass Properties is on, the massproperties analysis is displayed in the Mass Properties window.

To measure the area of the differencebetween elements1. Select the Measure Area tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Difference.

If any elements are selected, they are de-selected.

3. Identify the element from which to subtract.

4. Identify the element(s) to subtract from the elementthat was identified in step 3.

5. After you have identified all the elements to subtract from the



element identified in step 3, enter a data point to accept.

The edges that do not serve as the basis for themeasured area are hidden.

6. Reset to display the area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master unitsin the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the mass propertiesanalysis is displayed in the Mass Properties window.orReturn to step 4 to identify more elements to subtract.

To measure the area enclosed by elementsthat touch or whose endpoints are withinthe Maximum Gap1. (Optional) — Select the elements.


3. In the tool settings window, set Method to Flood.

4. (Optional) — If you want to exclude, from the total measurement,the area of any closed elements inside the selected area,turn on Locate Interior Shapes.

5. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the bounding elements.

6. Accept the elements.

The area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units are displayedin the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the mass propertiesanalysis is displayed in the Mass Properties window.

To measure an area defined by data points1. Select the Measure Area tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Points.

3. Enter a data point to define each vertex of an imaginaryshape that encloses the area.

The imaginary shape is dynamically displayed.

4. When done, Reset.

The area (A=) and perimeter (P=) in master units are displayedin the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, the mass properties


Drafting AidsMeasure Volume

analysis is displayed in the Mass Properties window.

Key-in: MEASURE AREA DIFFERENCE | ELEMENT | FENCE| FLOOD | INTERSECTION | POINTS | UNION

Measure Volume

(3D only) Used to measure the volume enclosed by an element ora set of elements and to analyze mass properties. The element(s)must completely enclose a volume; if a volume is not enclosed,a message appears in the status bar.

Tool Setting Effect

Tolerance For curves, sets the maximum percentage ofthe distance between the true curve and theapproximation used to sure. A low Tolerancemakes the measurement more accuratebut increases calculation time.

MassProperties

If on, the Mass Properties window (see page2-82) displays the mass property analysisfor the measured volume.

DisplayCentroid

If on, a graphic crosshair that representsthe center of mass for the measuredelement(s) is displayed.

OrientNormals

If on, the normal directions of all the selectedsurfaces are automatically changed to pointoutward. (The Change Normal Direction tool(see page 7-169) is used to manually changethe surface normal direction for a surface.)


Drafting AidsMass Properties window

To measure volume1. (Optional) — Select the bounding element(s).

Since only solid cones and solids of projection or revolutioncan completely enclose a volume by themselves, it is usuallynecessary to select multiple elements. 1

2. Select the Measure Volume tool.

If an element(s) were selected (step 1), the volume isdisplayed in the status bar. If Mass Properties is on, themass properties analysis is displayed in the Mass Propertieswindow. Otherwise, continue with step 3.



The volume is displayed in the status bar. If MassProperties is on, the mass properties analysis is displayedin the Mass Properties window.

Key-in: MEASURE VOLUME

Mass Properties window

Used to control and display mass properties analysis of the length,area, or volume measured with the Measure Length (see page 2-75)tool, Measure Area (see page 2-76) tool, or Measure Volume (see page2-81) tool. Opens when the Mass Properties tool setting is turned on.

Mass Propertieswindow,

displaying onlythe part that isalways visible

— the basicproperties

1 To convert a surface or cone that is uncapped to a solid, use the Change to Active

Surface Settings tool in the Modify Surfaces tool box.



Mass Per <Length/Area/Volume>

Sets the mass per master unit as follows, depending onwhich measuring tool is selected:

Tool selected Sets

MeasureLength (seepage 2-75)

Mass Per Length — the lineardensity per master unit.

Measure Area(see page 2-76)

Mass Per Area — the area densityper square master unit.

MeasureVolume (seepage 2-81)

Mass Per Volume — the volumetric(mass) density per cubic master unit.

This setting affects both the Mass and Moments of Inertia.

File menu > Save…

Open the Save Measurement Values dialog box, which is used tosave the mass properties analysis in a text file.

Display menu > Moments and Products of Inertia

Toggles the display of the part of the Mass Properties windowthat shows moments and products of inertia.

Item name Shows for measured element(s)

Moments ofInertia

Mass moments of inertia — usefulfor kinematic analysis, includingcalculating the force required to rotatea body about an axis.

Products ofInertia

Mass products of inertia.



Part of theMass Properties

window thatshows Moments

and Productsof Inertia

For closed, planar elements, the area moments of inertia areobtained by setting Mass Per Area to 1.0. In this case, the areamoments are displayed as master units to the fourth power. Thearea moments are required for analyzing the stress across a beamcross section and other areas of engineering analysis.

The combination of the mass moments and polar moments of inertiaare commonly referred to as the inertia tensor.

The combination of moments and products of inertia abouta given coordinate system can be used to calculate thesevalues for any coordinate system.

Display menu > Principal Moments

Toggles display of the part of the Mass Properties window thatshows Principal Moments and Principal Directions.

Item name Shows for measured element(s)

PrincipalMoments

The maximum, minimum and anintermediate moment of inertia.

PrincipalDirections

The three mutually perpendicularaxes extending from the centroidalong which the maximum, minimumand an intermediate moment ofinertia occur. The products of inertiaabout these axes is zero.


window thatshows Principal

Moments andDirections


Drafting AidsBasic properties

Display menu > Radii of Gyration

Toggles display of the part of the Mass Properties window thatshows the Radii of Gyration, which are an alternate way to expressthe Moments of Inertia as distances in working units.


window thatshows Radii of

Gyration

Basic properties

This part of the Mass Properties window is always displayed. Theexact items displayed on the left side vary depending on the lastelement measured and the tool used to measure it.

Length

Length, in working units, of a linear element. For surfaces,the length of the wireframe geometry.

Perimeter

Perimeter, in working units, of a closed planar element.

Surface Area

Area of closed planar element or surface area of solidsin square working units.

Volume

Volume enclosed by a solid, in cubic working units.


Drafting AidsBasic properties

Mass

Mass, computed by multiplying the Length, Surface Area, or Volumeby the Mass Per <Length/Area/Volume> (see ) setting.

Centroid

Coordinates, in working units, of the center of mass.2

2 Indicated graphically with a highlighted cross hair if the Display Centroid tool setting is on.


Manipulating and ModifyingElementsOnce elements are placed, you can move, copy, rotate, scale,delete, and otherwise modify their geometry. In this chapter,you will find procedures concerning element manipulationand modification operations, including:

• Selecting Elements (see page 3-1)

• Manipulating and Modifying Selected Elements (see page 3-11)

• Specialized Manipulation and Modification Tools (see page 3-13)

• Using the Fence to Manipulate and Modify Elements (see page 3-16)

• Using the Tools in the Fence tool box (see page 3-23)

• Using the Tools in the Element Selection tool box (see page 3-2)

• Using the Tools in the Manipulate tool box (see page 3-34)

• Using the Tools in the Change Attributes tool box (see page 3-59)

• Using the Tools in the Match tool box (see page 3-68)

• Using the Tools in the Drop tool box (see page 3-77)

• Using the Tools in the Modify tool box (see page 3-87)

• Element Level Manipulations (see page 3-116)

Selecting ElementsWhen precision is not important, the easiest way to perform elementmanipulations and modifications is to use the Element Selection tool(see page 3-3) in the Element Selection tool box (in the Main toolframe, Element Selection is the default “representative” of the ElementSelection tool box). Most basic manipulations and modifications canbe done with the Element Selection tool, including:


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsElement Selection tool box

• Moving and copying

• Scaling

• Moving vertices

• Modifying axes

When precision is important, the PowerSelector tool (see page3-5) is useful for distinguishing the elements on which toperform manipulations and modifications.

By default, selected elements are highlighted.1 If any elements areselected, an arrowhead icon is displayed in the status bar. The numberto the right of the icon is the number of selected elements.

Element Selection tool box

The Element Selection tool box contains tools for selecting elements.

To Select in the ElementSelection tool box

Simply select and deselectelements.

Element Selection (see page 3-3)

Select and deselect elements ona per element basis, by definingan area, or by drawing a linethat intersects them. PowerSelector (see page 3-5)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX SELECTION OFF | ON | TOGGLE

1 When Highlight Selected Elements is turned off (in the Input Category of the Preferences

dialog box), selected elements are bracketed with squares called handles.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsElement Selection

Element Selection

Used to select an element(s) for modification or manipulation.

While the Element Selection tool is selected, the pointer becomes anarrowhead with an aperture encircling the tip. The aperture denotesthe design plane area in which MicroStation searches for elements.The aperture size or Locate Tolerance is a user preference that isadjustable in the Preferences dialog box (Operation category).

If the desired element is visible in the aperture but youcannot select it, check the following:

• To select a shape, the pointer must be close to one of theenclosing lines. To select a circle or an ellipse, the pointermust be close to the circumference or center.

• If Level Lock is on, only elements on the ActiveLevel can be selected.

• If Grid Lock is on, elements can be selected only where they lie ongrid points. Some elements may not lie on any grid points.

To select a single element1. Select the Element Selection tool.

2. Click the element you want to select.

The selected element is highlighted.2

To select one or more elements1. Select the Element Selection tool.

2. Drag around the area containing the elements you want to select.

2 When Highlight Selected Elements is turned off (in the Input Category of the Preferences

dialog box), selected elements are bracketed with squares called handles.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsElement Selection

As you drag, a dynamic rectangle outlines the area.

3. Release the Data button.

All elements that are completely inside the dynamicrectangle are selected.

To select all elements including those not visible1. From the Edit menu, choose Select All.

To select an additional element1. Select the Element Selection tool.

2. Control-click the element to select.

To select one or more additional elements1. Select the Element Selection tool.

2. Hold down the �Ctrl� key and drag around the area containingthe additional elements you want to select.

Be careful not to point at any element that is alreadyselected as you press the Data button.

To also select elements that overlap the dynamic rectangle, holddown the �Shift� key as well as the �Ctrl� key as you drag.

3. Release the Data button.

All elements that are completely inside (or overlapping) thedynamic rectangle when you release the Data button areadded to the set of selected elements.

To deselect an element1. Select the Element Selection tool.

2. Control-click the element to deselect.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsPowerSelector

To deselect all elements1. Select the Element Selection tool.

2. Click somewhere in the view where there is no element.

Key-in: CHOOSE ELEMENT

It is possible to select elements based on their attributes. SeeSelecting Elements Based on Attributes on page 6-120.

When the active design file is large, choose Edit > Select Allwithcare. It may take some time to select many elements, and elementsare selected regardless of whether they are visible.

Control-click means to hold down the �Ctrl� key whileclicking the Data button.

If you select an element, all other elements are deselected.

Selecting Element Selection automatically disables AccuDraw if it wasnot already disabled. To activate AccuDraw for use with ElementSelection, select the Start AccuDraw tool in the Primary Tools tool box.

PowerSelector

The PowerSelector tool is used to select and deselect multipleelements in a variety of ways.

The Attribute List field in the PowerSelector settings window allowsunique methods for selecting elements. The active set is denotedby a list of values that ends with a semi-colon. You can edit thesevalues before the semi-colon to build a subset. Only the elements thatmatch the existing values are kept, the others are removed fromthe set. Pressing �Return� or �Tab� applies the subset. Switchingattributes allows you to continue the process of elimination.

If values are entered after the semi-colon, PowerSelector performs ascan on the active file and all locatable reference files. A selectionscan supports add, subtract and inverse selection modes.



If a semi-colon is not used: PowerSelector assumes a subset ifelements are selected, and a scan if nothing is selected.

PowerSelector applies a simple logic for handling complex elementslike cells, which can contain multiple attributes in a single instance.

The attributes Level, Color, Style, Weight, and Class willlocate simple elements within a complex element and actupon the entire complex element.

The Types attribute supports exact matches only.

A cell comprised of two red lines and two blue circles would be foundby a scan for red elements but not by a scan for circles.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the selection method:

Individual—selection is performed on aper element basis, as with the regularElement Selection tool (see page 3-3) . Ifyou enter a data point but miss an element,the Block Method activates.

Block Inside—all elements inside thedefined block are selected.

Block Overlap—all elements inside andoverlapping the defined block are selected.

Shape Inside—all elements inside thedefined shape are selected.

Shape Overlap—all elements inside andoverlapping the defined shape are selected.

Line—elements are selected by drawinga line that intersects them.



Tool Setting Effect

Mode Sets the objective of using the tool:

Add—selects elements.

Subtract—deselects elements.

Invert—toggles the selection status of anelement (selects deselected elements anddeselects selected elements).

Clear/Select All—deselects all selectedelements, or selects all elements if noelements are currently selected.

Attribute Clicking the Show More Informationarrow expands the tool settings windowto reveal the Attribute combo box andthe Attribute List field.

Level—ranges between 1 and 63.

Color—ranges between 0 and 254.

Style—Standard line styles rangebetween 0 and 7.

Weight—Line weight ranges between 0 and 31.

Type—Element type numbers as definedin the on-line Reference Guide.

Class—Element class values as defined inthe on-line Reference Guide.

AttributeList

Depending on which Attribute option ischosen, sets the values related to theelements to be selected. The Attribute Listfield supports overrides for all elementsexcept for multi-lines and dimensions. Forexample, if color 4 is overridden by color5, only color 4 will be recognized.



To select elements inside or overlappinga rectangular area1. Select the PowerSelector tool.

2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons:Method - Block and Mode - Add (+)

If Block is set to Inside — the block has a solid border andno dashed line running through it.

If Block is set to Overlap — the block has a dashed borderand a dashed line running through it.

3. (Optional) — To change between Inside and Overlap, select theicon again using either the keyboard shortcut or the pointer.

4. Enter a data point to define the first corner of the block.

5. Move the pointer until the dynamically displayed block containsor overlaps the elements you want to select.

6. Enter a second data point to close the block.

To select elements contained in or overlappinga polygonal area1. Select the PowerSelector tool.

2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons:



Method - Shape and Mode - Add (+)


4. Enter a data point to define the first vertex of the polygonal shape.

5. Continue entering data points until the polygonal shape containsor overlaps the elements you want to select.

6. Enter a final data point to close the polygonal shape.

To select elements that intersect a line1. Select the PowerSelector tool.

2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons:Method - Line and Mode - Add (+)

3. Enter a data point to begin the line.

4. Enter a data point to end the line.

All elements touched by the line are selected.

To select elements based on their attributes1. Select the PowerSelector tool.

2. In the tool settings window, select the following icon: Mode - Add (+)

3. In the tool settings window, click the Show More Information icon.

4. From the Attribute combo box, choose an element attributeor property as the selection criterion.

5. In the Attribute List field, key in the values applicableto elements you want to select.

All of the selected elements with the specified values areselected. The Attributes List field updates to display all



found values and ends with a semi-colon.

To select additional elements or deselect someselected elements based on their attributes1. Select the PowerSelector tool.

2. In the tool settings window, select the following icons: Method- Block and Mode - Add (+) or Subtract (-)


4. Enter a data point to define the first corner of the block.

5. Move the pointer until the dynamically displayed block contains oroverlaps the elements you want to select or deselect.

6. Enter a second data point to close the block.

7. In the tool settings window, click the Show More Information icon.

8. From the Attribute combo box, choose an element attributeor property as the selection criterion.

The attribute or property values applicable to the selectedelements display in the Attribute List field.

9. In the Attribute List field after the semi-colon, key in the valuesapplicable to elements you want to select or deselect.

All of the selected elements with the values specified afterthe semi-colon are selected or deselected.

Key-in: POWERSELECTOR

For power users, both Method and Mode have been mapped tothe keyboard. Note that left and right-handed configurationsare available simultaneously.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsManipulating and Modifying Selected Elements

Tool setting Keyboard shortcut

Method Individual — �Q� or �U�

Block — �W� or �I�Shape — �E� or �O�

Line — �R� or �P�

Mode Add — �A� or �J�

Subtract — �S� or �K�

Invert — �D� or �L�

Clear/Select All — �F� or �;�(Note that pressing �space bar� alsodeselects all elements.)

For instance, the Method keys �Q� or �U� select the IndividualMethod, �W� or �I� the Block Method, �E� or �O� the Shape Method,and �R� or �P� the Line Method; case is unimportant.

Selections through PowerSelector can be undone in order of selectionthrough the use of �Ctrl-Z� or Edit > Undo.

You can set a user preference to display selected elements ashighlighted instead of with handles.

To change between Inside and Overlap mode, select the Block or Shapeicon again using either the keyboard shortcut or the pointer.

Manipulating and Modifying Selected Elements

To move elements with the Element Selection tool

1. In the Element Selection tool box, select the ElementSelection tool (see page 3-3) .

2. Select the element or elements to be moved.

The selected element is highlighted.

3. Drag a selected element by any point on the element.3

3 If Highlight Selected Elements is turned off (in the Input Category of the Preferences dialog

box), drag a selected element by any point on the element that is not a handle.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsManipulating and Modifying Selected Elements

To scale or modify a selected element1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box opens.

2. In the Input category, turn off Highlight Selected Elements.4

3. In the Element Selection tool box, select the ElementSelection tool (see page 3-3) .

4. Select the element.

The selected element is bracketed with handles.

5. Drag the appropriate handle to make the desired change.

Ele-ment:

Handle: Modifi-cation:

Arc MidpointEnd-points

Radius3

Sweepangle

Block CornerSegmentmidpt.

ScaleaboutoppositehandleScalewidth orheightaboutoppositehandle

B-splinecurveComplexchainComplexshape

Any Scaleaboutoppositehandle

4 When Highlight Selected Elements is on (default), you cannot scale or modify

the selected element in this manner.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsSpecialized Manipulation and Modification Tools

Ele-ment:

Handle: Modifi-cation:

Circle Axisendpoint

Modifyaxis

Ellipse AxisendpointCorner

ModifyaxisScaleaboutcenter

LineLinestringMulti-lineShape4

Any Movevertex athandle

Text Left orrightTop orbottom

Scale width about opposite handleScale height about opposite handle

3 If the arc is elliptical, both axes are scaled.

4 Except for rectangular shapes (blocks).

Specialized Manipulation and Modification ToolsWhen you need to manipulate or modify elements with more precisionthan is possible with the Element Selection or PowerSelector tools, or ifyou need to delete elements, use a specialized element manipulation ormodification tool. These tools can be used in conjunction with eitherthe Element Selection or the PowerSelector tool or by themselves.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsSpecialized Manipulation and Modification Tools

This table summarizes the tool boxes that contain specialized toolsused to place, manipulate, and modify elements.

To Use a tool in the

Copy, move, scale, rotate, ormirror elements.

Manipulate tool box (seepage 3-34)

Change (attributes, level,etc. of) elements.

Change Attributes tool box(see page 3-59)

Modify (the shape or sizeof) elements.

Modify tool box (see page 3-87)

To use specialized tools

1. In the Element Selection tool box, select the El-ement Selection tool.

2. Select the element(s). See Selecting Elements on page 3-1.

3. Select the specialized tool.

4. Perform the desired manipulation or modification.

Alternative method — To use specialized tools1. Select the specialized tool.

The prompt “Identify element” displays in the status bar. Thepointer has a circular aperture that works like the apertureon the Element Selection arrowhead pointer.

2. Enter a data point on or near a desired element to identifythe element. In some cases it may be helpful to first snapa tentative point to the element. See Snapping tentativepoints to elements on page 2-2.

The element is highlighted, and the prompt “Accept/rejectelement” is displayed in the status bar.

3. To accept the element and continue, enter a data pointanywhere in any view except on an element.or


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsExample

To identify a different element, Reset and return to step 2.

4. Enter additional data points to perform (and in some cases,repeat) the desired manipulation.

5. (Optional) — Repeat steps 2–4 for each additional element. (Thetool must have been locked upon selection in step 1.)

The first method is referred to as noun-verb because the element(s)are distinguished before the specialized tool is selected. The secondmethod is referred to as verb-noun. All specialized tools work withthe verb-noun method. Not all can be operated noun-verb. When youselect a tool that does not work on a noun-verb basis, MicroStationautomatically de-selects any selected elements.

Example

The simplest of the specialized element manipulation tools isDelete Element in the Main tool frame. You need only distinguish(select or identify) the element(s) to be deleted.

Suppose you want to delete three elements. Assume the elements arein plain view (each without any nearby elements). Here a shortcutapplies to the verb-noun procedure: You can combine the steps ofaccepting one element for deletion and identifying the next element.

The verb-noun procedure

1. In the Main tool frame, select the Delete Element tool. (Forthis example, it is assumed the tool is locked.)

The prompt “Identify element” displays in the status bar.

2. Enter a data point on or near one of the elements to identify it.

The element is highlighted, and the prompt “Accept/reject


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsIdentifying elements

element” displays in the status bar.

3. Enter a data point on or near another one of the elements.

The first element is deleted, and the second element is highlighted.

4. Enter a data point on or near the third element.

The second element is deleted, and the third element is highlighted.

5. Enter a data point anywhere in any view except on an element.

The third element is deleted.

The noun-verb procedure

1. In the Element Selection tool box, select the El-ement Selection tool.

2. Select the elements.

3. In the Main tool frame, select the Delete Elementtool (or press the �Del� key).

The elements are deleted.

Identifying elements

If you have trouble identifying an element (if trying to identify itresults in the message “Element not found” being displayed in thestatus bar) check the pointer’s position and the locks mentionedin Selecting Elements on page 3-1. This message also may meanthat you are trying to identify an element of a type that the toolcurrently in use is not designed to work with.

Using the Fence to Manipulate and Modify ElementsIn addition to using the Element Selection or PowerSelector tool to groupelements for manipulation, you can group elements with the fence. Thefence creates a temporary grouping of elements that is ended when thedesign file is closed, if not before. For information about permanentgroupings, see Permanently Grouping Elements on page 6-1.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsSpecifying which elements are in the fence contents

Most often, the fence is placed around elements to group them formanipulation, just as the pointer is dragged around elements toselect them with the Element Selection tool. However, the fencehas two additional grouping capabilities. It can be used:

• As a void to exclude elements inside (or overlapping)the fence boundary.

• To clip elements that cross the fence boundary, like a cookie cutter,so that only the parts inside the fence boundary (or outsidein the case of a void) are subject to manipulation.

The fence can be rectangular (referred to as a fence block), polygonal(non-rectangular) (referred to as a fence shape, with 3–97 vertices),or circular (referred to as a fence circle). A fence shape can bederived from a previously placed shape element.

The Place Fence tool is used to place the fence. On placement, the fence— whether it is a fence block, shape, or circle — is displayed on screenas a closed shape with the color used to highlight identified elements.While the fence is placed, a fence icon is displayed in the status bar.

To remove the fence if it is already displayed1. In the Fence tool box, select the Place Fence tool and continue

with your work. (In the Main tool frame, Place Fence is thedefault “representative” from the Fence tool box.)

You can remove the fence this way to prevent accidentalfence manipulations.

Specifying which elements are in the fence contents

The Fence (Selection) Mode determines the fence contents —whether the elements (or parts of elements) inside, outside, oroverlapping the fence are “contained” by the fence.

• Inside — Only those elements completely inside thefence are in the fence contents.

• Overlap — Only those elements inside or overlapping the



fence are in the fence contents.

• Clip — Only elements completely inside the fence andparts of elements inside and overlapping the fence arein the fence contents.5

• Void — Only those elements completely outside the fenceare in the fence contents.

• Void-Overlap — Only those elements outside or overlappingthe fence are in the fence contents.

• Void-Clip — Only elements completely outside the fenceand parts of elements outside and overlapping the fenceare in the fence contents.5

Top Left: Inside; Top Middle: Overlap; Top Right: Clip. BottomLeft: Void; Bottom Middle: Void-Overlap; Bottom Right: Void-Clip.Fence selection modes. Above, the fence block and elements. Atright, the fence contents in each Fence Selection Mode.

The Fence Selection Mode is a tool setting (labeled Fence Mode) forthe fence tools in the Fence tool box as well as for manipulationtools that can operate on the fence contents. In the latter case,it is set with the option menu next to the Use Fence control.There is also a control in the Locks dialog box.

5 This definition and the respective image shown apply when Use Optimized Fence Clipping is

turned off in the Operation category of the Preferences dialog box. For more information

about this preference, see Optimized fence clipping (see page 3-20) .



Examples of tool settings window controls for setting theFence Selection Mode.

It is not necessary to place the fence in order to set the FenceSelection Mode. Conversely, once the fence is placed, you canadjust the Fence Selection Mode to change the fence contentswithout moving or replacing the fence.

To manipulate the fence contents

1. Place the fence.

2. Select an element manipulation tool that can beused with the fence contents.

3. In the tool settings window, turn on Use Fence and setthe Fence Selection Mode.

You are prompted, usually for a data point. For example,with the Delete Fence Contents tool (see page 3-32) , you areprompted to “Accept/Reject Fence Contents.”

4. Enter a data point to accept the manipulation or Reset.

5. In some cases, you can repeat the manipulation.

You can Reset to halt a fence manipulation that is in progress.Manipulations that were completed before Resetting remain inthe design and can be undone up to the limits of the undo buffer.(Pressing �Ctrl-C� also halts a fence manipulation.)


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsOptimized fence clipping

Manipulations on many elements

Some fence manipulations on many elements (large arrays, forexample) either take a long time to complete or cannot be entirelyundone once completed because there is not enough room inthe Undo Buffer to store all of the changes.

To minimize potential problems, do the following beforeattempting such a manipulation:

• Back up the design file (see To make a backup copyof the active design file).

• Increase the size of the Undo Buffer. (To set the Undo Buffer,choose Preferences from the Workspace menu and select theMemory Usage Category). It is necessary to exit and restartMicroStation for a change to the Undo Buffer to take effect.

Optimized fence clipping

The Use Optimized Fence Clipping preference in the Operationcategory of the Preferences dialog box is on by default. Thispreference enables you to maintain closed shapes, solids, and surfaceswhen clipping those elements that cross the fence boundary. Ifthis preference is turned off, closed shapes, solids, and surfacesare dropped to linear elements when clipped.

You can also use this preference in conjunction with the Locate ByPicking Faces preference (in the Input category of the Preferencesdialog box) to create associative holes in closed shapes, solids andsurfaces. When Locate By Picking Faces is set to Always, fences thatare located entirely within a closed piece of geometry can performclip actions upon their section of the larger area.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsSpecial fence manipulations

To create an associative hole inside an elementusing optimized fence clipping1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences.


2. In the Input category, set Locate By Picking Faces to Always.

3. Click OK to accept the change and close the dialog box.

4. Select the Place Fence tool.

5. Set the Mode to Clip.

6. Inside a closed shape, solid or surface, place a fence.

7. Accept.

To keep fence clipping from changing the larger geometry in which it isplaced, set Locate By Picking Faces to Never or Render Views Only.

Special fence manipulations

The Manipulate Fence Contents tool (see page 3-29) can be used to“stretch” (extend or shorten) segments of elements that overlap thefence. It does this simply by moving element vertices that fall withinthe fence. You can also stretch elements that overlap the fence usingthe Copy tool (see page 3-35) , Move tool (see page 3-38) , Scale tool(see page 3-41) and Rotate tool (see page 3-46) .

The fence contents can also be moved or copied to a new design file.

To copy the fence contents to a new design file1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE FILE or FF=.

The Save Fence Contents As dialog box opens.

2. Key in the name of the new file and set the directory


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsSpecial fence manipulations

in which to create


4. Accept the copy.

Alternative method — To copy the fencecontents to a new design file1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE FILE <filename>

or FF=<filename>.

2. Accept the copy.

The file is created in the directory that is pointed to bythe MS_DEF configuration variable.

When using the second method, if a file already exists with thespecified filename, an alert box warns you that it will be overwritten.

To move the fence contents to a new design file1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE SEPARATE or SF=.

The Save Fence Contents As dialog box opens.

2. Key in the name of the new file and set the directoryin which to create it.


4. Accept the move.

Alternative method — To move the fencecontents to a new design file1. In the Key-in window, key in FENCE SEPARATE

<filename> or SF=<filename>.

2. Accept the move.

The file is created in the directory that is pointed to bythe MS_DEF configuration variable.

When using the second method, if a file already exists with thespecified filename, an alert box warns you that it will be overwritten.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsFence tool box

Fence tool box

The Fence tool box contains tools that are used to place, modify,and move the fence and delete the fence contents.

To Select in the Fence tool box

Place the fence.

Place Fence (see page 3-24)

Modify one vertex of a fence.

Modify Fence (see page 3-28)

Manipulate the fence contents.orExtend or shorten elementsthat overlap the fence. Manipulate Fence Contents

(see page 3-29)

Delete the fence contents.

Delete Fence Contents (seepage 3-32)

Break up the complex elementsin the fence contents intotheir components.

Drop Complex Status of FenceContents (see page 3-33)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX FENCE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

To prevent accidental fence manipulations, remove a no longerneeded fence by selecting the Place Fence tool.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsPlace Fence

Place Fence

Used to place the fence.

Tool Setting Effect

Fence Type When the Fence Type is:

Block, Shape, or Circle—Sets thegeometric characteristics of thefence for graphical placement.

(from) Element, From View, orFrom Design File—Sets the entityfrom which the fence is derived.

Fence Mode Sets the Fence (Selection) Modethat, in conjunction with thefence placement, defines the fencecontents for manipulation. SeeSpecifying which elements are inthe fence contents on page 3-17.

Design (For 2D files only) With FenceType set to From Design File, setsthe design file(s) from which thefence is derived — Active or All(active design file and attachedreference files). The Chooseoption is used to identify a file— either the active design file oran attached reference file — byidentifying one of its elements.



To place a rectangular fence1. Select the Place Fence tool.

If a fence already exists, it is removed.

2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Block.


4. Enter a data point to define the diagonally opposite corner.

Place Fence, withFence Type set to

Block

Alternative method — To place a rectangular fence1. Select the Place Fence tool.


2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Block.

3. Drag the pointer from the first corner to the diagonallyopposed corner.



To place a polygonal (non-rectangular) fencewith at most 100 vertices1. Select the Place Fence tool.


2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Shape.

3. Enter a data point to define the beginning (and end) point.

4. Continue to enter data points to define the vertices.

5. To close the shape, enter a data point at the locationof the first data point.orClick the Close Fence button.orKey in CLOSE ELEMENT.

Place Fence, withFence Type set to

Shape

Alternative method — To place a polygonal(non-rectangular) fence with at most 100 vertices1. Select the Place Fence tool.


2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to From Shape.

3. Identify a shape element that is the same shape as thefence shape you want to place.

4. Enter a data point to accept the element.

The fence is placed directly on top of the element.



To place a circular fence1. Select the Place Fence tool.


2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Circle.


4. Enter a data point to define the radius.

Alternative method — To place a circular fence1. Select the Place Fence tool.


2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Circle.

3. Drag the pointer from the center to the perimeter.

To place a fence on an existing shape element1. Select the Place Fence tool.


2. In the tool settings window, set Fence Type to Element.

3. Identify a shape element that is the same shape as thefence shape you want to place.

4. Enter a data point to accept the element.

The fence is placed directly on top of the element.

Key-in: PLACE FENCE BLOCK | SHAPE | CIRCLE |FROMSHAPE | ELEMENT | VIEW | DESIGN | UNIVERSE| ACTIVE | ALLFILES

If the Fence (Selection) Mode is set to Clip, the From Shape optionduplicates the selected shape to be placed. This option works only withsimple shapes; it does not work with complex shapes at this time.

Selecting Place Fence automatically disables AccuDraw if it was notalready disabled. To activate AccuDraw for use with Place Fence,select the Start AccuDraw tool in the Primary tool box.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsModify Fence

If, after placing the fence but before selecting another tool,you decide the fence placement is unsatisfactory, simplyReset to begin re-placing it.

Modify Fence

Used to move the fence or modify one of its vertices.

The fence and the Fence (Selection) Mode define the fencecontents for manipulation. See Specifying which elementsare in the fence contents on page 3-17.

To move the fence without replacing it1. Select the Modify Fence tool.

2. Set the tool setting Modify Mode to Position.

3. Enter a data point to define the origin for the move.

4. Enter a data point to define the new fence position. Thisdata point precisely positions the origin.

5. Reset to accept the move.orRepeat step 4.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsManipulate Fence Contents

To modify a vertex of the fence1. Select the Modify Fence tool.

2. Set the tool setting Modify Mode to Vertex.

3. Identify the vertex to move.

4. Enter a data point to define the new vertex position.

5. Reset to accept the modification.orRepeat step 4.

Modify Fence Vertex

Key-in: MOVE | MODIFY FENCE

Selecting Modify Fence automatically disables AccuDraw if it was notalready disabled. To activate AccuDraw for use with Modify Fence,select the Start AccuDraw tool in the Primary Tools tool box.

Manipulate Fence Contents

Used to move, copy, rotate, mirror, scale, or stretch the fencecontents, which are defined by the fence and (except for stretching)the Fence (Selection) Mode. See Specifying which elementsare in the fence contents on page 3-17.

The method of manipulation is determined by the tool settingOperation. With the exception of Stretch, each Methodworks identically to a tool in the Manipulate tool box withthe tool setting Use Fence on.



Operation Identical to using this tool withUse Fence on

Copy Copy

Move Move

Scale Scale

Rotate Rotate

Mirror Mirror

With Operation set to Stretch, Manipulate Fence Contents ignores theFence (Selection) Mode and operates on elements as follows:

• A vertex of a line, line string, multi-line, or shape is moved if it isinside the fence. A vertex outside the fence is not moved.

• An endpoint of an arc is moved if it is inside the fence. Anarc endpoint outside the fence is not moved.

• An ellipse, circle, or cell is moved if it is completely inside the fence.

Fence Stretch has always been a powerful tool when working onB-spline surfaces, because it allows you to move many poles (alsoknown as control points) at once. With Fence Stretch built intothe Rotate and Scale tools, this dramatically increases the powerto bend and distort surfaces while keeping them smooth.

For general information about B-spline surfaces, see “3DElements” on page 7-48.

You can use Fence Stretch to manipulate breaks (breaks in multi-linesare often used to represent windows or doorways when the multi-lineitself is the wall). For instance, you can place your fence to include awindow, and move the window along the wall. You may also change thesize of the window by including only the start or end of the break inthe fence. This means that in most cases, you do not have to drop themulti-line into its component elements to perform such manipulations.

For general information about multi-lines, see “UsingMulti-lines” on page 6-23.

You cannot move the break off of the multi-line segment that containsit. If you move the fence so the start or endpoint of a break wouldmove off of the segment, the break position will simply be projectedto the nearest point on the segment. If you move a break off of



the end of the segment, it will simply be deleted.

If only one endpoint of the arc is in the fence, the arc is effectivelyrotated and scaled so that the point is moved to the new position.This means that arcs do not change their aspect ratio (for example,circular arcs do not become elliptical) or their sweep angle. Their newendpoint position remains consistent with how the fence was moved,instead of Fence Stretch simply scaling arcs in either x or y.

Tool Setting Effect

Stretch Cells If on, cells that overlap thefence are stretched.1

1 The LOCK CELLSTRETCH [OFF | ON | TOGGLE] key-in also can

be used to turn Stretch Cells off or on.

To stretch segments of elements thatoverlap the fence1. Select the Manipulate Fence Contents tool.

2. Set Operation to Stretch.

The Stretch option ignores the Fence (Selection) Mode. Themode has no effect while the Stretch option is in use.

3. Enter a data point inside the fence to define the origin.

4. Enter a data point to reposition the fence and the affected vertices.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDelete Fence Contents

Manipulate FenceContents tool with

Operation set toStretch.

Key-in: FENCE ICON

The relative positions of cuts, breaks and partial deletions inmulti-lines are maintained during stretch and move operations.

To constrain the movement of vertices to multiples of an angle,use AccuDraw (see page 2-13) in conjunction with the Stretchoption for Manipulate Fence Contents.

Delete Fence Contents

Used to delete the fence contents, which are defined by the fenceand the Fence (Selection) Mode. See Specifying which elementsare in the fence contents on page 3-17.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Complex Status of Fence Contents

To delete the fence contents1. Select the Delete Fence Contents tool.

2. Accept the deletion.

Key-in: FENCE DELETE

Deleting the fence contents can be undone only up to thelimits of the undo buffer.

Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents

Used to break up the complex elements (cells, complex chains, complexshapes, text nodes, surfaces, and solids) in the fence contents into theircomponents. The elements can then be manipulated individually.

ToolSetting

Effect

Fence(Selec-tion)Mode

Sets how the fence contents are determined.See Specifying which elements are in thefence contents on page 3-17.

To drop the complex status of the fence contents1. Select the Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents tool.

2. Accept the drop.

Key-in: FENCE DROP COMPLEX

To selectively break up a specific complex element(s), use theDrop Complex Status tool (see page 3-79) .

The Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents tool cannot be used to


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsManipulate tool box

disassociate a B-spline curve from its control polygon.

Manipulate tool box

The tools in the Manipulate tool box are used to copy, move, resize,rotate, mirror, and create arrays of elements.

To Select in the Manipulatetool box

Copy or stretch an element(s).

Copy (see page 3-35)

Move or stretch an element(s).

Move (see page 3-38)

Move or copy an element withthe sides of the copy parallelto the original.

Move Parallel (see page 3-39)

Resize and stretch an element(s)by the active scale factors.

Scale (see page 3-41)

Rotate and stretch an element(s).

Rotate (see page 3-46)

Mirror an element(s).

Mirror (see page 3-51)


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsCopy

To Select in the Manipulatetool box

Align an element(s) to an edgeof another element.

Align Edges (see page 3-53)

Copy an element(s) many timesto create a rectangular or apolar (circular) array.

Construct Array (see page 3-55)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MANIPULATE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

To manipulate elements in an attached reference file, use reference filetools — see Working with attached reference design files on page 5-13.

Copy

Used to copy or stretch an element(s).

Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy If off, the window switches to theMove Element settings window.

Use Fence If on, the fence contents arecopied. The option menu sets theFence (Selection) Mode.

Stretch Cells If on, the fence contents arestretched, when Fence (Selection)Mode is Stretch.



To copy an element(s)1. Select the Copy tool.


3. Enter a data point to position the copy.

Alternative method — To copy an element(s)1. Select or fence the element(s).

2. Select the Copy tool.

3. Enter a data point to define the origin for the copy.

4. Enter a data point to position the copy.

Copy tool. Left,identifying an

element to copy.Right, copying the

fence contents withUse Fence on.

To stretch elements in a fence1. Using the Place Fence tool (see page 3-24) , place a fence

around an element or group of elements.

2. From the Manipulate tool box, select the Copy tool.

The Copy Element settings window opens.

3. From the Use Fence option menu, choose Stretch.

The Use Fence check box activates, and the StretchCells check box also activates.



4. Enter a data point inside the fence to define the origin.

5. Enter a data point to reposition the fence and the affected vertices.

Stretching elementsin a fence using theCopy Element tool,

Left: Example A,Right: Example B.Enter a data pointto define the origin

of the fence (1).Enter a data point

to reposition the andthe affected vertices

(2).

Key-in: COPY ICON

Key-in: FENCE COPY ELEMENT

To constrain the movement of copies to multiples of anangle, use AccuDraw in conjunction with the Copy tool(see AccuDraw on page 2-13).

To copy the fence contents to a new design file, see the procedurein Special fence manipulations (see page 3-21) .

You cannot stretch all vertices outside of the fence. Because Stretch istreated as a Fence Mode, you cannot combine Void and Stretch.

The Fence Stretch option works the same from both the Copy


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMove

Element and Move Element settings window.

Move

Used to move or stretch an element(s).

Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy If on, the window switches to theCopy Element settings window.

Use Fence If on, the fence contents aremoved. The option menu sets theFence (Selection) Mode.

Stretch Cells If on, the fence contents arestretched, when Fence (Selection)Mode is Stretch.

To move an element1. Select the Move tool (be sure Use Fence is off).


3. Enter a data point to reposition the element.

To move one or more selected elements1. Select the element(s).

2. Select the Move tool.

Be sure Use Fence is off.

3. Drag a selected element by any point on the elementexcept the handles.

All selected elements move.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMove Parallel

To move the fence contents1. Place a fence around the element(s).

2. Select the Move tool.

Be sure Use Fence is on.

3. Enter a data point to define the origin for the move.

4. Enter a data point to reposition the fence contents.

Move tool. Left,identifying an

element to move.Right, moving the

fence contents withUse Fence on.

Key-in: MOVE ICON

Key-in: FENCE MOVE ELEMENT

To constrain movement to multiples of an angle, use AccuDraw inconjunction with the Move tool (see AccuDraw on page 2-13).

To move the fence contents to a new design file, see the procedurein Special fence manipulations (see page 3-21) .

Move Parallel

Used to move or copy an element (line, line string, multi-line, curve, arc,ellipse, shape, complex chain, or complex shape) parallel to the original.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMove Parallel

Tool Setting Effect

Distance If on, sets the distance to move.

Make Copy If on, the element is copied and theoriginal is not manipulated.

To move or copy an element parallel to the original1. Select the Move Parallel tool.



Distance Defines

Off Distance and direction.

On Direction only.

Move Paralleltool. Above:

Definingdistance witha data point

(Distanceoff). Below:

Distanceis keyed in

(Distanceon). In

illustrations,Make Copy

is on.

Key-in: MOVE PARALLEL ICON

Key-in: COPY | MOVE PARALLEL DISTANCE | KEYIN

You can instead use the Move tool (see page 3-38) in conjunction


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsScale

with AccuDraw to constrain element movement.

Scale

Used to resize and stretch an element(s).

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method.

Active Scale—Scale by the activescale factors (X Scale, Y Scale, andZ Scale). If a scale factor is 0-1(for example, 0.25), size in thatdirection is decreased; if a scalefactor is greater than 1, size inthat direction is increased.

3 points—Scale graphically,through the entry of three datapoints. The scale factors arecomputed by dividing the distancebetween the first and third pointsby the distance between the firstand second points.

X Scale Scale factor along view x-axis(horizontal), when Method isActive Scale.

Y Scale Scale factor along view y-axis(vertical), when Method isActive Scale.

Z Scale (3D only) Scale factor along viewz-axis (depth), when Methodis Active Scale.



Tool Setting Effect

Proportional If on, the element(s) proportionsare maintained, when Methodis 3 points.

Make Copy If on, the element(s) are copiedand the copy(s) are scaled; theoriginal(s) are not manipulated.

Scale Multi-line Offsets

If on, multi-line offsets arescaled (for example, to scale wallthickness when resizing a room).

Use Fence If on, the fence contents arescaled. The option menu sets theFence (Selection) Mode.

Stretch Cells If on, the fence contents arescaled and stretched, when Fence(Selection) Mode is Stretch.

To scale an element(s) by the active scale factors1. Select or fence the element(s).

2. Select the Scale tool.

3. In the tool settings window, set Method to Active Scale.

4. Enter a data point to define the point about whichthe element(s) are scaled.

Alternative method — To scale an element(s)by the active scale factors1. Select the Scale tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Active Scale.


4. Enter a data point to define the point about whichthe element(s) are scaled.



Scale, with Methodset to Active Scale.

Illustrations show XScale = 2.0, Y Scale =

0.5, and Make Copyon.

To scale an element(s) graphically1. Select or fence the element(s).


3. In the tool settings window, set Method to 3 points.

4. Enter a data point to define the point to scale about.

5. Enter a data point to define a known location or keypoint.

6. Enter a data point to define scaling factors.

Alternative method — To scale an element(s)graphically1. Select the Scale tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to 3 points.


4. Enter a data point to define the point to scale about.





Scale, with Methodset to 3 points.

To scale and stretch elements in a fence1. Using the Place Fence tool (see page 3-24) , place a fence



The Scale settings window opens.



4. On the Method option menu, choose Active Scale andtype values in the X, Y (Z) fields.

5. Enter a data point to define the point about which



the element(s) are scaled.

The elements(s) are stretched by the Active Scale.

Scaling andstretching

elements ina fence using

the Scale tool.Enter a data

point (1) todefine the

point aboutwhich the

element(s) arescaled.

To graphically scale and stretch elementsin a fence1. Using the Place Fence tool (see page 3-24) , place a fence



The Scale settings window opens.



4. On the Method option menu, choose 3 points.

5. Enter a data point to define the point about which


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsRotate

the element(s) are scaled.



The element(s) are graphically scaled and stretched.

Enter a data point (1) to define the point about which the element(s)are scaled. Enter a data point (2) to define a reference point for thescaling. Enter a data point (3) to define the amount of scaling.

Key-in: SCALE ICON

Key-in: FENCE SCALE POINTS COPY | ORIGINAL

Rotate

Used to rotate and stretch an element(s).



Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method used to rotateand stretch an element.

Active Angle—the element(s)are rotated by the Active Angle,which can be keyed in.

2 Points—the angle of rotationis defined by entering twodata points.

3 points—the angle of rotation isdefined by three data points.

Make Copy If on, the element(s) are copiedand the copy(s) are rotated; theoriginal(s) are not manipulated.

Use Fence If on, the fence contents arerotated. The option menu setsthe Fence (Selection) Mode.

Stretch Cells If on, the fence contents arerotated and stretched, when Fence(Selection) Mode is Stretch.

To rotate an element(s)1. Select or fence the element(s).

2. Select the Rotate tool.

3. Enter a data point to define the pivot point.

If Method is set to Active Angle, the elements(s) are rotatedby the Active Angle; repeat to rotate the element(s) again.Otherwise, continue with step 4.

4. If Method is set to 2 Points, enter a data point to definethe angle of rotation graphically.orIf Method is set to 3 points, enter a data point todefine the start of rotation.

If Method is set to 2 Points, the element(s) are rotated; repeat to



rotate the element(s) again. Otherwise, continue with step 5.

5. Enter a data point to define the angle of rotation graphically.

Alternative method — To rotate an element(s)1. Select the Rotate tool.


3. Follow steps 3–5 above.

Rotate tool. Top:with Method set to 2Points. Middle: withMethod set to Active

Angle and ActiveAngle set to 30 .

Bottom: with Methodset to 3 points.



To rotate and stretch elements in a fence1. Using the Place Fence tool (see page 3-24) , place a fence



The Rotate settings window opens.



4. On the Method option menu, choose Active Angle andtype a value in the angle field.


The elements(s) are rotated and stretched by the Active Angle.

Rotating and stretching elements in a fence using the Rotatetool. Enter a data point (1) to define the pivot point aboutwhich the element(s) are rotated and stretched.

To graphically rotate and stretch elementsin a fence1. Using the Place Fence tool (see page 3-24) , place a fence





The Rotate settings window opens.



4. On the Method option menu, choose 2 Points.

(If you choose 3 Points, go to step 7).


6. Enter a data point to graphically define the angle of rotation.

Skip to step 10.

7. If Method is set to 3 Points, enter a data point todefine the pivot point.

8. Enter a data point to define the start of rotation.

9. Enter a data point to graphically define the angle of rotation.

10. The element(s) are graphically rotated and stretched; repeatto rotate and stretch the element(s) again.

Graphically rotatingand stretching

elements in a fence (2Points). Enter a datapoint (1) to define the

pivot point. Entera data point (2) tographically definethe rotation angle.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMirror

Graphically rotatingand stretching

elements in a fence (3Points). Enter a datapoint (1) to define the

pivot point. Entera data point (2) todefine the start ofrotation. Enter adata point (3) to

graphically definethe rotation angle.

Key-in: ROTATE ICON

Key-in: FENCE ROTATE | SPIN COPY | ORIGINAL| POINTS COPY | ORIGINAL

If Use Fence is on and the rotation is repeated, any element(s) insidethe moved fence are copied along with the original fence contents. Itis usually easier to use the Construct Array tool (see page 3-55) withArray Type set to Polar to make multiple rotated copies.

Mirror

Used to mirror an element(s).


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMirror

Tool Setting Effect

Mirror About Sets direction in which element(s)are mirrored:

Horizontal—about horizontal axis.

Vertical—about vertical axis.

Line—about line defined bytwo data points.

Make Copy If on, the element(s) are copiedand the copy(s) mirrored; theoriginal(s) are not manipulated.

Mirror Text If on, text is mirrored.

MirrorMulti-lineOffsets

If on, multi-line profile offsetsare mirrored.

Use Fence If on, the fence contents aremirrored. The option menu setsthe Fence (Selection) Mode.

To mirror an element(s)1. Select or fence the element(s).

2. Select the Mirror tool.


If Mirror About is set to Horizontal or Vertical, the element(s) aremirrored. You can repeat step 3 to mirror the element(s) again.

If Mirror About is set to Line, this data point definesone point on the mirroring line.

4. If Mirror About is set to Line, enter another data point todefine another point on the mirroring line.

The element(s) are mirrored. You can go back to step 3to mirror the element(s) again.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsAlign Edges

Alternative method — To mirror an element(s)1. Select the Mirror tool.


3. Follow steps 3 and 4 above.

Mirror tool.Clockwise from topleft: Mirror About

Horizontal, Vertical,and Line. Mirror

Text is on.

Key-in: MIRROR ICON

Key-in: FENCE MIRROR COPY | ORIGINAL HORIZONTAL| LINE | VERTICAL

Align Edges

Used to align an element(s) to an edge of another element.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsAlign Edges

Tool Setting Effect

Align Sets the manner by which to align:

Top

Bottom

Left

Right

Horiz(ontal) Center

Vert(ical) Center

Both Centers

Use Fence If on, the fence contents arealigned. The option menu setsthe Fence (Selection) Mode.

To align elements to another element1. Select or fence the elements to align.

2. Select the Align Edges tool.

3. Identify the base element to which to align the selected elements.

The selected elements are aligned to the edge of the base element.

4. Accept the alignment to the base element.

Alternative method — To align elementsto another element1. Select the Align Edges tool.

2. Identify the base element to which to align other elements.

The base element highlights, and a range block is


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsConstruct Array

displayed normal to the view.

3. Identify an element to align.

The identified element is aligned to the edge of the base element,which remains highlighted with the range block.

4. Continue identifying elements until all of the desiredelements are aligned to the base element.

5. Accept the last element’s alignment to the base element.

The base element remains highlighted with the range block.

6. Reset.

Key-in: ALIGNEDGE

Construct Array

Used to copy an element(s) many times to create an array.

Tool Setting Effect

Array Type Set the type of array that isconstructed; different tool settingsare available depending onhow this is set.

Rectangular—Construct aRectangular array

Polar—Construct a Polar(circular) array

Use Fence If on, the fence contents are copiedinto an array. The option menusets the Fence (Selection) Mode.

Active Angle (Rectangular array type) Alignsthe imaginary orthogonal grid onwhich the copies are placed.



Tool Setting Effect

Rows (Rectangular array type) Thenumber of rows.

Columns (Rectangular array type) Thenumber of columns.

Row Spacing (Rectangular array type) Thespace between rows.1

ColumnSpacing

(Rectangular array type) Thespace between columns.1

Items (Polar array type) Sets thenumber of items or copies ofthe fence contents in the array,including the original.

Delta Angle (Polar array type) Sets theangle between items.

• If positive, copies are placedcounterclockwise.

• If negative, copies areplaced clockwise.

Rotate Items (Polar array type) If on, theelement(s) are rotated about thecenter of the array.

1 Row and column spacing are measured from the lower left corner of a

linear element or the center of a circle or ellipse.

To create a rectangular array1. Select or fence the element(s).

The element(s) become the lower left items of the array.

2. Select the Construct Array tool.

3. In the tool settings window, set Array Type to Rectangular.

4. (Optional) — As needed, adjust other settings.

5. Accept the array.



Alternative method — To create arectangular array1. Select the Construct Array tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Array Type to Rectangular.


The element becomes the lower left element of the array.


Constructing arectangular array.

“D1” denotes the RowSpacing, “D2” theColumn Spacing,

and “AA” the ActiveAngle. Left and

center: Identifyingan element. Right:Copying the fencecontents with Use

Fence on.

To create a polar array1. Select or fence the element(s).

2. Select the Construct Array tool.

3. In the tool settings window, set Array Type to Polar.

4. Enter a data point to define the array’s center.



Alternative method — To create a polar array1. Select the Construct Array tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Array Type to Polar.

3. Identify the element to copy.

4. Enter a data point to define the array’s center.

The point at which the element is identified (step 3) is positionedin each copy on an imaginary circle.

Constructinga polar

array. Top:Identifyingan element.Number of

Items is 8 andDelta Angle is

45 . Bottom:Copying fencecontents (Use

Fence on).Number of

Items is 6 andDelta Angle

is 60 .

Key-in: ARRAY ICON

Key-in: FENCE ARRAY RECTANGULAR | POLAR

Array construction, especially with the fence contents, can be


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsChange Attributes tool box

undone only up to the limits of the undo buffer.

Change Attributes tool box

These tools in the Change Attributes tool box are used to changean element(s) to the active element attribute settings.

To Select in the ChangeAttributes tool box

Change an element(s) level, color,line style, line weight, or class.

Change Element Attributes(see page 3-61)

Change a closed element(s) to theactive area (Solid or Hole).

Change Element to ActiveArea (see page 3-62)

Change a closed element(s) tothe Active Fill Type.

Change Element to Active FillType (see page 3-63)

Interactively modify the linestyle attributes of an elementwith a custom line style.

Modify Line Style Attributes(see page 3-65)

Change a multi-line to the activemulti-line definition.

Change Multi-line to ActiveDefinition (see page 3-67)


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsChange Attributes tool box

To Select in the ChangeAttributes tool box

Set the active element attributesso they match those of anexisting element.

Match Element Attributes(see page 3-68)

Change all active elementattribute settings, includingthose specific to particularelement types, so they matchthe attributes of an elementin the design.

Match All Element Settings(Smart Match) (see page 3-69)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CHANGE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

These tools are used to change other element-specific attributes:

To change attributesfor

Use

B-spline curves

Change to Active Curve Settings (see page6-102) in the Modify Curves tool box.

B-spline surfaces

Change to Active Surface Settings(see page 7-172) in the ModifySurfaces tool box.

Dimension elements

Update Dimension in the Dimensiontool box.

Text elements

Change Text Attributes in theText tool box.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsChange Element Attributes

Change Element Attributes

Used to change selected attributes of an element(s). Tool settingsare used to specify the new attribute settings. The controls aresimilar to those in the Element Attributes dialog box (Element menu> Attributes) and, as do the controls in the Element Attributesdialog box, change the active element attributes.

Tool Setting Effect

Level Active Level (see page 1-3)

Color Active Color (see page 1-13)

Style Active Line Style (see page 1-17) (and anyactive line style modifiers)

Weight Active Line Weight (see page 1-15)

Class Active Class (see page 1-28) — Primaryor Construction

Use Fence If on, the selected attributes of the fencecontents are changed.

To change an element’s attributes (thosethat are set to On)1. Select or fence the element(s).

2. Select the Change Element Attributes tool.

3. Accept the change.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsChange Element to Active Area

Alternative method — To change an element’sattributes (those that are set to On)1. Select the Change Element Attributes tool.



Key-in: CHANGE ICON

Key-in: FENCE CHANGE �CLASS | COLOR | LEVEL| STYLE | WEIGHT�

To change the Active Color (see page 1-13) , Active Line Style(see page 1-17) , or Active Line Weight (see page 1-15) and thecorresponding attribute of the selected element(s) in one step,use the controls in the Primary Tools tool box.

To set the active element attributes so they match those of an elementin the design, use the Match Element Attributes tool (see page 3-68) .

Change Element to Active Area

Used to change the area attribute of a closed element(s) (shapes,ellipses, complex shapes, or B-spline curves) to the Active Area.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsChange Element to Active Fill Type

Tool Setting Effect

Area Sets the Active Area.

• If Solid, element’s Areaattribute is changedto Solid.

• If Hole, element’s Areaattribute is changed to Hole.

To change an element to the active area1. Select the closed element(s).

2. Select the Change Element to Active Area tool.

Alternative method — To change an elementto the active area1. Select the Change Element to Active Area tool.

2. Identify the closed element.


Key-in: CHANGE AREA

To associate a solid element with a set of holes, use the GroupHoles tool (see page 6-22) in the Groups tool box.

It is not possible to pattern an element with the area attribute of Hole.

Change Element to Active Fill Type

Used to change a closed element (shape, ellipse, complex shape,or B-spline curve) to the Active Fill Type.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsChange Element to Active Fill Type

Tool Setting Effect

Fill Type Active Fill (see page 1-26) Type— None (no fill), Opaque (filledwith Active Color (see page1-13) ), or Outlined.

Fill Color Sets color with which theelement(s) are filled.

• If Fill Type is Opaque, theelement(s) are filled withthe Active Color, whichis also the color of theelement’s outline.

• If Fill Type is Outlined,the element(s) can be filledwith a color that is differentfrom the Active Color.

To change an element to the Active Fill Type1. Select the closed element(s).

2. Select the Change Element to Active Fill Type tool.

Alternative method — To change an elementto the Active Fill Type1. Select the Change Element to Active Fill Type tool.

2. Identify the closed element.


Key-in: CHANGE FILL

To display fill in a view, turn on Fill (see page 1-26) for theview in the View Attributes dialog box (opened by choosingView Attributes from the Settings menu).

These key-ins let you change a single color attribute:


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsModify Line Style Attributes

To change Key in

An element’s outline tothe Active Color (seepage 1-13) .

CHANGE COLOR OUTLINE

A filled element’s fill tothe Active Fill Color.

CHANGE COLOR FILL

Modify Line Style Attributes

Used to interactively modify the line style attributes of anelement with a custom line style. The tool setting Methoddetermines the type of modification.

Method Used to modify

Width The starting, or Origin, width and the Endwidth of an element.

Start Width The starting, or Origin, width of an element.

End Width The End width of an element.

Scale The Scale Factor applied to strokes.

Dash Scale The Scale Factor applied to variable lengthdash strokes.

Gap Scale Scale Factor applied to variable length gap strokes.

Shift The Shift distance by which the stroke patternis shifted relative to the beginning of anelement or its segments.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsCHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE

To modify an element’s line style attributes1. Select the Modify Line Style Attributes tool.


The movement of the pointer shows the direction and extent of thechange that will occur upon entry of the next data point.


Key-in: MODIFY LINESTYLE ICON

Key-in: MODIFY LINESTYLE �DASHSCALE | ENDWIDTH |GAPSCALE | SCALE | SHIFT | STARTWIDTH | WIDTH�

CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE

The CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE key-in is used to scale anelement’s (custom) line style by a specific factor — for example,CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE 2.0. The specified scale factor has thesame effect as the Scale Factor setting in the Line Styles dialog box.If you do not specify a factor, a factor of 1.0 is assumed.

To scale an element’s (custom) line styleby a specific factor1. Select the element(s).

2. Key in CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE [scale_factor].

Alternative method — To scale an element’s(custom) line style by a specific factor1. Key in CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE [scale_factor].




Manipulating and Modifying ElementsChange Multi-line to Active Definition

To scale the (custom) line style of elementscontained in the fence by a specific factor1. Place the fence and set the Fence (Selection) mode appropriately.

2. Key in CHANGE LINESTYLE SCALE [scale_factor].

3. Accept the fence contents.

Change Multi-line to Active Definition

Used to change a multi-line’s attributes to the active multi-linedefinition, which can be set as follows:

• In the Multi-lines dialog box (opened by choosing Multi-linesfrom the Element menu).

• Select a Multi-line settings group component in the Select Settingswindow (opened by choosing Manage from the Settings menu).

To change a multi-line to the activemulti-line definition1. Select the multi-line(s).

2. Select the Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool.

Alternative method — To change a multi-lineto the active multi-line definition1. Select the Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool.

2. Identify the multi-line.


Key-in: CHANGE MLINE


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMatch Element Attributes

The active multi-line definition can be set to match a multi-line elementwith the Match All Element Settings (SmartMatch) tool (see page 3-69) .

Match Element Attributes

Used to change the active element attribute settings so they matchthe attributes of an element in the design.

Tool Setting Effect

Level Active Level (see page 1-3)

Color Active Color (see page 1-13)

Style Active Line Style (see page 1-17)

Weight Active Line Weight (see page 1-15)

To match an element’s attributes (thosethat are on)1. Select the element.

2. Select the Match Element Attributes tool.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsSmartMatch

Alternative method — To match an element’sattributes (those that are on)1. Select the Match Element Attributes tool.


3. Accept the new active element attributes.

Key-in: MATCH ICON

Key-in: MATCH COLOR | LEVEL | STYLE | WEIGHT

To match all element attribute settings, including those that arespecific to an element type such as dimension or text, use the MatchAll Element Settings (SmartMatch) tool (see page 3-69) .

To change the color, line style, line weight, or level of anelement(s) to the active element attributes, use the ChangeElement Attributes tool (see page 3-61) .

SmartMatch

Used to change all active element attribute settings, including thosespecific to particular element types, so they match the attributesof an element in the design. When a cell is matched, the activescale factors and Active Cell are also matched.

To match an element’s attributes1. Select the element.

2. Select the SmartMatch tool.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMatch tool box

Alternative method — To match anelement’s attributes1. Select the SmartMatch tool.


3. Accept the new active settings.

Key-in: MATCH ELEMENT

To change the color, line style, line weight, or level of anelement(s) to the active element attributes, use the ChangeElement Attributes tool (see page 3-61) .

Match tool box

The tools in the Match tool box are used to set element attributesettings to those of an element in the design (or a reference file), makingit easy to place elements with the same attributes as existing elements.

To Select in the Match tool box

Change all active elementattribute settings, includingthose specific to particularelement types, so they matchthe attributes of an elementin the design.

Match All Element Settings(SmartMatch) (see page 3-69) 1

Set the active element attributesso they match those of anexisting element.

Match Element Attributes(see page 3-68) 1

Set the active text settingsthe same as the correspondingattributes of text in the design.

Match Text Attributes (seepage 3-72) 2


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMatch tool box

To Select in the Match tool box

Set the active multi-linedefinition to the definition ofa multi-line element.

Match Multi-line Definition(see page 3-73)

Set the active dimension settingsto the dimension attributes ofa dimension element.

Match Dimension Settings(see page 3-74)

Set the active pattern settingsto match the attributes of apattern element.

Match Pattern Attributes(see page 4-52) 3

Match the active B-spline curvesettings to the attributes ofa B-spline curve.

Match Curve Settings (seepage 3-75)

Match the active B-spline surfacesettings to the attributes ofa B-spline surface.

Match Surface Settings (seepage 3-76)

1 Also in the Change Attributes tool box.

2 Also in the Text tool box.

3 Also in the Patterns tool box.

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MATCH OFF | ON | TOGGLE


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMatch Text Attributes

Match Text Attributes

Used to set the active text settings (Size, Justification, Font,Line Spacing, Line Length, Underline, Vertical Text, Slant,and Intercharacter Spacing) the same as the correspondingattributes of text in the design.

To set the active text settings to thoseof existing text1. Select one text element.

2. Select the Match Text Attributes tool.orIn the Text dialog box, click the Match button.

Alternative method — To set the active textsettings to those of existing text1. Select the Match Text Attributes tool.

orIn the Text dialog box, click the Match button.

2. Identify the text element.

Key-in: ACTIVE TEXT

The active text settings are set in the Text dialog box


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMatch Multi-line Definition

(Element menu >Text).

Match Multi-line Definition

Used to set the active multi-line definition (all settings that can be setin the Multi-linesdialog box) to the definition of a multi-line element.

To match the active multi-line definition1. Select the multi-line element.

2. Select the Match Multi-line Definition tool.

Alternative method — To match the activemulti-line definition1. Select the Match Multi-line Definition tool.

2. Identify the multi-line element.

3. Accept the new active multi-line definition.

Key-in: MATCH MLINE

To change a multi-line to the active multi-line definition, usethe Change Multi-line to Active Definition tool (see page 3-67)


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMatch Dimension Settings

in the Change Attributes tool box.

Match Dimension Settings

Used to set the active dimension settings to the dimensionattributes of a dimension element.

To match dimension settings1. Select the dimension element.

2. Select the Match Dimension Settings tool.

Alternative method — To match dimensionsettings1. Select the Match Dimension Settings tool.

2. Identify the dimension element.

3. Accept the new active dimension settings.

Key-in: MATCH DIMENSION

To change a dimension to the active dimension attributes, use the


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMatch Curve Settings

Update Dimension tool in the Dimension tool box.

Match Curve Settings

Used to change the active B-spline curve settings to the B-splineattributes of a B-spline curve in the design.

Tool Setting Effect

Polygon If on, whether the curve’s controlpolygon is displayed is matched.

Invisible—the control polygonis not displayed.

Visible—the control polygonis displayed.

Curve If on, whether the curve isdisplayed is matched:

Invisible—the curve is notdisplayed.

Visible—the curve is displayed.

Closure If on, whether the B-spline isOpen or Closed is matched.

Order If on, the order of the identifiedcurve is matched.

To match the active curve settings1. Select the B-spline curve.

2. Select the Match Curve Settings tool.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsMatch Surface Settings

Alternative method — To match the activecurve settings1. Select the Match Curve Settings tool.

2. Identify the B-spline curve.

3. Accept the new active B-spline curve settings.

Key-in: MATCH CURVE

To change a B-spline curve to the active B-spline attributes,use the Change to Active Curve Settings tool (see page 6-102)in the Modify Curves tool box.

Match Surface Settings

Used to change the active B-spline surface settings to theattributes of a B-spline surface in the design.

Tool Setting Effect

Polygon If on, whether the surface’s controlpolygon is displayed is matched.

Invisible—the control polygonis not displayed.

Visible—the control polygonis displayed.

Curve If on, whether the surface isdisplayed is matched:

Invisible—the surface is notdisplayed.

Visible—the surface is displayed.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop tool box

Tool Setting Effect

Closure If on in the U or V direction,whether the surface is Open orClosed in that direction is matched.

Order If on in the U or V direction, theorder of the identified surface inthat direction is matched.

Rules If on in the U or V direction,the number of rule lines in thatdirection is matched.

To match the active surface settings1. Select the B-spline surface.

2. Select the Match Surface Settings tool.

Alternative method — To match the activesurface settings1. Select the Match Surface Settings tool.

2. Identify the B-spline surface.

3. Accept the new active B-spline surface settings.

Key-in: MATCH SURFACE

To change a B-spline surface to the active B-spline surfaceattributes, use the Change to Active Surface Settings tool (seepage 7-172) in the Modify Surfaces tool box.

Drop tool box

The tools in the Drop tool box are used to break up complexelements into simpler components, and to remove associationpoints between elements.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop tool box

To Select in the Droptool box

Break up a complex element(s) oran element(s) of a special type intosimpler components.

Drop Element (seepage 6-9) 1

Break up a complex element intoits components.

Drop ComplexStatus (see page3-79)

Convert a line string or shape to aseries of individual line elements.

Drop LineString/ShapeStatus (see page3-80)

Convert the text characters in a textelement to the individual elements thatare used to draw the characters.

Drop Text (seepage 3-81)

Discontinue an association between ashared cell, dimension witness line, ormulti-line and another element.

Drop Association(see page 3-82)

Remove (drop) an element(s) froma graphic group.orBreak up a graphic group intoindividual elements.

Drop from GraphicGroup (see page6-21) 1

Convert an element with a customline style to an identically appearinggroup of primitive elements withstandard line styles. Drop Line Style (see

page 3-83)


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Complex Status

To Select in the Droptool box

Convert any associative pattern (orhatch) into an identically appearinggroup of primitive elements.

Drop AssociativePattern (see page3-84)

Convert a multi-line to a set of linestrings, lines, and/or arcs.

Drop Multi-line (seepage 3-85)

Break up a dimension element(s)into their components.

Drop DimensionElement (see page3-86)

1 also in the Groups tool box.

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX DROP OFF | ON | TOGGLE

The Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) is a general droppingtool. It incorporates the capabilities of several of the morespecialized tools in the tool box.

Drop Complex Status

Used to break up a complex element (cell, complex chain, complexshape, text node, surface, or solid) into its components. Thecomponents can then be manipulated individually.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Line String/Shape Status

To break up a complex element intoits components1. Select the complex element(s).

2. Select the Drop Complex Status tool.

The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not complexelements. If none of the selected elements is a complex element,the message “Nothing to drop” is displayed in the status bar.

Alternative method — To break up a complexelement into its components1. Select the Drop Complex Status tool.

2. Identify the complex element.

3. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP COMPLEX

The Drop Complex Status tool cannot be used to disassociatea B-spline curve from its control polygon.

To quickly break up many complex elements, place the fence and usethe Drop Complex Status of Fence Contents tool (see page 3-33) .

Drop Line String/Shape Status

Used to convert a line string or shape to a series ofindividual line elements.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Text

To convert a line string or shape toindividual line elements1. Select the line string(s) or shape(s).

2. Select the Drop Line String/Shape Status tool.

The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not line stringsor shapes. If none of the selected elements is a line string or shape,the message “Nothing to drop” is displayed in the status bar.

Alternative method — To convert a line stringor shape to individual line elements1. Select the Drop Line String/Shape Status tool.

2. Identify the line string or shape.

3. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP STRING

Drop Text

Used to convert the text characters in a text element to theindividual elements that are used to draw the characters —lines, line strings, arcs, ellipses, and shapes.

To convert text to individual elements1. Select the text element(s).

2. Select the Drop Text tool.

The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not textelements. If none of the selected elements is a text element, themessage “Nothing to drop” is displayed in the status bar.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Association

Alternative method — To convert text toindividual elements1. Select the Drop Text tool.

2. Identify the text element.

3. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP TEXT

To break up a multi-line text element (text node), first use the DropComplex Status tool (see page 3-79) to break it up into individual textelements and then use the Drop Text tool on each of the text elements.

Drop Association

Used to discontinue an association point between a shared cell origin,dimension extension line vertex, or multi-line vertex and anotherelement. The association point is converted to a non-associativeorigin or vertex with its own x-, y-, and (in 3D) z- coordinates. It isthen independent of the other element. For more information aboutassociation points, see Associating Elements on page 6-46.

To discontinue an association1. Select the Drop Association tool.

2. Identify the association point.

3. Accept the drop.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Line Style

To discontinue all association points onan element(s)1. Select the element(s).

2. Select the Drop Association tool.

3. Accept the drop.

To discontinue all associations in thefence contents1. Key in FENCE DROP ASSOCIATION.

2. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP ASSOCIATION

Drop Line Style

Used to convert any element with a custom line style to an identicallyappearing group of primitive elements with standard line styles. Dashstrokes are converted to line or line string elements. Point symbols areconverted to primitive elements but not dropped to individual vectors.

To drop an element with a custom line style1. Select the element.

2. Select the Drop Line Style tool.

3. Accept the drop.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Associative Pattern

Alternative method — To drop an elementwith a custom line style1. Select the Drop Line Style tool.


3. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP LINESTYLE

Drop Associative Pattern

Used to convert any associative patterning or hatching intoprimitive elements that are no longer associated with theoriginal patterned element. For information about patterning,see “Hatching and Patterning” on page 4-26.

To drop an associative pattern or hatching1. Select the patterned element.

2. Select the Drop Associative Pattern tool.

3. Accept the drop.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Multi-line

Alternative method — To drop an associativepattern or hatching1. Select the Drop Associative Pattern tool.

2. Identify the patterned element.

3. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP PATTERN

Drop Multi-line

Used to convert a multi-line element to a set of linestrings, lines, and/or arcs.

To convert a multi-line to its components1. Select the multi-line(s).

2. Select the Drop Multi-line tool.

The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not multi-lines.If none of the selected elements is a multi-line, the message“Nothing to drop” is displayed in the status bar.

Alternative method — To convert a multi-lineto its components1. Select the Drop Multi-line tool.


3. Accept the drop.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDrop Dimension Element

To drop multi-line elements in the fence contents1. Key in FENCE DROP MLINE.

2. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP MLINE

To temporarily convert a multi-line element(s) into a form thatcan be displayed by pre-4.0 versions of MicroStation and byIGDS, use the FREEZE or FENCE FREEZE key-in. “Frozen”multi-line elements can be converted back to multi-line elementsusing the THAW or FENCE THAW key-in.

Drop Dimension Element

Used to break up a dimension element(s) into lines, linestrings, ellipses, arcs, and text.

To break up a dimension element1. Select the dimension element(s).

2. Select the Drop Dimension Element tool.

The tool has no effect on selected elements that are not dimensionelements. If none of the selected elements is a dimension element,the message “Nothing to drop” is displayed in the status bar.

Alternative method — To break up adimension element1. Select the Drop Dimension Element tool.

2. Identify the dimension element.

3. Accept the drop.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsModify tool box

To break up dimension elements in thefence contents1. Key in FENCE DROP DIMENSION.

2. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP DIMENSION

To temporarily convert a dimension element(s) into a form thatcan be displayed by pre-4.0 versions of MicroStation and byIGDS, use the FREEZE or FENCE FREEZE key-in. “Frozen”dimension elements can be converted back to dimension elementsusing the THAW or FENCE THAW key-in.

Modify tool box

The tools in the Modify tool box are used to modify element geometry.

To Select in the Modify tool box

Move a vertex of alinear element.orModify roundedsegments of complexchains and complexshapes.orChange roundedsegments of complexchains and complexshapes to verticesand vice-versa.orScale a circular arcwhile maintainingits sweep angle.or

Modify Element (see page 3-89)


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsModify tool box


Move dimension text.orChange dimensionextension line length.orScale a block aboutthe opposite vertex.orChange a circle’sradius or the length ofone axis of an ellipse.

Delete part of anelement.

Delete Part of Element (seepage 3-100)

Extend or shortena line.

Extend Line (see page 3-101)

Extend or shortentwo open elements totheir intersection.

Extend Two Elements to Intersection(see page 3-102)

Extend or shortenan open element toits intersection withanother element. Extend Element to Intersection

(see page 3-103)

Trim a series ofelements at theirintersection withone or more otherelements.

Trim Element (see page 3-104)


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsModify Element


Simultaneously trimor extend multipleelements at theirintersection withone or more otherelements.

IntelliTrim (see page 3-105)

Insert a vertex in alinear element.

Insert Vertex (see page 3-110)

Delete a vertex froma linear element.

Delete Vertex (see page 3-112)

Construct a circularfillet between twoelements.

Construct Circular Fillet (seepage 3-113) 1

Construct a chamferbetween two lines oradjacent segments ofa line string or shape. Construct Chamfer (see page 3-115) 2

1 Also located in the Fillets tool box

2 Also located in the Fillets tool box

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX MODIFY OFF | ON | TOGGLE

To create and “clean up” multi-line intersections, use the tools inthe Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30) .

Modify Element



Used to do the following:

• Move a vertex or segment of a line, line string, multi-line, curve,B-spline control polygon, shape, complex chain, or complex shape.

• Scale a block about the opposite vertex.

• Modify rounded segments of complex chains and complexshapes created with the Place SmartLine tool (see page6-80) while preserving their tangency.

• Change rounded segments of complex chains and complexshapes to sharp and vice-versa.

• Scale a circular arc while maintaining its sweep angle.

• Change a circle’s radius or the length of one axis of an ellipse.

• Move dimension text or modify the extension line lengthof a dimension element.

When used with AccuDraw (see page 2-13) , the ModifyElement tool becomes even more powerful. The proceduresthat follow detail the interaction of AccuDraw and the ModifyElement tool on various element types.

Elements with multiple segments are line strings, shapes, and complexchains and complex shapes placed with the Place SmartLine tool (seepage 6-80) . When used with AccuDraw, the Modify Element tool notonly affords you the capability to modify vertices and segments, butalso to change a vertex’s type (Sharp, Rounded, or Chamfered).

Tool Setting Effect

Vertex Type Sets the vertex type.

• Sharp

• Rounded

• Chamfered

RoundRadius

(with Vertex Type set to Rounded) If on,sets the arc radius for a rounded vertex.

ChamferOffset

(with Vertex Type set to Chamfered)Sets the two distances required to definea chamfer. Chamfer Offset requires thatthe two chamfer distances be equal (froma theoretical intersection of a midpoint).



Tool Setting Effect

Orthogonal If an orthogonal vertex is identified,preserves the orthogonality.

EnableSmartLinemodifica-tions

If off, turns off the “smart” behavior,which may be desirable, especially whenthe element has a very high number ofvertices (thousands) causing the tool toslow down considerably. (Note: turningoff this setting causes the other optionsto be disabled, as they only apply toSmartLine style modifications.)

Enablesegmentselection

If off, only allows element modificationby individual vertices.

Minimizenumberof linearelements

If off, no longer tries to reduce thenumber of component elements ina complex chain or shape (linesthat can become “compacted” intolinestrings, etc.).

Convertselectedround orchamfer tosegment

If on, when selecting a roundedor chamfered vertex, converts thecomponent to a segment (arc or linearsegment) so that it can be modified assuch. This only applies to the selectedround or chamfer, not to the wholechain or shape. After completingthe modification, the componentwill thereafter not be treated as around or chamfer again.

VertexSettings:FromElement/LastUsed

Choose:

From Element—to use the element’sown settings.

Last Used—to no longer use theelement’s settings.



To modify an element1. Select the Modify Element tool.

2. Identify the element close to the vertex, segment, or axis to modify.

3. Enter a data point to make the modification.

Modify Element.Clockwise from top

left: moving theendpoint of a line,

moving a vertexof a line string,

modifying dimensionextension line length,

moving a vertex ofa B-spline controlpolygon, scaling a

block, and changingthe radius of a circle.

To modify the endpoint of a line1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.

2. Enter a data point to identify the end of the line.

The drawing plane origin moves to the opposite end of the line, andthe coordinate system aligns its x-axis with the line. Additionally,the length of the line is displayed in the AccuDraw window.

3. (Optional) — Rotate the drawing plane axes.

4. (Optional) — Preview the modifications by keying in desiredchanges in the AccuDraw window.

5. Enter a data point to complete the modification.



To modify a circle1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.

2. Identify the circle.

The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the circle.In addition, the coordinate system switches to Polar,and aligns with the view axes.


4. (Optional) — Preview the modifications by keying in a radius valuein the AccuDraw window. (When modifying a circle, any valuekeyed in the AccuDraw window defines a new radius.)


To modify an ellipse1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.

2. Identify the ellipse by entering a data point near the axis to modify.

The drawing plane origin moves to the center of theellipse, and the coordinate system aligns its x-axis withthe primary axis of the ellipse.




To modify the sweep angle of an arc1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.


3. From the Method option menu in the tool settingswindow, choose Angle.

The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the arc, and the



coordinate system aligns its x-axis with the start of the arc’s sweep.




Modifying the sweepangle of an arc

You can adjust the arc sweep by either complement ofthe angle (180 either way).

To modify the radius of an arc withoutchanging its center point1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.


3. From the Method option menu in the tool settings window,choose Radius About Center.

The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the arc, andthe coordinate system aligns with the view axes.


5. (Optional) — Preview the modifications by keying in a radius valuein the AccuDraw window. (When modifying an arc, any valuekeyed in the AccuDraw window defines a new radius.)




Modifying the radiusof an arc without

changing its centerpoint.

To modify the radius of an arc withoutchanging its endpoints1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.


3. From the Method option menu in the tool settings window,choose Radius Preserve Ends.

The drawing plane origin moves to the center of the arc, andthe coordinate system aligns with the view axes.


5. (Optional) — Preview the modifications by keying in aradius value in the AccuDraw window.


Modifying theradius of an arc

without changing itsendpoints.



To modify a vertex of a multi-segment element1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.

2. Identify the element by entering a data point nearthe vertex to modify.

The drawing plane origin moves to the vertex, and thecoordinate system aligns with the view axes.




Above: Modifyinga chamfered vertex.

Below: Modifying thevertex of a Linear

segment and an Arcsegment.

To modify a Linear segment of a multi-segmentelement1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.

2. Identify the element by entering a data point near



the segment’s midpoint.

The drawing plane origin moves to the identification point, andthe coordinate system aligns its x-axis with the segment.




To modify an Arc segment of a multi-segmentelement1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.

2. Identify the element by entering a data point nearthe segment’s midpoint.

The drawing plane origin moves to the identification point.



Modifying an Arcsegment



To move a Linear segment parallel to itself1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.

2. Identify the element by entering a data point nearthe segment’s midpoint.

The drawing plane origin moves to the identification point, andthe coordinate system aligns its x-axis with the segment.

3. Position the pointer on the drawing plane’s y-axis.

4. Press the �Return� key.

The movement of the segment is constrained parallelto its current location.


To modify the vertex of orthogonal segments1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.


The drawing plane origin moves to the vertex, and thecoordinate system aligns with the segments.




To change a vertex’s type1. With AccuDraw active, select the Modify Element tool.


The drawing plane origin moves to the vertex. If thevertex is contained within a right angle, the coordinatesystem aligns with the right angle.

3. From the Vertex Type option menu in the tool settings window,



choose the desired type — Sharp, Rounded, or Chamfered.

4. If changing Vertex Type to Rounded, key in the desiredrounding radius, in working units (MU:SU:PU) in the toolsettings window’s Rounding Radius field.

5. If changing Vertex Type to Chamfered, key in the desiredchamfer offset, in working units (MU:SU:PU) in the toolsettings window’s Chamfer Offset field.

6. To maintain the vertex in its original location — that is, to justchange its type — enter a data point at the drawing plane origin.orTo otherwise modify the vertex, follow steps 3-5 in the procedureTo modify a vertex of a multi-segment element on page 3-96.

Key-in: MODIFY ELEMENT

You can modify a line, line string, multi-line, arc, circle, ellipse,curve, shape, text, or complex element by dragging its handleswhen selected (see To scale or modify a selected element onpage 3-12 for more information).

To choose SmartLine Modification Settings, click the arrow in thebottom right corner of the tool settings window.

Tool settings cannot be enabled unless AccuDraw is enabled.

Arc axes cannot be modified with the Modify Element tool. Instead,


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDelete Part of Element

use the Modify Arc Axis tool (see page 1-81) .

Delete Part of Element

Used to delete part of an element.

• A closed element is turned into an open element — an ellipse orcircle becomes an arc; a shape becomes a line string; a closedB-spline curve becomes an open B-spline curve.

• If an interior portion of an open element — line, line string,multi-line, curve, or arc — is partially deleted, the element isdivided into two elements of the same type.

To delete part of an element1. Select the Delete Part of Element tool.

2. Identify the element at one end of the part to delete.

3. For an open element, enter a data point to define theother end of the part to delete.orFor a closed element, enter a data point to define the directionin which to delete. Then enter another data point to definethe other end of the part to delete.

Delete Part ofElement


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsExtend Line

Key-in: DELETE PARTIAL

To delete part of a multi-line, use the Multi-line Partial Delete tool (seepage 6-42) in the Multi-line Joints tool box. To make an openingin a multi-line without dividing the multi-line into two elements,use the Cut All Component Lines tool (see page 6-36) .

Extend Line

Used to extend or shorten a line or an end segment of aline string or multi-line.

Tool Setting Effect

Distance If on, sets the distance.

• A negative distanceshortens the line.

• A positive distance extendsthe line.

To extend or shorten a line by entering a data point1. Select the Extend Line tool.

2. Identify the line near the endpoint to modify.

3. If Distance is on, accept the modification.orIf Distance is off, enter a data point to define the new endpoint.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsExtend Two Elements to Intersection

Extend Line tool.Top: Defining

the new endpointgraphically when

Distance is off.Bottom: Defining the

new endpoint whenDistance is on. If the

Distance, denotedby “D,” is negative,

the line is shortened.If the Distance is

positive, the line islengthened.

Key-in: EXTEND LINE DISTANCE | KEYIN

To extend an arc, use the Element Selection tool (see page 3-3)or the Modify Element tool (see page 3-89) .

Extend Two Elements to Intersection

Used to extend or shorten two lines, line strings, or arcsto their intersection.

To extend two elements to their intersection1. Select the Extend Two Elements to Intersection tool.



4. Accept the modification.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsExtend Element to Intersection

Extend Two Elementsto Intersection tool.Left: Lengtheningtwo lines. Right:

Lengthening an arcand shortening a

line.

Key-in: EXTEND ELEMENT 2

When an element is shortened, the part of the element that isidentified is kept. No modification is made if the identified elementscannot be extended so that they intersect.

To extend two multi-lines to their common intersection, use a toolin the Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30) .

Extend Element to Intersection

Used to extend or shorten a line, line string, or arc to itsintersection with another element.

To extend an element to its intersectionwith another element1. Select the Extend Element to Intersection tool.

2. Identify the element to extend or shorten.

3. Identify the element to which the first element willbe extended or shortened.



Manipulating and Modifying ElementsTrim Element

Extend Element toIntersection

Key-in: EXTEND ELEMENT INTERSECTION

Trim Element

Used to trim or cut an element or series of elements at theirintersection with one or more cutting elements. The cutting elementand the element that is trimmed can be lines, line strings, arcs, curves,B-spline curves, shapes, ellipses, complex chains, or complex shapes.

To trim an element(s)1. Use the Element Selection tool to select a cutting element(s).

2. Select the Trim Element tool.

3. Identify an element to trim.

The element is highlighted and how it will be trimmedis dynamically displayed.

4. Accept the trimmed element.

5. Go back to step 4 to identify another element to trim.orReset to finish.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsIntelliTrim

Alternative method — To trim an element(s)1. Select the Trim Element tool.

2. Identify the cutting element.


Trim Element tool.The cutting elements

are indicated byhandles.

Key-in: TRIM

To “clean up” intersections between multi-lines, use the tools inthe Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30) .

IntelliTrim

Used to simultaneously trim, extend or cut multiple elements.



The cutting elements or elements to which you can extend otherelements are lines, line strings, ellipses, arcs, curves, shapes, complexstrings, complex shapes, text nodes, and cell headers.

Elements that can be cut or trimmed are lines, line strings, curves, arcs,ellipses, shapes, B-spline curves, complex strings, and complex shapes.

The only elements that can be extended are lines, line strings, complexchains that end with a line or line string, and b-spline curves.

Tool Setting Effect

Quick Mode Operation:

Trim—If on, elements are trimmed.

Extend—If on, elements are extended.

Cut—If on, elements are cut. (You willnot actually see where the elementwas cut until you select it.)

AdvancedMode

Operation:

Toggling between Trim and Extend inAdvanced Mode causes all intersectionsand extension points to be recalculatedand displayed.

Trim—If on, elements are trimmed.

Extend—If on, elements are extended.

Cut—Dimmed if Advanced is selected.

SelectElements toTrim

If selected, each element that isidentified is designated as an elementto trim (or extend).



Tool Setting Effect

SelectCuttingElements

If selected, each element thatis identified is designated as acutting element.

Selection Set Designates selected elements,by default, as:

• Elements to Trim

• Cutting Elements

To trim (or extend) multiple elements1. Select the elements to trim or the cutting elements.

2. Select the IntelliTrim tool.

If the tool setting Selection Set is set to Elements to Trim,the selected elements are highlighted.

If Selection Set is set to Cutting Elements, the selectedelements are highlighted and dashed.

3. If the selected elements are the elements to trim,identify each cutting element.orIf the selected elements are the cutting elements,identify each element to trim.

All potential cutting points are shown as small dots.

4. When done identifying elements, Reset.

The proposed results of the operation are displayed. Thetrimmable elements remain highlighted to indicate thetentative nature of the display.

5. If the results are satisfactory, Reset to accept them.



Otherwise, continue with step 6.

6. For each element whose trim or extension result is not as youdesire, enter a data point on the element on or near the part ofthe element you wish to keep. When entering these guide points,you need not be concerned about “inside” and “outside” (becausethe cutting elements do not have to be connected or closed).

For each element to trim, the series of entered guide pointsis evaluated and the part of the element that is closest tothe closest guide point is kept. Every time the elementcrosses a cutting element, it is cut.

7. When done modifying the results, Reset.

Alternative method — To trim (or extend)multiple elements1. Select the IntelliTrim tool.

2. Identify each element to trim.


4. Identify each cutting element.


The proposed results of the operation are displayed. Thetrimmable elements remain highlighted to indicate thetentative nature of the display.

6. If the results are satisfactory, Reset to accept them.Otherwise, continue with step 7.

7. For each element whose trim or extension result is not as youdesire, enter a data point on the element on or near the part ofthe element you wish to keep. When entering these guide pointsyou need not be concerned about “inside” and “outside” (becausethe cutting elements do not have to be connected or closed).

For each element to trim, the series of entered guide pointsis evaluated and the part of the element that is closest tothe closest guide point is kept. Every time the elementcrosses a cutting element, it is cut.

8. When done modifying the results, Reset.



Trimming multiple elements. TopLeft: Identify the elements to be

trimmed (points 1-4), with a Resetto finish. Top Right: Identify

the cutting elements (points 5-6),with a Reset to finish. Proposed

cutting points appear as smalldots. Bottom Left: Reset to displaythe proposed result. Bottom Right:Reverse the result of any incorrectcuts by entering a data point near

the part of the element that youwish to keep (point 7). Reset to

finish.

Extending multiple elements. TopLeft: Identify the elements to be

extended (points 1-5), with a Resetto finish. Top Right: Identify

the cutting elements (points 6-8),with a Reset to finish. Proposed

cutting points appear as smalldots. Bottom: Reset to display the

proposed result. A further Resetcompletes the operation.

Key-in: TRIM MULTI


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsInsert Vertex

At any point while designating elements, you can switch betweenidentifying elements to trim and identifying cutting elements byselecting the appropriate radio button in the tool settings window.If the focus is on one of the radio buttons, you can select theother simply by pressing �space bar� or Reset.

To change an element from an element to trim to a cutting element, orvice-versa, simply reidentify it with the corresponding radio buttonselected. It is possible — and in some cases efficient — to select both theelements to trim and the cutting elements prior to selecting IntelliTrimand then reidentify those elements whose designation is wrong.

If an element cannot be either extended or trimmed, it isdeleted under the following condition: there is a cutting elementdirectly between the closest guide point and the element;otherwise the element is not modified.

Insert Vertex


• Insert a vertex in a line, line string, multi-line, shape,or B-spline control polygon.

• Attach a line segment to the endpoint of a line or line string.

• Extend a point curve.

• Add an extension line to a dimension element.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsInsert Vertex

To insert a vertex in a line, line string, multi-line,shape, or B-spline control polygon1. Select the Insert Vertex tool.

2. Identify the segment on which to add the vertex.

3. Enter a data point to position the new vertex.

Using Insert Vertexto insert a vertex in a

line string.

To attach a line segment to an endpointof a line or line string1. Select the Insert Vertex tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the segment endpoint.

To extend a point curve1. Select the Insert Vertex tool.

2. Identify the point curve near the endpoint from which to extend.

3. Enter a data point to position the new endpoint (andreposition the identified vertex).

To add an extension line to a dimension element1. Select the Insert Vertex tool.

2. Identify the dimension line near the desired extension line location.

3. Enter a data point to position the end of the extension line.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsDelete Vertex

Using Insert Vertexto add an extensionline to a dimension

element.

Key-in: INSERT VERTEX

The Insert Vertex tool can be used to change a point element intoa line or a line element into a line string.

A shape or line string can have at most 101 vertices.

Delete Vertex


• Delete a vertex from a line string, multi-line, shape,or B-spline control polygon.

• Remove an extension line from a dimension element.

To delete a vertex or an extension line1. Select the Delete Vertex tool.

2. Identify the vertex or extension line.



Manipulating and Modifying ElementsConstruct Circular Fillet

Delete Vertex

Key-in: DELETE VERTEX

Deleting a vertex from a line turns it into a point. It is impossible todelete a vertex from a line string element that has just two vertices.

Construct Circular Fillet

Used to construct a circular fillet (arc) between two elements(lines, line strings, circular arcs, circles, or shapes), two segmentsof a line string, or two sides of a shape.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsConstruct Circular Fillet

Tool Setting Effect

Radius Sets the fillet’s radius.

Truncate Sets which side(s) are truncated.

None—Neither side is truncated.

Both—Both sides are truncatedat their point of tangencywith the fillet.1

First—The first side identified(step 2) is truncated at its pointof tangency with the fillet.

1 If a fillet is constructed between two closed elements or an open and a

closed element, the closed element(s) are not modified.

To construct a circular fillet1. Select the Construct Circular Fillet tool.

2. Identify the first element or segment.

If Truncate is set to First, this side is truncated.

3. Identify the second element or segment.

4. Accept the fillet and truncation(s), if any.

Construct CircularFillet. From left:

Truncate set to None,Both, and First.


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsConstruct Chamfer

Key-in: FILLET MODIFY | NOMODIFY | SINGLE

In 3D, both elements must be on the same plane to be filleted.

To construct a 3D fillet between two surfaces, use the Blend SurfaceBetween Rail Curves tool (see page 7-181) in the Fillet Surfaces tool box.

Construct Chamfer

Used to construct a chamfer between either of the following:

• Two lines. The original lines are trimmed and a thirdline element forms the chamfer.

• Adjacent segments of a line string or shape. An additional vertex isinserted and the common vertex is adjusted to form the chamfer.

Tool Setting Effect

Distance 1 First element or segmentidentified (step 2).

Distance 2 Second element or segmentidentified (step 3).


Manipulating and Modifying ElementsElement Level Manipulations

To construct a chamfer1. Select the Construct Chamfer tool.

2. Identify the first line or segment.

3. Identify the second line or segment.

If the first data point identifies a line element, the second datapoint must also identify a line element. If the first data pointidentifies a segment of a line string or shape, the second data pointmust identify an adjacent segment of the same element.

4. Accept the chamfer.

Chamfer. D1 denotesDistance 1. D2

denotes Distance 2.

Key-in: CHAMFER

In 3D, both elements must be on the same plane to be chamfered.

Element Level ManipulationsThe following procedures are used to copy and moveelements between levels.

To make a copy of an element on a different level

1. In the Manipulate tool box, select the Copy tool. (In theMain tool frame, Copy is the default “representative”of the Manipulate tool box.)



2. Make sure the Use Fence tool setting is off.


4. Change the Active Level (see page 1-3) .

The new Active Level is shown in the Primary Toolstool box and status bar.

5. Accept the copy.

The copy is in the same position as the original.

To “move” an element to a different level

1. In the Change Attributes tool box, select the ChangeElement Attributes tool. (In the Main tool frame, ChangeElement Attributes is the default “representative” ofthe Change Attributes tool box.)

2. In the tool settings window, turn on Level.

3. In the Level field, key in the number of the level to whichthe element is to be “moved.”

The level keyed in becomes the Active Level.



You have not really moved the element; it remains inthe same position in the design. You have changed theelement’s level attribute.


Using Cells

A cell is a small drawing — usually of a frequently-used orcomplex symbol, notation, or detail — created in MicroStation.Cells are stored in a special kind of file called a cell library,which can contain many cells.

Sample architectural cells

Sample cells for civil engineering

Some sample cells for mapping

Some sample cells for mechanical engineering

Cells are used for these reasons:

• To save time drawing patterns and repeated details


Using CellsWorking with Cell Libraries

• To make it easy to update details throughout a design file

• To provide uniformity

You can create your own cell libraries. Just as new design files are basedon seed design files, each new cell library is based on a seed cell library.

To place parts of a design in a cell library, you first associate the celllibrary with the design file by attaching the cell library to the design file.

Each cell has a cell origin, defined when the cell is created, that canbe thought of as the cell’s “handle.” When you enter a data pointto place the cell, the origin is placed at that point.

In this chapter, you will find procedures concerningusing cells, including:

• Working with Cell Libraries (see page 4-2)

• Creating and Editing Cells (see page 4-6)

• Placing Cells (see page 4-9)

• Using the Tools in the Cells tool box (see page 4-13)

• Hatching and Patterning (see page 4-26)

• Using the Tools in the Patterns tool box (see page 4-32)

• Dimension-driven Cells (see page 4-53)

Working with Cell LibrariesThe following describes procedures for creating and attachinga cell library and for browsing cells.



To create and attach a cell library1. From the Element menu, choose Cells.

The Cell Library dialog box opens.

2. From the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box, choose New.

The Create Cell Library dialog box opens.

3. (Optional) — To select a different seed file for the celllibrary, click the Select button and select a seed file inthe Select Seed File dialog box.

4. (Optional) — To select a different destination disk drive, choosethe desired drive from the Drives option menu.

5. (Optional) — To select a different destination directory,use the Directories list box.

6. In the Files field, key in a name for the new cell library.

By convention, cell library files end in the extension “.cel.”




To attach an existing cell library1. From the Element menu, choose Cells.


2. From the File menu in the Cell Library dialog box, choose Attach.

The Attach Cell Library dialog box opens.

3. Select the name of the cell library in the Files list box.

4. Click OK.

Alternative method — To attach anexisting cell library1. From the Utilities menu, choose Cell Selector.

If there is no cell library already attached, the Select CellLibrary to Load dialog box opens.

2. Select the name of the cell library in the Files list box.

3. Click OK.

The Cell Selector dialog box opens, displaying a tile for eachof the available cells in the attached cell library.



To attach a remote cell library1. From the Cell Selector dialog box’s File menu, choose

Load Remote Cell Library.

The Specify URL for Cell Library dialog box opens. (See SelectRemote Design File dialog box in the Reference Guide fordescriptions of the controls in this dialog box.)

2. In the URL field, specify the path to the remote cell library.


4. Click OK.

To browse cells1. From the Element menu, choose Cells.

The Cell Library dialog box opens. If a cell library isattached, its name is in the title bar.

If no cell library is attached and there are no cells in the design file,there is nothing to browse. For information about attaching a celllibrary, see To attach a previously existing cell library on page 4-4.

2. In the list box, select the name of a cell.

An image of the cell is displayed to the right of the list box.

3. Browse through the cells by selecting other cells with the mouse


Using CellsCreating and Editing Cells

or by pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard.

As each cell is selected, its image is displayed to theright of the list box.

Creating and Editing CellsThis section covers how to create and edit cells.

Instead of creating cells “from scratch,” consider using, at least initially,the cell libraries supplied in MicroStation’s sample workspaces.This could save you substantial time and effort. Also, many celllibraries can be purchased from third-party vendors. These celllibraries can be customized to meet your exact needs.

If you need a cell but cannot add one to a cell library (because,for example, a system administrator is in charge of the celllibraries in your company), consider using a group to place thesame elements repeatedly in a design. A group is an unnamedcell that is not defined in a cell library. For more informationabout groups, see Using groups on page 6-3.

Cell type

When you create a cell, you define the cell origin (the locationaround which the cell is placed) and the cell type. There are fourtypes of cells: graphic, point, menu, and tutorial.

The symbology (color, line style, and line weight) of a graphic cellis determined when it is created, whereas a point cell assumesthe active symbology when placed. A graphic cell rotates whena view is rotated, while a point cell is view-independent. Apoint cell can be especially useful for text.

A point cell has one “snappable” point — its origin — and isalways placed on the Active Level, regardless of the level(s) onwhich its components were created. A graphic cell, however, islevel-independent; that is, it can be placed on levels relative to theActive Level or on the same levels as when created, dependingon whether Relative is on. The differences between graphic andpoint cells are summarized in this table:


Using CellsCell type

Graphic Cell Point Cell

Level level independent placed on active level

Rotation with view view independent

Snap to keypoints to cell origin

Symbology active settings whencreated

active settings whenplaced

The term “point cell” as discussed here refers to the Cell Type,which is assigned when the cell is created. This should not beconfused with the “Active Point Cell,” which refers to a cell ina cell library that is designated for placement using the toolsin the Points tool box . It is possible for a cell of either type—graphic or point — to be the Active Point Cell.

For information about menu cells, see Digitizing Tablet Menus.

To create a cell1. If no cell library is attached, attach one before continuing. See To

attach a previously existing cell library on page 4-4.

2. Draw the contents of the cell on the desired levels.

3. With the Element Selection tool, select all the elementsto be included in the cell.orPlace a fence that contains all elements to be includedin the cell. See Specifying which elements are in thefence contents on page 3-17.

4. In the Cells tool box, select the Define Cell Ori-gin (see page 4-20) tool.

The prompt in the status bar is “Define origin.” The cellorigin is the point that is used to position the cell in a design.When a cell is placed in a design, the cell origin will lie onthe data point entered to position it.


Using CellsCell type

5. Enter a data point to define the cell origin.

6. From the Element menu, choose Cells.


7. In the lower right corner of the settings box, click the Create button.

The Create Cell dialog box opens.

8. In the Name field, key in a name of six characters or fewer.

9. (Optional) — In the Description field, key in a descriptionof 27 characters or fewer.

10. From the option menu, choose the Cell types (see page 4-6) .

11. Click the Create button.

Alternatively, you can define the cell origin (steps 4–5) before selectingor fencing the elements (step 3) to be included in the cell.

One or more cells can be made part of another cell, or nested. Justselect the cells to be nested when you create the new cell.

To edit the name or description of a cell1. From the Element menu, choose Cells.


2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell.

3. In the lower right corner of the Cell Library dialogbox, click the Edit button.


Using CellsPlacing Cells

The Edit Cell Information dialog box opens.

4. Edit the name, description, or both.

5. Click the Modify button.

To delete a cell from the attached cell library1. From the Element menu, choose Cells.


2. In the list box, select the name of the desired cell.

3. In the lower right corner of the Cell Library dialogbox, click the Delete button.

Since the deletion cannot be undone, an alert box opens, askingyou to confirm that you want to delete the selected cell.1

4. Click OK.

Placing CellsBefore you can place a cell, you must activate it for thedesired method of placement:

For general Placement with the Place Active Cell tool(see page 4-14) in the Cells tool box (see page 4-13). This cell is called the Active Cell.

1 If the selected cell is a shared cell in the active design file, its definition can be deleted from

the active design file only if there are no instances of the shared cell in the active design file.


Using CellsPlacing Cells

For general Placement with the Place Active Cell Matrixtool (see page 4-16) in the Cells tool box (see page4-13) . This cell is called the Active Cell.

As a line Terminator with the Place Active LineTerminator tool (see page 4-21) in the Cells tool box.This cell is called the Active Line Terminator.

As a Point cell, for placement with the tools inthe Points tool box (see page 1-63) . This cell iscalled the Active Point Cell.

For Patterning with the Pattern Area tool (seepage 4-41) in the Patterns tool box. This cell iscalled the Active Pattern Cell.

To designate a cell as an active cell1. From the Element menu, choose Cells.


2. In the list box, select the name of the cell.

3. Click the Placement button in the Active Cells section.

4. Click the button — Placement, Terminator, Point, orPattern — in the Active Cells section.

Alternative method — To designate a cellas an active cell1. From the Utilities menu, choose Cell Selector.

The Cell Selector dialog box opens. Each cell in the attached


Using CellsControlling the level on which cells are placed

cell library is displayed on its own button.

2. Click the button on which the cell you want to makeactive is displayed.

Not only is the cell activated, but the pre-designated cellplacement tool for that cell is automatically selected as well.

You can customize the Cell Selector dialog box for other uses.

Controlling the level on which cells are placed

The Relative tool setting for the Place Active Cell tool (see page4-14) and Select and Place Cell tool (see page 4-18) controls thelevel(s) on which a graphic cell is placed.

• If Relative is off, a graphic cell is placed on the same level(s)as it was created (absolute placement).

• If Relative is on, a graphic cell is placed on a level or levels relativeto the Active Level. For example, consider a graphic cell that wascreated with elements on levels 5, 7, and 8. If Relative is on andthe Active Level is 1, the cell is placed on levels 1, 3, and 4. If theActive Level is 45, the cell is placed on levels 45, 47, and 48.

For information about what it means for a cell to be a “graphiccell,” see Cell types on page 4-6.

Shared cells

If Use Shared Cells is on in the Cell Library dialog box,cells are placed as shared cells.


Using CellsShared cells

What is a shared cell?

The first time you place a cell with Use Shared Cells on, the sharedcell definition (elements comprising the cell) is stored in the designfile in much the same way as it is stored in the cell library. Toplace subsequent instances of the shared cell, the cell librarydoes not need to be attached. In other words, a shared cell canhave many instances in a design but only one definition. When ashared cell instance is replaced using the Replace Cells tool (seepage 4-22) , all instances of the cell are replaced!

For an unshared cell, on the other hand, the library definitionis stored in the design file each time the cell is placed. Usingshared cells can therefore be a way to reduce design file size. Thereduction is greatest in files with cells that have a large numberof component elements and/or instances.

It is not necessary to know where the shared cell definitionis in the design; identifying any instance of the shared cellidentifies the actual definition.

Reasons to use shared cells

The use of shared cells is recommended for these reasons:

• Shared cells are faster to place and manipulate than unsharedcells. The first time a cell is placed in the design, the cell libraryin which it is stored must be attached. If the cell is placedas a shared cell, it is not necessary to have the cell libraryattached to place additional instances of that cell.

• All instances of a shared cell in the design are replaced whenany instance of that shared cell is replaced.

• Shared cells can be associated with points on other elements,if Association Lock (Settings >Locks > Association) is on.For example, if a shared door cell is placed in a wall andassociated with that wall, the door will automaticallymove if the wall is moved.

• Shared cells usually reduce design file size, therebyimproving performance.


Using CellsCells tool box

Cells tool box

The tools in the Cells tool box are used to place and manipulate cells.

To Select in the Cells tool box

Place the active cell.

Place Active Cell (see page 4-14)

Place a matrix (rows andcolumns) of the active cell.

Place Active Cell Matrix(see page 4-16)

Identify a cell and place anadditional instance(s).

Select and Place Cell (seepage 4-18)

Define the cell origin (the pointabout which the cell is placed)when creating the cell.

Define Cell Origin (seepage 4-20)

Display the name and level of acell that is in the design.

Identify Cell (see page 4-20)

Add a terminator to a linesegment.

Place Active Line Terminator(see page 4-21)

Replace a cell(s) (or all instancesof a shared cell) in the designwith another of the same namefrom an attached library. Replace Cells (see page 4-22)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CELLS OFF | ON | TOGGLE


Using CellsPlace Active Cell

To select and place cells by clicking thumbnail representations, use theCell Selector dialog box (Utilities menu > Cell Selector).

You can define Cell settings group components that, when selected,automatically adjust the active scale factors for cell placement.

To convert an instance of a shared cell to an unshared cell, use theDrop Element tool (see page 6-9) in the Groups tool box.

Place Active Cell

Used to place the Active Cell.

The Active Level (see page 1-3) is set in the Primary Tools tool box.

Tool Setting Effect

Active Cell Can be keyed-in here or set in theCell Library dialog box (Elementmenu > Cells).

Active Angle Sets the angle by which the cell isrotated, if Interactive is off.

X Scale Horizontal scale factor (along x-axis)1

Y Scale Vertical scale factor (along y-axis)1

Z Scale Depth scale factor (along z-axis)1


Using CellsPlace Active Cell

Tool Setting Effect

Relative If the active cell is a graphic cell2

and Relative is:

On—lowest level in cell is placed on theActive Level, and higher levels in cellare placed relative to the Active Level.3

Off—cell is placed on same level(s) as incell library (the level(s) that componentswere on when the cell was created).

Interactive If on, the scale and rotation angle aredefined graphically by data points.

1 Direction in the cell definition. If a scale factor is between 0–1 (for example, 0.25),

the size is decreased. If a scale factor is 1, the size is unchanged from the cell

definition. If a scale factor is greater than 1, the size is increased.

2 Point cells are always placed on the Active Level.

3 For example, consider a graphic cell that was created with elements on levels 5, 7,

and 8. If Relative is on and the Active Level is 1, the cell is placed on levels 1, 3,

and 4. If the Active Level is 45, the cell is placed on levels 45, 47, and 48.

To place the Active Cell1. Select the Place Active Cell tool.

2. Enter a data point to position the cell origin.

If Interactive is off, the cell is placed.

3. If Interactive is on, enter two more data points to definethe scale and the rotation angle.

4. Reset to finish.orReturn to step 2 to place another instance of the cell.


Using CellsPlace Active Cell Matrix

AA 1

2

31

Key-in: PLACE CELL ICON

Key-in: PLACE CELL INTERACTIVE ABSOLUTE | RELATIVE

The ACTIVE CELL (AC=) and ACTIVE RCELL (AR=) key-ins canbe used to set a cell (a shared cell or a cell in the attached celllibrary) as the active cell and place it in the design file.

Key-in Like Place Active Cell with

AC= <CELL_NAME>1 Relative Off

AR= <CELL_NAME>1 Relative On

1 cell_name is the name of a shared cell in the file or a cell in the

attached cell library or cell library list.

For example, to set CELL1 as the active cell and place it with itslowest level on the Active Level, key in AR=CELL1.

Place Active Cell Matrix

Used to place a matrix of the Active Cell. The cells are placedat the Active Angle and Active Scale on the same level(s)as in the cell definition, unless it is a point cell. Point cell


Using CellsPlace Active Cell Matrix

components are placed on Active Level.

The Active Angle and Active Scale can be set in the Design FileSettings dialog box (Settings menu > Design File…). The ActiveLevel (see page 1-3) is set in the Primary Tools tool box.

Tool Setting Effect

Active Cell Sets the Active Cell, whichcan be keyed-in here or set byclicking the Placement buttonin the Cell Library dialog box(Element menu > Cells).

Rows Sets the number of rows.

Columns Sets the number of columns.

Row Spacing Sets the space, in workingunits, between rows.

ColumnSpacing

Sets the space, in working units,between columns.

To place a matrix of the Active Cell1. Select the Place Active Cell Matrix tool.

2. Enter a data point to position the cell matrix. The origin of the cellin the lower left corner of the matrix is placed at this point.


Using CellsSelect and Place Cell

Place Active CellMatrix. D1 indicatesthe row spacing. D2indicates the column

spacing.

Key-in: MATRIX CELL rows, columns, row_spacing, column_spacing

Key-in: CM rows, columns, row_spacing, column_spacing

Select and Place Cell

Used to identify a cell in the design file and place anadditional instance(s) of that cell.

The Active Level is set in the Primary Tools tool box.

Tool Setting Effect

Active Angle Sets the angle by which thecell is rotated.

X Scale Sets horizontal scale factor(along x-axis).1


Using CellsSelect and Place Cell

Tool Setting Effect

Y Scale Sets vertical scale factor(along y-axis).1

Z Scale In 3D, sets scale factor alongz-axis.1

Relative If Active Cell is a graphic celland Relative is:2

On—the lowest level in the cell isplaced on the Active Level, andhigher levels in the cell are placedrelative to the Active Level.3

Off—the cell is placed on the samelevel(s) as in the cell library (thelevel(s) that the components wereon when the cell was created).

1 Direction in the cell definition. If a scale factor is between 0–1 (for

example, 0.25), size is decreased; if it is 1, size is unchanged from the cell

definition; if it is greater than 1, size is increased.

2 Point cells are always placed on the Active Level.

3 For example, consider a graphic cell that was created with elements on levels 5, 7,

and 8. If Relative is on and the Active Level is 1, the cell is placed on levels 1, 3,

and 4. If the Active Level is 45, the cell is placed on levels 45, 47, and 48.

To select and place a cell1. Select the Select and Place Cell tool.

2. Identify the cell.

If the cell is shared and Use Shared Cells is on, itbecomes the Active Cell.

If the cell is unshared, the cell library in which that cell isstored must be attached or in the cell library list.

3. Enter a data point to place an instance of the cell.

4. Reset to finish.or


Using CellsDefine Cell Origin

Return to step 3 to place another instance of the cell.

Key-in: SELECT CELL ICON

Key-in: SELECT CELL ABSOLUTE | RELATIVE

Define Cell Origin

Used to define the cell origin (the point about which the cell is placed).See To create a cell on page 4-7 for information about creating cells.

To define a cell origin1. Select the Define Cell Origin tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the cell origin.

An “O” displays at this point.

3. Reset to accept the cell origin.orReturn to step 2.

Key-in: DEFINE CELL ORIGIN

It is often helpful to snap a tentative point to preview thedata point to be entered in step 2.

Identify Cell

Used to display the name and level of a cell in the design.


Using CellsPlace Active Line Terminator

To display a cell’s name and level1. Select the Identify Cell tool.


The cell’s name and level(s) are displayed in the status bar.

3. Accept the cell.

Key-in: IDENTIFY CELL

Place Active Line Terminator

Used to place the Active Line Terminator cell on a line, linestring, or arc, primarily to place arrowheads.

Tool Setting Effect Alternate key-in

Terminator Sets Active LineTerminator, whichcan also be set in theCell Library dialog box(Element menu > Cells).

ACTIVETERMINATOR<TERMINATOR>orLT= <TERMINATOR>

Scale Sets Active LineTerminator scale.

ACTIVE TSCALE<SCALE>orTS= <SCALE>

To place the Active Line Terminator1. Select the Place Active Line Terminator tool.

2. Identify the element near the endpoint where theterminator is to be placed.

3. Accept the line terminator.


Using CellsReplace Cells

Place Active LineTerminator

Key-in: PLACE TERMINATOR

To place text (a note) in the design with an arrow, it is easiest to use thePlace Note tool in the Text tool box (Tools menu > Main > Text).

Replace Cells

Used to replace single or multiple cells in a design file, or to updatecells in a design with cells of the same name from the active cell library.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the method for replacing or updating cells.

Update—replaces the identified cell with the cellof the same name from the active cell library.

Replace—replaces single or multiple cellsby identifying the cell and then identifyingits replacement cell.

Mode (with Method set to Replace) Sets the methodby which cells are replaced.

Single—lets you replace individual cells.

Global—replaces all cells of the same namewith the replacement cell.



Tool Setting Effect

Use ActiveCell

(with Method set to Replace) If on, selectedcells are replaced with the Active Cellentered in the text field.

ReplaceAttributes

(with Method set to Replace) If on, all user data(such as tags and database attributes) associatedwith a cell are replaced by the new cell’s user data.

Use Fence Sets the method by which fence contentsare manipulated.

Inside—if Mode is set to Single, all cells insidethe fence are replaced. If Mode is set to Global,all cells inside the fence, as well as cells outsidethe fence having the same name as thoseinside the fence, are replaced.

Overlap—if Mode is set to Single, all cells insideand overlapping the fence are replaced. If Modeis set to Global, all cells inside and overlappingthe fence, as well as cells outside the fencehaving the same name as those inside andoverlapping the fence, are replaced.

Void—if Mode is set to Single, all cells outsidethe fence are replaced. If Mode is set to Global,all cells outside the fence, as well as cellsinside the fence having the same name as thoseoutside the fence, are replaced.

Void-Overlap—if Mode is set to Single, all cellsoutside and overlapping the fence are replaced.If Mode is set to Global, all cells outside andoverlapping the fence, as well as cells inside thefence having the same name as those outside andoverlapping the fence, are replaced.

To update cells from the active cell library1. Select the Replace Cells tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Update.



3. Identify the cell to update.

4. Accept the cell.

If the identified cell is shared, all instances of the cell inthe design are replaced with the cell of the same namefrom the active cell library.

If the identified cell is unshared, only the identified cell is replacedwith the cell of the same name from the active cell library.

To replace cells individually or globally1. Select the Replace Cells tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Method to Replace.

3. Identify the cell to replace.

4. Identify the replacement cell.

5. Accept.

If Mode is set to Single, the identified cell is replaced.

If Mode is set to Global, an alert box opens to confirmthe replacement of all of the cells having the samename as the identified cell.



To replace individual or multiple cellsinside the fence1. Place the fence around the cells to replace.

2. Select the Replace Cells tool.


4. In the tool settings window, turn on Use Fence andchoose the Inside option.


6. Accept.

If Mode is set to Single, all of the cells inside the fence are replaced.

If Mode is set to Global, all of the cells inside the fence andthose cells outside the fence having the same name are replacedin groups; after you click Yes in the alert box to confirm thereplacement of one group of cells, subsequent alert boxesappear until all of the cells in the fence and those cells of thesame name outside of the fence are replaced.

To individually replace cells containing user data1. Select the Replace Cells tool.


3. In the tool settings window, set Mode to Single.

4. In the tool settings window, turn on Replace Attributes.

5. Identify the cell to replace.


7. Accept.

The old cell, including its user data, is replaced withthe new cell and its user data.

Key-in: REPLACE CELLS EXTENDED

To replace cells from the system command line, enter at the systemprompt:msbatch repcell.ma <design_file> <cell_library> <y | n><cell_to_replace> <replacement_cell> where design_file is the design


Using CellsHatching and Patterning

file on which to operate, cell_library is the cell library that containsthe replacement cell, y keeps attributes, n does not keep attributes,cell_to_replace is the name of the cell in design_file to replace, andreplacement_cell is the name of the replacement cell in cell_library.

The Replace Cells tool cannot be used to replace groups (unnamedcells, also known as “orphan cells”).

Hatching and PatterningPatterning is the repeated placement of a hatch line or cell througha closed area at a specified interval (spacing), scale, and angle.You can place patterns on any designated level.

Controlling the display of patterns

Elements — either lines or cells — in a pattern aredesignated as pattern elements.

To turn the display of patterns on or offin one or more views1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes.



Using CellsPlacing patterns in the design

2. From the View Number option menu, choose thenumber of the desired view.

3. Turn Patterns on or off.

4. Click the Apply button.

5. Repeat steps 2–4 for additional views.

To turn the display of patterns on or off in all views1. From the Settings menu, choose View Attributes.


2. Turn Patterns on or off.

3. Click the All button.

Placing patterns in the design

The tools in the Patterns tool box (see page 4-32) are used topattern the area inside a closed element with the Area attribute ofSolid, the fence, the intersection, union, or difference of multipleelements, or the area enclosed by a set of elements.

The Hatch Area tool (see page 4-33) and Crosshatch Area tool (seepage 4-40) are used to place lines (hatch lines).


Using CellsAssociative patterns

Hatching(left) and

Crosshatching(right)

The Pattern Area tool (see page 4-41) is used to place the celldesignated as the Active Pattern Cell. For example, a wall face canbe patterned with a brick cell for a more realistic appearance.

Examplesof placingthe Active

Pattern Cell

Area patterning is a time-intensive operation. The time dependson the complexity of the Active Pattern Cell and the size of thepatterned area. The time also depends on the number, intricacy,and levels of hole elements within the area. More intricateelements may require several minutes to pattern.

Associative patterns

The Hatch Area tool (see page 4-33) , Crosshatch Area tool (seepage 4-40) , and Pattern Area tool (see page 4-41) have a toolsetting called Associative Pattern that, if on when a pattern isplaced, causes the pattern to be associated with the patternedelement. This means that whenever the element is modified ormanipulated, the pattern is automatically updated.

If an element that has an associated pattern is rotated or scaled,the associated pattern is also rotated or scaled.


Using CellsSnappable patterns

Snappable patterns

The Hatch Area tool (see page 4-33) , Crosshatch Area tool (see page4-40) , and Pattern Area tool (see page 4-41) have a tool settingcalled Snappable Pattern, that if on when a pattern is placed,causes the pattern elements to be eligible for snapping.

While in some cases being able to snap to pattern elements is desirable,in others it is not, since having large numbers of pattern elements inan area may make it difficult to select or identify a particular element.

Excluding areas inside a patterned areafrom patterning

The areas enclosed by elements with the Area attribute of Holethat are inside and on the same level as the Solid element usuallyare not patterned. The specifics are as follows:

Associative Pattern Hole Elements Inside Element

Off Are not patterned.

On If they were grouped with the elementusing the Group Holes tool (see page6-22) they are not patterned and thepattern is associated with the holeelements as well as the solid.Otherwise, the area enclosed by anyother element inside the element,regardless of its Area attribute,is patterned, and no associationsare made to it.

The area below and immediately surrounding the text in ahole text element is not patterned.

Cells used for patterning

Pattern cells may contain any combination of elements, eventext. Cells used for area patterning are typically designedspecifically for that purpose.


Using CellsCells used for patterning

Pattern cells supplied with MicroStation

The cell libraries “archpa.cel” and “geompa.cel,” in Bentley’s“Workspace\system\cell” directory, contain pattern cells that areuseful for various area patterning applications.

“archpa.cel” celllibrary

“geompa.cel”cell library


Using CellsTolerance

Guidelines for creating pattern cells

Additional pattern cells are created just as all other cells are.Here are some guidelines to follow and restrictions to be awareof when creating area pattern cells:

• Area pattern cells should contain at least one full cycle of thepattern in both the horizontal and vertical directions.

• The cell range is used to determine the pattern matrix size.If you want unused space at the pattern boundary, placepoint elements (zero length lines) to expand the patternrange. Point elements are not patterned.

• If the cell is created as a point cell, the pattern componentsare placed on the Active Level in the active color and lineweight. If the cell is created as a graphic cell, the patternelements are placed with the same symbology and on thesame level as the element being patterned.

• The Pattern Area tool (see page 4-41) handles horizontal orvertical lines that span the entire pattern cell in a specialmanner. Instead of placing many contiguous line segments tocreate the pattern, these lines are extended through the entirepattern area. This results in a substantial increase in patterningspeed and also requires much less room in the design file.

• MicroStation does not support nested area pattern cellsor pattern cells larger than 8 KB.

Tolerance

When patterning along or inside a curved element, the curve isapproximated with a series of line segments that are used as “guides.”

The tool setting Tolerance is the maximum distance in working unitsbetween a curved element and the approximating line segments usedto pattern. If the Tolerance is small, the line segments conform closelyto the curve and the approximation is more accurate, but processingtime increases. If the Tolerance is large, line segments do not conformas closely to the curve and the approximation is less accurate, but


Using CellsPatterns tool box

processing time decreases. The setting can be saved.

Left:Tolerance as

denoted by“T”. Center:

Approximatingline segmentsif tolerance islarge. Right:

Approximatingline segments

if toleranceis small.

T

Patterns tool box

The tools in the Patterns tool box are used to pattern areasand along linear elements.

To Select in the Patterns tool box

Hatch an area.

Hatch Area (see page 4-33)

Crosshatch an area.

Crosshatch Area (see page 4-40)

Pattern an area by tiling theActive Pattern Cell.

Pattern Area (see page 4-41)

Pattern along a linear element.

Linear Pattern (see page 4-49)


Using CellsHatch Area

To Select in the Patterns tool box

Display the angle and scaleattributes of a pattern element.

Show Pattern Attributes(see page 4-52)

Set the active pattern settingsto match the attributes of anexisting pattern element.

Match Pattern Attributes(see page 4-52)

Delete patterning.

Delete Pattern (see page 4-53)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX PATTERNS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Hatch Area

Used to hatch an area.



Tool Setting Effect

Method Determines the area that is hatched.

Element—The interior of a shape , ellipse,or closed B-spline curve1

; or between components of a multi-line.

Fence—The area inside the fence.

Intersection—Of two or more closed elements.1

Union—Of two or more closed elements.1

Difference—Between two or moreclosed elements.1

Flood—The (minimum) area enclosed by aset of elements (something like the flood filltool common in painting programs).

Points—An area defined by a series of datapoints, each of which defines a vertex.

(ActivePattern)Spacing

Sets the interval between hatching lines.

(ActivePattern)Angle

Sets the angle, relative to the view, atwhich hatching lines are drawn.

Tolerance(see page4-31)

Maximum distance between curvedelement and approximating line segmentsused to pattern.

AssociativePattern

If on, hatching is associated with a patternedelement and is automatically moved or resizedwhen the element is manipulated or modified.In other words, if the element is modifiedlater, the hatch lines are re-drawn.

If Method is Intersection, Union, Difference,or Flood, a complex shape that bounds thepatterned area is created, and the hatch linesare associated to the complex shape.2



Tool Setting Effect

SnappablePattern

If on, hatching lines can be snapped to.If off, hatching lines do not interfere withsnapping to other elements.


(When Method is set to Flood) If on, allclosed elements (regardless of their Areaattributes) inside the selected area areavoided when the area is hatched.

Locate Text (When Method is set to Flood) If on,any text or dimension text inside oroverlapping the selected area is avoidedwhen the area is hatched.

Max(imum)Gap

(When Method is set to Flood) The maximumdistance, in working units, between theendpoints of enclosing elements.

1 To be patterned, a closed element’s Area attribute must be Solid. An

element’s Area attribute is changed with the Change Element to Active

Area tool in the Change Attributes tool box.

2 To convert associative hatching into line elements that are no longer associated

with the element, use the Drop Associative Pattern tool in the Drop tool box.

To hatch the area inside a closed element1. Select the element.

2. Select the Hatch Area tool.

3. Set Method to Element.

4. Enter a data point to define a point through whicha hatch line must pass.

Elements that are inside the selected element and have the



Area attribute Hole are hatched as follows:

If AssociativePattern is

Then Hole elements insideselected element

Off Are not hatched.

On If they were grouped with the Solidelement using the Group Holes tool (seepage 6-22) , they are not hatched andthe hatching is associated with the Holeelements as well as the Solid.Otherwise, the area enclosed by any otherelement inside the element, regardlessof its Area attribute, is hatched, and noassociations are made to it.

Alternative method — To hatch the areainside a closed element1. Select the Hatch Area tool.




Hatching the areainside a closed

element. “θ” denotesthe Active PatternAngle. “S” denotesthe Active Pattern

Spacing.

2

1

S

θ



To hatch the area between multi-line components1. Select the Hatch Area tool.


3. Identify one component that is to be a boundary of the hatched area.

4. Identify the other component that is to be a boundaryof the hatched area.

If Associative Pattern is off, this data point defines a pointthrough which one of the hatch lines must pass.

5. Reset.

Hatching the areabetween multi-line

components1

2

To hatch the fenced area1. Select the Hatch Area tool.

2. Set Method to Fence.




To hatch the intersection or union ofclosed elements1. Select the Hatch Area tool.




As you accept each successive element, the edges thatdo not enclose the area to be hatched are hidden. Theresulting area is highlighted.



Intersection “Elements do not intersect” is displayedin the status bar.

Union All elements are hatched.


The area is hatched. The effect of the final acceptance pointdepends on the Associative Pattern tool setting.


Then this data point

Off Defines a point through which ahatch line must pass.

On Accepts the hatch lines, which areassociated to a complex shape created fromthe element’s intersection or union. A hatchline must pass through one of the vertices.



To hatch the difference between elements1. Select the Hatch Area tool.

2. Set Method to Difference.






Off Defines a point through which ahatch line must pass.

On Accepts the hatch lines, which areassociated to a complex shape created fromthe element’s intersection or union. A hatchline must pass through one of the vertices.

The area to be hatched is displayed dynamically.

5. Reset to finish.

To hatch an area enclosed by bounding elements1. Select the Hatch Area tool.

2. Set Method to Flood.

3. (Optional) — If you want the hatching to avoid closed elements,text or dimension text inside the selected area, turn onLocate Interior Shapes and Locate Text.

4. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the boundingelements. (To minimize the time required, zoom in to the areaof interest or select the bounding elements.)

The area to be patterned is displayed dynamically.

If there are selected elements, only selected elements areconsidered as possible bounding elements. If no elementsare selected, all elements in the view in which the data


Using CellsCrosshatch Area

point is entered are considered.

5. Accept the hatching.

The area is hatched. If Locate Interior Shapes and Locate Text ison, any inside closed element (regardless of its Area attribute),text or dimension text is avoided. If Associative Pattern is on,the hatch lines are associated to a complex shape created fromthe bounding elements and the inside elements.

To hatch an area defined by data points1. Select the Hatch Area tool.

2. Set Method to Points.



4. Reset to finish.

Key-in: HATCH ICON | DIFFERENCE | ELEMENT | FENCE| FLOOD | INTERSECTION | POINTS | UNION

Crosshatch Area

Used to crosshatch an area.

The tool settings and procedures are the same as those for theHatch Area tool (see page 4-33) , except that there are additionalfields to specify the Spacing and Angle of the crosshatch lines,in addition to those for the hatch lines.


Using CellsPattern Area

CrosshatchArea. “θ1” and

“θ2” denotethe Active

Pattern Angles.“S1” and “S2”

denote theActive Pattern

Spacing.

2

1

1

2

1

2

SS

θθ

Key-in: CROSSHATCH ICON

Key-in: CROSSHATCH DIFFERENCE | ELEMENT | FENCE| FLOOD | INTERSECTION | POINTS | UNION

Pattern Area

Used to pattern an area by tiling the Active Pattern Cell.



Tool Setting Effect

Method Determines the area that is patterned.

Element—The interior of a shape , ellipse,or closed B-spline curve1

; or between components of a multi-line.

Fence—The area inside the fence.

Intersection—Of two or more closed elements.1

Union—Of two or more closed elements.1

Difference—Between two or moreclosed elements.1

Flood—The (minimum) area enclosed by aset of elements (something like the flood filltool common in painting programs).

Points—An area defined by a series of datapoints, each of which defines a vertex.

(Active)Pattern Cell

The cell that is tiled to create the pattern. Canalso be set with Pattern button in the CellLibrary setting box (Element menu > Cells).

(ActivePattern)Scale

Sets the factor by which the ActivePattern Cell is scaled.2

Row Spacing The interval between rows.3

ColumnSpacing

The interval between columns.

(ActivePattern)Angle

The angle, relative to the view, at whichinstances of the active Pattern Cell are placed.


Maximum distance between a curvedelement and the approximating linesegments used for patterning.



Tool Setting Effect

AssociativePattern

If on, patterning is associated with a patternedelement and is automatically updated whenthe element is manipulated or modified. Ifthe Method is Intersection, Union, Difference,or Flood, a complex shape that bounds thepatterned area is created, and the patterningis associated to the complex shape.4

SnappablePattern

If on, patterning cells can be snapped to. Ifoff, patterning cells do not interfere withsnapping to other elements.


(When Method is set to Flood) If on, allclosed elements (regardless of their Areaattributes) inside the selected area areavoided when the area is patterned.

Locate Text (When Method is set to Flood) If on,any text or dimension text inside oroverlapping the selected area is avoidedwhen the area is patterned.

Max(imum)Gap

(When Method is set to Flood) The maximumdistance, in working units, between theendpoints of enclosing elements.

1 To be patterned, an element’s Area attribute must be Solid. An element’s

Area attribute is changed with the Change Element to Active Area tool

in the Change Attributes tool box.

2 If between 0–1 (for example, 0.25), size is decreased. If 1, size is unchanged

from cell definition. If greater than 1, size is increased.

3 If the Row Spacing or Column Spacing is zero, the instances of the Active

Pattern Cell are placed contiguous to one another.

4 To convert associative patterning into primitive elements that are

no longer associated with the element, use the Drop Associative

Pattern tool in the Drop tool box.



To pattern the area inside a closed element1. Select the element.

2. Select the Pattern Area tool.


4. Enter a data point to place the origin of one of thepattern cell instances.

Elements that are inside the selected element and have theArea attribute Hole are patterned as follows:


Then Hole elements insideselected element

Off Are not patterned.

On If they were grouped with the Solidelement using the Group Holes tool (seepage 6-22) they are not patterned andthe pattern is associated with the Holeelements as well as the Solid.Otherwise, the area enclosed by any otherelement inside the element, regardlessof its Area attribute, is patterned, andno associations are made to it.

Alternative method — To pattern the areainside a closed element1. Select the Pattern Area tool.






At left, pattern cellHBONE is used topattern a complex

shape. At right,the outside blockis patterned withENBOND. Since

the inner block hasthe area attribute of

Hole, the area insideit is not patterned.

To pattern the area between multi-linecomponents1. Select the Pattern Area tool.


3. Identify one component that is to be a boundary ofthe patterned area.

4. Identify the other component that is to be a boundaryof the patterned area.

If Associative Pattern is off, this data point also places theorigin of one of the pattern cell instances.

If Associative Pattern is on, the pattern is associated with themulti-line and the origin of one of the pattern cell instances ispositioned on one of the multi-line’s vertices.

5. Reset.

To pattern the fenced area1. Select the Pattern Area tool.

2. Set Method to Fence.




Patterning thefenced area. Left:

The pattern cellSPGRID. Right: The

pattern cell WOODplaced with the

Active Pattern Angle(denoted by “A”) set

to 30 .

To pattern the intersection or union ofclosed elements1. Select the Pattern Area tool.




As you accept each successive element, the edges thatdo not enclose the area to be patterned are hidden. Theresulting area is highlighted.



Intersection “Elements do not intersect” displaysin the status bar.

Union All elements are patterned.


The area is patterned. The effect of the final acceptance point



depends on the Associative Pattern tool setting.



Off Defines a point through which apattern line must pass.

On Accepts the pattern lines, which areassociated to a complex shape createdfrom the element’s intersection orunion. A pattern line must pass throughone of the vertices.

To pattern the difference between elements1. Set Method to Difference.





4. Reset to finish.



Off Defines a point through which apattern line must pass.

On Accepts the pattern lines, which areassociated to a complex shape createdfrom the element’s intersection orunion. A pattern line must pass throughone of the vertices.



To pattern an area enclosed by bounding elements1. Select the Pattern Area tool.


3. (Optional) — If you want the patterning to avoid closedelements, text or dimension text inside the selected area, turnon Locate Interior Shapes and Locate Text.

4. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the boundingelements. (To minimize patterning time, zoom in to the areaof interest or select the bounding elements.)


If there are selected elements, only selected elements areconsidered as possible bounding elements. If no elementsare selected, all elements in the view in which the datapoint is entered are considered.

5. Accept the patterning.

The area is patterned. If Locate Interior Shapes and LocateText is on, any inside closed element (regardless of its Areaattribute), text or dimension text is avoided. If Associative Patternis on, the patterning is associated to a complex shape createdfrom the bounding elements and the inside elements.

To pattern an area defined by data points1. Select the Pattern Area tool.

2. Set Method to Points.



4. Reset to finish.

Key-in: PATTERN AREA DIFFERENCE | ELEMENT | FENCE


Using CellsLinear Pattern

| FLOOD | INTERSECTION | POINTS | UNION

Linear Pattern

Used to draw a pattern along a linear element.

The pattern cell (top) and the element (bottom) used for theillustrations in the table below.



Tool Setting Effect

Cycle Sets the manner in which the activePattern Cell is placed.

Single—Placed with one instance oneach segment1

. If a segment’s length is less than 80% of thecycle length, the segment is patterned withthe first horizontal line in the pattern cell.

Multiple —Place along an element at ascale that is adjusted, if necessary, from theActive Pattern Scale so that every instance iscomplete along each segment.a If a segment’slength is less than 80% of the cycle length,the segment is patterned with the firsthorizontal line in the pattern cell.

Truncated—Place along the element atthe Active Pattern Scale. If necessary,the last instance is truncated.



Tool Setting Effect

Cycle Complete —Placed along the element at ascale that is adjusted, if necessary, fromthe Active Pattern Scale so that onlycomplete instances are placed.

Pattern Cell The cell that is tiled to create the pattern. Canalso be set with the Pattern button in the CellLibrary dialog box (Element menu > Cells).

Scale The active Pattern Cell is scaled by this factor.2


Maximum distance between a curved elementand the approximating line segments.

1 A line, arc, curve, or ellipse; or each segment of a line string, shape,

complex chain, or complex shape.

2 If between 0–1 (for example, 0.25), the size is decreased. If 1, the size is

unchanged from the cell definition. If greater than 1, the size is increased.

To pattern a linear element1. Select the Linear Pattern tool.


3. Enter a data point to indicate the pattern direction.

Key-in: PATTERN LINE SINGLE | MULTIPLE |ELEMENT | SCALE

Linear patterning is supported to maintain compatibility with existingapplications and for customers who have existing designs with linearpatterns. In most cases, however, defining a Custom Line Style (seepage 1-17) and using linear element placement tools is far more


Using CellsShow Pattern Attributes

efficient, and is recommended for new design work.

Show Pattern Attributes

Used to display the Pattern Angle and Pattern Scaleattributes of a pattern element.

To display the angle and scale of a pattern element1. Select the Show Pattern Attributes tool.

2. Identify the pattern element.

The element highlights, and its type and level displayin the status bar.


The pattern angle and scale are displayed in the status bar.

Key-in: SHOW PATTERN

Match Pattern Attributes

Used to set the active pattern settings (Angle, Scale, and Spacing) tomatch the attributes of a pattern element in the design.


Using CellsDelete Pattern

To match the active pattern settings to thoseof an existing pattern element1. Select the Match Pattern Attributes tool.

2. Identify the pattern element.

3. Accept the pattern element.

The new active pattern settings are displayed in the status bar.

Key-in: ACTIVE PATTERN MATCH

Delete Pattern

Used to delete patterning.

To delete patterning1. Select the Delete Pattern tool.

2. Identify the patterning to delete or, in the case of associativepatterning, the patterned element.


Key-in: DELETE PATTERN

Dimension-driven CellsCells have many uses: They can save time drawing repeateddetails, make it easy to update details throughout a design, provideuniformity in a project, and so on. Although they can be modified,most cells are placed as static parts of a design.

A dimension-driven cell has special “intelligence.” It is not static, butdynamically changes based on relationships that were defined whenit was created. For information about creating dimension-driven


Using CellsDimension-driven Cells

cells, see Dimension-driven Cells. A cell in the design that is basedon a dimension-driven cell is called a derived cell.

To place a derived cell1. Make the dimension-driven cell the active cell.

2. Key in MDL LOAD DDCELL.

3. Key in PLACE CELL DIMENSION.

The Dimension-Driven Design dialog box opens. A list boxwith each dimension or constant’s initial value (the valuestored in the library cell) is displayed.

4. (Optional) — For each dimension or constant you wantto change, select it in the list box, press �Tab�, and keyin the new value in the Edit field.

If the cell is visible in a view, the changes display dynamically.

5. (Optional) — To place the cell with active constraints so it can bemodified after placement, turn on Save Constraints.

6. Enter a data point to position the cell’s origin.

The cell is derived and placed. If the cell cannot be derivedfrom the supplied dimension and constant values, the cell isnot placed, and you are prompted to enter new values.

Dimensions can be tagged by a constant or, if not, appear inthe list labelled as “DIMENSION.”



To modify a derived cell1. Key in MDL LOAD DDCELL.

2. Key in MODIFY DIMENSIONS.


The Dimension-Driven Design dialog box opens. A list box witheach dimension or constant’s value is displayed.

4. For each dimension or constant you want to change, select it in thelist box, press �Tab�, and key in the new value in the Edit field.

5. Enter a data point to modify the cell.

If the cell cannot be derived from the supplied dimensionand constant values, the cell is not modified and you areprompted to enter new values.


Reference Files

Reference files are design or raster files that can be attached anddisplayed, plotted, and (in the case of reference design files) used forconstruction purposes, but they cannot be modified in any way. In thischapter, you will find procedures relating to reference files, including:

• Using Reference Design Files (see page 5-1)

• Using Reference Raster Files (see page 5-34)

• Adjusting the File Update Sequence (see page 5-46)

User preferences that affect reference file operations areset by choosing Preferences from the Workspace menu andselecting the Reference File category.

Using Reference Design FilesA reference design file is a design file that is attached or associated withthe active design file. Elements in a reference file display as thoughthey were in the active design. They can be used as construction aids aswell. (Although you cannot manipulate the elements in a reference file,you can snap to them and even copy them into the active design file.)

It is sometimes convenient to refer to one part of a design whiledrawing in another area by attaching the active design file to itself.

Attaching reference design files

The most common way to attach a reference design file is to attachit coincidentally, which means that the coordinates of the referencefile’s design plane are aligned with those of the active designfile, without any rotation, scaling, or offset.


Reference FilesAttaching reference design files

To attach a reference design file coincidentally1. From the File menu, choose Reference.

The Reference Files dialog box opens.

ReferenceFiles dialog

box —controls for

working withreference

design files

2. From the dialog box’s Display menu, choose Design.

3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Attach.

The Preview Reference dialog box opens.



4. (Optional) — Select the reference file to attach and click Preview.

5. Select the reference file to attach and click OK.

The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.

6. (Optional) — (not recommended unless the reference file path isexpected never to change) To retain the reference file’s full pathspecification in the attachment information, turn on Save FullPath (see Making portable reference file attachments on page 5-7).

7. (Optional) — (unless the selected reference file is alreadyattached) In the dialog box’s Logical Name field, key in abrief name (up to 20 characters) for the file.

8. (Optional) — In the dialog box’s Description field, key in adescription (up to 40 characters) of the file.

9. From the Attachment Mode option menu, choose Coincident.

By default, Attachment Mode is set to Coincident.

10. (Optional) — Set Scale Line Styles.

If Scale Line Styles is on, custom line style components (forexample, dashes) can be scaled after attachment. If off, custom



line style components cannot be scaled.

11. Click OK.

Alternative method — To attach a referencedesign file coincidentally1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


2. In the list box, right-click and choose Attach Ref fromthe menu that appears.


3. Perform steps 4 through 11 in the alternate procedure above.

Since the same design file can be attached many times, givethe attachments logical names and descriptions that help youremember which attachment is which.

The default setting of Save Full Path is controlled by the preferenceStore Full Path When Attached, which is set in the Reference Filecategory of the Preferences dialog box (Workspace menu > Preferences).

Attachments using saved views

Attaching reference files can be a useful way to set up aplot. In composing the plot, you can attach only the portionof a design in a saved view.

To attach a reference design file using a saved view1. Follow steps 1–8 in the procedure To attach a reference



design file coincidentally on page 5-2.

2. In the Saved Views list box, select a saved view.

Selecting asaved view

In the Attachment Mode option menu, Saved View isautomatically chosen.

3. (Optional) — In the Scale (Master:Ref) fields, definethe ratio of design file Master Units to reference filemaster units. For example:

To set Left Right

One design file master unitper reference file master unit(the default).

1 1

Five design file master units perreference file master unit.

5 1

4. (Optional) — Set Scale Line Styles.

If Scale Line Styles is on, custom line style components (forexample, dashes) are scaled by the Scale (Master:Ref) factors. Ifoff, custom line style components are not scaled.

5. Click OK.

The area of the reference file’s saved view dynamically displays



as a rectangle centered about the pointer.

6. Enter a data point to locate the center of the referencefile attachment (to position the center of the referencefile’s saved view).

Since the same design file can be attached many times, you shouldgive the attachments unique logical names and descriptions tohelp you remember which attachment is which.

To attach the active design file to itselfas a reference file1. From the File menu, choose Reference.



3. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Attach.


4. In the Files list box, select the active design file and click OK.

The Attach Reference File dialog box opens. Saved viewsdisplay in the Saved Views list box.

5. Attach the design file to itself coincidentally. Followsteps 7–11 in the procedure To attach a reference designfile coincidentally on page 5-2.orAttach a saved view. Follow steps 7–8 in the procedure Toattach a reference design file coincidentally on page 5-2,then steps 2–6 in the procedure To attach a reference designfile using a saved view on page 5-4.

Alternative method — To attach the activedesign file to itself as a reference file1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


2. In the list box, right-click and choose Attach Ref from



the menu that appears.


3. Perform steps 4–5 in the alternate procedure above.

The preference Update Self Attachments determines whether referencefiles that are attached to themselves (self-attached) are automaticallyupdated to reflect modifications to the active design file. Update SelfAttachments is on by default. This makes it easier to use self-attachedreference files, for example, to generate drawings of 3D models.

Making portable reference file attachments

When a reference file is attached, the full path to the directory in whichthe reference file resides is not retained by default in the attachmentinformation that is stored in the active design file. This approach allowsyou to make portable reference file attachments — attach referencefiles so they will be located by MicroStation in the following situations:

• The reference files are accessed across a network.

• The active design file and reference files are movedto a different directory.

• The active design file and reference files are transferredto a system with a different directory structure, oreven to a different platform.

To use the most flexible technique for making portable reference fileattachments, you must first define a custom configuration variablewhose definition specifies the directory in which reference files reside.For information about defining custom configuration variables, seeWorking With Configuration Variables in the Administrator’s Guide.



To attach a reference file residing in a directoryspecified by a custom configuration variable1. From the File menu, choose Reference.



3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Attach.

The Preview Reference dialog box opens. Even if thereference file you want to attach is displayed in the Fileslist box, do not skip steps 4-5.

4. From the dialog box’s Directory menu, choose SelectConfiguration Variable.

The Select Configuration Variable dialog box opens.

5. In the list box, select by name the configuration variablewhose definition specifies the directory in which thereference file resides, and click OK.

In the Preview Reference dialog box, the files in thespecified directory are listed.

6. In the list box, select the reference file to attach and click OK.

The Attach Reference File dialog box opens.

7. Attach the design file to itself coincidentally. Followsteps 7–11 in the procedure To attach a reference designfile coincidentally on page 5-2.orAttach a saved view. Follow steps 7–8 in the procedure Toattach a reference design file coincidentally on page 5-2,then steps 2–6 in the procedure To attach a reference design



file using a saved view on page 5-4.

The configuration variable name is stored, along with thefilename, (optional) logical name and (optional) description,in the attachment information. The variable name displaysin the File Name column in the Reference Files dialog boxto indicate the portable attachment.

Alternative method — To attach a referencefile residing in a directory specified by acustom configuration variable1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


2. In the list box, right-click and choose Attach Ref fromthe menu that appears.


3. Perform steps 4–7 in the alternate procedure above.

MicroStation will locate a reference file attached in this mannerwhenever the design file is opened — on any system — aslong as the custom configuration variable is defined and thereference file is stored in the specified directory. The specifieddirectory can vary from system to system.

Portability, albeit without the same flexibility, can be achieved bydefining the MS_RFDIR configuration variable rather than a customconfiguration variable. MS_RFDIR specifies the directories in whichMicroStation attempts to locate attached reference files after firstusing the attachment information (including custom configurationvariables) and, failing that, searching the same directory as the activedesign file. For information about defining configuration variables, seeWorking With Configuration Variables in the Administrator’s Guide.

Helping locate “lost” attachments

If MicroStation cannot locate a reference file upon opening a designfile, “file not found” is shown in the Full Path field when the fileis selected in the Reference Files dialog box.



To update an attachment when MicroStationcannot locate the file1. From the File menu, choose Reference.



3. In the list box, double-click the reference file.

The Attachment Settings dialog box opens.

4. In the File Name field, key in the new file specification.orClick the Browse button and select the reference file in theReattach Reference File dialog box. Then click OK to returnto the Attachment Settings dialog box.

5. (Optional) — (not recommended unless the reference filepath is expected not to ever again change) To retain thereference file’s full path specification in the attachmentinformation, turn on Save Full Path (see Making portablereference file attachments on page 5-7).

6. Click OK.



Alternative method — To update an attachmentwhen MicroStation cannot locate the file1. From the File menu, choose Reference.



3. In the list box, select the reference file.

4. From the setting box’s Settings menu, choose Attachment.

5. Follow steps 4-6 in the alternate procedure above.

Attaching remote reference files

The Remote Attach function allows you to select a URL as a designfile location instead of a specific local design file.

To attach a remote reference file1. From the File menu, choose Reference.


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Attach URL.

The Select Remote Design File to Attach dialog box opens. SeeSelect Remote Design File dialog box in the Reference Guidefor descriptions of the controls in this dialog box.

3. In the URL field, specify the path to the remote reference file.


5. Click OK.

Reference File Agent

Reference File Agent enables you to automatically maintain localcopies of remote reference files. Upon loading the Reference FileAgent, each attached reference file is checked against a data fileto see if a URL has been associated. If so, an HTTP request isautomatically sent to check the last-modified date of the remote file



against the local copy. If a newer copy exists at the remote URL,the status of the file changes to “Out of Date.”

Status Description

N/A Reference file has no associated URL.

Current Remote file is the same age or older.

Unknown Remote file could not be found, or the last modifieddate was not available. Generally indicates thatthe URL is invalid, or that there was a networkerror when the remote site was contacted.

Out of Date Local copy of the reference file is olderthen the remote copy.

Reference files with more than one logical name have only one entry inthe Reference File Agent. Downloading the associated remote URLresults in the update of all logical entries associated with the local file.

To access the Reference File Agent1. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Ref Agent.

orFrom the E-Links tool box (Tools > Engineering Links),select Load RefAgent.

The Reference File Agent dialog box opens.


Reference FilesWorking with attached reference design files

Working with attached reference design files

Except for the attachment tool, reference design file tools operateon the reference file(s) that are selected in the Reference Filesdialog box. If no reference file is selected there, you are promptedto identify a reference file. See Identifying reference designfiles on page 5-25 for more information.

The �Ctrl� and �Shift� keys are used to select multiple reference files.

To copy elements from a reference fileto the active design1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box, select the

reference file in which the elements are located.

2. Turn on Display, Snap, and Locate.

3. Select or fence the elements to be copied.

4. In the Manipulate tool box, select the Copy tool (see page 3-35) .

5. Enter a data point to define the origin of the elements to be copied.

The elements are dynamically displayed as the pointeris moved about the screen.

6. Enter a data point to define the origin of the copies ofthe elements in the active design.

To copy elements from a reference file to the active designwithout moving them, enter the data points in steps 5 and6, above, without moving the pointer.

To turn the display of a reference file off or on1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box, click the

Display column of the entry for the reference file.



Alternative method — To turn the displayof a reference file off or on1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,

select the reference file.

2. Turn the Display check box off or on.

To turn the display of levels in a reference fileoff or on (in a particular view or views)1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,


2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Levels.

The Ref(erence) Levels dialog box opens.

Ref(erence)Levels dialog

box

3. From the View Number option menu, choose the desired view.

4. Click the number of any level or levels to toggle itsdisplay in the chosen view.

5. Click Apply to apply the level map to the chosen view.orClick All to apply the level map to all views.

Alternative method — To turn the displayof levels in a reference file off or on (in a



particular view or views)1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


2. From the dialog box’s list box, select the reference file.

3. Select the Numbers tab.

Level Managerdialog box with

the Numbers tabdisplayed


To control level symbology for a referencedesign file1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,




2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Level Symbology.

The Ref(erence) Level Symbology dialog box opens.

Ref(erence)Level

Symbologydialog box

The number and filename of the reference file display inthe title bar of the dialog box.


The Color, Style, and Weight controls are similar to those inthe Element Attributes dialog box (see Setting the ActiveElement Attributes on page 1-1).

4. In the list box on the left side of the dialog box, select a levelor a range of levels and click the Apply button.orDouble-click a level.


5. Click OK.



Alternative method — To control level symbologyfor a reference design file1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


2. In the dialog box’s list box, select the reference file.


The number and filename of the reference file are displayedin the title bar of the dialog box.

LevelManager

dialog boxwith the

Symbologytab displayed


The Color, Style, and Weight controls are similar to those inthe Element Attributes dialog box (see Setting the ActiveElement Attributes on page 1-1).

5. In the tab page’s list box, select a level or a range of levels andclick the Apply button at the bottom-right of the tab page.orDouble-click a level.




To turn the display of level symbology in areference design file on or off (in all views)1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,


2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Level Symbology.

The Ref(erence) Level Symbology dialog box opens.


4. Click OK.

Alternative method — To turn the displayof level symbology in a reference designfile on or off (in all views)1. From the Settings menu’s Level sub-menu, choose Manager.


2. In the dialog box’s list box, select the reference file.



5. Click Apply.

To turn snapping to elements in a referencedesign file on or off1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box, click the

Snap column of the entry for the reference file.

Alternative method — To turn snapping toelements in a reference design file on or off1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,




2. Turn the Snap check box on or off.

To control whether elements in a reference filecan be identified (for construction or )1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box, click the

Locate column of the entry for the reference file.

Alternative method — To control whetherelements in a reference file can be identified(for construction or )1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,


2. Turn the Locate check box on or off.

To change a reference file’s logical nameor description1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,

double-click the reference file.

The Attachment Settings dialog box opens.

2. In the Logical Name field, key in the new logical name.

3. In the Description field, key in the new description.

4. Click OK.



Alternative method — To change a referencefile’s logical name or description1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,


2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Attachment.


To move a reference file1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog

box, select the reference file.

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Move.

3. Enter a data point to define the origin of the move.

4. Enter a data point to define the destination.

To scale a reference file1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Scale.

3. In the Scale Reference File tool settings, enter the scale ratio.

4. Enter a data point to define the point about which toscale the reference file.

To rotate a reference file1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Rotate.

3. In the Rotate Reference File tool settings, enter the angle setting(s).




To mirror a reference file about a horizontal axis1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Mirror Horizontal.

3. Enter a data point to define the horizontal axis.

To mirror a reference file about a vertical axis1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Mirror Vertical.

3. Enter a data point to define the vertical axis.

To define a reference file clipping boundary(outside boundary of the displayed area)1. To define the reference file clipping boundary’s position,

place a fence with the Place Fence tool.

2. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialogbox, select the reference file.

3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Boundary.

The clipping boundary is a shape with up to 101 vertices.

The boundaries of a saved view can be used as the clipping boundarywhen a reference file is attached (see To attach a referencedesign file using a saved view on page 5-4).

These view attributes that affect how clipped referencefiles are displayed are set in the View Attributes dialog box(Settings menu > View Attributes).



View Attribute Effect

Ref(erence File)Boundaries

If on, reference file clipping boundaries aredisplayed in the view as a dashed line.

Fast Ref(erence File)Clipping

If on, all attached reference files areclipped to rectangular boundaries, whichare orthogonal to the view and enclose theboundary points. If off, the reference fileis displayed and plotted as specified by anon-rectangular clipping boundary.

To place a reference file clipping mask thatcovers part of the reference file that is insidethe clipping boundary1. To define the reference file clipping mask’s position, place

a fence with the Place Fence tool.

2. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialogbox, select the reference file.

3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Mask.

The fenced area of the reference file no longer displays.

More than one clipping mask can be specified for a referencefile. Reference file elements display only if they are inside theclipping boundary and outside all clipping masks.

To selectively delete a reference file’sclipping mask(s)1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Mask Delete.

A clipping mask is highlighted for deletion.

3. Accept the deletion.or



Reset to keep the highlighted clipping mask.

The next clipping mask, if any, is highlighted for deletion.

4. Repeat step 3 for each subsequent clipping mask.

To define a reference file front clippingplane (3D only)1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Front.

3. Enter a data point to define the front clipping plane depth.

The reference file updates with the new clipping plane.

To define a reference file back clippingplane (3D only)1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Back.

3. Enter a data point to define the back clipping plane depth.

The reference file updates with the new clipping plane.

To update reference design file elements in a view1. Key in REFERENCE UPDATE.

2. Identify the reference file by identifying one of its elements.orIdentify the reference file by keying in its logical name orfilename in the Key-in window.

To reload a reference file1. In the list box in the Reference (Design) Files dialog




2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Reload.

The reference file is read from the disk and redrawn.

Reloading a reference file lets you see changes that have beenmade to the reference file by a co-worker on the network sincethe reference file was last attached or reloaded.

To detach a reference file1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,


2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Detach.

An alert box asks you to confirm that the selectedreference file is to be detached.

3. Click OK.

Alternative method — To detach a reference file1. In the Level Manager dialog box’s list box, select the reference file.

2. In the list box, right-click and choose Detach Ref fromthe menu that appears.

The file is detached and its name is removed from the list box.

To detach all reference files1. In the Reference (Design) Files dialog box’s list box,

select any reference file.

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Detach All.

An alert box asks you to confirm that all referencefiles are to be detached.

3. Click OK.

Alternative method — To detach all reference files1. In the Level Manager dialog box’s list box, select all


Reference FilesModifying attachment information from the system command line

of the reference files.

2. In the list box, right-click and choose Detach Ref fromthe menu that appears.

All of the files are detached and their names areremoved from the list box.

Identifying reference design files

Identifying a reference file on which to operate is an alternativeto selecting the reference file in the Reference Files dialog box’slist box; the identification technique is typically used with toolsin the Reference Files tool box (see page 5-28) .

To identify a reference design file1. In a view window, identify an element in the reference file.

orIn the Key-in window, key in the reference file’sfilename or logical name.

The only way to identify multiple reference design files is toselect them in the Reference Files dialog box.

Modifying attachment information from thesystem command line

You can modify a design file’s attachment information (relatingto attached reference design files only) without entering theMicroStation environment. The following types of attachmentinformation can be modified in this manner:

• filename

• logical name

• description


Reference FilesModifying attachment information from the system command line

To modify attachment information fromthe system command line1. Start MicroStation with the following command line:

ustation -waREF <dgn_file>

A text window opens, in which “MAIN MENU” options display.

2. (Optional) — To list all reference file attachment info, orderedby slot number, press �1� to select MAIN MENU option“List all reference file attachments.”

3. Press �2� to select MAIN MENU option “Modifyreference file attachment.”

A prompt, “Enter slot number to modify >,” displays.

4. Enter the slot number for the reference file whose attachmentinformation you are modifying.

“MODIFY MENU” options are displayed.

5. To modify the filename associated with the attachment, press �2�.orTo modify the attachment’s logical name, press �3�.orTo modify the attachment’s description, press �4�.

A prompt, “Change to … >,” displays showing the choseninformation. The cursor blinks at the end of the prompt line.

6. In the prompt line, edit the filename, logical name, ordescription as desired, and press �Return�.

7. To modify additional information for the same referencefile, return to step 5.orPress �5� to return to MAIN MENU.

8. To modify additional information for a different referencefile, return to step 2.orTo exit, press �3�.


Reference FilesMerging reference design files

Merging reference design files

It is possible to merge a design file and all attached reference designfiles into a single output file. Merging ensures that all data attachedto a single design file (all views, angles of views, rendering settings,and other settings) are stored in a single location. The result of amerging operation is effectively a snapshot of the design file.

This capability is especially useful for plotting active files,where many users are frequently changing a file’s composition,views, settings, and attachments.

To merge the active design file and all attachedreference design files1. Key in MDL LOAD REFMERGE.

The last view in which a data point was entered is processed. Onlythe displayed levels of the processed view are copied to the outputfile. This output file has the same name as the active design file,but with the extension “.rcd” (which stands for “record drawing”).

To merge reference design files from thesystem command line1. Exit MicroStation.

2. Set the system environment variable MS_INITAPPS to “refmerge.”

3. Start MicroStation with the following commandline:ustation:v<view_number> <file_specification>

For example, ustation:v2 *.dgn processes all the design files inthe current directory and uses view 2 as the source view.

Be sure to unset the system environment variable MS_INITAPPSwhen the operation is complete.

There is no inverse of a reference design file merging operation.


Reference FilesReference Files tool box

Reference Files tool box

The tools in the Reference Files tool box (Tools menu >Reference Files) are used to:

• Attach reference design files to the active design file.

• Control the positioning, scaling, and orientation ofattached reference design files.

• Detach reference design files from the active design file.

These tools can also be selected in these ways:

• From the Tools menu in the Reference Files dialog box (Filemenu > Reference). The controls in the Reference Files dialogbox are used to adjust reference files settings as well.

• From the Tools menu in the Drawing Composition dialog box (Filemenu > Drawing Composition). The Drawing Composition dialogbox is designed for the creation of drawing sheets for 3D models.

To Select in the ReferenceFiles tool box

Attach a reference file to theactive design file.

Attach Reference File (seepage 5-30)

Change a reference file clippingboundary.

Define Reference File ClippingBoundary (see page 5-31)


Reference FilesReference Files tool box


Mask (cover) part of a referencefile that is inside the clippingboundary.

Define Reference File ClippingMask (see page 5-31)

Selectively delete a referencefile’s clipping mask(s).

Delete Reference File ClippingMask(s) (see page 5-31)

Set the back clipping plane fora 3D reference file.

Define Reference File BackClipping Plane (see page 5-31)

Set the front clipping plane fora 3D reference file.

Define Reference File FrontClipping Plane (see page 5-32)

Reread and redraw a reference fileto see recent changes made to it.

Reload Reference File (seepage 5-32)

Move a reference file.

Move Reference File (seepage 5-32)

Scale a reference file.

Scale Reference File (seepage 5-32)

Rotate a reference file.

Rotate Reference File (seepage 5-33)


Reference FilesAttach Reference File


Mirror a reference file abouta horizontal axis.

Mirror Reference File AboutHorizontal (see page 5-33)

Mirror a reference file abouta vertical axis.

Mirror Reference File AboutVertical (see page 5-34)

Detach a reference file fromthe active design file.

Detach Reference File (seepage 5-34)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX REFERENCE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Tools that operate only on reference raster files are not in theReference Files tool box. They can be accessed only throughthe Tools menu in the Reference Files dialog box (see UsingReference Raster Files on page 5-34).

Attach Reference File

Used to attach a reference design file to the active design file.See Attaching reference design files on page 5-1.


Reference FilesDefine Reference File Clipping Boundary

Define Reference File Clipping Boundary

Used to define a reference file clipping boundary. See theprocedure To define a reference file clipping boundary (outsideboundary of the displayed area) (see page 7-109) .

Define Reference File Clipping Mask

Used to place a reference file clipping mask. See the procedure Toplace a reference file clipping mask that covers part of the referencefile that is inside the clipping boundary (see page 5-22) .

Delete Reference File Clipping Mask(s)

Used to selectively delete a reference file’s clipping mask(s). See the proce-dure To selectively delete a reference file’s clipping mask(s) (see page 5-22) .

Define Reference File Back Clipping Plane

Used to set the back clipping plane for a 3D reference file. See the procedureTo define a reference file back clipping plane (3D only) (see page 5-23) .


Reference FilesDefine Reference File Front Clipping Plane

Define Reference File Front Clipping Plane

Used to set the front clipping plane for a 3D reference file. See the procedureTo define a reference file front clipping plane (3D only) (see page 5-23) .

Reload Reference File

Used to reread and redraw a reference file. See the proce-dure To reload a reference file (see page 5-23) .

Move Reference File

Used to move a reference file. See the procedure Tomove a reference file (see page 5-20) .

Scale Reference File

Used to scale a reference file. See the procedure Toscale a reference file (see page 5-20) .


Reference FilesRotate Reference File

Tool Setting Effect

Scale(Master:Ref)

Sets the ratio of design file MasterUnits to reference file masterunits. For example, to set fivedesign file master units for eachreference file master unit, keyin 5 in the left-hand field and 1in the right-hand field.

Rotate Reference File

Used to rotate a reference file. See the procedure To ro-tate a reference file (see page 5-20) .

Tool Setting Effect

Angle(s) Sets the rotation angle(s).

• In 2D, about the z-axis only.

• In 3D, about the x-, y-,and z axes.

Mirror Reference File About Horizontal

Used to mirror a reference file about a horizontal axis. See the procedureTo mirror a reference file about a horizontal axis (see page 5-21) .


Reference FilesMirror Reference File About Vertical

Mirror Reference File About Vertical

Used to mirror a reference file about a vertical axis. See the procedureTo mirror a reference file about a vertical axis (see page 5-21) .

Detach Reference File

Used to detach a reference file from the active design file. See theprocedure To detach a reference file (see page 5-24) .

Using Reference Raster FilesRaster image files can be attached as reference raster files similarlyto design files. Monochrome, continuous tone (gray-scale), or colorimages in a variety of supported image files can be attached.

A raster image file is composed of thousands of individual dots orpixels that describe an image in much the same way a picture ina newspaper is printed using varying dot densities.

In the CAD work environment, raster image files originatefrom the document scanning process. This process involves theelectronic scanning of source documents such as blueprints orphotographs into a raster image format using a purpose-builtscanning device and specialized software.

Once scanned in, the raster image file can be used in MicroStationas a background for a new design or to supplement a proposeddesign with complementary images.


Reference FilesRaster image types

Raster image types

There are three categories of raster image files in use at present. Thedistinction is based on the color depth, which refers to the numberof bits used to specify pixel color. Each type of raster image file —black-and-white (1-bit), palletized color (4- or 8-bit), and full or truecolor (24-bit) — has its advantages and disadvantages.

Monochrome (1-bit) imagery

The simplest of the raster file formats, monochrome, sometimesreferred to as black-and-white, images consist of either black orwhite pixels. Most closely associated with traditional manualdrawings, black and white images require the least amount ofresources to display and manipulate.

When working with good quality engineering drawings, thescanned results are commonly stored in a monochrome format.During the scanning process, the linework on the drawing isconverted to black dots while the background media is seen aswhite. In MicroStation this results in high contrast imagery thatworks well with existing design elements.

On the minus side, any subtle drawing features, such as fineshading, or sketching features, such as stippling, may be lost in theconversion. In addition, stains and other drawing imperfections mayshow up as very noticeable artifacts on the image itself.

Mapped (4- or 8-bit) color imagery

Next up on the image complexity scale is the palletized color rasterimage. Instead of only one bit of information being recorded foreach pixel in the image, 8-bit palletized color provides up to 256different colors. The term “palletized” comes from the use of acolor table to identify what color a specific pixel value from 0-255will appear as on the video screen. This is similar in operationto MicroStation’s own color table system.

Mapped color images are very useful in capturing continuous toneor gray scale images such as black-and-white photographs. Inthis case, the 256 values all represent a uniform scale of grays


Reference FilesRaster image file formats

from black to white. A common use of this type of image in CADis the aerial survey photograph, which is typically continuoustone, black-and-white. Aerial survey images are often used as abackground to a design project for “heads up” design.

Full (24-bit) color, mapped or RGB imagery

The third raster image type is called full color or RGB. Using eight bitsof information per primary color — Red, Green, and Blue — this imagetype provides the closest match to the original scanned document.Normally used with color photographs or color satellite imagery, 24-bitcolor images also take up more system resources resulting in slowerupdate times and limits to the overall size of the image. In mostinstances, this type of image is reserved for special projects that cannotbe properly displayed using one of the other raster file types.

Raster image file formats

In addition to its color depth, a raster image file is also characterizedby its file format. MicroStation lets you attach reference rasterfiles in any of over a dozen formats. This large collection of formatsincludes international standards, such as those developed andpublished by organizations such as CCITT, and application-specificde facto industry standard formats, such as TIFF.

For the list of supported raster image file formats, see SupportedImage Formats in the Administrator’s Guide.

A sample reference raster file application

As briefly described, one of the uses for reference raster files is asa background to an engineering project. Another use is historicaldrawing capture. Using a document scanner, old archival paperdrawings are scanned into a black-and-white raster file, which is inturn cleaned up and transferred to the design system. Once there, theraster file is attached to an existing design file as a background.

In the event changes need to be incorporated into the old drawing,


Reference FilesReference raster files and the Reference Files dialog box

that portion of the raster file where the changes occur can beerased (see Erasing part of a reference raster file on page 5-45)and the change drawn using standard MicroStation tools andtechniques. A drawing that combines raster and design fileelements is often referred to as a hybrid drawing.

Reference raster files and the Reference Files dialog box

The Reference Files dialog box has a unique set of controlsfor working with reference raster files.

To access the dialog box controls for workingwith raster files1. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Display menu, choose Raster.

ReferenceFiles dialog

box —controls for

working withreference

raster files

The title bar updates to indicate that the controls shown arefor working with reference raster files.

Reference raster file attachment settings

All reference raster file attachment settings are available duringthe attachment process and can be changed once a file is attached.By adjusting these settings for a specific attachment, you can:

• Include the raster image in any plotfile generated as partof the plotting output process.

• Invert the colors of the raster image similar to makinga negative of a photograph.


Reference FilesAttaching reference raster files

• Select a color in the raster image to be transparent, allowingdesign elements or other images to show through the image.This option is the only way to create image mosaics.

• Perform a halftoning operation on the raster image known asdithering to simulate the colors in the image when the video displayis not capable of showing all available colors (mapped or RGBraster image only). This option is particularly useful when workingwith a full color image on a system displaying only 256 colors.

• Apply a tint to the colors in the raster image as a meansof visually separating the image from neighboring designelements and other reference files.

If enabled, dithering constitutes an additional processing step in thedisplay of a reference raster file. This may be a consideration whenworking with large raster files (10 MB and greater).

Attaching reference raster files

As many as 64 raster files can be displayed at the same timein MicroStation. Each file is loaded into a layer, and thelayers are stacked on top of each other.

The attachment of a reference raster file is similar to the attachmentof a reference design file. The attachment can be made interactivelyby defining two points that identify where the image rectangle islocated in the design plane, or at a predefined location (Intergraphraster formats only). The latter is possible because the Intergraphformats include positional data in the file to map the rasterimage to a specific location on the design plane.

A reference raster file’s full path specification is stored as part ofthe attachment information. This differs from reference design fileattachments in which storing the full path specification is an option.

When working in a mixed operating system environment, use aconfiguration variable to specify the file path to referenced rasterfiles. This avoids the problem with dissimilar operating system pathspecifications. Alternatively, you can place the raster reference fileseither in the same directory as the active design file or one of thedirectories pointed to by the MS_RFDIR configuration variable. Forinformation about defining configuration variables, see Working With



Configuration Variables in the Administrator’s Guide.

To attach a reference raster file interactively1. From the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s Tools menu,

choose Attach > Interactive.

The Attach Raster Reference File dialog box opens.

2. Using the controls in the Attachment File group box, selecta raster file to attach. These controls are analogous to thosein the Open Design File dialog box.

When you select a file, additional information about the imageis shown in the Preview Attachment section of the dialogbox. Information shown includes the image size in horizontaland vertical pixels and the type of raster data.

3. (Optional) — To preview the selected raster file, clickthe Preview button.

4. (Optional) — In the Attachment Settings section’s Layer field, keyin a layer number to be associated with this reference raster file.

By default, Layer is set to one greater than the highest Layer



value already in use by previously attached reference raster files.

5. (Optional) — (required when the selected reference fileis already attached) In the Logical Name field, key in alogical name (up to 20 characters).

Logical names facilitate identification of reference files.

6. (Optional) — In the Description field, key in a description(up to 40 characters).

7. (Optional) — Use the remaining controls in the AttachmentSettings section to adjust the settings for this attachment:

Color — use to set the tint color for the entire raster image.

Transparent Color — use to set a transparent colorfor the raster image.

Transparent — turn on to make one color of the rasterimage transparent. This color is also used as a fill colorwhen clipping raster images. See Erasing part of areference raster file on page 5-45.

Invert — turn on to display a negative raster image.

Dither — turn on to modify the appearance of the raster image tomore closely match its true colors. In order to dither the image, anextra pass is required when reading the raster image from disk.

Plot — turn on to enable the raster image to be plotted.

View — turn on the numbered buttons for each view windowin which to display the raster image.

8. Click OK.

The Attach Raster Reference File dialog box closes, and you areprompted to enter coordinates to position the raster image.

9. Enter a data point to position the lower left corner.

A dynamic rectangle representing the raster image’saspect ratio is displayed.

10. Enter a data point to position the upper right corner.

To attach a reference raster file at a locationspecified in the raster file (Intergraph



image formats only)1. From the Tools menu in the Reference (Raster) Files

dialog box, choose Attach > Fixed.

The Attach Raster Reference File dialog box opens.

2. Follow steps 2–8 in the procedure To attach a referenceraster file interactively on page 5-39.

No further prompting occurs. The raster file is attached at the lastlocation where it was previously attached to a design file.

To modify a reference raster file’sattachment settings1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box, double-click

the raster file whose attachment settings you want to modify.

The Attachment Settings dialog box opens. The titlebar identifies the raster file.

2. Use the controls in the dialog box to modify the standardattachment settings. These controls are similar to those inthe Attach Raster Reference File dialog box (see To attach areference raster file interactively on page 5-39).

3. (Optional) — (not available with monochrome file attachments)To improve the displayed appearance of the raster image, keyin the desired value in the Display Gamma field.

Gamma correction scales the intensities of the image


Reference FilesManipulating reference raster files

to the specified scale factor.

4. (Optional) — (not available with monochrome file attachments)To improve the plotted appearance of the raster image, keyin the desired value in the Plot Gamma field.

5. Click OK.

Alternative method — To modify a referenceraster file’s attachment settings1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box, select the

raster file whose attachment settings you want to modify.

2. From the dialog box’s Settings menu, choose Attachment.


Manipulating reference raster files

This section covers the ways in which reference raster files can bemanipulated. Unlike design data which can be easily modified withhundreds of tools, raster data manipulation is limited to the toolsaccessible from the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s Tools menu.

All reference raster file modifications except for moving and scalingrequire changes to the raster image, but the changes may be savedto an alternate file to avoid changing the original data.

Moving

After you attach a reference raster file, you can change itslocation on the design plane.

To move a reference raster file1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box,



select the reference file to move.

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Move.

3. Enter a data point to define the origin of the move.

4. Enter a data point to define the destination.

Moving a reference raster file affects the attachment only and doesnot modify the image file, except for files in Intergraph formats,where the file location is also saved in the file.

Resizing

Just as the location of a reference raster file on the design planecan be modified, so can its overall size.

To resize a reference raster file1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box,

select the reference file to resize.

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Modify.

The status bar prompt reads “Identify corner to modify.”

3. Enter a data point near the corner of the raster imageyou wish to resize.

A dynamic rectangle representing the aspect ratio ofthe raster images is displayed with the corner closestto the data point in motion.

4. Move the pointer to increase or decrease the dynamic rectangleto the desired size, and then enter a data point.

The image reappears at its new size.

Resizing a reference raster file affects the attachment only anddoes not modify the image file, except for files in the Intergraphfile formats, where the new size is also saved in the file.

Rotating

Reference raster files can be rotated in 90 , 180 , or 270 increments.



To rotate a reference raster file1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box, select

the reference raster file to rotate.

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Rotate > 90,Rotate > 180, or Rotate > 270.


The Save Changed Image As dialog box opens.

4. In the Name field, enter a name for the modified image file.

5. Click OK.

If you did not change the filename or the file already exists, analert box asks if you want to overwrite the original file.

Rotating a reference raster file causes the raster file itself to be modified.

Mirroring

Reference raster files can be mirrored about a horizontal or vertical line.

To mirror a reference raster file about ahorizontal or vertical axis1. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box,

select the reference file to mirror.

2. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose MirrorHorizontal or Mirror Vertical.

3. Enter a data point to define the axis.


4. In the Name field, enter a name for the mirrored image file.

5. Click OK.


Mirroring a reference raster file causes the raster fileitself to be modified.



Erasing part of a reference raster file

In a reference raster file, you can clip (crop) an area outside a boundaryor erase (mask) an area that is inside a boundary, which can be any areaidentified by the fence, up to a maximum of 101 vertices. Images areerased by filling the area with the Transparent Color. These functionsare useful to create mosaics of several overlapping or adjacent images.

To define a boundary outside of which areference raster file is erased1. To define the reference file clipping boundary’s position,

place a fence with the Place Fence tool.

2. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box,select the reference file.

3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Boundary.


4. In the Name field, enter a name for the cropped image file.

5. Click OK.


To erase part of a reference raster file thatis inside the clipping boundary1. To define the part of the raster image to erase, place a fence

with the Place Fence tool (see page 3-24) .

2. In the Reference (Raster) Files dialog box’s list box,select the reference file.

3. From the dialog box’s Tools menu, choose Clip Mask.


4. In the Name field, enter a name for the masked image file.

5. Click OK.

If you did not change the filename or the file already exists, an


Reference FilesPlotting reference raster files

alert box asks if you want to overwrite the original file.

Cropping or masking a reference raster file causes theraster file itself to be modified.

Plotting reference raster files

You can plot reference raster files as follows:

• On pen plotters, raster images are reproduced through pen strokes.You can specify the resolution using the RASTER_RESOLUTIONrecord in the plotter driver file.

• On raster-oriented plotting devices, such as PostScript, youcan plot monochrome or color (halftoned) images.

For more information about plotting and printing, see thePrinting and Plotting Guide.

Adjusting the File Update SequenceWhen updating a view, MicroStation follows, by default,the following update sequence:

1 . All attached reference raster files are displayed first, followed by

2 . the active design file, and then

3 . the reference design files, roughly in their attachment order.

You can customize the update sequence used with the active design fileusing the Update Sequence dialog box. The customization capability isused to prioritize the display of overlapping elements and raster images.

The update sequence also affects the plotting process. For moreinformation, see the Printing and Plotting Guide.

To modify the file update sequence1. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Settings menu,

choose Update Sequence.

The Update Sequence dialog box opens. The list box


Reference FilesAdjusting the File Update Sequence

shows the current update sequence.

2. In the list box, select one or more reference files orthe active design file.

Use the �Shift� or �Ctrl� key to select a range or individual files.

3. Click the First, Last, Up or Down button to move the selected filesin the chosen direction on the list. Attached reference rasterfiles can be moved only to the first or last position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the sequence is modified as desired.

5. Click OK.

Attached raster reference files can only be moved as a group andthen only to the first or last position in the sequence.

Changes to the update sequence are saved to the active design fileon disk by choosing Save Settings from the File menu.

To restore the default update sequence1. From the Reference Files dialog box’s Settings menu,

choose Update Sequence.

The Update Sequence dialog box opens.

2. Click the Default button.

3. Click OK.

Once this procedure is performed and design file settings aresaved, any previous update sequence changes are lost. Thealternative is to override the active design file’s custom update


Reference FilesAdjusting the File Update Sequence

sequence with the default update sequence.

To override the custom update sequencewith the default1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences.


2. In the Category list box, select Reference File.

3. Turn on Ignore Update Sequence.

4. Click OK.

If Ignore Update Sequence option is on, the Update Sequence item inthe Reference Files dialog box’s Settings menu is disabled (dimmed).


Advanced 2D DraftingTechniquesIn this chapter, you will find procedures concerning some of themore advanced 2D operations in MicroStation, including:

• Permanently Grouping Elements (see page 6-1)

• Putting “Holes” in Solid Elements (see page 6-5)

• Using the Tools in the Fillets tool box (see page 6-5)

• Using the Tools in the Groups tool box (see page 6-8)

• Using Multi-lines (see page 6-23)

• Using the Tools in the Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30)

• Associating Elements (see page 6-46)

• Isometric Drawing (see page 6-48)

• Using the Tools in the Isometric tool box (see page 6-50)

• Using Curves (see page 6-54)

• Using the Tools in the Create Curves tool box (see page 6-68)

• Selecting Elements Based on Attributes (see page 6-120)

• Using Auxiliary Coordinate Systems (see page 6-122)

• Using the Tools in the ACS tool box (see page 6-125)

• Digitizing (see page 6-130)

Permanently Grouping ElementsSome groupings in MicroStation, such as the set of selectedelements and the fence contents, are temporary. Other groupings


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesUsing complex chains and complex shapes

are permanent. These groupings include:

• levels (see Element Level Manipulations on page 3-116).

• complex chains and complex shapes (see Using complexchains and complex shapes on page 6-2).

• groups (see Using groups on page 6-3).

• graphic groups (see Using graphic groups on page 6-3).

Using complex chains and complex shapes

A complex chain (sometimes called a “complex string”) is a seriesof connected open elements (lines, line strings, arcs, curves)grouped for manipulation as a single entity.

A complex shape, like a complex chain, is a series of connectedopen elements grouped for manipulation as a single object. Thedifference is that the first and last element in a complex shapeare connected, thereby closing a shape.

Left: Complex shapes created from arc and line string with CreateComplex Shape tool. Center and right: Union and intersection ofcircle and block created with Create Region tool.

The easiest way to create complex chains and shapes is to use the PlaceSmartLine tool (see page 6-80) . The tools in the Groups tool box (seepage 6-8) can be used to create complex chains and shapes as well.

Complex chains and complex shapes are complex elements. Acomplex element is a grouping of two or more elements that ismanipulated as a single entity. Cells are also complex elements.(If you develop application software for MicroStation, you shouldknow that a “complex header” element is stored in the design filefor each grouping.) Use the Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) inthe Groups tool box (see page 6-8) to drop the status of a complexelement; that is, convert the complex element to its component


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesUsing groups

elements so they can be manipulated individually.

Using groups

A group is a complex element whose component elementsneed not be connected.

To create a group1. Select the elements that will compose the group.

2. From the Edit menu, choose Group.

The handles change from indicating each selected elementto indicating the group.

To break up a group1. Select the group.

2. From the Edit menu, choose Ungroup.

The handles change from indicating the group to indicatingeach selected element.

You manipulate and modify groups just as you do simple elements. Forinformation about manipulation and modification of simple elements,see Manipulating and Modifying Elements on page 4-1.

A group is actually an unnamed cell. Unlike named cells,groups are not defined in cell libraries. For this reason groupsare sometimes called “orphan cells.”

Using graphic groups

Graphic groups are the most flexible grouping technique inMicroStation. Without “breaking up” the grouping you can add,remove, or manipulate individual member elements. Whether youractions change the whole graphic group or only part of it dependsupon whether you turn Graphic Group Lock on or off.

The Groups tool box (see page 6-8) has tools for creating a graphic


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesUsing graphic groups

group and adding and removing elements to or from a graphic group.

To manipulate or modify a graphic group1. Turn on Graphic Group (Lock) in the Settings menu’s

Locks sub-menu.

2. Select the appropriate tool to perform the desiredmanipulation or modification. See Specialized Manipulationand Modification Tools on page 3-13.

3. Identify the graphic group.

4. Continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool.

To manipulate or modify one or more memberelements of a graphic group1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the element(s).

2. Perform the desired manipulation or modification. SeeManipulating and Modifying Selected Elements on page 3-11.orSelect the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulationor modification in the Manipulate tool box (see page 3-34)or Modify tool box (see page 3-87) .

3. If using a specialized tool, continue as called for in theinstructions for using the tool.

Alternative method — To manipulate or modifyone or more member elements of a graphic group1. Turn off Graphic Group (Lock) in the Settings menu’s

Locks sub-menu.

2. Select the appropriate tool to perform the desired manipulationor modification in the Manipulate tool box (see page 3-34)or Modify tool box (see page 3-87) .

3. Identify an element in the graphic group.

4. Continue as called for in the instructions for using the tool.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPutting “Holes” in Solid Elements

Putting “Holes” in Solid ElementsWhen you draw a shape that represents a hole in a solid element,the interior of that shape cannot be hatched or patterned, andthe background will show “through” the hole.

The block is asolid; the circle

and hexagon areholes, and so are

not hatched.

Whether a closed element is a solid or hole is determinedby its Area attribute:

The Change Element to Active Area tool (see page3-62) in the Change Attributes tool box is used tochange the Area of a closed element(s).

The Group Holes tool (see page 6-22) in the Groups tool boxis a special tool for putting holes in solid elements. The toolis named as it is because it creates a group consisting of theholes and the solid (see Using Groups on page 6-3).

Fillets tool box

The tools in the Fillets tool box are used to fillet planar elements.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Parabolic Fillet

To Select in the Fillets tool box

Construct a circular filletbetween two elements.

Construct Circular Fillet(see page 3-113) 1

Construct a parabolic filletbetween two elements.

Construct Parabolic Fillet(see page 6-6)

Construct a chamfer betweentwo lines or adjacent segmentsof a line string or shape.

Construct Chamfer (seepage 3-115) 2

1 Also in the Modify tool box.

2 Also in the Modify tool box.

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX FILLET OFF | ON | TOGGLE

To perform filleting or chamfering “on the fly,” use the PlaceSmartLine tool (see page 6-80) .

Construct Parabolic Fillet

Used to construct a parabolic fillet (curve element) between two lines.

Tool Setting Effect

Distance The distance between thepoints of tangency.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Parabolic Fillet

Tool Setting Effect

Type Sets how the parabola is aligned:

Horizontal—aligned with thehorizontal view axis. Used inhighway design to join intersectinggrade lines. All IGDS parabolasare horizontal.

Symmetric—aligned with theidentified sides.

Truncate Controls which side(s) aretruncated.

None—neither side is truncated.

Both—both sides are truncatedat their point of tangencywith the fillet.1

1 If a fillet is constructed between two closed elements or an open and a

closed element, the closed element(s) are not modified.

To construct a parabolic fillet1. Select the Construct Parabolic Fillet tool.

2. Identify the first line.

3. Identify the second line.

4. Accept the fillet and truncations, if any.

Construct ParabolicFillet. Left:

Horizontal. Right:Symmetric. Distance

is denoted by “D.”Truncate is set to

Both.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesGroups tool box

Key-in: PLACE PARABOLA HORIZONTAL | MODIFY |NOMODIFY MODIFY | NOMODIFY

In 3D, both elements must be on the same plane to be filleted.

To place a B-spline curve in the form of a parabola, use the PlaceConic tool (see page 6-85) in the Curves tool box.

Groups tool box

The tools in the Groups tool box are used to create and manipulatecomplex chains, complex shapes, and graphic groups.

To Select in the Groups tool box

Break up a complex element(s)or an element(s) of a special typeinto simpler components.

Drop Element (see page 6-9)

Create a complex chain (opencomplex element).

Create Complex Chain (seepage 6-11)

Create a complex shape (closedcomplex element) from individualopen elements.

Create Complex Shape (seepage 6-14)

Create a complex shape from theunion, intersection, or differencebetween closed elements orby “flood fill.” Create Region (see page 6-16)

Create a graphic group.1

orAdd elements to an existinggraphic group.orCombine two or more graphicgroups into one graphic group.

Add to Graphic Group (seepage 6-20)


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesDrop Element

To Select in the Groups tool box

Remove (drop) an element(s)from a graphic group.orBreak up a graphic group intoindividual elements.

Drop from Graphic Group(see page 6-21)

Select a solid element and thehole or holes to be associatedwith the solid.

Group Holes (see page 6-22)

1 To create a group (orphan cell), select the elements and choose Group from

the Edit menu. A group is not the same as a graphic group.

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX GROUPS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Drop Element

Used to break up an element(s) into simpler components. Tool settingsare used to specify the element types on which the tool operates.

Tool Setting Effect

Complex If on, complex elements (cell, complexchain, complex shape, text node,surface, or solid) are dropped intotheir components.

Dimensions If on, dimension element(s) aredropped into lines, line strings,ellipses, arcs, and text.

LineStrings/Shapes

If on, line strings and shapes areconverted to series of individualline elements.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesDrop Element

Tool Setting Effect

Multi-lines If on, multi-line elements are convertedto sets of line strings, lines, and/or arcs.

Shared Cells If on, shared cells are dropped. If ToGeometry is chosen from the optionmenu, they are dropped into theircomponents; if To Normal Cell is chosen,they are converted to unshared cells.

Solids If on, a SmartSurfaces or SmartSolids isdropped to either Wireframe or Surfaces.

Text If on, text characters in text elementsare converted to the individualelements that are used to draw thecharacters — lines, line strings, arcs,ellipses, and shapes.

To break up an element into its components1. Select the element(s).

2. Select the Drop Element tool.

3. Turn on the appropriate tool settings to specify the elementtype(s) on which to operate.

4. Accept the settings and initiate the drop.

Only the selected elements of the specified type(s) are dropped.The tool has no effect on selected elements of other types. Ifnone of the selected elements is of the specified type(s), themessage “Nothing to drop” displays in the status bar.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCreate Complex Chain

Alternative method — To break up an elementinto its components1. Select the Drop Element tool.

2. Turn on the appropriate tool settings to specify the elementtype(s) on which to operate.


4. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP ELEMENT

Drop Element cannot be used to drop elements more than one level at atime. For example, if you turn on Complex and Line Strings/Shapesand operate on a complex shape that contains two line strings, thecomplex shape is dropped but the component line strings are not.That is, the operation results in two line strings.

Create Complex Chain

Used to create a complex chain — an open complex element thatis formed from a series of open elements (lines, line strings,arcs, curves, and open B-spline curves) that can be manipulatedas if it were a single primitive element. The resulting complexchain takes on the active element attributes regardless of theattributes of the component elements.



Tool Setting Effect

Method How elements are added to the complex chain:

Manual—Each element is manually identified.

Automatic—After the first element isidentified, if one endpoint of an additionalopen element(s) is within the Max. Gap,one of the elements can be added.

Max(imum)Gap

The greatest allowable distance betweenelements when the Method is Automatic.

If zero, only elements that connect (havea common endpoint) are added.

To create a complex chain manually1. Select the Create Complex Chain tool.

2. Set Method to Manual.

3. Identify the first element to include in the chain.

4. Continue to identify elements to add to the chain.

If they are not already connected, the elements areconnected as they are identified.1

5. Reset to complete the complex chain.

To create a complex chain automatically1. Select the Create Complex Chain tool.

2. Set Method to Automatic.


4. Accept additional elements as they highlight.

If the elements do not have a common endpoint,

1 These connections appear as “lines” that connect the endpoints of the elements. These

connections are part of the complex chain but are not elements. They disappear

when complex status is dropped. It is recommended that elements be connected

manually before being included in a complex chain.



they are connected.1

If a fork is found, that is, if more than one element is withinthe Max. Gap, the message “FORK -- Accept or Reset to SeeAlternate” displays in the status bar.

5. Enter a data point to accept the highlighted element.orReset to highlight an alternate element. Continue to Resetuntil the desired element highlights.

6. Creation ends automatically if there are no elements withinthe Max. Gap. Reset to stop the process before it reachesthis point and complete the complex chain.

Create ComplexChain with Method

set to Automatic.After entering data

point 2, the topelement in the fork

was highlighted(top). To highlightthe alternate path,

a Reset was entered(bottom).

Key-in: CREATE CHAIN MANUAL | AUTOMATIC

To convert a complex chain back to its individual components,use the Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) .

It is best to create complex chains from elements thatshare common endpoints.

To draw a complex chain of connected arcs and line segmentswith one tool, use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80)


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCreate Complex Shape

in the Linear Elements tool box.

Create Complex Shape

Used to create a complex shape (a closed complex element that can bemanipulated as if it were one primitive element) from a series of openplanar elements (lines, line strings, arcs, curves, and open B-splinecurves). The resulting complex shape takes on the active elementattributes regardless of the attributes of the component elements.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how elements are added to complex shape.

Manual—Each element is manually identified.

Automatic—After the first element isidentified, if one endpoint of an additionalopen element(s) is within the Max. Gap,one of the elements can be added.

Max(imum)Gap

The largest distance allowed betweenconsecutive elements, if Method is Automatic.

If zero, only elements that connect (have acommon endpoint) can be added.



Fill Color Complex shape is filled with this color,if the Fill Type is Outlined; otherwisedisabled (dimmed).


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCreate Complex Shape

To create a complex shape manually1. Select the Create Complex Shape tool.

2. Set Method to Manual.


4. Continue to identify elements to add to the shape.

The elements are connected as they are identified, unlessthey already are connected.2

5. If the first and last elements connect, accept the shape.

If the first and last elements do not connect, Reset to close theshape and create a line element between their endpoints.

To create a complex shape automatically1. Select the Create Complex Shape tool.

2. Set Method to Automatic.


4. Accept additional elements as they highlight.

If the elements do not have a common endpoint,they are connected.2

If a fork is found; that is, if more than one element is withinthe Max. Gap, the message “FORK -- Accept or Reset to SeeAlternate” displays in the status bar.

5. Enter a data point to accept the highlighted element.orReset to highlight an alternate element. Continue to Resetuntil the desired element highlights.

Key-in: CREATE SHAPE MANUAL | AUTOMATIC

If an element is accepted that is connected to the first elementidentified, the complex shape is closed. If no element is found within

2 These connections appear as “lines” that connect the endpoints of the elements.

These connections are part of the complex chain but are not elements. They

disappear when complex status is dropped. It is recommended that elements be

connected before being included in a complex chain.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCreate Region

the Max. Gap, a line element is created between the open endpointsof the first and last elements and the complex shape is closed.

To convert a complex shape back to its individual components,use the Drop Element tool (see page 6-9) .

To draw a complex shape of connected arcs and line segmentswith one tool, use the Place SmartLine tool (see page 6-80)in the Linear Elements tool box.

Create Region

Used to create a complex shape (a closed complex elementthat can be manipulated as if it were one primitive element)from either of the following:

• The union, intersection, or difference between two ormore closed elements.

• A region bounded by elements that have endpoints that arecloser together than the Max(imum) Gap.



Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how elements are added to the complexshape and the element types from whichit can be created, as follows.

Intersection—Edges bound the intersection oftwo or more closed, planar elements.1

Union—Edges bound the union of two ormore closed, planar elements.1

Difference—Edges bound the difference oftwo or more closed, planar elements.1

Flood—Edges bound the area enclosedby elements that either touch oneanother or whose endpoints fall withinthe Maximum Gap.2

Fill Type Sets the Active Fill Type.

None—If on, the complex shape is not filled.

Opaque—If on, the complex shape isfilled with the Active Color.

Outlined—If on, the complex shape isfilled with the Fill Color.

Fill Color Complex shape is filled with this color, ifthe Fill Type is Outlined. When Fill Typeis Opaque, Fill Color displays the ActiveColor, which can also be set from thislocation. When Fill Type is None, the FillColor option is disabled (dimmed).

KeepOriginal

If on, the original elements remainin the design.



Tool Setting Effect


(When Method is set to Flood) If on, closedelements inside the selected area are includedas part of the new complex shape.

Max(imum)Gap

(When Method is set to Flood) Sets thelargest distance allowed between consecutiveelements. If zero, only elements thatconnect can be added.

1 Shapes, ellipses, circles, or complex shapes.

2 Somewhat akin to the “flood fill” tool in many paint programs.

To construct a complex shape from theintersection or union of elements1. Select the Create Region tool.




As you accept each successive element, the edges that donot serve as the basis for the new shape are hidden. Theresulting shape displays with highlighting.



Intersection “Elements do not intersect” displays.

Union A shape is placed over each element.




Left: Intersection.Right: Union. Keep

Original is off.

To construct a complex shape from thedifference between elements1. Select the Create Region tool.

2. Set Method to Difference.


3. Identify the element to subtract from.

4. Identify the element(s) to subtract from the elementthat was identified in step 3.3

5. Accept the last element.

Method set toDifference

3 If these elements are inside the element that was identified in step 3, then their Area

attribute is converted to Hole. The effect is the same as using the Group Holes tool.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesAdd to Graphic Group

To construct a complex shape by “flood fill”1. (Optional) — Select the bounding elements.

2. Select the Create Region tool.


4. (Optional) — If you want the complex shape to include any closedelements that are inside the area enclosed by the boundingelements, turn on Locate Interior Shapes.

5. Enter a data point in the area enclosed by the bounding elements.

6. Accept the complex shape.

Method set to Flood.Keep Original is off.

Key-in: CREATE REGION DIFFERENCE | FLOOD |INTERSECTION | UNION

Add to Graphic Group


• Create a graphic group.

• Add elements to an existing graphic group.

• Combine two or more existing graphic groups into a


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesDrop from Graphic Group

single graphic group.

To create a graphic group or add elementsto a graphic group1. Select the Add to Graphic Group tool.


If the element is not in a graphic group, a new graphicgroup is created.

If the element is in a graphic group, all elements subsequentlyidentified are added to that graphic group.

3. Identify another element(s) to add to the graphic group.

4. Accept the graphic group.

Key-in: GROUP ADD

Drop from Graphic Group


• Remove (drop) an element(s) from a graphic group.

• Drop the grouped status of the entire graphic group; that is,break up the graphic group into its components.

To remove an element(s) from a graphic group1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, turn off Graphic Group.

2. Select the Drop from Graphic Group tool.

3. Identify the element(s) to be removed from the graphic group.

4. Accept the drop.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesGroup Holes

To break up an entire graphic group1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, turn on Graphic Group.

2. Select the Drop from Graphic Group tool.

3. Identify a member of the graphic group.

4. Accept the drop.

Key-in: GROUP DROP

Group Holes

Used to identify a solid element and the hole elements tobe associated with the solid.

The solid and its associated hole(s) can be shapes, ellipses, and/orcomplex shapes that are in the same plane. Holes are not patternedand appear “transparent” in rendered views.

To group a solid and a hole(s)1. Select the Group Holes tool.

2. Identify the solid element.

3. Identify the hole element(s) to associate with the solid.

4. Accept the last element.

5. Reset.

The solid and holes are consolidated into a group (orphan cell). Thearea attribute (solid or hole) of each element is set appropriately.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesUsing Multi-lines

The holes immediately follow the solid in the group definition.

Group Holes.The block isidentified as

the solid andthe circle and

hexagon areholes (Top

view).

Key-in: GROUP HOLES

One way to create a 3D solid of projection or revolution witha hole(s) in it is to use the Group Holes tool to associate theplanar boundary element with its associated holes beforegenerating the solid with the Extrude tool (see page 7-93) or theConstruct Revolution tool (see page 7-97) .

Rendered viewof a solid of

projectiongenerated from

the groupcreated in the

illustration.

Using Multi-linesA multi-line element consists of up to 16 independently-defined



lines and optional end caps and joints.

Multi-lines

• The active multi-line definition specifies the form of multi-linesplaced with the Place Multi-line tool. The component lines canbe varying distances apart. Each component line can haveits own level, color, line style, and line weight.

• You can define and save multi-lines as styles in settings files.

• You can easily “clean up” intersections in multi-lines andmodify individual multi-line components using the tools inthe Multi-line Joints tool box (see page 6-30) .

• You can associate multi-lines to other elements (seeAssociating multi-lines on page 6-47).



General Procedure — To define a multi-line

1. From the Element menu, choose Multi-lines.

The Multi-lines dialog box opens.

The controls show the settings that constitute the active multi-linedefinition. The defined multi-line (if there is one) is showngraphically in the dialog box’s lower left corner.

The Component option menu controls which controlsdisplay in the dialog box.

2. Add any desired component lines to the multi-line definition. SeeTo add a line to a multi-line definition on page 6-26.

3. Adjust each new component line’s offset. See To adjust acomponent line’s offset on page 6-26.

4. Give the component lines any desired attributes (class, level, color,line weight, and line style) to override the active element attributeswhen the multi-line is placed. See To give a component lineattributes that override the active element attributes on page 6-26.

5. Add any desired color fill to the areas between component lines.See To add color fill to a multi-line definition on page 6-26.

6. Delete any unwanted lines from the multi-line definition. See Todelete a component line from a multi-line definition on page 6-27.

7. Define a start cap for the multi-line. See To define a startcap for a multi-line on page 6-27.

8. Define an end cap for the multi-line. See To define an endcap for a multi-line on page 6-27.

9. Adjust the settings for joints (a line optionally displayed at vertices



in the multi-line). See To define multi-line joints on page 6-28.

10. Save the new multi-line definition as a settings group component.See Settings Files in the Administrator’s Guide.

To add a line to a multi-line definition1. From the Component option menu, in the Multi-lines

dialog box, choose Lines.

2. From the dialog box’s Edit menu, choose Insert.

A new line displays in the lines list box. It has no offsetvalue and no attribute override settings.

To adjust a component line’s offset1. From the Component option menu in the Multi-lines


2. Select the desired line in the list box.

3. Key in a positive or negative offset value (in workingunits) in the Offset field.

To give a component line attributes that overridethe active element attributes1. From the Component option menu in the Multi-lines



3. To give the selected line attributes of class, level, color, line weight,and line style (to override the active element attributes), turn onthe desired controls to the right and adjust the settings.

The controls work the same way as the controls in theElement Attributes dialog box.

To add color fill to a multi-line definition1. In the Multi-lines dialog box, turn on Fill Color.

2. From the adjacent color palette, choose the desired fill color.



To delete a component line from amulti-line definition1. From the Component option menu in the Multi-lines



3. From the dialog box’s Edit menu, choose Delete.

To define a start cap for a multi-line1. From the Component option menu in the Multi-lines

dialog box, choose Start Cap.

The controls for defining a start cap display. A graphicrepresentation of the start cap definition displays in thelower left corner of the dialog box.

2. Turn on one, two, or all of the start cap types:

Line — a straight line across the end of the multi-line.

Outer Arc — a single arc bridging the two outermost lines.

Inner Arcs — arcs between each component line and thecomponent line nearest it on each side.

3. To give the start cap attributes of class, level, color, line weight,and line style (to override the active element attributes), turn onthe desired controls to the right and adjust the settings.


To define an end cap for a multi-line1. From the Component option menu in the Multi-lines

dialog box, choose End Cap.

The controls for defining an end cap are displayed. A graphicrepresentation of the end cap definition is displayed inthe lower left corner of the dialog box.

2. Turn on one, two, or all of the end cap types:

Line — a straight line across the end of the multi-line.



Outer Arc — a single arc bridging the two outermost lines.

Inner Arcs — arcs between each component line and thecomponent line nearest it on each side.

3. To give the end cap attributes of class, level, color, line weight,and line style (to override the active element attributes), turn onthe desired controls to the right and adjust the settings.


To define multi-line joints1. From the Component option menu in the Multi-lines

dialog box, choose Joints.

The controls for defining multi-line joints display. A graphicrepresentation of the joint displays in the lower left cornerof the dialog box (if Display Joints is on).

2. To have joints display, turn on Display Joints.

3. To give the joints attributes of class, level, color, line weight, andline style (to override the active element attributes), turn on thedesired controls to the right and adjust the settings.


To retrieve a multi-line definition stored asa style and make it active1. From the Settings menu, choose Manage.

The Select Settings window opens. The drawing settings groups in


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCompatibility with previous versions

the open settings file are listed in the Group list box.

2. From the dialog box’s Style menu, choose Multi-Line.

The Select Multi-line Style dialog box opens.

3. In the list box, select the desired style.

4. Click Load.

The active multi-line definition is set as specified inthe style definition.

Compatibility with previous versions

You can “drop” a multi-line; that is break it up into component lines,line strings, and so on. This can be done to convert it to elements thatcan be displayed and modified with MicroStation 3.x or earlier or tobe able to manipulate the multi-line’s components individually.

You can also “freeze” a multi-line (temporarily convert it into a formthat can be displayed by MicroStation 3.x or earlier).

To drop all multi-lines in the fence contents, key inFENCE DROP MLINE.

To freeze all multi-lines in the fence contents, along with other elementsnot recognized by MicroStation 3.x or earlier, key in FENCE FREEZE.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesMulti-line Joints tool box

To “drop” a multi-line

1. In the Drop tool box, select the Drop Multi-linetool (see page 3-85) .


3. Accept the drop.

Alternative method — To “drop” a multi-line1. Select the multi-line.

2. In the Drop tool box, select the Drop Multi-line tool.

To “freeze” a multi-line1. Key in FREEZE.


3. Accept the freeze.

Multi-line Joints tool box

The tools in the Multi-line Joints tool box are used to construct jointsat multi-line intersections, construct cuts (breaks) in multi-lines, andmodify multi-line components. Multi-lines are placed with the PlaceMulti-line tool (see page 1-37) in the Linear Elements tool box.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesMulti-line Joints tool box

To Select in the Multi-lineJoints tool box

Construct a closed cross joint.

Construct Closed Cross Joint(see page 6-32)

Construct an open cross joint.

Construct Open Cross Joint(see page 6-33)

Construct a merged cross joint.

Construct Merged Cross Joint(see page 6-34)

Cut (break) a component linein a multi-line segment.

Cut Single Component Line(see page 6-35)

Cut (break) all component linesin a multi-line segment.

Cut All Component Lines(see page 6-36)

Construct a closed tee joint.

Construct Closed Tee Joint(see page 6-37)

Construct an open tee joint.

Construct Open Tee Joint(see page 6-38)

Construct a merged tee joint.

Construct Merged Tee Joint(see page 6-39)


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Closed Cross Joint

To Select in the Multi-lineJoints tool box

Construct a corner joint.

Construct Corner Joint (seepage 6-40)

Remove a break in a multi-line.

Uncut Component Lines(see page 6-41)

Partially delete a multi-linewithout losing previouslycreated breaks.

Multi-line Partial Delete(see page 6-42)

Move a multi-line’s work line orone of its component lines.

Move Multi-line Profile (seepage 6-43)

Change the end cap of amulti-line.

Edit Multi-line Cap (seepage 6-45)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX JOINTS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Construct Closed Cross Joint

Used to construct a closed cross joint between two multi-lines.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Open Cross Joint

To construct a closed cross joint1. Select the Construct Closed Cross Joint tool.

2. Identify the multi-line to break.

3. Identify the other multi-line.

4. Accept the joint.

Construct ClosedCross Joint

Key-in: JOIN CROSS CLOSED

Construct Open Cross Joint

Used to construct an open cross joint between two multi-lines. Allcomponent lines of the first identified multi-line are broken. Onlythe outside component lines of the second are broken.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Merged Cross Joint

To construct an open cross joint1. Select the Construct Open Cross Joint tool.

2. Identify the first multi-line.

3. Identify the second multi-line.


Construct OpenCross Joint

Key-in: JOIN CROSS OPEN

Construct Merged Cross Joint

Used to construct a merged cross joint between two multi-lines.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCut Single Component Line

To construct a merged cross joint1. Select the Construct Merged Cross Joint tool.

2. Identify one multi-line.



Construct MergedCross Joint

Key-in: JOIN CROSS MERGE

Cut Single Component Line

Used to cut (break) a component line in a multi-line segment.

To cut a single component line1. Select the Cut Single Component Line tool.

2. Identify the component line at the point where cutting will begin.

3. Enter a data point to define the end of the cut.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCut All Component Lines

Cut SingleComponent Line

Key-in: CUT SINGLE

To re-connect component lines that have been cut, use the UncutComponent Lines tool (see page 6-41) .

Cut All Component Lines

Used to cut (break) all component lines in a multi-line segment. Thecuts are made on an axis perpendicular to the identified component line.

To cut all component lines1. Select the Cut All Component Lines tool.

2. Identify any component line at the point where cutting will begin.

3. Enter a data point to define the end of the cut.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Closed Tee Joint

Cut All ComponentLines

Key-in: CUT ALL

To re-connect component lines that have been cut, use the UncutComponent Lines tool (see page 6-41) .

When a multi-line is cut, it remains a single element. To delete part ofa multi-line, use the Multi-line Partial Delete tool (see page 6-42) .

Construct Closed Tee Joint

Used to extend or shorten a multi-line to its intersection withanother multi-line and construct a closed tee joint.

To construct a closed tee joint1. Select the Construct Closed Tee Joint tool.

2. Identify the multi-line to extend or shorten.

3. Identify the multi-line to which the first multi-line willbe extended or shortened.



Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Open Tee Joint

Construct Closed TeeJoint

Key-in: JOIN TEE CLOSED

When a multi-line is shortened, the part of the multi-lineidentified is kept.

Construct Open Tee Joint

Used to extend or shorten a multi-line to its intersection withanother multi-line and construct an open tee joint.

To construct an open tee joint1. Select the Construct Open Tee Joint tool.





Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Merged Tee Joint

Construct Open TeeJoint

Key-in: JOIN TEE OPEN

Construct Merged Tee Joint

Used to extend or shorten a multi-line to its intersection withanother multi-line and construct a merged tee joint.

To construct a merged tee joint1. Select the Construct Merged Tee Joint tool.





Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Corner Joint

Construct MergedTee Joint

Key-in: JOIN TEE MERGE


Construct Corner Joint

Used to extend or shorten two multi-lines to their intersectionand construct a corner joint.

To construct a corner joint1. Select the Construct Corner Joint tool.

2. Identify one multi-line.




Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesUncut Component Lines

Construct CornerJoint

Key-in: JOIN CORNER


Uncut Component Lines

Used to remove a break in a multi-line, when the multi-linewas broken with one of the cut or join tools.

To uncut a single component line1. Select the Uncut Component Lines tool.

2. Identify one end of the break.



Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesMulti-line Partial Delete

Uncutting onecomponent line

To uncut all component lines1. Select the multi-line(s).

2. Select the Uncut Component Lines tool.

Key-in: UNCUT

Multi-line Partial Delete

Used to partially delete a multi-line without losing anypreviously created breaks.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesMove Multi-line Profile

Tool Setting Effect

Cap Mode Determines whether end caps are createdand how they are defined:

None—No caps are created. The end capangle will be 90 . Effect is same as Cut AllComponent Lines tool (see page 6-36) .

Current—Uses the start cap and end capdefinitions of the identified multi-line.

Active—Uses the active multi-line definition.

Joint—Uses the identified multi-line’s jointdefinition instead of end cap definition.Ensures end cap will always be 90 .

To delete part of a multi-line1. Select the Multi-line Partial Delete tool.

2. Identify the multi-line at one end of the part to delete.

3. For an open multi-line, enter a data point to define theother end of the part to delete.orFor a closed multi-line, enter a data point to define thedirection in which to delete. Then enter another data pointto define the other end of the part to delete.

Key-in: MLINE PARTIAL DELETE

Move Multi-line Profile



Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesMove Multi-line Profile

• Move an individual component line of a multi-line.

• Reposition the work line of a multi-line without movingits component lines.

Tool Setting Effect

Move Determines the tool’s operation:

Workline—Move the identified multi-line’swork line without moving its component lines.

Component—Move a single component lineof the identified multi-line.

To move a multi-line’s work line1. Select the Move Multi-line Profile tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Move to Workline.


A dashed dynamic line displays. This represents the work line.

4. Enter a data point to reposition the work line.

With typical usage, the appearance of the component linesis unchanged. However, if you move the dynamic work linefar enough to cause segments to reverse direction it becomesimpossible to preserve the appearance of the multi-line.When this occurs, the entire multi-line dynamically displaysshowing its new configuration. Entering a data point whenthis occurs modifies the entire multi-line.

To move one of a multi-line’s component lines1. Select the Move Multi-line Profile tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Move to Component.

3. Identify the component line.

The identified component line dynamically highlights. Shouldyou move the highlighted component line in a manner thataffects other components of the multi-line (end caps, forinstance), these components also highlight and dynamically


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesEdit Multi-line Cap

change with the identified component line.

4. Enter a data point to reposition the component line.

Key-in: MLINE EDIT PROFILE

Edit Multi-line Cap

Used to change the end cap of a multi-line.

Tool Setting Effect

Cap Mode Sets type of end cap:

None—Removes any end caps. The end capangle will be 90 . Effect is same as Cut AllComponent Lines tool (see page 6-36) .

Current—Does not change the end cap.Enabled only when Adjust Angle is turned on.

Active—Uses the active multi-linedefinition for the end cap.

Joint—Uses the multi-line’s joint definitioninstead of its cap definitions. Ensuresend cap will always be 90 .

Adjust Angle If on, allows the angle of the end capto be adjusted.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesAssociating Elements

To change a multi-line’s end cap1. Select the Edit Multi-line Cap tool.

2. Identify the multi-line nearest the end cap to be modified.

3. If Adjust Angle is off, accept the modified cap.orIf Adjust Angle is on, enter a data point to adjust theangle of the end cap.

Key-in: MLINE EDIT CAP

Using AccuDraw with the Adjust Angle option makes it easier tomake the end cap perpendicular to the rest of the multi-line.

Associating ElementsUnder most circumstances, elements are static: when an element isplaced in a design, its position is defined simply by the design planecoordinates on which it lies. It retains that position in the designplane until you move it with an element manipulation tool.

One exception to this rule is association, in which an element’sposition in the design plane is defined in relation to anotherelement. When that other element is moved, the associatedelement moves with it. For example, dimension elements can beassociated with the elements whose dimensions they display. Thedimensions they display are updated when the dimensions of theelements with which they are associated change.

Elements that can be associated with other elements

The types of elements that can be associated with other elementsare dimensions, multi-lines, and shared cells. The association ismade when the dimension, multi-line, or shared cell is placed. Theprocedures for associating shared cells and multi-lines are covered here.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesAssociating shared cells

Associating shared cells

When a shared cell is associated with another element, the cell’sorigin is associated with a point on the other element.

To associate a shared cell with another element1. From the Element menu, choose Cells.


2. Turn on Use Shared Cells.

3. In the list box, select the desired cell.

4. In the Active Cells section, click the Placement button.

5. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, turn on Association (Lock).

6. In the Cells tool box, select the Place Active Cell tool.(In the Main tool frame, Place Active Cell is the default“representative” of the Cells tool box.)

The prompt in the status bar is “Place Active Cell.”

7. Snap a tentative point to the element to which thecell is to be associated.

8. Enter a data point to accept placement and associationof the Active Cell.

Associating multi-lines

When a multi-line is associated with another element, oneor more vertices of the multi-line are associated with pointson another element (or elements).

To associate a multi-line with another element1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, or in the tool settings for


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesIsometric Drawing

the Place Multi-line tool, turn on Association (Lock).

2. In the Linear Elements tool box, select the Place Multi-line tool.

Vertices of the multi-line that are not associated with otherelements can be placed in the normal way (as if placing aline string). When you are ready to place a vertex associatedwith another element, continue with step 3.

3. Snap a tentative point to the element to which themulti-line’s vertex is to be associated.

4. Enter a data point to accept placement of the vertex of themulti-line and its association with the other element.

5. Continue placing vertices of the multi-line or Reset tocomplete the multi-line.

The vertices of a multi-line can further be associated withvertices of other multi-lines.

Isometric DrawingIsometric drawing is a technique used to represent 3D relationshipsin a 2D design. There are special tools to quickly and accuratelyplace isometric representations of blocks and circles, and you canconfigure the screen pointer to make the job even easier. However,such drawings are not 3D models; they are strictly illustrative.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesIsometric Drawing

To set the Isometric (drawing) Plane1. From the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, choose Full.


2. From the Isometric Plane option menu, choose Top,Left, Right, or All.

You can also set the Isometric Plane in the tool settings window forthe Place Isometric Block and Place Isometric Circle tools.

To force each data point to lie on theIsometric Plane1. In the Settings menu’s Locks sub-menu, turn on Isometric (Lock).

When a linear element is placed, it “snaps” to the Isometric Plane.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesIsometric tool box

Line string placedwith Isometric Lock

on and IsometricPlane set to Top.

Note how the linesare constrained.

To configure the pointer for isometric drawing1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences.


2. In the Preferences dialog box’s Category list box, select Operation.

3. From the Pointer Type option menu, choose Isometric.

The pointer’s cross hairs indicate graphically the IsometricPlane in which elements are placed.

4. (Optional) — From the Pointer Size option menu, choose Full View.

The pointer’s cross hairs extend to the edges of the screen,facilitating alignment of new elements with elementsin the same isometric plane.

5. Click OK.

Isometric tool box

The tools in the Isometric tool box are used to represent3D relationships in a 2D design.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace Isometric Block

To Select in the Isometrictool box

Place a shape that representsa rectangle projected from theisometric drawing plane.

Place Isometric Block (seepage 6-51)

Place an ellipse that representsa circle projected from theisometric drawing plane.

Place Isometric Circle (seepage 6-52)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ISOMETRIC OFF | ON | TOGGLE

To create 3D models, draw in 3D. See 3D Design andModeling on page 7-71.

Place Isometric Block

Used to place a planar shape representing a rectangle projectedfrom the isometric drawing plane.

Tool Setting Effect

(Isometric)Plane

Defines angles of isometric axes:

Top—30 and 150

Left—90 and 150

Right—30 and 90



Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace Isometric Circle

Tool Setting Effect





To place an “isometric” block1. Select the Place Isometric Block tool.


3. Enter a data point to define the corner that isdiagonal from the first.

Place Isometric Blockwith Isometric Plane

set to Top (a), Left(b), and Right (c).

Key-in: PLACE BLOCK ISOMETRIC

Place Isometric Circle

Used to place a planar ellipse representing a circle projectedfrom the isometric drawing plane.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace Isometric Circle

Tool Setting Effect

Plane Defines angles of isometric axes:

Top—30 and 150

Left—90 and 150

Right—30 and 90



Fill Color Sets the color with which the “isometriccircle” is filled.



To place an “isometric” circle1. Select the Place Isometric Circle tool.


3. Enter a second data point on the circumference.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesUsing Curves

Place IsometricCircle with the

Isometric Plane set toTop (a), Left (b), and

Right (c).

Key-in: PLACE CIRCLE ISOMETRIC

Using CurvesWith manual drafting tools, you can draw a point curve (a curvethrough a series of points) with a French curve. MicroStation has, ineffect, a variety of mathematical French curves for placing curveson the basis of data points in the design plane, including pointcurves and NURBS (non-uniform rational B-splines).

Composite curves (see page 6-59) actually can consist of a combinationof line segments, arcs, and Bézier curves.

You can draw curves without any understanding of themathematics behind them, or you can create curves basedon sophisticated mathematical formulas (see Creating anyconceivable curve on page 6-60).

The easiest way to become familiar with curve placement toolsis to enter a series of data points or a line string, then constructdifferent curves based on those elements. With B-splines, youcan adjust the settings as you watch the curve update, thenaccept the curve when it has the correct shape.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPoint curves

Point curves

Point curves are based on a relatively simple mathematical formula —there are no settings that control the curve’s shape. As you place a pointcurve, it is dynamically displayed as you enter data points. Of course,you can place active points or other elements to snap to as you placethe point curve, and you can enter the data points using AccuDraw.

Point curves are placed with the Place Point or Stream Curve tool(see page 1-42) in the Linear Elements tool box.

Point curves

B-spline curves

A B-spline curve is more complex mathematically than a pointcurve. A B-spline curve’s shape is determined by the numberand location of its poles, which are represented as vertices ofthe curve’s control polygon and its order.

B-spline curve andits control polygon.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesB-spline curves

B-spline curves are drawn with the Place B-spline Curve toolinthe Create Curves tool box as well as several Special-purpose2D B-spline tools. (see page 6-59)

You can place a B-spline curve by entering data points or constructit by identifying a line string or shape — this is determined bychoosing Placement or Construction, respectively, from the DefineBy option menu in the tool settings window.

Methods by which the curve is calculated

Unlike point curves, there are a number of Methods, whichcan be chosen from the Method option menu, for calculatingthe final curve that results.

Method Data points or vertices of element define

Define Poles Vertices of control polygon.

Through Points Points on the curve.

Least Squares A set of points that the curve approximatesor is “fit” to.

Catmull-Rom A set of points that is closely approximated.

These illustrations show the different types of B-spline curvesconstructed from the same line string.

B-spline curves constructed based on a line string. Method set to, fromleft: Define Poles, Through Points, Least Squares, Catmull-Rom.

Least SquaresThe third Method, Least Squares, is similar to Through Points, exceptthat you can adjust the number of poles in the control polygon.



If the number of poles is lower than the number of data points orvertices, the curve is fit using the least squares method.

Generally, the more poles in the control polygon, the better the curvewill fit a regular shape. In the following illustration, the line string onwhich the B-splines were based is shown as a solid line. The controlpolygons are displayed, as they are in MicroStation, as dashed lines.

B-spline curvesby Least

Squares basedon the same line

string: three,four, and five

poles.

Catmull-RomThe Catmull-Rom curve is popular with aircraft and ship hulldesigners — it passes directly through the data points or vertices onwhich it is based, as do point curves and B-splines Through Points. Ingeneral, the approximation is more accurate than with other methods.

However, Catmull-Rom curves avoid these problems:

• Point curves are flat between the first and second data points aswell as between the next-to-last and last data points.

• With very irregular shapes, B-spline curves ThroughPoints can develop unwanted loops.

Line string inshape of square

as the basisfor B-spline:

Through Points(left) and

Catmull-Rom(right).



B-spline curve attributes

B-spline curve settings are set in the B-splines dialog box, which isopened by choosing B-splines from the Element menu. The ModifyCurves tool box’s Change to Active Curve Settings tool (see page 6-102)is used to change the attributes of existing B-spline curves.

Display of the curve or control polygonYou can turn on or off the display of either the control polygon or curve.

OrderIn practical terms, a B-spline curve’s order defines the curve’sdistance from the control polygon’s poles. The greater the order,the further the curve can lie from the poles of its control polygon.A high-order curve is “freer” than a low-order curve.

The limit to a curve’s order is the number of poles: You cannot place aB-spline curve with a greater order than the number of poles.

B-spline curves(Method set to

Define Polesand Define

By set toConstruction).

The Orderincreases from

left to right.In these cases,

the line stringsare congruent

with the controlpolygons.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesComposite curves

ClosureA closed B-spline starts and ends at the same point,and encloses an area.

A closed B-spline can also be periodic, which means that all derivativesof the curve (including tangency) are continuous through the point. Inother words, a periodic B-spline passes “smoothly” through the pointat which its ends are joined, without a kink in the curve.

In a design, a B-spline whose ends do not meet can be called “open.”Mathematically, however, an open B-spline starts at its first pole andends at its last pole, and the ends need not meet. Setting the toolsetting Closure to Open results in mathematically open B-spline curves.

You can use the Change to Active Curve Settings tool (see page6-102) to change a periodic B-spline’s definition in the designfile to be a mathematically open B-spline without changing itsshape. This is helpful when the design file is to be transferred toa package that does not support periodic B-splines.

Special-purpose 2D B-spline tools

These tools in the Create Curves tool box are used to place thefollowing special types of 2D B-spline curves.

The Place Conic tool (see page 6-85) is usedto place a conic section — a hyperbola,parabola, or partial ellipse.

The Place Spiral tool (see page 6-86) is usedto place a transitional spiral — this is mostcommonly used for highway design.

The Construct Interpolation by Arcs tool (see page6-83) is used to place a complex chain of arcs thatpasses through a given set of points.

Composite curves

The Place Composite Curve tool (see page 6-80) in the Create Curves


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCreating any conceivable curve

tool box lets you place a complex element that can contain linesegments, arcs, and a special type of B-spline curve, a Bézier curve.

Bézier curves

A Bézier curve is a B-spline curve with the same number of poles as itsOrder. Thus, a fourth-order B-spline with four poles is a fourth-orderBézier curve. These are very popular as they allow control of a curve’sstarting and ending position as well as the tangents at those positions.

Compositecurve

comprisinga line, an arc,

a Bézier curve,another line,

and an arc

The handles that appear when placing a Bézier curve with thePlace Composite Curve tool (see page 6-80) control the tangentsat the ends of the curve segment. The line defined by the first andsecond poles is the initial tangent direction, and the line definedby the third and fourth poles is the final tangent direction. Thelength of the handles controls the size of the tangent at each end.(A tangent is a vector so it has direction and magnitude.)

Creating any conceivable curve

The Curve Calculator tool (see page 6-93) lets you create any



conceivable planar curve, based on a mathematical formula.

• A pre-defined curve can be selected from a libraryand placed in the design.

• New curves can be defined and added to the supplied libraries.This is similar to programming a programmable calculator.

Equations that are dimmed in the list box are locked. Modifyingthem can corrupt the curve’s formula and should only be done if youunderstand how the curve is defined and wish to modify its underlyingdefinition. See Defining a Curve’s Formula on page 6-63.

To unlock an equation, key in FORMULA UNLOCK [number].

General Procedure — To place a pre-defined curve

1. In the Create Curves tool box, select the Curve Calculator tool.

The Curve Calculator dialog box opens.

2. From the File menu in the Curve Calculator dialogbox, choose Open.

The Resource File to Open dialog box opens.

3. Select a curve library file and click the OK button.

4. From the File menu in the Curve Calculator dialog



box, choose Open Curve.

The Open Curve dialog box opens.

5. Select a curve in the list box and click OK.

The defining equations are listed in the CurveCalculator dialog box.

6. Edit values in the equation that defines the curve. See To editvalues in the equation that defines a curve on page 6-62.

7. From the Tools menu in the Curve Calculator dialog box,choose Place Parametric Curve.

8. Enter a data point to define the curve’s origin.

The curve is defined relative to the coordinate system of theview in which this data point is entered.

To edit values in the equation that defines a curve1. In the Curve Calculator dialog box, select a row in the list box.

orKey in the variable’s name in its text item.

The variable and value appear in the text items below the list box.

2. Key in a new value.



General Procedure — To define a curve’s formula

1. In the Create Curves tool box, select the Calculate Curve tool.

The Curve Calculator dialog box opens.

2. In the Curve field, key in the curve’s name.

3. Define the equations.

4. Lock the equations that, if modified, would corrupt the definition.See To lock an equation on page 6-63 for details.

5. Place a curve to test the equation.

6. Save the equation.

Some mathematical knowledge is needed to define a new curve.A curve is defined by the parametric equations for the x, y, andz coordinates of the curve. These formulas give the value ofthe articular coordinate as a parameter “t” that is between zeroand one (0.0 ≤ t ≤ 1.0). This is the standard parametric form ofa curve described in mathematical text books.

Variable names are limited to 8 characters and the right sideof the equation is limited to 40 characters. There is also alimit of 25 formulas to define a curve.

To lock an equation1. In the Curve Calculator dialog box, select the equation in

the list box and key-in FORMULA LOCK.

Key in FORMULA LOCK [number].

number is the equation’s number (the count starts at zero).

The locked equation is grayed-out in the list box andcannot be modified.

Examples

A sinusoid with an amplitude of 5 and wave length of 10 canbe defined with the following equations:



Formula Syntax

x(t) = 10u(t) x = 10*u

y(t) = 5sin(u(t)) y(t) =5*sin(u)

u(t) = 2πt u(t) =2*pi*t

The third equation is necessary since “t” must be between zero andone and we want an entire period of the sine wave, from 0–2π.

Auxiliary functions such as this can be defined. By using twoauxiliary variable-value equations for the amplitude and wavelength a more flexible definition results.

x = wl*uy = amp*sin(u)u = 2*pi*tamp = 5wl = 10

This definition could be used to place sine waves of any amplitudeand wave length by modifying the last two equations. It is clear,however, that the first three equations should not be modified,since doing that would corrupt the sine wave’s definition. Toprevent this you can lock the first three formulas. These equationswould then be dimmed in the list box and the end-user wouldnot be able to harm them. The status of an equation, locked orunlocked, is saved with the equation in the library file; it is setusing the Formula Lock/Unlock tool described below.

Dimensionality

Curves can be defined in 2 or 3 dimensions; if no z formula is presentthe z value defaults to 0, thereby creating a planar curve.

Function format

The formulas defining the x, y, and z coordinates of the curve canuse trigonometric, hyperbolic, logarithmic, exponential, or powerfunctions. The format for such functions is as follows:



Function Returns

sin (value) sine of value1

cos (value \) cosine of valuea

tan (value) tangent of valuea

asin (value) arc sine of valuea

acos (value) arc cosine of valuea

atan (value) arc tangent of valuea

atan2 (y, x) arctan(y)/xa

sinh (value) hyperbolic sine of value

cosh (value) hyperbolic cosine of value

tanh (value) hyperbolic tangent of value

asinh (value) inverse hyperbolic sine of value

exp (value) evalue

ldexp (x,p) 2xp

log (value) natural logarithm of value

log10 (value) base 10 logarithm of value

ldexp (x, y) xy

sqrt (value) square root of value

1 Depends on global angle units setting

Calculate Curve also understands standard C operators.

Deriving a curve from an existing curve

A curve can be defined from a set of formulas alone or can be derivedfrom formulas and an existing curve (the root curve). If a curve isderived, then these values can be referenced in the equations.

These values are derived from the Frenet frame of the root curveand are updated depending on the value of “t,” the curve parameter.All these values begin with an underscore.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesB-spline Curves tool frame

Value Description

_rx x coordinate of root curve’s position

_ry y coordinate of root curve’s position

_rz z coordinate of root curve’s position

_tx x coordinate of root curve’s tangent

_ty y coordinate of root curve’s tangent

_tz z coordinate of root curve’s tangent

_mx x coordinate of root curve’s normal

_my y coordinate of root curve’s normal

_mz z coordinate of root curve’s normal

_bx x coordinate of root curve’s binormal

_by y coordinate of root curve’s binormal

_bz z coordinate of root curve’s binormal

_kappa curvature of root curve

_tau torsion of root curve

The following constants can be referenced in equations:

Value Description

pi π

e e

B-spline Curves tool frame

Tools for creating and modifying B-spline curves are accessedfrom the B-spline Curves tool frame.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesB-spline Curves tool frame

To Use tools in the

Place a B-spline curve or Curveby a tangent,orPlace a composite curve,orConstruct interpolation by arcs,orPlace a conic, spiral, or helix,orOffset an element,orExtract surface rule lines,orCalculate a curve.

Create Curves tool box (seepage 6-68)

To Use tools in the

Change to active curve settings,orReduce curve data,orExtend a curve,orChange the direction of anelement,orConvert an element to a B-spline,orBlend a curve,orDrop a B-spline curve,orFlatten a curve,orEvaluate a curve.

Modify Curves tool box (seepage 6-100)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX BSPLINE OFF | ON | TOGGLE


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCreate Curves tool box

Create Curves tool box

The Create Curves tool box has tools that are used to draw curvesand extract surface rule lines from a B-spline surface.

To Select in the Create Curvestool box

Place a planar B-spline curve.

Place B-spline Curve (seepage 6-69)

Create a B-spline curve thatpasses through a set of pointswhile maintaining user-definedtangent directions at those points. Create Curve by Tangents

(see page 6-77)

Place a composite curve, whichcan have line strings, arcs, orBézier curves as components.

Place Composite Curve (seepage 6-80)

Place or construct a complexchain of arcs that passes througha given set of points.

Construct Interpolation byArcs (see page 6-83)

Place a parabola, hyperbola,or partial ellipse.

Place Conic (see page 6-85)

Place a clothoid, Archimedes,or logarithmic spiral.

Place Spiral (see page 6-86)

Place a helix in a 3D design.

Place Helix (see page 6-88)


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace B-spline Curve

To Select in the Create Curvestool box

Construct a B-spline curve thatis the same distance from theidentified element at all points.

Offset Element (see page 6-89)

Extract a B-spline curve(s) froma B-spline surface.

Extract Surface Rule Lines(see page 6-90)

Place a curve by defining itsmathematical formula.

Curve Calculator (see page 6-93)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVECREATE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

To construct a curve along the intersection of two 3D elements, use theConstruct Trim tool (see page 7-161) in the Modify Surfaces tool box.

B-spline-specific settings are set in the B-splines dialog box, whichis opened by choosing B-splines from the Element menu.

Place B-spline Curve

Used to place a planar B-spline curve. For general information aboutcurve placement, see Using Curves on page 6-54.



Method Description Illustration

DefineControlP[oin]ts

The poles (vertices) ofthe control polygon aredefined by data pointsor the vertices of theselected line string orshape. The number ofpoles must be greaterthan or equal to theorder. If Closure isOpen, the curve isplaced between thefirst and last pointsor vertices.




ThroughPoints

The curve passesthrough the pointsdefined by the datapoints or the verticesof the identified linestring or shape and isinterpolated at eachpoint. The curveis cubic (Order=4)with continuoussecond derivatives— this minimizes thecurvature.• If Closure is set

to Open, Numberof Poles = DataPoints + 2

• If Closure is set toClosed, Numberof Poles = DataPoints

L[east]-Square[s]ByTol[erance]

The curve isapproximated basedon the points defined bythe data points or thevertices of the identifiedline string or shape. Themaximum deviation ofthe input points fromthe curve is adjustableusing the Tolerancesetting. After theapproximation curve iscreated, the maximumdeviation and the meandeviation display inthe status field.




L[east]-Square[s]ByNum[ber]

The sum of the squaresof the distances fromthe data points orthe vertices of theselected line string orshape to correspondingpoints on the curve isminimized. The controlpolygon has the activenumber of Poles.If the number of datapoints or vertices is thesame as the number ofPoles, the curve passesthrough all the datapoints or vertices,• If Closure is set

to Open, thecurve begins andends at the firstlast data points,respectively.

• If Closure is set toClosed, the curveapproximates alldata points orvertices and neednot pass throughany of them,unless there arethe same numberas the numberof Poles.

If the maximum errorexceeds the Tolerance1

, the maximum errordisplays in status bar.

1 The Tolerance is set in the B-splines dialog box (Element > B-splines).




Cat-mull-Rom

Fourth-order (cubic)NURBS curve that isinterpolated. Extrapoles are added toclosely resemble theshape defined by thedata points entered,using this formula:• Number of Poles =

3 × (Data Points- 1) + 1

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the manner in which the curve isgenerated (see large table above).

Input By Sets the manner in which the inputpoints are located.

Enter Data Points—The curve is placed byentering data points. The curve dynamicallyupdates while new points are entered orwhen the indicator is moved.

Pick Line String—The curve is constructedbased on the vertices of an identifiedline string or complex chain (results inopen B-spline) or shape or complex shape(results in closed B-spline).

Closure Sets whether the curve is Open or Closed. Notavailable if Method is Catmull-Rom.

Order Sets the order of the equation that defines thecurve (2-15), when Method is set to DefineControl Pts. or L-Square By Num.

Poles Sets the number of poles (3–101), whenMethod is set to L-Square By Num.



Tool Setting Effect

Tolerance Sets the fitting or approximation tolerance,when Method is set to L-Square By Tol. Theminimum distance from any one of the inputdata points to the curve is less than thisvalue. The minimum distance is computedby projecting a point to the curve.

End Tangent Sets the manner in which the curve’s tangencyto adjacent elements is controlled, whenMethod is set to Through Points or L-SquareBy Tol and Closure is set to Open:

Automatic—default tangent directionsare automatically computed.

Both—starting and ending tangent directionsare defined graphically.

Start Tangent—starting tangent directionis defined graphically.

End Tangent—ending tangent directionis defined graphically.

Through EndPoints

Sets the manner in which the curve’sbeginning and ending points are located,when Method is set to L-Square By Tol.

If On, the curve passes through the firstand the last input points. Otherwise, thecurve’s endpoints are computed basedon the Tolerance setting.



To place a B-spline curve by entering data points1. Select the Place B-spline Curve tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Enter Data Points.

3. Enter a data point to define the curve’s beginning.

4. Enter a series of data points.

Method Each data point defines

Define ControlPts.

One of the control polygon’s poles.

ThroughPoints orCatmull-Rom

A point through which the curve must pass.

L-Square ByTol or L-SquareBy Num

One of a set of points that the curve mustapproximate.

5. If Closure is set to Open, enter a data point to define the curve’s end.

6. Reset.

The curve is generated unless Method is set to ThroughPoints or L-Square By Tol and Closure is set to Open. Inthis case, continue with step 7.

7. If End Tangent is set to Start Tangent, End Tangent, or Both, entera data point to define the starting or ending tangent direction.

8. If End Tangent is set to Both, enter a data point to definethe ending tangent direction

To construct a B-spline curve by identifyingan element1. Select the Place B-spline Curve tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Pick Line String.

3. Identify a line string or complex chain to construct an open curve.or



Identify a shape or complex shape to construct a closed curve.

Method Each vertex defines

Define ControlPts.

One of the control polygon’s poles.

ThroughPoints orCatmull-Rom

A point through which the curve must pass.


One of a set of points that the curve mustapproximate.

4. Accept.

The curve is generated unless Method is set to ThroughPoints or L-Square By Tol and Closure is set to Open. Inthis case, continue with step 5.

5. If End Tangent is set to Start Tangent, End Tangent, or Both, entera data point to define the starting or ending tangent direction.

6. If End Tangent is set to Both, enter a data point to definethe ending tangent direction.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCreate Curve by Tangents

Top Left: DefineControl Pts.; TopRight: ThroughPoints; Bottom

Left: Catmull-Rom,Bottom Right:

L-Square by Num.B-spline curvesconstructed by

identifying a linestring or shape. The

same curves could beplaced by enteringdata points at the

same position as thevertices. In these

examples, the Orderis 3, and for LeastSquares only, the

number of Poles isalso 3.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT | PLACE BSPLINE CURVE CATMULLROM| LEASTSQUARES | POINTS | POLES

Create Curve by Tangents

Used to create a B-spline curve that passes through a set of pointswhile maintaining user-defined tangent directions at those points. Youcan define points and tangent directions interactively using data pointsor by identifying elements. In the latter case, the curve passes throughthe endpoints of the identified elements and uses directions of theelements as tangent inputs. The curve may be either quadratic or cubic.



Tool Setting Effect

Input By Sets the manner in which the inputpoints are located.

Enter Tangents—graphically define aseries of vectors.

Pick Elements—identify existing elements.

Curve Type Sets the curve fitting algorithm:

Cubic—cubic (order 4)

Quadratic—quadratic (order 3)

To create a B-spline curve that passesthrough a set of data points with interactivelyspecified tangent directions1. Select the Create Curve by Tangents tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Enter Tangents.

3. Enter a data point to define the curve’s starting point.

4. Enter a data point to define the tangent direction atthe defined starting point.

5. Enter a data point to define the next point throughwhich the curve will pass.

6. Enter a data point to define the tangent direction at thepoint defined in the previous step.

7. For each additional point through which the curve will pass,repeat steps 5 (see page 6-78) -6 (see page 6-78) .

8. Reset to generate the curve.



As data pointsare entered,

defining eachcurve point (1) and

tangent direction(2), graphics

dynamically displaythe point(s) and thetangent direction(s).

After placing therequired data points,

entering a resetgenerates the curve.

To create a B-spline curve that passes through thevertices of existing elements and whose tangentdirections correspond to the elements’ directions1. Select the Create Curve by Tangents tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Pick Elements.

3. Identify an element.


5. Accept.

The curve is generated. It passes through the endpointsof the identified elements, and its tangent directions


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace Composite Curve

correspond to the elements’ directions.

Identify theelements (1,

2, 3) fromwhich the

curve is to begenerated.

Accept (4) togenerate a

curve passingthrough the

end points ofthe selected

elements,with itstangent

directionscorresponding

to theelements’

directions.

Place Composite Curve

Used to place a composite curve, which can have line strings, arcs,or Bézier curves (fourth order B-spline curves with four poles) ascomponents. If all components are line segments and there are fewerthan 101 vertices, a line string or shape is placed in the design;otherwise a complex chain or complex shape is placed.



Tool Setting Effect

SmoothCorners

If on, intersections of arcs and Béziercurves are smooth.

Planar If on and the active design file is 3D, thecomposite curve is forced to lie on one plane.

Mode Sets the type of component that is placed(see step 4 below)).

Arc Radius (Arc by Edge or Arc by Center only) Ifon, sets the arc radius.

Arc Angle (Arc by Edge or Arc by Center only) Ifon, sets the arc sweep angle.

To place a composite curve1. Select the Place Composite Curve tool.

2. From the tool settings window’s Mode option menu,choose the component.

3. If this is the first component in the composite curve, entera data point to define the origin.

4. Enter data points to place the component (follow theprompts in the status bar).

Mode Enter data points to Similar to

Arcs By Edge Define point on arc.Define arc endpoint.

Place Arc (seepage 1-75)

Arcs By Center Define center (defines radius,unless Radius is on).Define sweep angle (unless ArcAngle is on).

Place Arc (seepage 1-75)



Mode Enter data points to Similar to

Bézier Curves Define first anchor point.Define first direction point (definetangency).Define second anchor point (endpoint).Define second direction point.

None

Line Segments Define endpoints of segments. PlaceSmartLine (seepage 6-80)

5. To place more of the same component, return to step 4.orTo choose a different component, return to step 2.orTo complete an open composite curve, Reset.orTo complete a closed composite curve, click the Close Elementbutton, or key in CLOSE ELEMENT.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Interpolation by Arcs

Place Composite Curve. Clockwise from top left: A: Smooth Cornersis on. At first, Mode is Arcs By Center. After data point 3, Modeis set to Line Segments, back to Arcs By Center after data point4, and so on. The figure is closed by entering a data point at thesame location as the origin or by clicking Close Element.

B: Mode is Arcs by Center. For first two arcs, Smooth Corners isoff. After data point 5, Smooth Corners is on.

C: Mode is initially Line segments. After data point 3, the Mode ischanged to Arcs By Edge and the Line Style is also changed.After data point 4, the Line Weight is changed.

D: The Fibonacci curve is placed with Mode set to Arcs by Center,Smooth Curves on, and Arc Angle set to 90 .

The Arc Radius is 1 for first two arcs and is changed to 2 and 3after data points 5 and 7, respectively. E: Mode is Bézier curve.The odd-numbered data points define anchor points; the evennumbered ones define direction (tangency) points. A Reset wasentered after data point 8 to complete the curve.

Key-in: PLACE COMPOSITE

To combine contiguous open elements of any type into a complexchain (open) or complex shape (closed), use the Create ComplexChain tool (see page 6-11) or Create Complex Shape tool (seepage 6-14) in the Groups tool box.

Construct Interpolation by Arcs

Used to place or construct a complex chain of arcs that passes througha given set of points. The arcs are joined smoothly — that is, theyhave tangent continuities. The given points can either be specifiedas a line string or shape element or entered interactively.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConstruct Interpolation by Arcs

Tool Setting Effect

Input By Sets how the complex chain is defined.

Enter Data Points—The complex chain isplaced by entering data points.

Pick Line String—The complex chain isconstructed based on the vertices of anidentified line string or shape.

To place an arc interpolation by enteringdata points1. Select the Construct Interpolation by Arcs tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Enter Data Points.

3. Enter a data point to define the beginning of the interpolation.

4. Continue to enter data points to define other interpolation points.

5. Reset to complete the definition.

To construct an arc interpolation byidentifying an element1. Select the Construct Interpolation by Arcs tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Input By to Place Line String.

3. Identify a line string or shape from which to constructthe interpolation.

4. Accept the construction.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace Conic

Key-in: CONSTRUCT ARCS INTERPOLATION

Place Conic

Used to place a conic section — a hyperbola, parabola, or partial ellipse— as a third-order uniform B-spline curve with three poles.

Tool Setting Effect

(Section)Type

Sets whether the conic section is aHyperbola, Parabola,1

or Partial Ellipse.2

Define By Sets the point defined in step 4 in theprocedure below.

Shoulder Points—the shoulder pointis defined.

Tangents—the intersection of the tangentlines is defined.

Rho The range depends on the Section Type:

• If Hyperbola, 0.5 < ρ < 1.0

• If Parabola, ρ = 0.5.

• If Partial Ellipse, 0.0 < ρ < 0.5.

1 To construct a parabolic fillet to two elements, use the Construct

Parabolic Fillet tool.

2 To place a partial ellipse as an arc element, use the Place Half Ellipse

tool or Place Quarter Ellipse tool in the Arcs tool box.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace Spiral

To place a conic section1. Select the Place Conic tool.


3. Enter a data point to define the other endpoint.

4. Enter a final data point.

If Define By is set to Points, it defines the shoulder point.

If Define By is set to Tangent, it defines the intersectionof the tangent lines.

Place Conic.Left: By

Points; Right:By Tangent.

Double-dottedcurves are

partialellipses (0.0 <ρ < 0.5), solid

curves areparabolas (ρ

= 0.5), andsingle-dotted

curves arehyperbolas

(0.5 < ρ <1.0).

Key-in: PLACE CONIC

Place Spiral


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace Spiral

Used to place a transitional spiral as a B-spline curve.

Tool Setting Effect

Type Sets the spiral’s mathematical definition.

Clothoid—Used to create a smooth transitionbetween arcs that have different radii sothat there is no abrupt change of curvature.Used in highway design.

Archimedes—The radius changes linearlybased on the angle.

Logarithmic—The radius changesexponentially based on the angle.

InitialDegree

If Type is set to Clothoid, sets the degreeof curvature at the origin.

Final Degree If Type is set to Clothoid, sets the degree ofcurvature at the spiral’s endpoint.

Length If Type is set to Clothoid, sets thespiral’s length.

InitialRadius

If type is Archimedes or Logarithmic, setsthe radius at the origin.

Final Radius If type is Archimedes or Logarithmic, setsthe radius at the spiral’s endpoint.

Angle If Type is Archimedes or Logarithmic,sets the sweep angle.

Tolerance If Type is Clothoid or Logarithmic,sets the tolerance.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlace Helix

To place a spiral1. Select the Place Spiral tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the spiral’s origin.

3. Enter a data point to define the tangent direction at the origin.

4. Enter a data point to define the spiral’s direction.

Key-in: PLACE SPIRAL

Place Helix

(3D only) Used to place a helix (3D B-spline curve).

Tool Setting Effect

Thread Can be right or left.

Axis Sets the direction of the helix’s axis.

Orthogonal If on, the helix is orthogonal.

Top Radius If on, sets the second radius (step 5 below).

Base Radius If on, sets the first radius (step 3 below).

Height If on, sets the height (step 4 below).

Pitch If on, sets the pitch.

To place a helix1. Select the Place Helix tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the Base end of the axis.

If all constraints are on and Axis is set to anything other


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesOffset Element

than Points, the helix is displayed dynamically and you canenter a data point to accept the helix.

3. Enter a data point to define the beginning of the helixand the first (Base) radius.

4. Enter a data point to define the other end of the axis.

5. Enter a data point to define the second (Top) radius.

6. Accept the helix.

Key-in: PLACE HELIX

Offset Element

Used to construct an offset curve from an element (line, linestring, multi-line, curve, arc, ellipse, shape, complex chain, orcomplex shape) — a B-spline curve that is the same distancefrom the identified element at all points.

Tool Setting Effect

Cusp Sets how “corners” are treated.

Corner—“Corners” are sharp in theoffset curve.

Round—“Corners” are rounded in the offsetcurve. Tolerance must be set to a non-zerovalue if Cusp is set to Round.

Distance If on, sets the distance to offset.

Tolerance If on, overrides the system Tolerance,which is set in the B-splines dialog box(Element > B-splines).



Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesExtract Surface Rule Lines

To construct an offset curve1. Select the Offset Element tool.



Distance This data point defines

Off Distance and direction.

On Direction only.

Construct Offset Curve. Left: Cusp set to Corner and Distanceoff. Center: Cusp set to Round and Distance off. Right: Cuspset to Round and Distance On Make Copy is on..

Key-in: CONSTRUCT CURVE OFFSET

Extract Surface Rule Lines

(3D only) Used to extract a B-spline curve(s) from a B-spline surface.

This example shows the results of the Extract Surface Rule Lines tool,with Extract set to Multiple Curves, applied to an arbitrary surface.



Originalsurface

Surface with10 extractedsurface rule

lines in bothdirections.

Tool Setting Effect

Extract Sets the objective of the tool.

Single Curve—Extract a curve that has aconstant parametric u-value (iso-u curve) orconstant parametric v-value (iso-v curve).The u-value or v-value is the specified IsoValue. The udirection is the direction in whichthe data points that defined each row wereentered; the v-direction is the direction inwhich the columns were defined.

Multiple Curves—Extract a set of curvesthat are spaced evenly on the surfacein both directions.

Iso Value If on, sets the iso value of the extractedcurve. This option is enabled only ifExtract is set to Single Curve.



Tool Setting Effect

Numbers U/V Sets the number of curves to extract fromboth parametric u- and v- directions.These fields are enabled only if Extractis set to Multiple Curves.

Ignore Trim If off, the curves are trimmed by the B-splinetrim curves, if any. This option is enabledonly if Extract is set to Multiple Curves.

To construct a curve based on a rule linefrom a surface1. Select the Extract Surface Rule Lines tool.

2. Identify the surface.

As you move the pointer, an iso-u curve displays dynamically.

3. Enter a data point to define the curve’s position andcreate the iso-u curve.orReset to display an iso-v curve.

As you move the pointer, an iso-v curve displays dynamically.

4. Enter a data point to define the curve’s position and createthe iso-v curve (or Reset to create no curve).

Identify the surface(1). Enter a second

data point (2) toposition the iso curve.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCurve Calculator

To extract multiple curves from a surface1. Select the Extract Surface Rule Lines tool.


3. Accept the surface.

The curves are generated.

Key-in: EXTRACT SURFACE RULE LINES

Curve Calculator

Opens the Curve Calculator dialog box (see page 6-95) , which isused to place any conceivable planar curve as a NURBS, based ona mathematical formula, in either of the following ways:

• From a library of pre-defined curves.

• By defining a custom formula.

Trigonometric, hyperbolic, exponential, logarithmic, and powerfunctions can be used to create sinusoids, spirals, catenaries,involutes, evolutes, and so on. For the creation procedures, seeCreating any conceivable curve on page 6-60.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCurve Calculator

To place a parametric line string1. From the Tools menu in the Curve Calculator dialog box,

choose Place Parametric Line String.

2. Enter a data point to define the line string’s origin.

To construct a curve defined by formulasand another curve1. From the Tools menu in the Curve Calculator dialog box,

choose Construct Parametric Curve.

2. Identify the curve in the design.

3. Accept the new curve.

To construct a line string defined by formulasand another curve1. From the Tools menu in the Curve Calculator dialog box,


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesCurve Calculator dialog box

choose Construct Parametric Line String.

2. Identify the existing curve.

3. Accept the line string.

Key-in: MDL LOAD CURVCALC

Curve Calculator dialog box

Used to place any conceivable planar curve as a NURBS, basedon a mathematical formula. Opens when the Curve Calculatortool is selected in the Create Curves tool box.

Set Value

Sets values in the equations that define the curve. Thevariable-value pairs can be edited as follows:

• Select a row in the list box. The variable and value appearin the text items below the list box.

• Enter a variable’s name in its text item and press �Return�.

• The key-in can be used to update a variable-value pair.

The dynamics reflect any changes in the variable-value pairs



defining the curve if a placement tool is selected.


Key-in: SET VALUE VARIABLE [value]

Formulas in black are variable-value pairs that can be edited.Formulas that are dimmed are locked and cannot be selected.These are the parametric equations of the curve and shouldnot be changed unless you want to define a new curve (seeDefining a Curve’s Formula on page 6-63).

For example, the supplied curve definition “Elliptical arc” (in“curve.rsc”) lets you enter values for the two radii that define theellipse as well as the start and sweep angles.

Tolerance

Sets the tolerance.


Key-in: ACTIVE TOLERANCE value

Active Units

The units used by the equations to create the curve — masterunits, sub-units (the default), or positional units.


Key-in: ACTIVE UNITS �MU | SU | PU�

Active Angle

Angle units used — degrees or radians. The default is storedin the curve’s definition in the library.


Key-in: ACTIVE ANGLES DEGREES | RADIANS



File > New File

Lets you remove a curve library and start a new curve library.


Key-in: MENU NEWFILE

File > Open File…

Opens the Resource file to Open dialog box, which is used toopen a library of pre-defined curves.


Key-in: MENU OPENFILE FILENAME

By default, looks for “.rsc” files in the directory pointed to bythe MS_DATA configuration variable.

OK

Click to open the selected curve library file. The OpenCurve Resource dialog box opens.

File > Select Curve…

Opens the Open Curve Resource dialog box, which is used to selecta curve from the open library of pre-defined curves.


Key-in: MENU OPENCURVE CURVE NUMBER

File > Save

Saves the curve library file.


Key-in: MENU SAVE



File > Save As…

Opens a dialog box which is used to create a new curve library file.


Key-in: MENU SAVETO

Edit > Clear

Removes the listed curve from curve library. All equations are removedand the defaults are set for tolerance, units, angle, and mode.


Key-in: MENU CLEAR

Edit > Duplicate

Removes the listed curve from curve library without removing itsdefining functions. This makes it easy to define a new curve froman old curve without having to re-type all the equations.


Key-in: MENU DUPLICATE

Edit > Mode

Sets the type of curve to create.

Curve type Specified Created using

Defined Completely byequations

PlaceParametricCurve

Derived By equations and aroot curve

ConstructParametricCurve

A curve’s type is stored in the library file so that the appropriate



create commands can be enabled when the curve is loaded.


Key-in: ACTIVE MODE DEFINED | DERIVED

Tools > Place Parametric Curve

Used to place a curve that is defined by listed formulasrelative to a view’s coordinate system.

The active units, active angle, and Tolerance are set in theCurve Calculator dialog box.


Key-in: PLACE PARAMETRIC CURVE RELATIVE

To place a curve that is defined by listed formulas relativeto the design file coordinate system, key-in PLACEPARAMETRIC CURVE ABSOLUTE.

Tools > Place Parametric Line String

Used to place a line string that is defined by listed formulas relativeto a view’s coordinate system. The vertices are evaluated at evenintervals throughout the domain of the equations. By default, 11vertices are calculated at the values t = 0.0, 0.1, 0.2,…,1.0.



Key-in: PLACE PARAMETRIC LINESTRING RELATIVENUMBER_OF_VERTICES

The number_of_vertices can be up to the maximum of 101points allowed in a line string.

To place a line string that is defined by listed formulas relative tothe design file coordinate system, key-in PLACE PARAMETRICLINESTRING ABSOLUTE number_of_points.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesModify Curves tool box

Tools > Construct Parametric Curve

Used to place a curve defined by the listed formulas and a curve inthe design. Offsets and evolutes are examples of such curves.

The active units, active angle units, and Tolerance are setin the Curve Calculator dialog box.


Key-in: CONSTRUCT PARAMETRIC CURVE

Tools > Construct Parametric Line String

Used to create a curve defined by the listed formulas and acurve in the design. The vertices are evaluated at even intervalsthroughout the domain of the equations. By default, 11 verticesare calculated at the values t = 0.0, 0.1, 0.2,…,1.0.



Key-in: CONSTRUCT PARAMETRIC LINESTRING[number_of_vertices]

Number_of_vertices can be 1-101.

Modify Curves tool box

The Modify Curves tool box has tools that are used to modify curves.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesModify Curves tool box

To Select in the Modify Curvestool box

Change a B-spline curve’sattributes to the active B-splinecurve settings.

Change to Active Curve Settings(see page 6-102)

“Clean up” curves with largenumbers of control points.

Reduce Curve Data (seepage 6-103)

Extend a B-spline curve.

Extend Curve (see page 6-105)

Reverse the direction of an openB-spline curve or change the startof a closed B-spline curve.

Change Element Direction(see page 6-106)

Convert an element to a B-splinecurve with the same shape.

Convert Element to B-spline(see page 6-107)

Construct a blend curve betweentwo elements.

Blend Curves (see page 6-108)

Convert a B-spline curve tolines, a line string, a streamcurve, arcs or points.

Drop B-spline Curve (seepage 6-110)


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesChange to Active Curve Settings

To Select in the Modify Curvestool box

Flatten or project MicroStationcurve type elements.

Flatten Curve (see page 6-111)

Graphically and numericallyevaluate the attributes of aB-spline curve at given locationson the curve. Evaluate Curve (see page 6-114)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVEMODIFY OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Change to Active Curve Settings

Used to change a B-spline curve’s attributes to the active settingsfor the attribute(s) for which the tool setting is on.

Tool Setting Effect

Polygon If on, sets whether the curve’s controlpolygon is displayed:

Invisible—the control polygon is not displayed.

Visible—the control polygon is displayed.

Curve If on, sets whether the curve is displayed:

Invisible—the curve is not displayed.

Visible—the curve is displayed.

Closure If on, sets whether the B-spline isOpen or Closed.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesReduce Curve Data

Tool Setting Effect

Order If on, sets the curve’s order.

PreserveShape

If on, the curve’s shape remains the same,even though the Order is changed. Onlyavailable if Order is on.

To change a B-spline curve’s attributes(those that are on)1. Select or fence the element(s).

2. Select the Change to Active Curve Settings tool.


Alternative method — To change a B-splinecurve’s attributes (those that are on)1. Select the Change to Active Curve Settings tool.



Key-in: CHANGE CURVE

To set the active B-spline curve settings so they match those ofa B-spline curve in the design, use the Match Curve Settingstool (see page 3-75) in the Match tool box.

Reduce Curve Data

Used to “clean up” a B-spline curve that has a large numberof control points (poles), like those sometimes created with the


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesReduce Curve Data

Offset Element tool (see page 6-89) or imported from other systems.The replacement curve does not deviate from the original curveby the given Tolerance. While the number of control points isreduced, the order of the curve is not changed.

Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy If on, the original curve is not deleted uponcreation of the replacement curve.

MaintainEndTangents

If on, the end tangent directions ofthe replacement curve are the same asthose of the original.

Tolerance Sets the maximum distance allowed betweenthe replacement curve and the originalcurve. To make the replacement curveappear identical to the original, even thoughits complexity is reduced, experiment withdifferent Tolerance values.

To reduce the number of poles in a B-spline curve1. Select the Reduce Curve Data tool.


3. Accept the reduction in the number of poles.

The number of poles reduced is displayed in the status bar.If the number displayed is 0, the curve could not be modifiedwhile maintaining the specified Tolerance.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT CURVE REDUCE

To check the number of control points in a B-spline curve, usethe Analyze Element tool in the Primary Tools tool box or choose


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesExtend Curve

Information from the Element menu.

Extend Curve

Used to extend an element (line, line string, arc, ellipse, complexchain or B-spline curve) by a certain scale.

Tool Setting Effect

Continuity Defines the smoothness of the extension.

Position—The extension is a straight line.

Tangent—The extension is tangentcontinuous.

Curvature—The extension is curvaturecontinuous.

ExtensionScale

Scale relative to the length between the twopoles of the curve at the end of the extension.1

Must be greater than 0 and less than 1.

1 More precisely: Length between first two poles of extension curve = Length

between two poles of original curve ¥ Extension Scale ³ (1 - Extension Scale)


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesChange Element Direction

To extend an element by a certain scale1. Select the Extend Curve tool.


3. Accept the extension.

Key-in: EXTEND CURVE

Change Element Direction

Used to reverse an element’s (line, line string, arc, ellipse,complex chain, complex shape, curve, or B-spline curve)direction or change its start point.

• An open element’s direction when placed is from its start point(the first point defined) to its end point.

• A closed element’s direction when placed is counterclockwise.

An element’s direction is significant when:

• It is labeled with the Label Line tool.

• A view is rotated to align with it.

To reverse an element’s direction1. Select the Change Element Direction tool.


The element is highlighted and an arrow showing its


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesConvert Element to B-spline

direction is displayed.

3. Reset.


The element’s direction is reversed.

To move an element’s start point1. Select the Change Element Direction tool.


The element is highlighted and an arrow showing itsdirection is displayed.

3. Identify the element’s new start point.

The direction arrow moves to the new start point.

4. Reset.

Key-in: CHANGE DIRECTION

Convert Element to B-spline

Used to convert an element (line, line string, arc, ellipse, complexchain, complex shape, surface of projection or revolution, or cone)to a B-spline curve with the same shape.

Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy • If on, a B-spline curve with thesame shape as the identifiedelement is created.

• If off, the identified element isconverted to a B-spline curve


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesBlend Curves

Tool Setting Effect

ConvertElement toSurface

If on, a closed element is convertedto a B-spline surface rather than aclosed B-spline curve.

Tolerance If on, sets how accurately the element isconverted or copied, if Convert Elementto Surface is on.

To convert an element to a B-spline1. Select the Convert Element to B-spline tool.


3. Accept the new B-spline curve.

Key-in: CONVERT BSPLINE

Blend Curves

Used to construct a B-spline curve between two elements (lines,line strings, arcs, ellipses, complex chains, complex shapes, orB-spline curves) that consists of the trimmed original elementsand a transition curve connecting them.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesBlend Curves

Tool Setting Effect

Continuity Sets number of control points between theblend points (identified in steps 2 and 4 below).

Position—0 control points. A straight “line”is constructed between the blend points.

Tangent—2 control points. In mostcases, this is adequate.

Curvature—4 control points.

3rd Degree-13 Degree—6, 8,…, 26 controlpoints, respectively.

Factor 1 Magnitude of blend curve’s initial tangent.

Factor 2 Magnitude of blend curve’s final tangent.

To construct a blend between two elements1. Select the Blend Curves tool.

2. Identify the first element at the blend’s start point.

3. Identify the end of the first element to trim.

4. Identify the second element at the blend’s end point.

5. Identify the end of the second element to trim.

The blend curve displays dynamically.

6. (Optional) — Adjust the relative magnitudes of Factor 1 andFactor 2 to achieve the desired blend.

7. Accept the blend.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesDrop B-spline Curve

Blend Curves.Blending the lineand arc shown at

top left. Top right:Continuity is set to

Position. Bottom: Inboth illustrations,

Continuity is set toTangent.

Key-in: BLEND CURVE

Drop B-spline Curve

Used to convert a B-spline curve to lines, a line string, astream curve, arcs or points.

Tool Setting Effect

ChordHeight

Used with Chord Height method.

ChordLength

Used with Fixed Chord Length method


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesFlatten Curve

To drop a B-spline curve1. Select the Drop B-spline Curve tool.


3. Accept the drop.

Key-in: DROP CURVE

Flatten Curve

Used to flatten or project a MicroStation curve-type element, such as aline string, complex chain, complex shape, or B-spline curves, into aspecified plane. This tool is designed to process digitized data orimported curves that are not currently planar but meant to be.



Tool Setting Effect

FlattenPlane

Sets the normal direction for the flatten plane.

Automatic—computed by an averagingprocess based on the identified element.

Closest Standard Plane—First, a normaldirection is computed by the averagingprocess is done in the Automatic case. Thisresulting plane is compared to the standardXY, YZ, XZ planes to see which is closer. Theclosest is used as the flatten plane.

Drawing XY Plane—parallel to thedesign cube’s xy plane.

Drawing XZ Plane—parallel to thedesign cube’s xz plane.

Drawing YZ Plane—parallel to thedesign cube’s yz plane.

View—parallel to the view.

User Defined—defined by three data points.

Keep Profile If on, the original curve is not deleted.

To flatten or project an element1. Select the Flatten Curve tool.

2. Identify the element to flatten or project.

3. If Flatten Plane is set to Automatic or Closest StandardPlane, accept the element.orIf Flatten Plane is set to Drawing XY Plane, Drawing XZPlane, or Drawing YZ Plane, enter a data point (base point)to define the location of the flatten plane.or



If Flatten Plane is set to View, enter a data point to definethe depth of the flatten plane.orIf Flatten Plane is set to User Defined, enter a series of three datapoints (length, width, and height) to define the flatten plane.

With Keep Profileturned on, and

Flatten Plane set toDrawing XZ plane,

identify the curve (1).

Identify the locationof the Drawing XZ

plane (2), to generatethe flattened curve.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesEvaluate Curve

Three-dimensionalcurve, shown with“flattened” curves

aligned with the XY,XZ and YZ drawing

planes.

Key-in: FLATTEN CURVE

Evaluate Curve



(3D only) Used to graphically and numerically evaluate attributesof a B-spline surface, other than order, poles, and knots, at givenlocations on the surface. There are four ways to define locationson a surface, and two output options.

The attributes that can be computed are points, tangents, andnormal directions. Computed attributes can be used as referencepoints or reference lines for other purposes.

Below is an example of Evaluate Curve results specifying node points.Note that the number of node points is equal to the number of knots.



By changing the number of points, the data may be viewedin a variety of pictorial formats.



This B-splinecurve is

identical to theone displayed

in the tableof tool settingdescriptions.

Note thatincreasing the

number ofpoints in the

Curvature Plotand changingthe Curvature

Plot Scale, thisimage clearly

shows the firstderivative.

Tool Setting Effect

Attribute(s)Output By

Sets the method used to output thecomputed attributes.

Display Only—Attributes are displayed only.

Save In File—The attributes are saved in theactive design file with the same graphic groupnumber for easy manipulation.



Tool Setting Effect

Location(s)Input By

Sets the manner in which the locations onthe surface are defined.

Enter Data Point—Interactively define asingle location on the surface.

Parameter—Using the Parameter Value U andV settings. The values, which must be in therange 0–1, specify the location from the domain tomap to the displayed object. Within MicroStation,the domain is from 0.0 to 1.0.

Dist[ance] Along Curve—Using the Dist FromStart(%) U and V settings. The values are each apercentage of the total length of the u or v curve onthe surface. For example, to extract the tangentdirection of a surface at its middle point, set Dist.From Start(%) U and V each to 50.

Point Array—Using the Number of Pointssetting. The value is the number of evenlyspaced locations on the curve. For example, toevaluate at 20 evenly spaced locations on thecurve, set Number of Points to 20.

Tangent PlotScale

Sets the scale factor applied to the magnitudedisplay. If set to 1.0, the extracted tangent isthe true derivative vector — that is, the tangentdirection with the magnitude.

CurvaturePlot Scale

Sets the scale factor applied to the line segmentsthat represent curvature vectors in CurvaturePlot output. If set to 1.0, the true curvaturevector is displayed. The curvature value is thelength of this vector. The radius of curvatureis equal to one divided by the curvature. For astraight line, the radius of curvature is infinitysince its curvature is zero.

Perpendic-ular CircleRadius

Sets the radius of the perpendicular circles inPerpendicular Circles output.



Tool Setting Effect

ParameterValue

Sets the parameter value applicable to theParameter option for defining locations on thecurve; see Location(s) Input By above.

Dist[ance]FromStart(%)

Sets the distance value applicable to the Dist.Along Curve option for defining locations on thecurve; see Location(s) Input By above.

Number ofPoints

Sets the numeric value applicable to the PointArray option for defining locations on the curve;see Location(s) Input By above.

[Compute]Points

If on, the points on the curve at which evaluationis performed are displayed in the output.

[Compute]Tangents

If on, the curve’s tangents are computed.

[Compute]CurvaturePlot

If on, the curve’s curvature plot is computed.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesSelecting Elements Based on Attributes

Tool Setting Effect

[Compute]InflectionPoints

If on, the curve’s inflection points arecomputed. Inflection points are where thecurve changes concavity.

[Compute]Perpendicu-lar Circles

If on, the curve’s perpendicular circles are computed.

To evaluate a B-spline curve1. Select the Evaluate Curve tool.

2. Identify the curve.

If Location(s) Input By is set to Enter Data Point, this data pointalso determines the location on the curve at which to evaluate.

3. Accept the curve.

The curve is evaluated, and the desired attributes arecomputed and output.

Key-in: EVALUATE CURVE

This tool can also be used to evaluate lines, arcs, and ellipses.

Selecting Elements Based on AttributesIn addition to graphically selecting elements with the Element Selectiontool (see Selecting Elements on page 3-1), you can easily select thembased on their attributes using the Select By Attributes dialog box. Thedialog box has controls for specifying attribute-based search criteria.In essence, the dialog box is an extension of the Element Selection tool.

For example, you can request MicroStation to select all text elementsor all elements with line weight 3. You can even specify searchcriteria based on different kinds of attributes — for example,


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesSelecting Elements Based on Attributes

green, dotted arc elements on levels 22 and 23.

Any kind of attribute can be specified as search criteria:

• level

• type (line, arc, B-spline, text, etc.)

• color

• line style

• line weight

• class

• tag values

• properties, including the area attribute (Solid or Hole),whether an element can be snapped to, whether it is locked,and whether it has been modified.

General Procedure — To use Attributesas Selection Criteria

1. From the Edit menu, choose Select By Attributes.

The Select By Attributes dialog box opens. The second optionmenu in the Mode section should be set to Selection.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesUsing Auxiliary Coordinate Systems

2. Use the controls in the dialog box to specify selection criteria. (Tospecify criteria based on element properties, click the Propertiesbutton and use the controls in the Select by Properties dialog box.To specify criteria based on tag values, click the Tags buttonand use the controls in the Select By Tags dialog box.)

3. In the Mode section, make sure On is chosen fromthe third option menu.

4. Click Execute.

The elements meeting the specified selection criteria areselected and bracketed with handles.

The above procedure can be adapted for locating (highlighting)elements or filtering their display based on their attributes. Theeffect of the Execute button in the Select By Attributes dialog box iscontrolled with the second option menu in the Mode section, which isset to Selection by default. The other options are Location and Display.

Using Auxiliary Coordinate SystemsYou can define new x- and y- axes in your design plane and savethem as an auxiliary coordinate system. You can save severalauxiliary coordinate systems and quickly choose any of them andthe design file or view coordinate systems.

The drawing plane coordinate system used with AccuDraw(see page 2-13) serves much the same function as an auxiliarycoordinate system but is even more useful.

Auxiliary coordinate systems are particularly helpful in 3D design,where they facilitate placing elements on planes at different depthsand orientations. See 3D auxiliary coordinate systems on page 7-61.

Once an auxiliary coordinate system is active you can use itwith precision input key-ins (such as AX= and AD=) to performprecision input with respect to the auxiliary coordinate systems. SeePrecision input key-ins with an ACS on page 7-68.



To define and save an auxiliary coordinatesystem in a 2D design by data points1. (Optional) — From the Settings menu, choose View

Attributes (or press �Ctrl-B�)orFrom any view window’s control menu, choose View Attributes.


2. (Optional) — In the View Attributes dialog box, turnon ACS Triad and click All.

When an auxiliary coordinate system is defined, two arrowsindicating the positive x- and y- axes and their origindisplay. (This symbol is called a “triad” because it consists



of three arrows in 3D designs.)

3. From the Utilities menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates.

The Auxiliary Coordinate Systems dialog box opens.

4. From the dialog box’s Tools menu’s Define By Pointssub-menu, choose Rectangular.

The prompt in the status bar is “Enter first point @ x axis origin.”

5. Enter a data point to define the origin of the auxiliarycoordinate system.

The coordinates of the point identified will be 0,0 in theauxiliary coordinate system. The prompt in the statusbar is “Enter second point on x-axis.”

6. Enter a data point to define a point on the positive x-axis.

The ACS triad displays.

7. In the Auxiliary Coordinate Systems dialog box’s Namefield, key in a name of up to seven characters to identifythe auxiliary coordinate system.

8. (Optional) — In the Description field, key in a description of up to28 characters to help identify the auxiliary coordinate system.

9. Click Save.

The new auxiliary coordinate system displays in the list box.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesACS tool box

ACS tool box

The tools in the ACS tool box are used to define and manipulatean auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) — a coordinate system youdefine that differs from the design plane (world) and view coordinatesystems. For general information about using an ACS, see 3Dauxiliary coordinate systems on page 7-61.

One ACS can be active at any time in a 2D or 3D design. While ACSscan be used in 2D, they are most useful in 3D design.

To Select in the ACS tool box

Define an ACS aligned witha planar element.

Define ACS (Aligned withElement) (see page 6-126)

Define an ACS by enteringdata points.

Define ACS (By Points)(see page 6-126)

Define an ACS aligned witha view.

Define ACS (Aligned withView) (see page 6-127)

Rotate the active ACS.

Rotate Active ACS (seepage 6-128)

Move the origin of the Active ACS.

Move ACS (see page 6-129)

Identify an ACS for attachmentas the Active ACS.

Select ACS (see page 6-130)


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesDefine ACS (Aligned with Element)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX ACS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Define ACS (Aligned with Element)

Used to define an ACS aligned with a planar element. Upondefinition, the ACS becomes the Active ACS.

Tool Setting Effect

Type Sets the ACS Type — Rectangular,Cylindrical, or Spherical.

ACS PlaneLock

If on, each data point is forced to lie onthe Active ACS’s xy-plane.

ACS PlaneSnap

If on, each tentative point is forced to lieon the Active ACS’s xy-plane.

To define an ACS aligned with an element1. Select the Define ACS (Aligned with Element) tool.

2. Enter a data point to identify the element with which toalign the ACS and define the ACS origin.

3. Accept the ACS.

The ACS’s xy-plane is parallel to the plane of the identified element.

Key-in: DEFINE ACS ELEMENT

Define ACS (By Points)

Used to define an ACS with data points. Upon definition,


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesDefine ACS (Aligned with View)

the ACS becomes the Active ACS.

Tool Setting Effect


ACS PlaneLock


ACS PlaneSnap


To define an ACS with data points1. Select the Define ACS (By Points) tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the ACS origin.

3. Enter a data point to define the direction of the ACS’s positivex-axis, which extends from the origin through this point.

4. (3D only) Enter a data point to define the directionof the positive y-axis.

The direction of the positive z-axis follows by applyingthe “right hand rule.”

Key-in: DEFINE ACS POINTS

Define ACS (Aligned with View)

Used to define an ACS aligned with a view. Upon definition,the ACS becomes the Active ACS.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesRotate Active ACS

Tool Setting Effect


ACS PlaneLock


ACS PlaneSnap


To define an ACS that is aligned with a view1. Select the Define ACS (Aligned with View) tool.

2. Enter a data point to select the view with which the ACSis to be aligned and define the ACS origin.

The ACS’s x- and y- axes are the same as the view’s horizontal(x-) and vertical (y-) axes, respectively.

Key-in: DEFINE ACS VIEW

Rotate Active ACS

Used to rotate the Active ACS. The origin is not moved.

To rotate the active ACS1. Select the Rotate Active ACS tool.

The Rotate Active ACS dialog box opens.

2. In the Rotate fields, enter the rotation angles, in degrees,


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesMove ACS

from left to right, for the x-, y-, and z-axes.4

3. Click either of the following buttons:

To rotate Active ACS from Click

Unrotated (top) orientation Absolute

ACS’s current orientation Relative

4. When you are finished, click Done to close the RotateActive ACS dialog box.

Key-in: ROTATE ACS ABSOLUTE | RELATIVE

Move ACS

Used to move the origin of the Active ACS.

To move the active ACS1. Select the Move ACS tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the new origin.

The ACS Type and orientation do not change.

Key-in: MOVE ACS

4 Z-axis in 3D-only.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesSelect ACS

Select ACS

Used to identify an ACS for attachment as the Active ACS.

To select and attach an ACS1. Select the Select ACS tool.

A coordinate triad displays for the Active ACS, if there is one, andeach saved ACS in each view that contains the ACS origin.

2. Identify the ACS to attach.

Key-in: ATTACH ACS

DigitizingMicroStation requires that you use a digitizing tablet or table5

to perform digitizing. Digitizing is the process of electronicallyreproducing the features of an existing hard copy drawing or map intoa MicroStation design. A large tablet or table is recommended.

Accurate digitizing requires careful planning and setup of therelationship between the hard copy, mounted on the tablet or table,and the design plane, represented on the screen.

For more details about setting up to use a digitizing tablet,see Digitizing Tablets in the Setup Guide.

Setting up to digitize1. Create a design file.

2. Set up appropriate working units. See Setting working

5 The version of for your system may not support the use of a digitizing tablet. For information

about supported input devices, see Input devices in the Setup Guide.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesSetting working units

units on page 6-131.

3. Set up appropriate views. It is recommended that you set upone of the views to encompass the entire drawing.

4. (Optional) — Partition the digitizing tablet surface. SeeDigitizing tablet partitioning on page 7-140.

5. Mount the hard copy to be digitized on the surface of thetablet. (Tape works well for mounting.) Locate the featuresyou will be mapping to the design file over the digitizingpartition, not over the screen partition.

6. Place monument points that associate known points (of yourchoosing) on the hard copy with points in the design plane.See Placing monument points on page 6-133.

7. From the File menu, choose Save Settings (or press �Ctrl-F�) tosave the working units, view configuration, and the relationshipsspecified by monument points, digitizer partitioning and setup.

8. Use any MicroStation drawing tool to trace the hard copyimage. See Tools for digitizing on page 6-134.

Setting working units

Set working units that are appropriate for the image beingdigitized while ensuring that the design plane working area isgreater than the actual size of the image.

For example, suppose you are digitizing a map of Alabama for use inthe United States. English units (miles, feet, etc.) are commonly usedin the United States, so you might set master units to miles (MI),sub-units to feet (FT), with 1,200 positional units per foot. This yieldsa working resolution of 1 /100 of an inch and a working area of 677miles square. Alabama is 330 miles long and 200 miles wide, so theworking area is greater than the image to be digitized. If increasedresolution is desirable, there is working area to spare.

Digitizing tablet partitioning

Partitioning divides the surface of the digitizing tablet into two areasor partitions. One area, the screen partition, continues to provide


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesDigitizing tablet partitioning

standard tablet-to-screen mapping. Within the screen partition,moving the tablet cursor results in a corresponding movement ofthe screen pointer, regardless of what is displayed on the screen.The other area is the digitizing partition. Within the digitizingpartition, movement of the tablet cursor results in a correspondingmovement of the screen pointer only within the part of the designplane to which you are mapping features of the hard copy.

After you partition the tablet surface, you will notice a change inthe behavior of the screen pointer, depending on whether it is in thescreen or digitizing partition. When in the screen partition, thepointer moves on the screen in direct proportion to the movementof the tablet cursor. If you have two screens, the screen partitioncorresponds to the rectangular area encompassing both screens.

When the tablet cursor is in the digitizing partition, the tabletcursor position determines the position of the pointer in the designplane. MicroStation places the pointer in the first open view wherethe design plane position is visible. The open views are checked insequence starting with the lowest numbered view. If the design planeposition is not visible in any views, the pointer is not displayed.Nevertheless, even when you cannot see the pointer, you can continueto enter data points and place elements into the design.

The screen partition takes priority over the digitizing partition. Ifdata points are entered in the screen partition, their position in thedesign plane reflects their position on the screen. Therefore, makesure not to stray into the screen partition while digitizing.

If the tablet surface is not partitioned, MicroStation defaults thescreen partition to an 18 × 12 area (or smaller on a smaller tablet)in the lower left corner of the tablet surface.

To change the default digitizing and screenpartitions on the tablet surface1. From the Workspace menu, choose Digitizing.

The Digitizing dialog box opens.

2. From the dialog box’s Tablet menu, choose Partition.

3. Identify the lower left corner of the screen partition by placing


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPlacing monument points

the tablet cursor over it and pressing the Data button.

4. Identify the upper right corner of the screen partition by placingthe tablet cursor over it and pressing the Data button.

Placing monument points

Monument points are used to define the mapping of coordinateson the digitizing tablet to coordinates in the design plane.Thus, monument points are defined on both the digitizingtablet surface and in the design plane.

At least two monument points must be defined; more are recommendedfor increased accuracy. When only two monument points are defined,MicroStation assumes the hard copy is perfectly aligned on thetablet surface. If more than two monument points are defined,MicroStation can compensate for misalignment.

A monument point can be any point at which the coordinateson the hard copy being digitized are known. It is best to defineseveral widely spaced monument points.

It is easier to place monument points in the design plane beforesetting up for digitizing, and then snap tentative points to themduring setup and digitizing. To make monument points visible,place them with a line weight of at least 3.

To place monument points that associate pointson the hard copy with points in the design plane1. (Optional) — Place point elements (zero length lines) for reference

with line weights of at least 3 using the Place Active Point tool.

2. From the Workspace menu, choose Digitizing.

The Digitizing dialog box opens.

3. From the dialog box’s Tablet menu, choose Setup.

4. Choose a monument point on the hard copy, position the tabletcursor over it, and enter a data point. Ignore the location ofthe screen pointer, which only lets you know that the tablet


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesTools for digitizing

cursor is over an active area of the tablet.

5. Move the tablet cursor into the screen partition and enter a datapoint in the design that corresponds to the monument point youchose in the previous step. Precision input, or snapping to a pointelement, if one was placed for reference, is recommended.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for additional monument points.

7. After placing all monument points, Reset.

8. Confirm accurate placement of the monument points by movingthe cursor around the hard copy. If the monument pointsare correctly defined, the pointer displays in the design atpoints corresponding to the monument points.

Tools for digitizing

The Place Stream Line String tool (see page 1-40) and the Place Pointor Stream Curve tool (see page 1-42) in the Linear Elements toolbox are particularly useful. With these tools, it is not necessaryto press the Data button to enter individual data points sinceMicroStation samples the movement of the tablet cursor andautomatically records data points based on Stream.

Panning while digitizing

As hard copy is digitized, the design in the view normally remains staticand the screen pointer moves as the tablet cursor is moved. You mayfind it more convenient to let the screen pointer remain stationary inthe center of a view and have the view pan as the tablet cursor is moved.

To automatically pan this way while digitizing, key in SET AUTOPANON. The view in which the screen pointer is located when this key-in isentered becomes the anchor view, the view that is panned as digitizingprogresses. The center of the view becomes the anchor point, thelocation in which the screen pointer is locked or anchored.

When automatic panning is on and the tablet cursor is in the screenpartition of the digitizing tablet, the design will pan unless thepointer is in the center of the view. The effect is exactly as if youbegan panning at the center of the view, and is much less useful


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPanning while digitizing

than the panning that occurs in the digitizing partition.

Therefore, you may want to turn automatic panning off (SETAUTOPAN OFF) when the tablet cursor is in the screen partition. Tofacilitate toggling of automatic panning, create and attach a cursorbutton menu with a button assigned to the key-in SET AUTOPANTOGGLE. See Customizing cursor button menus in the Setup Guide.


Advanced 2D Drafting TechniquesPanning while digitizing


3D Design and Modeling

MicroStation’s 3D tools let you work on a single 3D model, ratherthan separate 2D drawings, of a design.

• When the 3D model is complete, drawings such as plans,elevations, sections, and details are generated from the singlemodel. Any required modifications are made to the model justonce, and then the drawings are regenerated.

• As an added benefit, you can use MicroStation’s tools for renderingand visualizing 3D models to produce realistic color images ofyour design. This is often more cost-effective than traditionalmock-ups and artist’s drawings, especially when there are frequentrevisions or tight deadlines. Animated sequences provide a way topresent a design that was not available before CAD.

In this chapter you will find procedures concerning 3Ddesign and modeling, including:

• Basic 3D Concepts (see page 7-2)

• Viewing a 3D Design (see page 7-8)

• Using the View Controls in the 3D View Control toolbox (see page 7-11)

• 3D Elements (see page 7-48)

• Drawing in 3D (see page 7-54)

• Using the Tools in the 3D Primitives tool box (see page 7-77)

• Using the Tools in the 3D Construct tool box (see page 7-92)

• Using the Tools in the 3D Modify tool box (see page 7-108)

• Using the Tools in the 3D Utility tool box (see page 7-130)

• Using the Tools in the Create Surfaces tool box (see page 7-141)


3D Design and ModelingBasic 3D Concepts

• Using the Tools in the Modify Surfaces tool box (see page 7-159)

• Using the Tools in the Fillet Surfaces tool box (see page 7-177)

• Using the Tools in the 3D Queries tool box (see page 7-182)

• Using Cells in 3D (see page 7-187)

Basic 3D ConceptsThis section introduces the basic concepts related toworking with 3D designs.

Before working in 3D, you should understand the following:

• Placing Elements in 2D (see page 1-1)

• Drafting Aids (see page 2-1)

• Manipulating and Modifying Elements (see page 3-1)

• Advanced 2D Drafting Techniques (see page 6-1)

Design cube

The design cube represents a 3D design file’s total volume.Points in 3D design files are defined with x-, y-, and z-values,or coordinates. 3D design files consist of a design cube in whichyou work. Points can be placed anywhere within the designcube, and are not restricted to a single plane.


3D Design and ModelingView volume

The designcube and 2Ddesign plane

Design cube coordinates are expressed in the form (x,y,z).

A 3D design file contains 4,294,967,296 positional units (UORs) in thex, y, and z-directions, analogous to the 2D design plane.

The global origin in the 3D seed files provided with MicroStationis located at the exact center of the design cube and assigned thecoordinates (0,0,0). Any point in front of the global origin has a positivez-value and any point behind it has a negative z-value.

View volume

The view volume (sometimes called the display volume) is thevolume displayed in a 3D view. In most cases, only a part of thedesign cube (see page 7-2) is displayed in a view.


3D Design and ModelingActive Depth

Viewvolume. “A”denotes the

window area(hatched).

“D” denotesthe Display

Depth,bounded by

the front “F”and back

“B” clippingplanes. The

large cubeshows the

design cube,part of which

is displayedin each view.

Any elements, or parts of elements, not contained in the viewvolume are not displayed in the view. The view volume is boundedby the window area, and its Display Depth.

Display Depth

The distance from the front to the back of a 3D view is its DisplayDepth, which is bounded by clipping planes.

• The front clipping plane is the one nearest the viewer.

• The back clipping plane is farthest from the viewer.

Elements in front of the front clipping plane or behind the backclipping plane are not displayed in the view, even if they are withinits viewing area, regardless of how far the view is zoomed out.

Active Depth

The Active Depth is the plane, parallel to the screen in a view, on whichdata points are entered by default. The Active Depth is perpendicular


3D Design and ModelingStandard views

to, and is measured along, the view’s z-axis. This is why it is sometimesreferred to as the “active z-depth.” The grid lies on this plane as well.

Active Depth,denoted by

“AZ.” “x,”“y,” and “z”denote theView axes.

“F” and “B”denote thefront and

back clippingplanes,

respectively.

For example, suppose you are designing the interior of a multi-storybuilding. You can complete the details in one floor at a time in thetop view by changing the Display Depth and Active Depth for theview after drawing the elements on each successive floor.

The Active Depth is set with the Set Active Depth view control (seepage 7-19) . You can also set the Active Depth by completing a viewmanipulation — for example, Rotate View, Fit View, Change ViewPerspective, Pan View — for which you snapped for the first data point.

A view’s Active Depth is always within its Display Depth (see page 7-4) .

Although Active Depth is a very powerful concept, MicroStationalso lets you position points away from the Active Depth. For moreinformation, see Drawing in 3D on page 7-54.

Standard views

If you rotate a view a standard orientation, the orientation displayswith the view number in the view’s title bar.

2D

In 2D, the design plane is parallel to the screen, so you view



the design from above. The default (unrotated view) in 2D isa Top view with its orientation such that:

• The x-axis is positive from left to right (horizontally).

• The y-axis is vertical, and positive from bottom to top (vertically).

In a 2D design, you rotate a view about an imaginary z-axis,which is perpendicular to the screen. No matter how you rotatea view in 2D, you still view it from above.

Orthogonal views

In 3D, since you can rotate views about three axes, rather than justone, there are six orthogonal orientations, each of which correspondsto a standard view: Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Front, or Back.

The faces of thecube correspond

to the 3Dorthogonal

views. The cubeis displayed

here in anIsometric view.

Top viewA Top view displays the design from the top:

• the xy plane is parallel to your screen (as in a 2D design).

• x is positive from left to right (horizontally).



• y is positive from bottom to top (vertically).

• z is positive toward you, perpendicular to the screen.

Front viewA Front view displays the design from the front:

• the xz plane is parallel to your screen.

• x is positive from left to right (horizontally).

• z is positive from bottom to top (vertically).

• y is positive away from you, perpendicular to the screen.

Right viewIn a Right view, you view the design cube from the right:

• the yz plane is parallel to your screen.

• y is positive from left to right (horizontally).

• z is positive from bottom to top (vertically).

• x is positive toward you, perpendicular to the screen.

Isometric views

There are two other standard views — Isometric and Right Isometric.These views are rotated so the three faces of a cube orthogonal to thedesign cube axes are equally inclined from the screen surface.

Standard view Faces in front

Isometric Top, left, and front

Right Isometric Top, right, and front

An Isometric view of a cube is shown in the illustration underthe heading Orthogonal views (see page 7-6) .


3D Design and ModelingView coordinates

View coordinates

When a view is rotated, the design file’s axes are rotated with it.A view’s axes, on the other hand, is relative to the view (or, if youlike, the screen) and the following always applies:

• The x-axis is horizontal and positive from left to right.

• The y-axis is vertical and positive from bottom to top.

• The z-axis is perpendicular to the view (screen), andpositive toward you.

The axes systems for the design cube and the view alignexactly in a Top view only.

Perspective projection

Elements in 3D models must be displayed on the screen,which is, of course, planar.

• In a view with parallel projection, each element is projectedto the screen along a line parallel to the view’s z-axis.Although parallel projected views make drawing easier, theylack realism because elements have the same relative sizeregardless of their depth in the view.

• In a view with perspective projection, elements at greater depthsappear relatively smaller, enhancing realism. A view withperspective projection is sometimes called a camera view.

Viewing a 3D DesignA 3D view displays part of the design cube (see page 7-2) fromany point, looking in any direction.

• As in 2D, elements to the left, right, above, or below can beexcluded from a view by zooming in or windowing so thatthe elements are outside the view’s area.

• 3D views also have depth. You can exclude the display ofelements located in front of, or behind, a required object bychanging the view’s Display Depth (see page 7-4) .


3D Design and Modeling3D viewing procedures that are similar to 2D

3D viewing procedures that are similar to 2D

Many 3D viewing procedures are similar to their 2D counterparts.

The way to change a view’s area without changing the DisplayDepth is the same as for 2D. The Window Area, Window Center,Zoom In, and Zoom Out view controls are used.

Fitting views in 3D

The Fit View view control has some 3D-specific aspects and settings.

ExpandClippingPlanes

If on, the view’s Display Depthis adjusted, along with the vieworigin and magnification, so that allelements on levels that are on forthe view are displayed.

Center ActiveDepth

If on, centers the Active Depth inthe fitted view. (It is recommendedthat you turn on Center Active Depthwhen fitting a view you intend todynamically rotate or a view whoseperspective you intend to change.)

CenterCamera

If on, centers the Camera in thefitted view.

Rotating views in 3D

The Rotate View view control is used in 3D to rotate a view to one of thestandard views (see page 7-5) as well as to custom orientations. Oneunique way to use Rotate View in 3D to specify a custom rotation isto dynamically rotate a cube that represents the view volume.


3D Design and Modeling3D viewing procedures that are similar to 2D

To dynamically rotate a view in 3D1. Select the Rotate View view control.

2. Set Method to Dynamic.

A cube representing the view volume dynamically displays.

3. Enter a data point to define the view orientation.

To rotate a view in 3D by three points1. Select the Rotate View view control.

2. Set Method to 3 Points.

3. Enter a data point to select the view to rotate and todefine the origin of the view x-axis.

The origin, as well as a dynamic line indicating thepositive direction of the view x-axis, displays in allviews where it is possible.

4. Enter a data point to define the positive direction of the view x-axis.

A rectangle that indicates the new view boundary displaysonly in the view that is being rotated.

5. Enter a data point in any view to define the positive directionof the view y-axis and rotate the view.

To rotate a view(s) in 3D to a standard orientation1. Select the Rotate View view control.

2. Set Method to the desired standard orientation — Top, FrontRight, Isometric, Bottom, Back, Left, or Right Isometric.

3. Select the view(s).

Panning in views in 3D

While panning using the Pan View view control, a dynamic cube isdisplayed between the origin and the pointer (rather than an arrow as in2D), indicating the distance and direction that the view will be moved.


3D Design and Modeling3D-specific viewing procedures

3D-specific viewing procedures

In addition to the familiar 2D viewing procedures, in 3D you can:

• Limit the depth of the view volume (see page 7-3) using theSet Display Depth view control (see page 7-16) .

• Change the magnification of the view volume (see page 7-3)using the Zoom view control (see page 7-14) .

• Change the perspective angle of a view using the ChangeView Perspective view control (see page 7-15) or the CameraSettings view control (see page 7-27) .

Display of the view volume in the other views is apparent onlywhen they display the same volume of the design cube as theselected view. Use the ALIGN key-in to ensure that views aredisplaying similar volumes of the design cube.

Using saved views in 3D

Creating saved views in 3D is identical to 2D. Like 2D saved views,those in 3D design “remember” which levels are on and off, andthe area of the design that is displayed. Additionally, the DisplayDepth is saved with a 3D saved view. When creating saved viewsin 3D, thought should be given to the Display Depth.

3D View Control tool box

The 3D View Control tool box has view controls that are usedto perform 3D-specific view manipulations.


3D Design and Modeling3D View Control tool box

To Select in the 3D ViewControl tool box

Change the magnification ofthe view volume.

Zoom (see page 7-14)

Change the perspective angleof a view.

Change View Perspective(see page 7-15)

Set a view’s Display Depthgraphically.

Set Display Depth (seepage 7-16)

Set a view’s Display Depth bykeying in the absolute depthfrom the Global Origin.

Key in SET DDEPTHABSOLUTE or DP= (see Tokey in a view’s Display Depthon page 7-18)

Set a view’s Display Depth bykeying in the distance to move thefront and back clipping planes.

Key in SET DDEPTHRELATIVE or DD= (see Tokey in the distance to move theDisplay Depth on page 7-19)

Set a view’s Active Depth byentering a data point.

Set Active Depth (see page 7-19)

Set the Active Depth for aview(s) by keying in the absolutedistance from the origin.

Key in ACTIVE ZDEPTHABSOLUTE or AZ= (see To keyin the Active Depth on page 7-21)

Key in the distance to movethe Active Depth.

Key in ACTIVE ZDEPTHRELATIVE or DZ= (see To keyin the distance to move the ActiveDepth on page 7-22)

Show the Display Depth settingfor a view(s).

Show Display Depth (seepage 7-22)


3D Design and Modeling3D View Control tool box

To Select in the 3D ViewControl tool box

Show the Active Depth settingfor a view(s).

Show Active Depth (seepage 7-23)

Control view rotation usinga dialog box.

Change View Rotation (seepage 7-23)

Rotate a view(s) to a specificorientation.

Key in ROTATE VIEWABSOLUTE (see To rotatea view(s) to a specific orientationwith a key-in on page 7-24)

Rotate a view(s) relative to theircurrent orientations.

Key in ROTATE VIEWRELATIVE (see To rotate aview(s) counter-clockwise aboutits center on page 7-24)

Rotate a view(s) to align themwith an element.

Key in ROTATE VIEWELEMENT (see To rotate aview(s) to align it with a planarelement on page 7-24)

Adjust the view camera.

Camera Settings (see page 7-27)

Render a view(s), the fencecontents, or an element(s).

Render (see page 7-32) 1

1 Also in the Visualization Tools tool box.

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DVIEWING OFF | ON | TOGGLE


3D Design and ModelingZoom

Zoom

(3D only) Used to change the magnification of the view volume. Ina view with perspective projection, the eye point position is changedrelative to a point in the view volume — usually a point on an element.

To zoom in or out of a 3D view1. Select the Zoom view control.

2. Enter a data point to define an origin to zoom about.This point becomes the center point in the view volumeand is on the Active Depth.

In most cases you want to snap to an element to define the origin.

A cube dynamically displays, representing the viewvolume to be displayed.

3. Enter a data point to define the extent of the volume to be displayed.

The original cube remains displayed, and another cube,which indicates the volume in which the volume definedin steps 2–3 displays.

To zoom in, this cube should be small; to zoom out, it should be big.

4. Enter a data point to define the second cube.

If it is large relative to the first, the view volume moves closer.

If it is small relative to the first, the view volumemoves farther away.

Key-in: ZOOM 3D

Rather than changing the perspective angle as does a camera’s zoomlens, this view control lets you actually move closer to or furtheraway from an element. (A zoom lens is useful with a real camerabecause it is often inconvenient to actually move closer to or further


3D Design and ModelingChange View Perspective

from the subject; in a computer model this is no problem.)

Change View Perspective

(3D only) Used to change the perspective angle of a view.

To change the perspective angle of a view1. Select the Change View Perspective view control.

2. In the desired view window, enter a data point todefine the “from” point.

As you drag the pointer toward or away from the center of theview, the view cube dynamically displays.

3. In the same view window, enter a data point to define a “to” point.

If the “to” point is closer to the center of the view than the“from” point, the perspective angle will be reduced (lessperspective), or vice versa. Elements on the active depthplane remain the same size while those in front or behind


3D Design and ModelingSet Display Depth

the active depth plane appear to change size.

Change ViewPerspective

Key-in: CHANGE VIEW PERSPECTIVE

To remove all perspective, enter the first point near the edge ofthe view and the second near the center.

Set Display Depth

(3D only) Used to graphically set a view’s Display Depth (see page7-4) — the front and back clipping planes (boundaries) of the volumedisplayed in a view. The position of each clipping plane is measuredalong the view’s z-axis. Only elements or parts of elements betweenthe front and back clipping planes are displayed.



To set the Display Depth graphically1. Be sure at least two views are open.

It is helpful to have a view open that is orthogonal to the view inwhich the Display Depth is being set, as well as an isometric view.

2. Select the Set Display Depth view control.

3. Select the view in which to set the Display Depth.

If an isometric view is open, dynamics (as shown in theillustration) indicate the selected view’s Display Depth. Asyou move the pointer in a different view, a shape indicateswhere the first depth boundary will be placed.

4. Define the front clipping plane.

To set frontclippingplane to

Enter a data point in

Active Depth The view for which Display Depthis being set.

Depth otherthan ActiveDepth

A view other than the one forwhich Display Depth is being set,at the desired depth.2

2 The view’s Active Depth, which is set with the Set Active Depth view

control , must be within its Display Depth.

5. In a view other than the one for which Display Depth is being set,enter a data point to define the back clipping plane.

If you specify the same plane for the front and back clipping



planes, a message displays and the Display Depth does not change.

Setting the DisplayDepth in the Top view

(selected with datapoint 1) by entering

data points in thefront view (2 and 3) to

define the front andback clipping planes,

respectively.Dynamics in Isometric

view indicate thefollowing for view inwhich Display depth

is set: “F”: Frontclipping plane (2).“B”: Back clipping

plane (3). “A”: ActiveDepth.

To key in a view’s Display Depth1. Key in SET DDEPTH ABSOLUTE front, back.

orKey in DP= front,back.

FRONT and BACK are the distances, in working units,along the view z-axis from the Global Origin to the desiredfront and back clipping planes.


If the Active Depth is not within the range specified bythe Display Depth, the Active Depth is automaticallychanged to the front clipping plane.


3D Design and ModelingSet Active Depth

To key in the distance to move the Display Depth1. Key in SET DDEPTH RELATIVE front,back.

orDD= front,back.

FRONT and BACK are the distances, in working units, to movethe front and back clipping planes, respectively.


If the Active Depth is not within the range specified bythe Display Depth, the Active Depth is automaticallychanged to the front clipping plane.

Key-in: DEPTH DISPLAY

If dynamics do not display in the Isometric or another view (do notfit), use the Zoom Out or Fit View view controls in the view controlbar until the view can display the dynamics.

Set Active Depth

(3D only) Used to graphically set a view’s Active Depth (seepage 7-4) — the plane, parallel to the screen in a view, onwhich data points are entered by default. The Active Depth’svalue is measured along the view’s z-axis.

The Active Depth must be within the view’s Display Depth, which isset with the Set Display Depth view control (see page 7-16) .



To set the Active Depth graphically1. Make sure at least two views are open.

It is helpful to have a view open that is orthogonal to the view inwhich the Active Depth is being set, as well as an isometric view.

2. Select the Set Active Depth view control.

3. Select the view in which to set the Active Depth.

If an isometric view is open, dynamics (as shown in the illustration)indicate the selected view’s Display Depth. As you move the pointerin a different view, a shape indicates the depth of the pointer.

4. Enter a data point in a different view at the desired ActiveDepth for the view selected in step 3.

It is often useful to snap to an existing element in the design whenyou want to place other elements at the same depth.

If useful dynamics do not display in the Isometric view, use theZoom Out or Fit View view controls in the view control bar untilthe isometric view can display the volume contained by the viewfor which the Active Depth is being set.



Setting theActive Depth

in the Top view(selected with

data point 1) byentering a datapoint (2) at the

desired depth inthe Front view.

Dynamics inIsometric view

show for theTop view: “F:”Front clipping

plane. “B:”Back clipping

plane. “A:”Active Depth.

To key in the Active Depth1. Key in ACTIVE ZDEPTH ABSOLUTE <depth>.

orKey in AZ= <depth>.

DEPTH is the distance in working units along the view z-axisfrom the Global Origin to the desired Active Depth.


If DEPTH is not within the view’s Display Depth, the ActiveDepth is automatically changed to the front clipping plane.The change is indicated in the status bar.


3D Design and ModelingShow Display Depth

To key in the distance to move the Active Depth1. Key in ACTIVE ZDEPTH RELATIVE <distance>.

orKey in DZ= DISTANCE is the distance, in working units, tomove the Active Depth along the view z-axis.


If DISTANCE is not within the view’s Display Depth, theActive Depth is automatically changed to the front clippingplane. The change is indicated in the status bar.

Key-in: DEPTH ACTIVE

Show Display Depth

(3D only) Used to show a view’s Display Depth (see page 7-4) setting.

To show the Display Depth setting for a view1. Select the Show Display Depth view control.

2. Select the view.

The view’s Display Depth setting is shown in the status bar.

3. Go back to step 2 to show the Display Depth for another view.

Key-in: SHOW DEPTH DISPLAY

A view’s Display Depth is set with the Set Display Depth


3D Design and ModelingShow Active Depth

view control (see page 7-16) .

Show Active Depth

(3D only) Used to show a view’s Active Depth (see page 7-4) setting.

To show the Active Depth setting for a view1. Select the Show Active Depth view control.

2. Select the view.

The view’s Active Depth setting is shown in the status bar.

3. Go back to step 2 to show the Active Depth setting for another view.

Key-in: SHOW DEPTH ACTIVE

A view’s Active Depth is set with the Set Active Depthview control (see page 7-19) .

Change View Rotation

Opens the View Rotation dialog box (see page 7-25) , which canbe used, as an alternative to the Rotate View view control in


3D Design and ModelingChange View Rotation

the view control bar, to control view rotation. Changes takeeffect only if applied with the Apply button.

To rotate a view(s) to a specific orientationwith a key-in1. Key in ROTATE VIEW ABSOLUTE <xx,yy,zz>.

xx, yy, and zz are the rotations, in degrees, about the viewx-, y-, and z-axes (by default, 0 for each).


To rotate a view(s) counterclockwiseabout its center1. Key in ROTATE VIEW RELATIVE <xx,yy,zz>.

orRV=<xx,yy,zz>.

xx, yy, and zz are the relative, counterclockwise rotations,in degrees, about the view x-, y-, and z-axes.


To rotate a view(s) to align it with a planar element1. Key in ROTATE VIEW ELEMENT.


This data point also indicates the part of the element withwhich to align the view’s x-axis.


The view is rotated so that its x-axis is aligned withedge of identified element and its z-axis is perpendicular


3D Design and ModelingView Rotation dialog box

to identified element.

Whether the view is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise isdetermined by the direction of the identified element. The origin ofthe x-axis is always towards the start point of the element.

Element: View x-axis is:

Linear Aligned with identified line segment.

Non-linear Tangent to identified element at theidentification point.

Key-in: DIALOG VIEWROTATION

View Rotation dialog box

Used to control view rotation. Opens when the Change ViewRotation view control (see page 7-23) is selected.

Std. (Standard)

Sets a standard orientation — Top, Bottom, Front, Back,Left, Iso(metric), or Right Iso(metric).


3D Design and ModelingView Rotation dialog box

Key-in: VIEW TOP | BOTTOM | FRONT | BACK| LEFT | RIGHT | ISO

Key-in: VI

View

Sets the view for which rotation is displayed.

“+” control

Click to rotate the view in the positive direction by the Stepamount about the specified Axis.

“-” control

Click to rotate the view in the negative direction by the Stepamount about the specified Axis.

Step

Sets the rotation increment, in degrees, for each clickon a “+” or “–” control.

Axis

Sets the axes about which rotation is specified:

• View.

• Drawing — design cube.

Apply

Applies the displayed rotation to the chosen View. To discard changes


3D Design and ModelingCamera Settings

(not apply them), choose a different view from the View option menu.

Camera Settings

Used to directly adjust the virtual camera (as an alternative to usingthe Change View Perspective view control (see page 7-15) ).



Tool Setting Effect

CameraSettings

Determines the operation to be performed:

Turn On—Used to turn on the camerain a view(s).

Turn Off—Used to turn off the camerain a view(s).

Set Up—Used to turn on the camera in aview and set the camera target and position.The position is the design cube location fromwhich the model is viewed with the camera.The target is the focal point (center) of acamera view. Objects beyond the cameratarget appear smaller; objects in front ofthe camera target appear larger and maybe outside of the viewing pyramid.

Move—Used to move the camera position.This operation is analogous to focusing acamera at an object and moving aroundto obtain different views of it.

Target—Used to move the target. Thisoperation is analogous to standing inone position and pointing the cameraat different objects.

Image PlaneOrientation

Sets the orientation of the plane on whichthe camera image is represented.

Perpendicular—Perpendicular to thecamera direction.

Parallel to X Axis—Parallel to the view x-axis,analogous to a Bellow camera.

Parallel to Y Axis—Parallel to the view y-axis,analogous to a Bellow camera.

Parallel to Z Axis—Parallel to the viewz-axis. All vertical lines (along thisaxis) appear parallel.



Tool Setting Effect

Angle Sets the camera “lens” angle, in degrees.Increasing this setting widens the field ofvision (and decreases the Focal Length).

Focal Length Sets the camera “lens” focal length,in millimeters (MM). Decreasing thissetting widens the field of vision (andincreases the Angle).

StandardLens

Sets the camera “lens” Angle and FocalLength to values associated with a standardlens type commonly used by photographers.

Fisheye—93.3 ; focal length 20mm

Extra-wide—74.3 ; focal length 28mm

Wide—62.4 ; focal length 35mm

Normal—46.0 ; focal length 50mm

Portrait—28.0 ; focal length 85mm

Telephoto—12.1 ; focal length 200mm

Telescopic—2.4 ; focal length 1000mm

To turn on the camera in a view1. Select the Camera Settings view control.

2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Turn On.




Top Left: Fisheye;Top Center:

Extra-wide; TopRight: Wide; Bottom

Left: Normal;Bottom Center:

Portrait; BottomRight: Telephoto.

To turn off the camera in a view1. Select the Camera Settings view control.

2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Turn Off.




To turn on the camera and set the targetand position1. Select the Camera Settings view control.

2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Set Up.

3. Select the view.

4. Enter a data point to define the camera target — thefocal point (center) of the view.

A dynamic pyramid displays to show the viewing volumewith the camera at the pointer location.

5. Enter a data point to define the camera position.

The camera is turned on.

To move the camera1. Select the Camera Settings view control.

2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Move.

3. Select the view.

A dynamic pyramid shows the viewing volume with thecamera at the pointer location.

4. Enter a data point to define the new camera position.

If the camera was off, it is turned on.

To move the target1. Select the Camera Settings view control.

2. In the tool settings window, set Camera Settings to Target.

3. Select the view.

A dynamic pyramid shows the viewing volume with the


3D Design and ModelingRender

camera target at the pointer location.

4. Enter a data point to define the new camera target.

If the camera was off, it is turned on.

Key-in: SET CAMERA �DEFINITION | OFF | ON| POSITION | TARGET�

Setting Image Plane Orientation to Parallel to Z Axis is usefulfor architectural renderings as it ensures buildings appearvertical from any camera position.

The virtual camera has advantages over conventional cameras.All elements in the field of view are in focus, no matter how closeto or far from the camera. You need not worry about depth offield, aberrations, astigmatism, or curvature of field — in a sense,the virtual camera takes a “perfect” picture.

Render

Used to request on screen rendering, or ray tracing. The Rendersettings window contains controls that determine what is to berendered, the rendering mode, and shading type.

Tool Setting Effect

Target Sets the entity or area to be rendered:

View—a selected view.

Fence—the contents of an existing fence.

Element—a selected element.



Tool Setting Effect

Render Mode Sets the rendering mode:

• Wiremesh

• Hidden Line

• Filled Hidden Line

• Constant

• Smooth

• Phong

• Ray Trace

• Radiosity

ShadingType

Sets the type of rendering:

• Normal

• Antialias

• Stereo

To render a view1. Select the Render view control.

2. From the Target option menu in the Render settingswindow, select View.

3. From the Render Mode option menu, choose the desired renderingmode — Wiremesh, Hidden Line, Filled Hidden Line, Constant,Smooth, Phong, Ray Trace, or Radiosity.

4. From the Shading Type option menu, choose Normal(default), Antialias (for antialiased rendering), or Stereo



(for stereo rendering).

5. Select the view.

For ray tracing, the view’s back clipping plane and referencefile clip boundaries are ignored.

If Radiosity is selected, the Final Display option menu in the Radiositydialog box (Settings menu Rendering > Radiosity) is used to choosewhich rendering method is used — Ray Trace, Smooth, or Wiremesh.

To render the fence contents1. Select the Render view control.

2. In the Render settings window, set Target to Fence.

3. Accept.

When Target is set to Fence, the Shading Type Antialias can beused only when Render Mode is Ray Trace or Radiosity.

To render an element(s)1. Select the element(s).

2. Select the Render view control.

3. In the Render settings window, set Target to Element.

Alternative method — To render an element(s)1. Select the Render view control.

2. In the Render settings window, set Target to Element.


4. Accept.

Key-in: RENDER ICON

Key-in: RENDER VIEW | FENCE | ELEMENT �WIREMESH| HIDDEN | FILLED | CONSTANT | SMOOTH | PHONG |RAYTRACE | RADIOSITY� NORMAL | ANTIALIAS | STEREO

If either Ray Trace or Radiosity is the selected Render Mode, View


3D Design and ModelingNavigate Camera

or Fence are the only Target options available.

An alternate way to render a view is to use the Utilities menu’sRender sub-menu. The sub-menu items Wiremesh, Hidden Line,Filled Hidden Line, Constant, Smooth, Phong, Ray Trace, or Radiosity,directly correspond to the Render view control’s Render Mode options.Choosing one of these items is equivalent to selecting the Render viewcontrol and setting Target to View. Choosing the Phong Stereo item isequivalent to selecting the Render view control, setting Target to View,and setting shading type to Stereo. Choosing the Phong Antialiassub-menu item is equivalent to selecting the Render view control,setting Target to View, and setting Shading Type to Antialias.

Navigate Camera

(3D only) Used to interactively move or “fly” through a designusing the keyboard and/or the mouse.

When you open the Navigate Camera view control for the firsttime, it is in Basic Mode. In Basic Mode, navigation options for thekeyboard and the mouse are predefined, so you can move through adesign immediately, without adjusting any settings. In AdvancedMode, you can change the default navigation options.

The following list contains all the keyboard shortcuts used tocontrol camera movement, speed, and orientation.



KeyboardKey Effect

Left arrow, �A�

or �J�

Same as moving the mouse to the left.

Right arrow,�D� or �L�

Same as moving the mouse to the right.

Up arrow, �W�

or �I�Same as moving the mouse forward.

Down arrow,�S� or �K�

Same as moving the mouse backward.

Home, �Q� or�U�

Resets the camera’s roll, elevation, andorientation (see the Roll, Elevate, andOrient fields under Camera Orientationin the Define Camera tool settingswindow). For example, pressing theHome key on your keyboard: once -resets the camera’s tilt angle to zerodegrees (roll). twice - resets the roll,then resets the camera’s elevation angleto zero degrees (camera is horizontalto the ground). three times - resetsthe roll, then resets the elevation,then resets the camera’s orientationangle to zero degrees (camera is in thedirection of the positive X-axis).

�+� Increases the Distance field by 10percent. For example, if your Distanceis set to 10 (feet), pressing the �+� key onyour keyboard increases the Distanceto 11 feet. Changes are applied to boththe Arrow Keys and the Mouse column.

�[� Increases the Degrees field by 10percent. For example, if your Degreesis set to 30, pressing the �[� key on yourkeyboard increases the Degrees to 33degrees. Changes are applied to boththe Arrow Keys and the Mouse column.



KeyboardKey Effect

�-� Decreases the Distance field by(approximately) 10 percent. Forexample, if you had increased yourDistance by 10 percent (from 10 feet to11 feet), pressing the �-� key on yourkeyboard decreases the Distance backto 10 feet. Changes are applied to boththe Arrow Keys and the Mouse column.

�]� Decreases the Degrees fields by(approximately) 10 percent. Forexample, if you had increased yourDegrees by 10 percent (from 30degrees to 33 degrees), pressing the�]� key on your keyboard decreases theDegrees back to 30 degrees. Changesare applied to both the Arrow Keysand the Mouse column.

Tool Setting Effect

Active View Sets the view in which to navigate thecamera. If you try to navigate in a viewwhich does not have a camera turned on, awarning message displays. Once you dismissthe message, the camera is turned on inparallel projection for that view.

Basic Mode Uses the default keyboard and mouse settingsfor controlling camera movement.



Tool Setting Effect

AdvancedMode

Allows the use of custom keymaps. Thenavigation option that you choose fromthis location in the settings window onlyapplies to the keyboard.

Fly—Move forward/back, turn left/right:

Up arrow, or moving the mouse forward —moves the camera forward along the currentangle of the camera. For example, if thecamera is pointed at an upward angle, you willmove forward and upward along that angle.

Down arrow, or moving the mouse backward— moves the camera backward at the currentangle of the camera. For example, if camerais pointed at an upward angle, you will movebackward and downward along that angle.

Left/right arrow, or moving the mouse tothe left/right — same as Turn.



Tool Setting Effect

AdvancedMode

Turn—Turn about camera axes:

Up arrow, or moving the mouse forward —turns the camera upward, perpendicular tothe ground (as if standing still and turningyour head toward the sky).

Down arrow, or moving the mouse backward— turns the camera downward, perpendicularto the ground (as if standing still and turningyour head toward the ground).

Left arrow, or moving the mouse to the left— turns the camera to the left parallel tothe ground (as if standing still and turningyour head toward the left).

Right arrow, or moving the mouse to the right— turns the camera to the right parallel tothe ground (as if standing still and turningyour head toward the right).



Tool Setting Effect

AdvancedMode

Slide—Move up/down/left/right incamera plane:

Up arrow, or moving the mouse forward —moves the camera up, perpendicular to theground (as if you were looking straight outof a glass elevator that was going up).

Down arrow, or moving the mouse backward— moves the camera down, perpendicular tothe ground (as if you were looking straight outof a glass elevator that was going down).

Left arrow, or moving the mouse to theleft — moves the camera left, parallel tothe ground (as if you are looking straightout of the window of a train moving in thedirection of your left shoulder).

Right arrow, or moving the mouse to theright — moves the camera right, parallel tothe ground (as if you are looking straightout of the window of a train moving in thedirection of your right shoulder).



Tool Setting Effect

AdvancedMode

Glide—Move forward/back/left/rightin camera plane:

Up/down arrow, or moving the mouseforward/backward — same as Fly.

Left/right arrow, or moving the mouse tothe left/right — same as Slide.

Walk—Move forward/back at currentheight, left/right swivel:

Up arrow, or moving the mouse forward —moves the camera forward, parallel to theground (as if walking into the design).

Down arrow, or moving the mouse backward— moves the camera backward, parallel to theground (as if walking away from the design).

Left/right arrow, or moving the mouse tothe left/right — same as Swivel.



Tool Setting Effect

AdvancedMode

Swivel—Turn about design axes:

Up/down arrow, or moving the mouseforward/backward — similar to Turn,except that the camera turns up ordown perpendicular to the tilt of thecamera, and stops when it points straightup or straight down.

Left arrow, or moving the mouse to the left— turns (swivels) the camera to the left,parallel to the tilt of the camera.

Right arrow, or moving the mouse to the right— turns (swivels) the camera to the right,parallel to the tilt of the camera.



Tool Setting Effect

AdvancedMode

Float—Move up/down/left/right indesign plane:

Up/down arrow, or moving the mouseforward/backward — Similar to Slide,except that the camera moves up or downperpendicular to the tilt of the camera.

Left/right arrow, or moving the mouse tothe left/right — Similar to Slide, exceptthat the camera moves to the left or rightparallel to the tilt of the camera.

Dolly—Move forward/back/left/rightat current height:

Up/down arrow, or moving the mouseforward/backward — same as Walk.

Left/right arrow, or moving the mouse tothe left/right — same as Float.



Tool Setting Effect

AdvancedMode

Tilt—Tilt camera about camera axes:

Up/down arrow, or moving the mouseforward/backward — same as Turn.

Left arrow, or moving the mouse to theleft — tilts the camera to the left (asif standing still and leaning your headtoward your left shoulder).

Right arrow, or moving the mouse to theright — tilts the camera to the right (asif standing still and leaning your headtoward your right shoulder).

MouseControl

If on, the mouse is enabled (in addition to thekeyboard) for controlling camera movements.If off, only the keyboard is enabled forcontrolling camera movements.

(Advanced Mode only) Using the Mousecombo box, you can assign the samenavigation options to the mouse as youcan to the keyboard.

Arrowbuttons

(Advanced Mode only) Clicking thesebuttons is analogous to pressing thecorresponding arrow keys on the keyboard.The arrow buttons change depending onthe navigation option chosen.

Show Set-tings/HideSettings

Shows/hides the Shift, Ctrl and Ctrl-Shiftsettings (Advanced Mode only), theDistance and Degrees fields, and theDisplay View Cone option.

ShowShortcutKeys (?)

Displays the default shortcuts for the keyboardand the mouse. Pressing the �?� key on thekeyboard also displays the default shortcuts.



Tool Setting Effect

Shift key (Advanced Mode only) Allows you toassign a navigation option to the �Shift�key. Once set, you can control thecamera using the �Shift-arrow� key or�Shift-mouse� combination.

Ctrl key (Advanced Mode only) Allows you to assigna navigation option to the �Ctrl� key . Onceset, you can control the camera using the�Ctrl-arrow� key or �Ctrl-mouse� combination.

Ctrl-Shift (Advanced Mode only) Allows you to assigna navigation option to the �Ctrl-Shift� keycombination. Once set, you can control thecamera using the �Ctrl-Shift-arrow� key or�Ctrl-Shift-mouse� combination.

Distance Sets the distance, in working units, foreach camera movement.

For the mouse, the Distance field sets thedistance traveled (in working units) when youmove the mouse from the left-most point inthe view to the right-most point in the view.

Degrees Sets the angle for each camera movement.

Display ViewCone

If on, displays the orientation of the camerain the non-active views.

To move the camera through a view windowusing the Basic Mode1. Select the Navigate Camera view control.

2. From the Active View option menu, select a view.

3. Set Mode to Basic.



4. If you want to use the mouse as well as the keyboard to controlthe camera, turn on Mouse Control. If Mouse Control is off, allsettings pertaining to the mouse are disabled (dimmed).

5. (Optional) — Click the Show Shortcuts keys (?) button for a list ofthe default keyboard and mouse navigation settings.

6. (Optional) — To display more settings, click theShow Settings button.

7. (Optional) — In the Distance field, enter the distance foreach movement of the camera.

Distance is in Working Units.

8. (Optional) — In the Degree field, enter the angle foreach movement of the camera.

9. (Optional) — Turn on Display View Cone.

10. Press any of the arrow keys, letter keys, or keyboard combinationsto move the camera through the active view.orIf you are using the mouse, enter a data point to select theactive view, then move the mouse to move the camera. Enteranother data point to accept and stop moving the camera, orReset to restore the view’s starting position.

When using View Previous and View Next, only mouse acceptpoints are recognized as viewing operations. For example, if in aview you Tilt the camera with the mouse, accept and then Walkforward using the keyboard, when you click the View Previousview control, the keyboard input is ignored, and the view is



restored to its condition before the Tilt operation.

To move the camera through a view windowusing the Advanced Mode1. Select the Navigate Camera view control.

2. From the Active View option menu, select a view.

3. Set Mode to Advanced.

When you choose the Advanced Mode, you also need toselect a navigation option, such as Fly.

4. If you want to use the mouse as well as the keyboard to control thecamera, turn on Mouse, and select a navigation option. If Mouse isoff, all settings pertaining to the mouse are disabled (dimmed).

5. (Optional) — Click the Show Shortcuts keys (?) button for a list ofthe current keyboard and mouse navigation settings.

6. (Optional) — To display more settings and navigationoptions, click the Show Settings button.


3D Design and Modeling3D Elements

7. (Optional) — For each of the Shift key, Ctrl key, and Ctrl-Shiftcombo boxes, select a navigation option.

8. (Optional) — In the Distance field, enter the distance foreach movement of the camera.

Distance is in Working Units.

9. (Optional) — In the Degree field, enter the angle foreach movement of the camera.

10. (Optional) — Turn on Display View Cone.

11. Press any of the arrow keys, letter keys, or keyboard combinationsto move the camera through the active view.orIf you are using the mouse, enter a data point to select theactive view, then move the mouse to move the camera. Enteranother data point to accept and stop moving the camera, orReset to restore the view’s starting position.

When using View Previous and View Next, only mouse acceptpoints are recognized as viewing operations. For example, if in aview you Tilt the camera with the mouse, accept and then Walkforward using the keyboard, when you click the View Previousview control, the keyboard input is ignored, and the view isrestored to its condition before the Tilt operation.

Key-in: CAMERA NAVIGATE

3D ElementsMany of the elements used in 3D design, including shapes, circles,polygons, and arcs, are 2D and are therefore restricted to one plane,even in a 3D design. 3D elements do not have this restriction,and can be drawn freely in the design cube.

Open 3D elements

Open elements do not enclose an area or volume.


3D Design and ModelingPrimitive surfaces

Non-planar line strings and curves

To place a line string or point curve that is not constrained to oneplane, use these tools in the Linear Elements tool box:

To place anon-planar

Use this tool in the LinearElements tool box

Line string Place SmartLine (see page 6-80)

Point curve Place Point or Stream Curve (seepage 1-42) with the tool settingNon-planar turned on

The Extract Surface Rule Lines tool (see page 6-90) in the CreateCurves tool box (see page 6-68) and the Extract Face or Edge Geometrytool (see page 7-137) in the 3D Utility tool box (see page 7-130) areused to extract a curve from a B-spline surface.

Helixes

A helix is placed with the Place Helix tool (see page 6-88) .

Primitive surfaces

Primitive1 surfaces (often referred to by 3D modelers as“primary” or “simple” surfaces) include the 3D surfaces thatare relatively simple to describe.

They are placed in the design with the tools in the 3DPrimitives tool box (see page 7-77) , which is in the top-left

1 Here the word “primitive” is used in a somewhat different sense than its normal meaning in .



position in the 3D Main tool frame.

Slab

A slab (also referred to as a “3D block”) is placed with thePlace Slab tool (see page 7-78) .

Slab

A slab is defined in the design file as an extruded surface inwhich the profile element is a block (rectangle). For informationabout generating more complex extruded surfaces, see Extrudedsurfaces and surfaces of revolution on page 7-52.

Sphere

A sphere’s geometry is defined by its center and its radius. It is placedin the design with the Place Sphere tool (see page 7-81) .

Sphere

A sphere is defined in the design file as a surface of revolution



in which the profile element is an arc. For information aboutgenerating more complex surfaces of revolution, see Extrudedsurfaces and surfaces of revolution on page 7-52.

Cone and cylinder

The ends of a cone are two circles lying in parallel planes. It is placedin the design with the Place Cone tool (see page 7-87) .

Cone

A cylinder is a cone in which both ends have the same diameter. It isplaced in the design with the Place Cylinder tool (see page 7-83) .

Torus

A torus (also referred to as a “donut”) is defined by its radiiand Projection Angle. It is placed in the design with thePlace Torus tool (see page 7-88) .

Torus

A torus is defined in the design file as a surface of revolutionin which the profile element is circle.

Wedge

A wedge is placed in the design with the Place Wedgetool (see page 7-90) .


3D Design and ModelingExtruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution

Wedge

A wedge is defined in the design file as a surface of revolutionin which the profile element is a rectangle.

Extruded surfaces and surfaces of revolution

Many objects can be drawn by first drawing a planar profile element(or cross-section) and then projecting or rotating the cross-section.

• An extruded surface or solid is formed by extruding a planarelement — line string, curve, shape, ellipse, B-spline curve,complex chain, or complex shape. It is placed in the design withthe Extrude tool (see page 7-93) in the 3D Construct tool box.

• A surface or solid of revolution is formed by rotating a planarelement. It is placed in the design with the Construct Revolutiontool (see page 7-146) in the 3D Construct tool box.

Extrudedsurface

Surface ofrevolution

Complex chains and shapes can be extruded or rotatedto create elaborate surfaces.


3D Design and ModelingFree-form (NURBS) surfaces

Free-form (NURBS) surfaces

A non-uniform rational B-spline (NURBS) surface is the mostmathematically flexible way to represent a surface in a design. AB-spline surface is easy to modify because each pole of its controlnet affects the shape of the surface only over a limited part. Thecontrol net is analogous to a B-spline curve’s control polygon.

B-splinesurface.

Wireframeview.

Smoothshaded view.

Teapotcreated using

B-splinesurfaces.

Before working with 3D NURBS surfaces, it is a good idea tobecome familiar with 2D B-spline concepts and placement. Formore information, see Using Curves on page 6-54.


3D Design and Modeling3D Fillets

3D Fillets

Tools in the 3D Modify tool box (see page 7-108) and the FilletSurfaces tool box (see page 7-177) let you round edges of solids andblend existing surfaces, using a variety of fillets.

Drawing in 3DBy default, data points in a 3D design are placed at the view’sActive Depth (see page 7-4) . You can snap a tentative point toan existing element at any depth in a view. However, the newelement is moved to the view’s Active Depth.

• AccuDraw and its drawing plane, 3D data points and 3Dtentative points (see page 7-61) , and 3D auxiliary coordinatesystems (see page 7-61) , let you place elements away fromthe Active Depth. Often this improves productivity, since youneed not constantly change the Active Depth.

• Boresite Lock makes Identifying existing elements easier.

Placing elements in 3D

Placing elements in a 2D design is like manual drafting — allelements appear on the same plane, the sheet of paper.

In 3D, you place elements in space — horizontally (for example,a floor), vertically (for example, a wall), or at any other angleor direction (for example, a sloping roof).

Many elements rely on the orientation of the view, AccuDraw’s drawingplace, or the current auxiliary coordinate system if the ACS Plane Lockis on for exact placement. To place elements such as blocks (rectangles),circles (by center), polygons, cells, and text, you have these choices:

• Rotate a view so that the plane of the view (your screen) isparallel to the required orientation.

• A more advanced method is using AccuDraw in 3D (see page 7-55)or 3D auxiliary coordinate systems (see page 7-61) .


3D Design and ModelingUsing AccuDraw in 3D

Specifying whether an element encloses volume

The Type tool setting for the tools in the 3D Primitives tool box (see page7-77) specifies whether a closed 3D element is either of the following:

• Solid — capped on its ends; encloses a volume.

• Surface — not capped on its ends; does not enclose volume.

For example, to draw a tube you can use the Place Cylinder tool (seepage 7-83) with Type set to Surface, while to draw an iron bar youcould use the Place Cylinder tool with Type set to Solid.

Top: Solidswith hidden

lines removed.Bottom:

Surfaces withhidden lines

removed.

To change an element from a surface to a solid1. In the Modify Surfaces tool box, select the Convert 3D tool.

2. From the Convert To option menu, choose Solid.

3. Identify the element to modify.

4. Enter a data point to accept the modification.

Using AccuDraw in 3D

In 3D AccuDraw provides the ability to actually work in a pictorial



view rather than the standard, orthogonal views.

This is possible because AccuDraw automatically constrains datapoints to its drawing plane regardless of its orientation to the view.

Compasstilted overalong thetop view

plane in a 3Dpictorial view

The AccuDraw window in 3D

In 3D, when using Rectangular coordinates, the AccuDraw windowhas an additional field for the z-axis. For Polar coordinates in 3D,the AccuDraw window has the same two fields as in 2D.

Orienting the drawing plane in 3D

Learning to orient AccuDraw’s drawing plane is essential tomastering 3D drawing. For example, it is easy with AccuDraw toplace a non-planar complex chain or complex shape in an isometricview in any direction without reverting once to an orthogonalview. By simply rotating the drawing plane axes, you can “strikeoff” at a right angle to the current segment.

This is most apparent during the creation of a true 3D drawingnormally portrayed as an isometric drawing — for example, aplumbing riser diagram. By starting a pipe run along one viewaxis and shifting it using the �F�, �S�, and �T� keyboard shortcuts,you can twist and turn the pipe through 3D space.



A simpleplumbing riserdiagram under

constructionshowing thecompass ateach corner

and annotationpointing out the

drawing planeorientation at

each vertex

This ability to adhere to the standard view axes while manipulatingyour drawing in a pictorial view is so important that AccuDrawmaintains the current orientation from tool to tool. You can still returnto the view orientation by using the �V� keyboard shortcut.

The following table summarizes the AccuDraw keyboard shortcutsavailable for fine tuning the drawing plane orientation so theaxes point where you want them to go:

Key Effect

�V� Rotates the drawing plane to align with the viewaxes. Pressing this key a second time restorescontext-sensitive rotation.

�F� Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes ina standard Front view. Pressing this key a secondtime restores context-sensitive rotation.

�S� Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axes ina standard Right view. Pressing this key a secondtime restores context-sensitive rotation.

�T� Rotates the drawing plane to align with the axesin a standard Top view. Pressing this key a secondtime restores context-sensitive rotation.

�R�, �Q� Used to quickly and temporarily rotate thedrawing plane by a single point.



Key Effect

�R�, �A� Used to permanently rotate the drawing plane by threepoints. Because it rotates the active ACS, this rotationwill still be active after the tool in use is exited. If on, thetool setting Use Current Origin causes the drawing planeorigin to be used as the x-axis origin, thereby eliminatingthe need to enter an extra data point. Of course, in manycases it is desirable to be able to define the x-axis originat a different location than the drawing plane origin.

�R�, �X� Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its x-axis.

�R�, �Y� Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its y-axis.

�R�, �Z� Rotates the drawing plane 90 about its z-axis.

Arbitrary rotationsBy default, AccuDraw orients the drawing plane to the view axes. Thisis in keeping with the way it works in 2D. You can return AccuDraw tothis orientation at any time using the �V� keyboard shortcut.

You can set up an arbitrary orientation that can be saved andsubsequently retrieved as an auxiliary coordinate system (ACS).

To rotate the drawing plane axes to alignwith the current view1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the �V� key.

To interactively rotate the drawing plane axes1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �R�, �A�.

2. Enter a data point to locate the x-axis origin.

3. Enter a data point to define the direction of the x-axis.

As a result, the direction of the y-axis is implied (perpendicular



to the x-axis), and the axes are rotated.

Graphicallyrotating the

drawingplane

axes. Left:Defining

the x-axisdirection.

Right:Defining

the y-axisdirection

(onlynecessary

in 3D).

For information about saving and retrieving an ACS definedusing AccuDraw, see Using AccuDraw with auxiliarycoordinate systems on page 7-65.

The Front, Side and Top rotationsThree keyboard shortcuts, �F�, �S�, and �T�, are used to orientAccuDraw’s drawing plane to the standard Top, Front, and Side views.Activating one of these shortcuts causes AccuDraw to dynamicallyrotate the compass to indicate the orientation of the drawing plane.

UsingAccuDraw

with the PlaceSlab tool



To rotate the drawing plane axes to alignwith the standard Top view1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the �T� key.

To rotate the drawing plane axes to alignwith the standard Front view1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the �F� key.

To rotate the drawing plane axes to align witha standard side (Left or Right) view1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press the �S� key.

Rotating an axis by 90When the drawing plane is rotated to orientations other than thestandard Top, Front, and side, it is often useful to be able to accessplanes at 90 , AccuDraw has keyboard shortcuts that rotate thedrawing plane 90 along its individual axes. These shortcuts — �R�,�X�, �R�, �Y�, and �R�, �Z� — can be used to spin the drawing plane anynumber of times until its orientation is exactly as you desire.

To rotate the drawing plane axes 90 aboutan individual axis1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, use one of the

following keyboard shortcuts.

To rotate 90 about Press

x-axis �R�, �X�

y-axis �R�, �Y�

z-axis �R�, �Z�

The new orientation is maintained only until a data pointor Reset is entered. However, you can save this coordinatesystem for subsequent recall (see Using AccuDraw withauxiliary coordinate systems on page 7-65).


3D Design and ModelingPrecision input key-ins in 3D

Precision input key-ins in 3D

Precision input key-ins in 3D work much as in 2D, except thatthe depth coordinate must also be entered.2

For more information about precision input key-ins, seePrecision Input Key-ins on page 2-65 and Precision inputkey-ins with an ACS on page 7-68.

3D data points and 3D tentative points

3D data points and 3D tentative points can be used to position pointsat a depth within the view volume other than at the Active Depth.

To enter a 3D data point or 3D tentative point1. In a view, position the pointer at the desired x- and y- coordinates.

2. To enter a 3D data point, press the 3D Data button.orTo enter a 3D tentative point, press the 3D Tentative button.

A boreline, in the view’s z-direction, displays in each view that isnot parallel to the view selected in step 1. (If no borelines display,adjust the views so that at least one other view that shows thesame part of the design has a different orientation.)

3. Position the pointer on a boreline at the desired depth and againpress the 3D Data button or 3D Tentative button.

For information about the assignment of the 3D Data button andthe 3D Tentative button on your system, see Using the Mouseor Digitizing Tablet in the Setup Guide.

3D auxiliary coordinate systems

An auxiliary coordinate system (ACS) is a coordinate system withan orientation and, usually, an origin, different from those of the

2 If you omit the z-coordinate, or any other coordinate, it is the same as

keying in 0 for that coordinate.


3D Design and Modeling3D auxiliary coordinate systems

design file coordinates. Although not exclusively a 3D concept, anACS is most useful in 3D design as a drawing aid.

By using an ACS that corresponds to the location and orientationof a particular element, you can enter data points relative toparts of the design rather than the global origin.

Although using ACSs may seem complicated, AccuDraw usesthem as a basic part of its 3D functionality, permanently storingarbitrary rotations. It is not necessary to learn much aboutACSs to use them effectively with AccuDraw.

ACS is called UCS (user coordinate system) by some other CAD systems.

ACS Type

You can choose from these ACS types: Rectangular,Cylindrical, and Spherical.

RectangularLike the design cube coordinate system, with coordinatesexpressed in the form (X,Y,Z). You can use AccuDraw to define,save, and retrieve rectangular ACSs (see Using AccuDraw withauxiliary coordinate systems on page 7-65).

RectangularACS



CylindricalPoints are specified as two magnitudes (R and Z) and an angle(θ), with coordinates expressed in the form (R, θ, Z).

The process of locating a point in a cylindrical ACS canbe thought of as follows:

1 . Moving from the origin along the x-axis a distance of R.

2 . Rotating about the z-axis an angle of θ.

3 . Finally, moving parallel to the z-axis a distance of Z.

CylindricalACS

In 2D, there is no depth (z-axis), and cylindrical coordinatesare commonly known as polar coordinates.These are used to position a data point with a Cylindrical ACS:

• AX=R, ,Z for an exact location, where:

R is the distance from the origin, along the x-axis.

is the angle counterclockwise from the x-axis about the z-axis.

Z is the distance in the z-direction.

• AD= R, , Z for locations relative to a tentative point, where:

R is the difference in distance from the origin, along the x-axis.

is the difference in the angle counterclockwisefrom the x-axis.



Z is the difference in the distance in the z-direction.

Spherical(3D only) Points are specified by a magnitude (R) and two angles (θand φ), with coordinates expressed in the form (R, θ, φ).

The process of locating a point in a spherical ACS canbe thought of as follows:

1 . Move from the origin along the x-axis a distance of Rto establish a radius vector.

2 . Rotate this vector about the z-axis an angle of θ.

3 . The angle φ is the angle between the radius vectorand the positive z-axis.

Spherical ACS

These key-ins are used to position a data point with a Spherical ACS:

• AX=R, , for an exact location, where:

R is the radius vector distance from the origin.

is the angle counterclockwise from the x-axis about the z-axis.

is the angle between the radius vector and the z-axis.

• AD= R, , for locations relative to a tentative point, where:

R is the difference in the radius vector distance from the origin.

is the difference in the angle, counterclockwise,



from the x-axis.

is the difference in the angle between the radiusvector and the z-axis.

Using AccuDraw with auxiliary coordinate systems

Unless you are using one of the four (Top, right Side, Front, View)standard orientations, AccuDraw “forgets” the drawing planeorientation at the end of the current design session. To overcome this,there is a mechanism to save and retrieve arbitrary drawing planeorientations as rectangular auxiliary coordinate systems.

The �R�, �A� keyboard shortcut is used to define an arbitrary drawingplane orientation that can subsequently be saved as a rectangularACS. See Arbitrary rotations on page 7-58.

To save a drawing plane coordinate system1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �W�, �A�.

The Write To ACS dialog box opens.

2. In the Name field, key in a name for the coordinate system.orTo save the coordinate system as the active (unnamed)ACS, leave the Name field blank.




To recall a saved drawing plane coordinate system1. With the focus in the AccuDraw window, press �G�, �A�.

The Get ACS dialog box opens.

2. In the Name field, key in the name of the coordinatesystem to recall.orTo retrieve the active (last used) ACS, leave the Name fieldblank. (This has the same effect as setting Rotation to Auxiliaryin the AccuDraw Settings dialog box.)

3. (Optional) — To rotate the drawing plane to the saved orientationwithout moving the drawing plane origin, turn off Origin.orTo move the drawing plane origin to the saved location withoutrotating the drawing plane, turn off Rotation.


The compass updates to show the effect of recallingthe saved coordinate system.

Other ways of working with auxiliary coordinate systems

In addition to the AccuDraw keyboard shortcuts for working with anACS, MicroStation also has an ACS tool box and dialog box. These arethe only mechanisms for working with a cylindrical or spherical ACS.

Defining an ACSYou can define an ACS (without using AccuDraw) in anyof the following ways:



To define an ACS Use this tool in the ACS tool box

That is aligned witha planar element.

Define ACS (Aligned with Element)(see page 6-126)

By entering datapoints.

Define ACS (By Points) (see page 6-126)

That is aligned witha view.

Define ACS (Aligned with View)(see page 6-127)

Making an ACS activeMicroStation lets you define and save multiple ACSs. At any time,you can make one ACS active. This lets you work simultaneouslywith three coordinate systems — the active ACS as well as thedesign file and view coordinate systems.



To make a saved ACS the active ACS(without using AccuDraw)1. From the Utilities menu, choose Auxiliary Coordinates.

The Auxiliary Coordinate Systems dialog box opens.

2. Select an ACS from the list of saved ACSs.

3. Click the Attach button.

The selected ACS becomes the active ACS.

To identify an ACS to make it the active ACS1. In the ACS tool box, select the Select ACS tool (see page 6-130) .

Triads appear, indicating the available saved ACSs.

2. Identify the required ACS at its origin.

ACS Plane LockIf on, ACS Plane Lock forces all data points to be on theactive ACS’s xy plane.

Precision input key-ins with an ACSWhile an ACS is active, precision input can be specifiedas one of the following:


3D Design and ModelingManipulating and modifying elements in 3D

For precision input as ACS Type Key in

ACS coordinate Rectangu-larSphericalCylindrical

AX=X VALUE, Y VALUE,Z VALUEAX=R VALUE, ANGLE,

ANGLEAX=R VALUE, ANGLE,Z VALUE

Distances, along the ACSaxes, from the most recentlyentered tentative pointor data point

Rectangu-larSphericalCylindrical

AD=X VALUE, Y VALUE, ZVALUE (X, Y, AND Z, AXES)AD=R VALUE, ANGLE,

ANGLEAD=R VALUE, ANGLE,Z VALUE

Manipulating an ACSYou can manipulate an ACS as follows:

To Use this tool in the ACS tool box

Rotate the active ACS.

Rotate Active ACS (see page 6-128)

Move the origin of theactive ACS.

Move ACS (see page 6-129)

Manipulating and modifying elements in 3D

For the most part, manipulating and modifying elements in 3D issimilar to 2D. 3D-specific aspects are discussed here.

Element manipulations (for example, scaling or rotation) areperformed relative to AccuDraw’s drawing plane. If AccuDrawis not active, the manipulation is performed relative to the viewaxes (see View coordinates on page 7-8).


3D Design and ModelingManipulating and modifying elements in 3D

Graphic groups work as they do in 2D.

Selecting elements in 3D

Most basic 3D element manipulations, including moving, scaling,rotating, deleting, and copying, can be done with the ElementSelection tool, and are similar to 2D.

• As in 2D, you can select one or more elements and manipulatethem as a single entity (see Selecting Elements on page 3-1).

• By dragging one of the handles of a selected element,you can modify it individually. The type of modificationallowed depends on the element (see To scale or modifya selected element on page 3-12).

Identifying existing elements

When Boresite Lock is on, elements at any depth can be selectedor identified with a data point. Elements identified with adata point remain at their depth in the design, regardlessof the Active Depth (see page 7-4) .

When Boresite Lock is off, only elements at or very near the ActiveDepth can be selected or identified with a data point.

If you have difficulty selecting an element, check Boresite Lock,as well as Grid Lock and Level Lock.

Tentative points and Boresite LockTentative points override Boresite Lock. You can snap to elements atany depth in a view, whether or not Boresite Lock is on.

Set Display Depth to a small range to be sure you snap tothe element at the desired depth.


3D Design and ModelingSmartSolids/SmartSurfaces

Using the fence in 3D

When you place the fence, it is planar and specific to one view. In 3D,the fence encloses the volume bounded by the area of the fence and theview’s Display Depth — that is, the volume enclosed by moving thefence from the front to the rear of the view volume along the view z-axis.

Even if an element is completely within the fence boundaries,if it also intersects the view’s front or back clipping plane (seeView volume on page 7-3), it is considered to cross the fence andis clipped if Fence (Selection) Mode is set to Clip.

This is important to remember, in particular, when creating3D cells (see page 7-187) .

How elements such as shapes and solids are clipped by thefence is affected by the preference Use Optimized FenceClipping (see page 7-75) .

Text cannot be clipped.

Certain viewing operations, such as rotating and zooming, cancause the fence in a 3D view to disappear.

For basic information about the fence, see Using the Fence toManipulate and Modify Elements on page 3-16.

SmartSolids/SmartSurfacesUsing MicroStation’s SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces tools you canquickly construct complex 3D models of your designs. For example,starting with basic solids or surfaces, you then can:

• Add finishing touches, such as fillets and chamfers.

• Use a planar closed shape, or open element, as a template tocreate a cut out in either a surface or a solid.

• Use the Shell Solid tool (see page 7-103) to quickly create a“hollow” solid with defined wall thickness.


3D Design and ModelingSettings that affect SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces

Settings that affect SmartSolids/SmartSurfacesSeveral settings control the way in which SmartSolids andSmartSurfaces are treated. These control both the display andthe method for selecting SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces, as wellhow they are treated when exported as visible edges.

SmartSolids

The SmartSolid Settings dialog box (Element menu > SmartSolids)controls the default display of SmartSolid elements.

Display

By default, SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces are displayed inWireframe display mode. This is the more efficient mode for workingwith SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces in a design session. Surfacesdisplay mode should be used only where the design is to be renderedwith an earlier version of MicroStation (pre MicroStation/J).

Surface Rule Lines

In Wireframe (and Surfaces) display mode, curved surfaces arerepresented both by their edge lines and a defined number of rule lines.Surface rule lines provide a visual indication of a surface’s curvature.

With the default setting of 4, for example, a full cylindrical solid isdisplayed with 4 surface rule lines, while the same solid cut in halfdisplays with 2 surface rule lines. Planar surfaces, which do not havecurvature, are represented by their edge boundaries only.


3D Design and ModelingLocate By Picking Faces

To change the default display of SmartSolidsand SmartSurfaces1. From the Element menu, choose SmartSolids.

The SmartSolid Settings dialog box opens.

2. Make the desired changes to the settings.

In non-renderedviews, curved

surfaces arerepresented by

surface rulelines. Top:

Surface RuleLines set to 4(the default).

Bottom:Surface Rule

Lines set to 10.

Locate By Picking Faces

This setting, in the Input category of the Preferences dialog box,affects that way that solids and closed elements are selected.Generally, you select elements by snapping to their edges. WhenLocate By Picking Faces is on, a data point anywhere on a solid orsurface will select that face element. This is particularly usefulin a rendered view, where you can identify a solid or surface witha data point anywhere on the displayed surface.

Options for Locate By Picking Faces are:

• Never — in all views, solids and surfaces can only be identifiedwith a data point on an edge or surface rule line.


3D Design and ModelingLocate By Picking Faces

• Rendered Views Only (default) — where a view’s default displaymode is set to any of the rendering options, surfaces and solidsmay be identified with a data point anywhere on their surface,not necessarily on an edge line or surface rule line.

• Always — in all views (whether rendered or not) faces may beidentified with a data point anywhere on their surface.

To change the method of selecting surfaces1. From the Workspace menu, choose Preferences.


2. In the Category list, select Input.

The Set input preferences options display.

3. From the Locate By Picking Faces option menu, choosethe required setting.

4. Click OK.

With Locate ByPicking Faces: Off —

solids and surfacescan be identified only

with a data pointon an edge or ruleline (for example,

1). On — solidsand surfaces may

be identified with adata point anywhere

on any face (forexample, 2).


3D Design and ModelingUse Optimized Fence Clipping

Use Optimized Fence Clipping

In the Operation section of the Preferences dialog box, the UseOptimized Fence Clipping setting affects the way that SmartSolidsand SmartSurfaces are clipped. When this option is on (thedefault), fence operations that involve clipping (Clip and Void Clip)do not drop the solids or surfaces back to their basic components.In effect, the fence operation works like a boolean subtraction,where part of the solid or surface is removed.

As with other fence operations, in 3D the extent of the fencevolume is defined by the fence, and the display depth of theview. When a circular fence is used, for example, it is similar tousing a cylinder as the clipping template.

Optimized fence clipping is supported in all views,including camera views.

Usingoptimized

fenceclipping.

Top: A blockwith thefence in

place readyto delete.Bottom:

The resultof deleting

the fencecontents

with UseOptimized

FenceClipping

turned off(left) and on

(right).


3D Design and ModelingExporting visible edges

Exporting visible edges

When Exporting Visible Edges, from a design that consistsprimarily of SmartSolids, the SmartSolids option in theMethod menu may prove faster. While processing all elementtypes, it is optimized for SmartSolids.

Calculate Intersections is not supported with the SmartSolidsoption. Also, for files containing a large number of elements,another option may prove more suitable. You should experimentto determine which option is best for your application.

To choose SmartSolids when exportingvisible edges1. From the File menu, choose Export > Visible Edges.

The Export Visible Edges dialog box opens.

2. In the General section, from the Method option menu,choose SmartSolids.

3D Main tool frame

Tools for creating and modifying solids and surfaces are accessedfrom tool boxes in this tool frame.

To Use tools in the

Place a simple 3D element —slab, sphere, cylinder, cone,torus, or wedge.

3D Primitives tool box (seepage 7-77)


3D Design and Modeling3D Primitives tool box

To Use tools in the

Extrude a solid or surface, orconstruct a surface of revolution,orExtrude a solid or surfacealong a path,orConstruct a thin shell solid,orThicken a surface into a solid.

3D Construct tool box (seepage 7-92)

Modify a solid, remove a face,orConstruct a new solid from theunion, intersection, or differenceof existing solids,orCut, fillet, or chamfer anexisting solid.

3D Modify tool box (seepage 7-108)

Align elements relative to aface on each element,orChange the display of aSmartSolid/SmartSurface,orExtract a face or edge from a solid,orIntersect a solid/surface witha linear element.

3D Utility tool box (seepage 7-130)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DTOOLS OFF | ON | TOGGLE

3D Primitives tool box

The tools in the 3D Primitives tool box are used to place a simple 3Delement — slab, sphere, cylinder, cone, torus, or wedge.


3D Design and ModelingPlace Slab

To Select in the 3D Primitivestool box

Place a slab.

Place Slab (see page 7-78)

Place a sphere.

Place Sphere (see page 7-81)

Place a cylinder.

Place Cylinder (see page 7-83)

Place a cone.

Place Cone (see page 7-87)

Place a torus.

Place Torus (see page 7-88)

Place a wedge-shaped object.

Place Wedge (see page 7-90)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DDRAWING OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Place Slab

(3D only) Used to place a volume of projection with arectangular cross-section.



Tool Setting Effect

Type Can be Surface (not capped) or Solid (capped).

Axis Sets the direction in which the heightis projected.

Orthogonal If on, the edges are orthogonal.

Length If on, sets the length (step 3).

Width If on, sets the width (step 4).

Height If on, sets the height (step 5).

To place a slab1. Select the Place Slab tool.


When Axis is set to Points, a side of the slab is parallel tothe view in which this data point is entered.

3. Enter a data point to define the length and rotation angle.

If Length is on, this data point defines the rotation angle.

4. Enter a data point to define the width.

If Width is on, this data point accepts the width.

5. Enter a third data point to define the height.

If Height is on, this data point accepts the height.

If Orthogonal is on, the slab is orthogonal; the height and



length of the vertical edges are the same.

Place Slab,constrained

to beorthogonal.

Defining thelength, width,

and heightgraphically.


3D Design and ModelingPlace Sphere

Placing thesame slab as

in previousexample, butwith length,

width,and height

constrainedusing

AccuDraw.

Key-in: PLACE SLAB ICON

Although the slab’s length, width, and height can be specifiedas tool settings, it is generally quicker and easier to type thesedistances into the AccuDraw window.

To place a volume of projection with a non-rectangular cross-section,use the Extrude tool (see page 7-93) in the 3D Construct tool box.

Place Sphere

(3D only) Used to place a sphere — a volume of revolutionwith a circular cross section.


3D Design and ModelingPlace Sphere

Tool Setting Effect

Axis Sets the direction of the sphere’s axis.


To place a sphere1. Select the Place Sphere tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the sphere’s center.

3. If Radius is off, enter a data point to define the radius.

If Radius is on, this data point accepts the sphere.

Place Sphere.Defining

the radiusgraphically.


3D Design and ModelingPlace Cylinder

Placingthe same

sphere withradius keyed

in usingAccuDraw.

Key-in: PLACE SPHERE ICON

Although the sphere’s radius can be specified as a toolsetting, it is generally quicker and easier to type the radiusinto the AccuDraw window.

To place a volume of revolution with a non-circular cross-section,use the Place Free-form Surface tool (see page 7-146) inthe Create Surfaces tool box.

Place Cylinder

(3D only) Used to place a cylinder.

Tool Setting Effect


Axis Sets the direction of the cylinder’saxis (height).

Orthogonal If on, the cylinder is a right cylinder.



Tool Setting Effect


Height If on, sets the height.

To place a cylinder1. Select the Place Cylinder tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the center of the base.

3. Enter a data point to define the radius.

If Radius is on, this data point accepts the base.

4. Enter a data point to define the height.

If Height is on, this data point accepts the cylinder.



Place Cylinderwith all constraints

turned off and alldata points entered

graphically.



Place Cylinderwith Orthogonal

turned on and alldata points entered

graphically.

Place cylinder withorthogonal turnedon and AccuDrawused to constrain

the radius “R” andheight “H.”

Key-in: PLACE CYLINDER ICON

Key-in: PLACE CYLINDER RADIUS | RIGHT | SKEWED

Although the cylinder’s radius and height can be specified as


3D Design and ModelingPlace Cone

tool settings, it is generally quicker and easier to type thesedistances into the AccuDraw window.

Place Cone

(3D only) Used to place a cone.

Tool Setting Effect


Axis Sets the direction of the cone’s axis (height).

Orthogonal If on, the cone is a right cone.

Top Radius If on, sets the second radius (step 5).

Base Radius If on, sets the first radius (step 3).


To place a cone1. Select the Place Cone tool.


3D Design and ModelingPlace Torus

2. Enter a data point to define the center of the base.

3. Enter a data point to define the base’s radius.

If Base Radius is on, this data point accepts the base.

4. Enter a data point to define the height and the top’s center.

If Height is on, this data point defines the top’s center only. IfOrthogonal is also on, this data point accepts only.

If Orthogonal is on, this data point defines the height only.

5. Enter a data point to define the top radius.

If Top Radius is on, this data point defines the height only.

Key-in: PLACE CONE ICON

Key-in: PLACE CONE RADIUS | RIGHT | SKEWED

Although the cone’s radii and height can be specified astool settings, it is generally quicker and easier to type thesedistances into the AccuDraw window.

This tool works similarly to the Place Cylinder tool (see page 7-83) .See the illustration after the procedure, “To place a cylinder.”

Place Torus

(3D only) Used to place a torus (a donut-shaped surface or solid).


3D Design and ModelingPlace Torus

Tool Setting Effect


Axis Sets the direction of the axis of revolution.

PrimaryRadius

If on, sets the primary radius (the onethe torus is swept around).

SecondaryRadius

If on, sets the secondary (inside) radius.

Angle If on, sets the sweep angle.

To place a torus1. Select the Place Torus tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the start point.


PrimaryRadius:

This data point defines:

Off Center, primary radius, and start angle.

On Just the center and start angle.

4. Enter a data point to complete the torus, as follows:

If these areon:

This data point defines:

None3 Secondary radius and sweep angle.

SecondaryRadius

Sweep angle.

Angle Secondary radius.

SecondaryRadius andAngle

Direction of the sweep angle rotation.


3D Design and ModelingPlace Wedge

3 The Primary Radius has no effect on this step.

Key-in: PLACE TORUS

Place Wedge

(3D only) Used to place a wedge — a volume of revolutionwith a rectangular cross-section.

Tool Setting Effect


Axis Sets the direction of the axis of ion.

Radius If on, sets the primary radius.

Angle If on, sets the angle (of sweep).



3D Design and ModelingPlace Wedge

To place a wedge1. Select the Place Wedge tool.

2. Enter a data point to define the outside start point.

3. Enter a data point to define the center and the start angle.

If Radius is on, this data point defines just the start angle.

4. Enter a data point to define the sweep angle.

If Angle is on, this data point defines the direction of the rotation.

5. Enter a data point to define the height.

If Height is on, this data point defines whether the wedgeis projected up or down from the start plane.

Placinga Wedgewith all

constraintsoff.


3D Design and Modeling3D Construct tool box

Placing aWedge with

PrimaryRadius “R,”

Angle “θ”,and Height

“H” on.

Key-in: PLACE WEDGE

To place a volume of revolution with a non-rectangularcross-section, use the Construct Revolution (see page 7-97)tool in the 3D Primitives tool box.

3D Construct tool box

Tools in the 3D Construct tool box are used to extrude a surface or solidlinearly or along a path, construct a surface or solid of revolution,create a shell solid, or thicken a surface to create a solid.


3D Design and ModelingExtrude

To Select in the 3D Constructtool box

Create a surface or solid byextruding an element linearly.

Extrude (see page 7-93)

Create a surface or solid byrevolving an element.

Construct Revolution (seepage 7-97)

Create a surface or solidby extruding an elementalong a path.

Extrude Along Path (seepage 7-100)

Hollow out a solid to create a solidwith walls of constant thickness.

Shell Solid (see page 7-103)

Add thickness to a surfaceto create a solid.

Thicken to Solid (see page7-106)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DCONSTRUCT OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Extrude

(3D only) Used to create a surface or solid — a complex 3Delement generated by linearly extruding a profile element (line,line string, arc, ellipse, text, multi-line, complex chain, complexshape, or B-spline curve) a defined distance. Surfaces formedbetween the original profile element and its extrusion are indicatedby straight lines connecting the keypoints.



Tool Setting Effect


Orthogonal If on, the profile element is extrudedorthogonally.

Distance If on, sets the distance, in working units,the element is extruded.

Spin Angle If on, sets the spin angle.

X Scale If on, sets the scale factor in the x-direction.1

Y Scale If on, sets the scale factor in the y-direction.

Keep Profile If on, the original profile element iskept in the design.

1 If X Scale or Y Scale are off, the profile element is not scaled in that direction.

To extrude a surface or solid1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the profile element.

2. Select the Extrude tool.



3. Enter a data point to define the start point.

4. Enter a second data point.

Distance Defines extrusion’s

Off Distance

On Direction

Alternative method — To extrude a surface or solid1. Select the Extrude tool.

2. Identify the profile element.


Distance Defines extrusion’s

Off Distance

On Direction



Extruding a solidgraphically (with

Orthogonal turnedoff). Identify the

profile (1). Definethe distance and

direction (2).


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Revolution

Extruding a solidusing AccuDrawto constrain the

extrusion distance(D) and direction (to

make the extrusionorthogonal).

Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE PROJECTION

Although the extrusion distance can be specified as a toolsetting, it is generally quicker and easier to type this distanceinto the AccuDraw window.

The Place Slab tool (see page 7-78) provides a faster way toplace an extrusion with a rectangular cross-section. The PlaceCylinder tool (see page 7-83) provides a faster way to place anextrusion with a circular cross-section.

Construct Revolution

(3D only) Used to create a surface or solid of revolution — a complex3D element that is generated by rotating a profile element (line, linestring, arc, ellipse, shape, complex chain, complex shape, or B-splinecurve) about an axis of revolution. Surfaces created by the profileelement, as it is rotated, are indicated by arcs connecting the keypoints.



Tool Setting Effect


Axis Sets the direction of the axis of revolution.

Angle Sets the rotation angle.

Keep Profile If on, the original profile element iskept in the design.

To construct a solid or surface of revolution1. Select the Construct Revolution tool.


3. Enter a data point3 .

If Axis is set to Points, this data point defines one pointon the axis of revolution. Otherwise, this data pointdefines the axis of revolution.

4. If Axis is set to Points, enter a second data point to defineanother point on the axis of revolution.

5. Reset to finish.orReturn to step 3 to revolve the same profile element again.

3 To be sure the axis of revolution is defined at the exact location desired, use AccuDraw.



ConstructRevolution.

AccuDraw used toconstrain the axis ofrotation, defined by

points 2 and 3.

The completed solid(of revolution).

Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE REVOLUTION

The Place Sphere tool (see page 7-81) provides a faster way to place


3D Design and ModelingExtrude Along Path

a solid of revolution with a circular cross-section.

To revolve a profile element n segments about the same axis ofrevolution, repeatedly enter data points until 360 is reached.The surface is then placed automatically.

Extrude Along Path

(3D only) Used to create:

• a tubular surface or solid extrusion along a path.

• a surface or solid by extruding a profile element (line,line string, arc, ellipse, complex chain, complex shape, orB-spline curve) along a path.

Tool Setting Effect


Defined By Circular—A tube with a circularcross-section is generated.

Profile—Surface is constructed by extrudingone element (the profile) along anotherelement (the path). Orientation of theprofile is continually changed to followthe orientation of the path.

InsideRadius

If on and Defined By is set to Circular,sets the inside radius.

OutsideRadius

If on and Define By is set to Circular,sets the outside radius.



To extrude a circular tube along a path1. Select the Extrude Along Path tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Defined By to Circular.

3. Identify the path element.

4. Accept the path element.

5. If Outside Radius is off, enter a data point to definethe outside radius.orIf Outside Radius is on, accept the outside radius.

6. If Inside Radius is off, enter a data point to define the inside radius.orIf Inside Radius is on, accept the inside radius.

The extrusion appears.

7. Accept to complete the extrusion.



Extrude circular tubealong path (with

inside and outsideradii turned on).

Left: Identify thepath (1)

Right: Accept toview the extrusion

(2), then accept(3) to complete the

extrusion.

To extrude a profile along a path1. Select the Extrude Along Path tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Defined By to Profile.

3. Identify the path element.


5. Accept to view the extrusion

6. Accept to complete the extrusion.


3D Design and ModelingShell Solid

Extrude profile alongpath.

Left: Identify thepath (1) and the

profile (2).

Right: Accept to viewthe extruded profile

(3), then accept(4) to complete the

extrusion.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT EXTRUDE ALONG

Shell Solid

(3D only) Used to create a hollowed out solid having facesof a defined thickness. One or more selected faces also maybe removed to create an opening.

• After selecting, the solid, as you move the screen pointer over thesolid the face nearest the pointer highlights. A data point selectsthe highlighted face, which remains highlighted.

• You can enter a Reset to deselect an incorrect face. Wherea number of faces have been selected, consecutive Resetswill deselect them in the reverse order (that is, the last faceselected is the first face deselected).



Tool Setting Effect

ShellOutward

If on, material is added to the outside; theoriginal solid defines the inside of the walls.

ShellThickness

Sets the wall thickness for the remaining faces.

To construct a shell solid with no faces removed1. Select the Shell Solid tool.

2. In the Shell Thickness field, key in the desired thickness value.

3. If required, turn on Shell Outward.

4. Identify the solid.

The solid highlights. Simultaneously, the face nearest thescreen pointer location highlights also.

5. Accept, away from the solid, to create the hollowed out shell solid.

To construct a shell solid with one ormore faces removed1. Select the Shell Solid tool.

2. In the Shell Thickness field, key in the desired thickness value.

3. If necessary, turn on Shell Outward.


The solid highlights. Simultaneously, the face nearest the



screen pointer location highlights also.

5. Identify the face to remove.

The face highlights.

6. Accept, away from the solid, to create the shell solid

or

Identify further faces for removal.

7. Accept, away from the solid, to create the shell solid.

Creating a shellsolid. Left: Identify

the solid (1). Center:Identify the faces to

remove (2 and 3).Right: Accept (4),

away from the solidto create the shell

solid.

Rendered view of theshell solid.


3D Design and ModelingThicken to Solid

Key-in: CONSTRUCT SHELL

Thicken to Solid

(3D only) Used to add thickness to an existing surface to createa solid. On identifying the solid, an arrow displays showing thedistance and direction of the thickening that will be added. If AddTo Both Sides is on, arrows display in both directions. If Thicknessis not turned on, then thickening is added graphically, with theamount of thickening defined by the screen pointer.

Tool Setting Effect

Add To BothSides

If on, the thickness value is added toboth sides of the surface.

Thickness Sets the thickness value that is addedto the surface.

To add thickness to a surface to create a solid1. Select the Thicken to Solid tool.


3D Design and ModelingThicken to Solid

2. Turn on Thickness.

3. In the Thickness field, enter the value for the thickening.

4. If necessary, turn on Add To Both Sides.


The surface highlights. An arrow(s) displays, showing the distanceand to which side(s) the thickness will be added.

6. If Add To Both Sides is off, move the pointer, using the arrowsas a guide, to select the side for thickening.

7. Accept.

Thickening an existing solid (a cylinder) to create a solid.

Top left, center, and right show the cylinder before applyingthickening to the outer, inner, and both sides, respectively. Forthickening to both the inner and outer sides of the surface,the direction is defined by the location of the screen pointerand indicated by an arrow. Where Add To Both Sides isselected, the arrows point in both directions and the screenpointer location has no bearing on the result.

Bottom left, center and right, show the results of the thickening


3D Design and Modeling3D Modify tool box

for outer, inner, and both sides, respectively.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT THICKEN

3D Modify tool box

Tools in the 3D Modify tool box are used to:

• modify or remove faces of a solid

• construct a single solid from the union, intersection ordifference of existing solids

• place cuts, fillets, or chamfers on existing solids.

To Select in the 3D Modifytool box

Relocate inwards or outwardsone or more faces of a solid.

Modify Solid (see page 7-109)

Remove one or more facesfrom a solid.

Remove Faces and Heal(see page 7-111)

Construct a single solid that isthe union of two or more existing(overlapping) solids.

Construct Union (see page7-114)

Construct a single solid that isthe intersection of two or moreexisting (overlapping) solids.

Construct Intersection (seepage 7-116)


3D Design and ModelingModify Solid

To Select in the 3D Modifytool box

Construct a single solid bysubtracting the volume of oneor more (overlapping) solidsfrom another. Construct Difference (see

page 7-119)

Create a cut, slot, or pocketin a solid.

Cut Solid (see page 7-121)

Fillet one or more edges of a solid.

Fillet Edges (see page 7-125)

Chamfer one or more edgesof a solid.

Chamfer Edges (see page 7-127)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DMODIFY OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Modify Solid

(3D only) Used to relocate a face of a solid inwards (negative) oroutwards (positive) relative to the center of the solid. Directionof movement is normal to the selected face.

Tool Setting Effect

Distance If on, sets the distance that the faceis to be modified (moved) relative tothe center of the solid.


3D Design and ModelingModify Solid

To modify a face of a solid1. Select the Modify Solid tool.

2. Turn on Distance.

3. In the Distance field, key in the desired value.


The solid highlights. Simultaneously, the face nearest thescreen pointer location highlights also.

5. Identify the face to modify.

The face highlights. An arrow displays the direction anddistance of the modification, normal to the face.

6. Move the pointer, using the arrow as a guide to definethe direction of the modification.

If Distance is off, the pointer defines both the directionand the distance of the modification.

7. Accept to modify the face.

Modifying a face ona solid. Left: Identify

the solid (1), thenthe face to modify(2). Center: Move

the screen pointer todefine the directionof the modification.

Right: Accept (3)to complete the

modification.


3D Design and ModelingRemove Faces and Heal

Modifying a curvedface of a solid. Top

Left: Identify thesolid (1), then the

curved face to modify(2). Use the screen

pointer to definethe direction of the

modification andaccept (3). Top

Right: The solidafter modification.

Bottom: Front views,showing the solid

before (left) andafter (right) the

curved surface wasmodified.

Key-in: STRETCH FACES

Remove Faces and Heal

(3D only) Used to remove an existing face(s) or a feature from asolid and then heal (close) the opening. Additionally, the RemoveLogical Faces toggle lets you remove all faces associated with afeature by identifying any one of the feature’s surfaces.

For example, with Remove Logical Faces turned on, you canremove all faces that are associated with:

• a cut

• a solid that has been added to or subtracted from the original



• a shell solid (returning the solid to its original formwith no hollowing out)

• a fillet or chamfer

by identifying any one face of the feature.

After identifying the solid, as you move the screen pointer overit, the face nearest the pointer highlights. A data point selectsthe highlighted face, which remains highlighted.

You can enter a Reset to deselect an incorrect face. Where a number offaces have been selected, consecutive Resets will deselect them in thereverse order (that is, the last face selected is the first face deselected).

Tool Setting Effect

Method Defines how faces are selected for removal:

Logical Groups—All associated faces areprocessed. For example, a feature suchas a cut can be removed by selecting anyone face of the feature.

Faces—Only selected faces are processed.

To remove one or more faces from a solid1. Select the Remove Faces and Heal tool.

2. From the Method option menu, choose Faces.


The solid highlights. Simultaneously, the face nearest the



screen pointer location highlights.

4. Identify the face to remove.

The face remains highlighted.

5. Accept to remove the face.orIdentify further faces to remove.

6. Accept to remove the selected faces.

Removing a singleface. Left: Identify

the solid (1) and theface to remove (2).

Right: Accept (3) toremove the selected

face.

Removing multiplefaces. Left: Identifythe solid (1) and the

faces to remove (2and 3). Right: Accept

(4) to remove theselected faces.

To remove a cut feature from a solid1. Select the Remove Faces and Heal tool.

2. From the Method option menu, choose Logical Faces.


The solid highlights. Simultaneously, the face nearest the screen


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Union

pointer location highlights in the active color and line style.

4. Identify one of the faces of the cut.

The face highlights.

5. Accept to remove all faces associated with the cut.

Removing a cutfeature from a solid.

Left: Identify thesolid (1). Center: oneof the faces of the cut

(2). Right: Acceptto remove all faces

associated with thecut (3).

Key-in: REMOVE FACES

Construct Union

(3D only) Used to unite two or more overlapping solids.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Union

Tool Setting Effect

KeepOriginals

Determines whether or not the original solidsare retained after constructing the solid.

None—If set, none of the originalsolids are retained.

All—If set, all of the original solidsare retained.

First—If set, the first original solididentified is retained.

Last—If set, the last original solididentified is retained.

To construct a union between overlapping solids1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the solids.

2. Select the Construct Union tool.

The solids are united into a single solid.

Alternative method — To construct a unionbetween overlapping solids1. Select the Construct Union tool.

2. Identify the first solid.

3. Identify the second solid.

4. Accept to construct the union.orIdentify further solids.

5. Accept to construct the union.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Intersection

Using the Element Selection toolto unite several elements into a

single solid.

Left: Use the Element Selectiontool to select the elements to be

united (1 and 2).

Right: Select the Construct Uniontool to unite the selected elements.

Selecting elements individually tounite into a single solid.

Left: After selecting the ConstructUnion tool, select the elements to

unite (1 and 2).

Right: Accept (3) to complete theconstruction.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT UNION

Construct Intersection

(3D only) Used to construct a solid that is the intersection



of two or more overlapping solids.

Typically, you can use this tool to create a solid from the projectedfront and side elevations of an object.

Tool Setting Effect

KeepOriginals






To construct a solid at the intersectionof overlapping solids1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the solids.

2. Select the Construct Intersection tool.

Alternative method — To construct a solid atthe intersection of overlapping solids1. Select the Construct Intersection tool.

2. Identify the first solid.

3. Identify the second solid.

4. Accept to construct the intersection.orIdentify further solids.

5. Accept to construct the intersection.



Creating a solid from the front and side elevations of an object.

Left: Front and side elevations of the required object.

Center: After projecting the front and side “through” eachother, select the Construct Intersection tool and identifyeach of the solids (1 and 2).

Right: Accept (3) to create the solid at the intersectionof the two original elements.

Rendered viewshowing the two

projected elementsformed from the

intersection of thetwo projections.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Difference

Rendered viewshowing the

completed itemformed from the

intersection of thetwo projections.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT INTERSECTION

Construct Difference

(3D only) Used to subtract the volume of one or moreoverlapping solids from another solid.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Difference

Tool Setting Effect

KeepOriginals






To construct a solid that is the difference betweenone solid and one or more overlapping solids1. Select the Construct Difference tool.

2. Identify the solid from which the other solid(s) will be subtracted.

3. Identify the solid to subtract.

4. Accept to subtract the second solid from the first.orIdentify further solids to subtract.

5. Accept to subtract the latter solids from the First.


3D Design and ModelingCut Solid

Example ofsubtracting several

solids from another.

Left: Identify thesolid from whichthe others will be

subtracted (1), andthen the solids tosubtract from the

first (2,3,4,5)̇.

Accept (6) to completethe subtraction.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT DIFFERENCE

Cut Solid

(3D only) Used to place a cut in a solid, using a cutting profile.Cutting profiles may be open or closed elements. Open elementsmust extend to the edge of the solid. When an open element is thecutting profile, the identification point for the solid determines theportion of it that is retained. If Split Solid is on then no materialis removed, the solid is split at the cutting profile.



Tool Setting Effect

CutDirection

Sets the direction of the cut, relative to thecutting profile’s Surface Normal.

Both—Both directions from the profile’s plane.

Forward—Forward from the profile’s plane.

Back —Back from the profile’s plane.

Cut Mode Sets the limits of the cut.

Through—Cuts through all faces of the solid.

Define Depth—Cuts into the solid adefined distance.

Cut Depth (Cut Mode set to Define Depth only) Setsthe cut’s projection distance.

Split Solid If on, no material is removed from the solid;it is split into two or more segments.

Keep Profile If on, the original cutting profile remainsin the design.

To create a cut in a solid using an elementas the profile1. Select the Cut Solid tool.



2. (Optional) — To retain the cut portion, turn on Split Solid.

3. Identify the solid to cut.

4. Identify the cutting element.

An arrow(s) indicates the direction of the cut.

5. Accept to complete the cut.

Using a closed planarelement as a cutting

profile to create a cutin a solid.

Top Left: Identifythe solid (1) and the

cutting profile (2).Top Right: Accept (3)

to create the cut.

Front views showthe solid and cuttingprofile (left) and the

completed cut (right).



Where open elementsare used as cuttingprofiles, they must

extend at least to theedge of the solid as

shown here in thefront view (bottomleft). Additionally,

the identificationpoint for the solid

(1) determines whichpart of the solid is

retained.

When Split Solid ison, the solid is splitinto segments by the

cutting profile.


3D Design and ModelingFillet Edges

Key-in: CONSTRUCT CUT

Fillet Edges

(3D only) Used to fillet, or round, one or more edges of a solid,projected surface, or a surface of revolution.

• After identifying the solid, as you move the screen pointer overthe solid the edge nearest the pointer highlights. A data pointselects the highlighted edge, which remains highlighted.

• You can enter a Reset to deselect an incorrect edge. Wherea number of edges have been selected, consecutive Resetswill deselect them in the reverse order (that is, the last edgeselected is the first edge deselected).

• Alternatively, you can deselect any highlighted edgeby selecting it again.

Tool Setting Effect

Radius Defines the radius of the fillet

SelectTangentEdges

If on, edges that are tangentially continuousare selected and rounded in one operation.


3D Design and ModelingFillet Edges

To fillet one or more edges of a solid orprojected surface1. Select the Fillet Edges tool.

2. In the Radius field, enter the required radius.

3. If required, turn on Select Tangent Edges.

4. Identify an edge to fillet.

The solid highlights, with the selected edge highlighted.

5. Accept to fillet the edge.orIdentify further edges to be filleted.

6. Accept to fillet the edges.

Applying fillets toedges of a solid

(Top) and a projectedsurface (Bottom).Left: Identify theedges (1 and 2),

which highlight.Accept (3) to fillet the

selected edges.


3D Design and ModelingChamfer Edges

Effect of “SelectTangent Edges”

setting. Left: Off —only the identified

section of the edge isselected for filleting.

Right: On — theidentified section

plus all edges thatare tangentiallycontinuous are

selected for filleting.

Key-in: FILLET EDGES

Chamfer Edges

(3D only) Used to chamfer one or more edges of a solid, projectedsurface, or a surface of revolution.

• After selecting, the solid, as you move the screen pointer overthe solid the edge nearest the pointer highlights. A data pointselects the highlighted edge, which remains highlighted.

• You can enter a Reset to deselect an incorrect edge. Wherea number of edges have been selected, consecutive Resetswill deselect them in the reverse order (that is, the last edgeselected is the first edge deselected).Alternatively, you can deselect any highlighted edgeby selecting it again.



Tool Setting Effect

Distance1/Distance 2

Sets the distances to trim back thefaces. If the Lock control is on, they areconstrained to the same value.

Lock control • If on (closed) Distance 1 and Distance2 are the same value.

• If off (open) Distance 1 and Distance2 can be different.

SelectTangentEdges

If on, edges that are tangentially continuousare selected and rounded in one operation.

FlipDirection

Where Distance 1 and Distance 2 are different,reverses the direction of the chamfer and thevalues that the faces are trimmed.

To chamfer one or more edges of a solid1. Select the Chamfer Edges tool.

2. In the Distance 1 and Distance 2 fields, enter the required values.

3. If required, turn on Select Tangent Edges.

4. Identify an edge to chamfer.

The solid highlights, with the selected edge highlighted.

5. Accept to chamfer the edge.orIdentify further edges to be chamfered.

6. Accept to chamfer the edges.



Applying a chamferto an edge of a solid

(Top) and a projectedsurface (Bottom).

Left: Identify theedge (1), which

highlights.

Right: Accept tochamfer the selected

edge (2).

Effect of “SelectTangent Edges”

setting. Left: Off —only the identifiedsection of the edge

is selected forchamfering. Right:

On — the identifiedsection plus all edgesthat are tangentially

continuous areselected for

chamfering.


3D Design and Modeling3D Utility tool box

To correct a chamfer that is constructed inthe wrong direction (that is, Distances 1 and2 are applied to the wrong faces)1. Undo the chamfer.

2. Turn on Flip Direction.

3. Reconstruct the chamfer.

Key-in: CHAMFER EDGES

3D Utility tool box

Tools in the 3D Utility tool box are used to:

• Relocate elements so their faces are aligned.

• Change the display of SmartSolids.

• Extract a face or edge from a solid.

• Intersect a solid or surface with a linear element.

To Select in the 3D Utilitytool box

Move an element and align aselected face of it to the selectedface of a second element.

Align Faces (see page 7-131)

Change the display ofSmartSolids/SmartSurfaces

Change SmartSolid Display(see page 7-135)


3D Design and ModelingAlign Faces

To Select in the 3D Utilitytool box

Extract a face, or edge, froma solid.

Extract Face or Edge Geometry(see page 7-137)

Find the intersection pointbetween a solid/surface anda linear element.

Intersect Solid/Surface withCurve (see page 7-138)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DQUERY OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Align Faces

Used to relocate an element to align the selected face of the firstelement to the selected face of a second element.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the way that the planes of thefaces are selected.

Use AccuDraw—AccuDraw’s drawing plane isused to define the orientation of the faces.

By 3 Points—The orientation of the planesare defined by 3 points.



Tool Setting Effect

Use ACS for (Method set to By 3 Points only) Sets theway that the orientation of the selectedface’s plane is calculated.

Neither—Orientation for both faces isdefined by 3 points.

Element—Orientation for the first element istaken from the ACS. If no ACS is active, thedesign file coordinate system is used.

Placement—Orientation for the placementof the first element is taken from theACS. If no ACS is active, the design filecoordinate system is used.

Make Copy If on, a copy of the first element is used andthe original element is not manipulated.

FlipDirection

Lets you reverse the direction of thealigned element.

To align the faces of two elements using AccuDraw1. Select the Align Faces tool.

2. Set Method to Use AccuDraw.

3. Identify the element to align.

The element highlights.

4. Move the pointer over the element to highlight therequired face and accept.


6. Move the pointer over the element to highlight therequired face and accept.

The first element is relocated with the selected facesaligned. The first element is positioned symmetrically onthe face of the second element.



Aligning faces oftwo elements using

AccuDraw.

Identify the firstelement (1) and the

face to be aligned (2),the second element(3), and the face to

align with (4).

To align the faces of two elements withoutusing AccuDraw1. Select the Align Faces tool.

2. Set Method to By 3 Points.

3. Set Use ACS for to Neither.

4. Identify the element to align.

The element highlights.


6. Define the “from” coordinate origin. This defines the origin



point for the element that is being aligned.

7. Define the “from” coordinate first axis point.

A red arrow appears, showing the direction of the first (x) axis.

8. Define the “from” coordinate second axis point.

Green and blue arrows appear, showing the direction of the second(y) axis and the third (z) axis’ directions, respectively.

9. Define the “to” coordinate origin. This defines the originpoint for the relocation. The first element’s origin pointwill be located at this point.

10. Define the “to” coordinate first axis point.

A red arrow appears, showing the direction of the first (x) axis.

11. Define the “to” coordinate second axis point.

Green and blue arrows appear, showing the direction of the second(y) axis and the third (z) axis’ directions, respectively.

Simultaneously, the first element is relocated with its definedaxes aligning exactly with those of the second element.


3D Design and ModelingChange SmartSolid Display

Aligning faces of twoelements

Identify and acceptthe first element

(1,2).

Define the “from”coordinate origin

(3), first axis point(4) and second axis

point (5).

Define the “to”coordinate origin

(6), first axis point(7) and second axis

point (8).

Key-in: ALIGNFACE

Change SmartSolid Display

(3D only) Used to change the number of Surface Rule Lines used todisplay SmartSolids and SmartSurfaces, and to change the displayfrom Wireframe mode to Surface mode and vice-versa. This isuseful where the design is to be rendered with earlier versions of


3D Design and ModelingChange SmartSolid Display

MicroStation. In these instances the SmartSolid display must be setto Surface Mode for hidden line removal and the rendering modes tofunction correctly (with the earlier MicroStation versions).

Tool Setting Effect

Display Sets the display mode for SmartSolidsand SmartSurfaces:

Surfaces—Required only if design is to berendered with earlier versions of MicroStation.

Wireframe—The default display mode,which should be used unless the designis to be rendered with an earlier versionof MicroStation.

Surface RuleLines

Sets the number of rule lines that represent afull 360 of curvature of a curved surface.

To change the SmartSolid display settingsof an element1. Select the Change SmartSolid Display tool.

2. From the Display option menu, choose the display mode required.

3. Optionally, change the Surface Rule Lines setting.


5. Accept.


3D Design and ModelingExtract Face or Edge Geometry

Changing the SmartSolid display from Wireframe Mode to SurfaceMode (with Surface Rule Lines set at 5). Left: Identify the solid (1).Center: Accept to effect the change (2). Right: The same solid displayedin surface mode with Surface Rule Lines increased from 5 to 10.

Key-in: CHANGE BREP DISPLAY

Extract Face or Edge Geometry

(3D only) Used to extract a face or edge from a solid. Toolsettings let you define the symbology (level, color, weight, andstyle) of the extracted face or edge.

Tool Setting Effect

Extract Sets the type of element to be extracted:

Faces—Extract selected faces from the solid.

Edges—Extract selected edges from the solid.

Level Defines the level on which the extractedelement is placed.

Color Defines the color of the extracted element.


3D Design and ModelingIntersect Solid/Surface with Curve

Tool Setting Effect

Weight Defines the line weight of the extractedelement.

Style Defines the line style of the extracted element.

To extract a face from a solid1. Select the Extract Face or Edge Geometry tool.

2. If required, turn on and set symbology settings.


4. Identify one or more faces on the solid.

5. Accept.

Key-in: EXTRACT FACE

Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve

(3D only). Used to find the intersection point between asolid/surface and a linear element (curve).


3D Design and ModelingIntersect Solid/Surface with Curve

Tool Setting Effect

IntersectionPoints

Locates the intersection point of the curvewith the solid/surface.

Normals atIntersections

Displays the surface normal at the point ofintersection of the curve with the solid/surface.

To construct points and surface normals at theintersection of a line with a solid1. Select the Intersect Solid/Surface with Curve tool.

2. Turn on Intersection Points and Normals at Intersections.


4. Identify the line.

5. Accept.

Constructing pointsand surface normalsat the intersection of

a line with a solid.


3D Design and ModelingSurface Modeling tool frame

Above: Identify thesolid (1) and the line

(2).

Below: Accept toconstruct the points

and surface normals.

Key-in: INTERSECT CURVE SURFACE

Surface Modeling tool frame

The Surface Modeling tool frame provides access to all of the“child” 3D surface modeling tool boxes.


3D Design and ModelingCreate Surfaces tool box

To Use tools in the

Place or construct a free-formB-spline surface.orConstruct a skin surface; or a surface bysection, network, edges, or offset.orConstruct a surface by sweepingan element along two traces oralong a helical curve.

Create Surfaces tool box(see page 7-141)

Trim, extend, stitch, split, orpunch surfaces.orChange B-spline specific elementattributes.orRemove a trim boundary from a surface.

Modify Surfaces tool box(see page 7-159)

Construct a fillet or blend betweensurfaces.

Fillet Surfaces tool box(see page 7-177)

Evaluate surfaces. 3D Queries tool box(see page 7-182)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX SURFACE OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Create Surfaces tool box

The tools in the Create Surfaces tool box are used to place or constructa free-form, helical, or offset surface, and to construct a surface bycross-sections, edges, skin, or by sweeping along two traces.


3D Design and ModelingCreate Surfaces tool box

To Select in Create Surfacestool box

Construct a B-spline surfacethat is transformed betweensection elements, or elementsof a network. Construct Surface by Section or

Network (see page 7-143)

Construct a B-spline surface thatcontains selected elementsas edges.

Construct Surface by Edges(see page 7-145)

Place or construct a free-formB-spline surface.

Place Free-form Surface

Construct a B-spline surfaceby transforming one element(section) to a second element(section) as it is projected alonga linear element (the trace).

Construct Skin Surface (seepage 7-151)

Create a B-spline surface bysweeping one or two sectionprofile curves along twotrace curves. Sweep Along Two Traces

(see page 7-152)

Create a helical-shaped B-splinesurface by sweeping a sectionprofile curve along a pre-definedhelix curve. Construct Helical Surface

(see page 7-155)

Construct a B-spline surface thatis offset from another surface.

Construct Offset Surface(see page 7-158)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFREEFORM OFF | ON | TOGGLE


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Surface by Section or Network

Construct Surface by Section or Network

(3D only) Used to construct a B-spline surface that is transformedbetween section elements, or elements of a network.

All section elements must be in the same direction to avoid the resultingsurface from being “twisted”. Before using Construct Surface by Sectionor Network, use the Change Element Direction (see page 6-106) toolin the Modify Curves tool box to change the sections’ directions andstart points so they are in a similar position to each other. As a finalcheck, visual aids display each element’s direction as it is selected.

Tool Setting Effect

Define By Sets how the surface is constructed.

Section—Transformed between sections (lines,line strings, arcs, ellipses, complex chains,complex shapes, or B-spline curves). Theorder in the u-direction is 4. The order in thev-direction is determined by the sections.

Network—A Gordon surface is constructed,interpolating a network of elements.Each element in the network’s u-directionshould intersect all elements in itsv-direction, and vice-versa.

ApplySmoothing

If off, the continuities of the constructedsurface are those of the input cross-sections.

If on, each input cross-section is approximatedby a smooth B-spline curve within thespecified Tolerance value, and the surface iscreated from the approximation curves.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Surface by Section or Network

To construct a B-spline surface by cross-sections1. Select the Construct Surface by Section or Network tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Define By to Section.

3. Identify the sections in the order that the transformation isto follow. (You can Reset to reject a section.)

4. Accept to display the B-spline surface.

5. Accept the B-spline surface.

Top Left: Identifythe section elements

(1,2,3, and 4).Arrows display toverify the element

direction.

Top Right: Accept todisplay the B-spline

surface (5) andaccept again to create

the surface (6).

With ApplySmoothing

turned on, eachsection element is

approximated by aB-spline curve, withthe resulting surface

being smoother.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Surface by Edges

To construct a surface that interpolatesa network of elements1. Select the Construct Surface by Section or Network tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Define By to Network.

3. Identify the first curve in the u-direction.

4. Identify the other curves in the u-direction.

5. Accept the curves.

6. Identify the first curve in the v-direction.

7. Identify the other curves in the v-direction.

8. Accept the curves.


Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE CROSSSECTION

Each element (curve) in the u-direction must intersect eachelement (curve) in the v-direction of the network.

Construct Surface by Edges

(3D only) Used to construct a B-spline surface that has elements(lines, line strings, shapes, arcs, curves, B-spline curves, complexchains, and complex shapes) as edges. Where the number of edges isthree to six inclusive, they must meet at their endpoints.

• If there are two edges, a ruled surface, connecting either the closestor the farthest ends, is constructed between the boundaries.

• If there are three edges, the tool settings let you choosebetween a Coons patch, or an n-sided patch.

• If there are four edges, a bi-cubically blended Coons patch is created.

• If there are five or six edges, then three five or six surfaces,respectively, are joined to form one patch.


3D Design and ModelingPlace Free-form Surface

Tool Setting Effect

Method For3 Edges

Lets you choose how the surface isconstructed from 3 edges:

Degenerate Coons Patch

N-sided Patch

To construct a surface by edges1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the edges.

2. Select the Construct Surface by Edges tool.


Alternative method — To construct asurface by edges1. Select the Construct Surface by Edges tool.

2. Identify the first edge.

3. Identify the other edge(s).

4. Enter a data point to display the surface.


Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE EDGE

If there are two edges, Resetting during the final step causesan alternative surface to be displayed. This surface thencan be accepted or rejected.

Place Free-form Surface

(3D only) Used to place or construct a free-form B-spline surface.



Method Surface is defined as follows

Define Poles Poles (vertices) of the control net aredefined by data points or vertices ofelements. The number of poles in the u-and v-direction must be greater than orequal to the order in that direction.

Through Points Surface passes through the pointsdefined by the data points or verticesof elements and is interpolated at eachpoint. One pole is defined for each datapoint, the number of which must begreater than or equal to the Order.

L[east]-Square[s] ByTol[erance]

The surface is approximated based onthe points defined by the data points orthe vertices of the identified line stringor shape. The maximum deviationof the input points from the surfaceis adjustable using the Tolerancesetting. After the approximationsurface is created, the maximumdeviation and the mean deviation aredisplayed in the status field.

L[east]-Square[s] ByNum[ber]

The sum of the squares of the distancesfrom the data points or vertices ofelements to corresponding points on thesurface is minimized. The control nethas the active number of Poles in the u-and v-direction. If the maximum errorexceeds the Tolerance, the maximumerror is displayed in the status bar. 1

Catmull-Rom Fourth-order NURBS surface thatis interpolated to closely resemblethe overall shape defined by thedata points entered or vertices ofthe selected line strings.

1 The Tolerance is set in the B-splines dialog box (Element > B-splines (see

Chapter 4, “Element Menu,” in the on-line Reference Guide).



Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets how the surface is generated (seelarge table above).

Define By Sets how the surface is created.

Placement—the surface is placed byentering data points.

Construction—the surface is constructedbased on the vertices of line strings or shapes.

Closure Sets whether surface is Open or Closedin the u- or v-direction.

Order The order of the equation that defines thesurface in the u- or v-direction (2-15).

Poles The number of poles in the u- or v-direction,if Method is Least Squares (3–101).

Tolerance Sets the fitting or approximation tolerance,when Method is set to L-Square By Tol. Theminimum distance from any one of the inputdata points to the surface is less than thisvalue. The minimum distance is computedby projecting a point to the surface.

To place a free-form surface with data points1. Select Place Free-form Surface tool.

2. Set Define By to Placement.

3. Enter a series of data points to define the first row(in the u-direction).


Define Poles One of the control net’s poles.




Through Points A point through which thesurface must pass.


One of a set of points thatis approximated.

4. Reset to complete the first row.

The number of data points in the first row must be greaterthan or equal to the Order in the u-direction.

5. Enter more data points to define other rows. After the samenumber of data points as in the first row is entered, the rowis completed and a new row is started.

6. Reset to complete the definition.

If at least as many rows as the Order in the v-direction arecompletely defined, a B-spline surface is generated.

Placing a free-formsurface by entering

data points (Methodset to Define Poles).A Reset was entered

after data points 4and 12.



To construct a free-form surface based onan element’s vertices1. Select the Place Free-form Surface tool.

2. Set Define By to Construction.

3. Identify the elements in the sequence that the B-splinesurface is to follow.


Alternative method — To construct a free-formsurface based on an element’s vertices1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the elements in the

sequence that the B-spline surface is to follow.

2. Select the Place Free-form Surface tool.


Left: Identify theelements, in the

sequence that theB-spline surface is tofollow (points 1 to 4).

Right: Accept (5) tocreate the B-spline

surface.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Skin Surface

Rendered view of theB-spline surface.

Key-in: PLACE SURFACE

Construct Skin Surface

(3D only) Used to construct a B-spline surface by transformingtwo elements (sections) along another element (the trace). Thesections and trace can be lines, line strings, arcs, ellipses, complexchains, complex shapes, or B-spline curves.

Tool Setting Effect


Orthogonal If on, each section is rotated to beperpendicular to the trace.

To construct a B-spline surface by skin1. Place the section elements in their correct position (orientation


3D Design and ModelingSweep Along Two Traces

and location) on the trace element.

2. Select the Construct Skin Surface tool.

3. Identify the trace.

4. Identify the first section.

5. Identify the second section.

6. Enter a data point to display the B-spline surface.


Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE SWEEP

Sweep Along Two Traces

(3D only) Used to create a B-spline surface by sweeping one ortwo section profile curves along two trace curves.

Tool Setting Effect

Method Sets the number of section profile curves.

Sweep One Along Two—one sectionprofile curve.

Sweep Two Along Two—two sectionprofile curves.



Tool Setting Effect

Scale ToSecond Trace

If on, the section profile curve is scaled as itsweeps along the two trace curves. If off, thesecond trace curve simply serves to controlorientation. This option is enabled only ifMethod is set to Sweep One Along Two.

Scale SectionHeight

If on, the section profile curve is also scaled inthe height direction. This option is enabledonly if Method is set to Sweep One AlongTwo and Scale To Second Trace is on.

To sweep a section profile curve(s) alongtwo trace curves1. Select the Sweep Along Two Traces tool.

2. Identify the first trace curve.

3. Identify the second trace curve.

4. Identify the first (or only) section profile curve.

5. If Method is set to Sweep Two Along Two, identify thesecond section profile curve.

6. Accept.

The surface is generated and displayed.




Sweep One AlongTwo: Identify the

first (1) and second(2) trace curvesfollowed by the

profile curve (3).Enter a data point (4)

to view the surface.Accept/Reject the

surface.

Left: With Scale toSecond Trace turnedoff, the profile curve

is swept along thefirst trace.

Center: With Scaleto Second Trace

turned on, the profile(width) is scaled tothe second trace, asit is swept along the

first trace.

Right: With ScaleSection Height

turned on, both thewidth and the height

of the profile arescaled as it is sweptalong the first trace.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Helical Surface

Sweep Two AlongTwo: Identify the

first (1) and second(2) trace, followed

by the first (3) andsecond (4) profile

curves. Enter adata point (5) toview the surface.

Accept/Reject thesurface.

The surface is scaledto the second trace

as it is swept alongthe first. At the same

time it transitionsfrom the first profile

to the second.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE TRACE

Construct Helical Surface



(3D only) Used to construct a helical-shaped B-spline surface bysweeping a section profile curve along a pre-defined helix curve. Thesection profile curve needs to be placed at one end of the helix curve.Before using this tool, you must also place a line that represents theaxis direction of the helix curve; only the direction of the line matters.

Tool Setting Effect

Scale Sectionin X

Sets the factor by which the section profilecurve is scaled as it sweeps along the helixcurve in the direction from the startingpoint of the helix curve to its center point— that is, the radius direction.

Scale Sectionin Y

Sets the factor by which the section profilecurve is scaled as it sweeps along the helixcurve in the direction of the helix axis —that is, the height direction.

Spin Angle Sets the angle at which the profile is spunas it sweeps along the helix curve.

To construct a helical-shaped B-spline surface1. Select the Construct Helical Surface tool.

2. Identify the trace helix curve.

3. Identify the section profile curve.

4. Identify the line that represents the axis direction of the helix curve.

5. Accept.

The surface is generated and displayed.




Left: Identify thehelix (1) the profile

(2) and a linedefining the direction

of the helix axis (3).

Right: Accept(4) to view the

helical surface.Accept/Reject the

surface.

Rendered view of thehelical surface.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE HELICAL

Even though this tool is designed for helical sweeping situations,the trace curve does not have to be a helix curve. It can be


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Offset Surface

considered as a more generalized rigid sweep tool.

Construct Offset Surface

(3D only) Used to construct a B-spline surface by offsetting anextruded surface, surface of revolution or a B-spline surface.

Tool Setting Effect

Distance If on, sets the offset distance in thesurface normal direction.


To construct an offset surface1. Select the Construct Offset Surface tool.


Surface normals display, indicating the direction and distance ofthe offset surface. If distance is on, their length is fixed.


If Distance is off, this data point defines the distanceto offset the surface.


3D Design and ModelingModify Surfaces tool box

If Distance is on, this data point defines the direction only.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE OFFSET

Modify Surfaces tool box

The tools in the Modify Surfaces tool box are used to create newsurfaces from the union, intersection, or difference betweensurfaces; to trim, extend, stitch, split, punch, or extrude surfaces;or to change B-spline specific attributes.

To Select in the Modify Surfacestool box

Trim two elements to theircommon intersection.

Construct Trim (see page 7-161)

Punch a hole in a surface, orto project a B-spline curveonto a surface.

Project Trim (see page 7-164)

Switch between surface types,or add caps to extrusions andsurfaces of revolution.

Convert 3D (see page 7-167)

To stitch two surfaces togetherto form a single surface.

Construct Stitch (see page7-168)


3D Design and ModelingModify Surfaces tool box

To Select in the Modify Surfacestool box

Change the normal directionof a surface element.

Change Normal Direction(see page 7-169)

Reverse the sense of theboundaries of a B-spline surface.orRemove one or all boundaries(holes) from a B-spline surface.

Modify Trim Boundary (seepage 7-170)

Change a surface’sB-spline-specific attributesto the active B-spline settings.

Change to Active SurfaceSettings (see page 7-172)

Split, or break, an element intotwo separate surfaces.

Split Surface (see page 7-173)

Construct a B-spline surfaceextension to an element.

Extend Surface (see page 7-174)

Smooth a B-spline surface byreducing its number of controlpoints (poles).

Reduce Surface Poles (seepage 7-175)

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DMODSURF OFF | ON | TOGGLE


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Trim

Construct Trim

(3D only) Used to do the following:

• Trim two elements to their common intersection

• Trim one element to its intersection with a second.

• Impose boundaries onto the first selected element, or bothelements, at their common intersection.

• Construct a curve along the common intersectionof the two elements.

When using this tool, before accepting the trim, you canadjust the various tool settings to suit.

When selecting elements for trimming, the portion of the element thatis identified is retained. Before accepting the trim, you can turn on Flip1st, or Flip 2nd, for the first or second selected element respectively.These toggles reverse the portion that is retained and are useful ifyou inadvertently select the wrong portion to be retained.

Tool Setting Effect

IntersectionCurve

If on, a curve is constructed along the commonintersection of the surfaces.

Trim 1stSurface

The first surface identified is trimmed to itsintersection with the second element.



Tool Setting Effect

Trim 2ndSurface

The second surface identified is trimmed toits intersection with the first element.

Flip 1st Sets which portion of the 1st selectedelement is retained after trimming. If on,the selected portion is deleted; if off, theselected portion is retained.

Flip 2nd Sets which portion of the 2nd selectedelement is retained after trimming. If on,the selected portion is deleted; if off, theselected portion is retained.

Copy 1st If on a copy is made of the first selectedelement, and the original element isretained in the design.

Copy 2nd If on a copy is made of the first selectedelement, and the original element isretained in the design.

To trim two elements to their common intersection1. Select the Construct Trim tool.


This data point identifies the portion of the surface to be trimmed.If Flip 1st is off, then the identified portion is kept, and vice versa.


This data point identifies the portion of the surface to be trimmed.If Flip 2nd is off, then the identified portion is kept, and vice versa.

4. Accept to view the trim.

5. Accept to trim the elements.



Trimming twoelements to at their

common intersectionpoint.

Top Left: Identify thetwo surfaces (1 and

2).

Top Right: Accept toview the trim (3) and

accept to completethe trim (4).

Bottom: Front viewsshowing the surfacesbefore (left) and after

(right) trimming.

With Flip 1st. turnedon, the opposite

portion of the firstsurface is retained

after trimming.


3D Design and ModelingProject Trim

Key-in: CONSTRUCT TRIM

Project Trim

(3D only) The Project Trim tool is used to:

• Punch a hole in a surface by projecting a cutting profile.

• Project a B-spline curve onto a surface.

Tool Setting Effect

Direction Sets the direction of the projection.

Orthogonal—Projection is taken normalto the cutting profile.

View—Projection is taken normal tothe active view.

Vector—Direction of projection is determinedby two points.

Normal to Surface—Projection is taken normalto the plane of the surface being trimmed.



Tool Setting Effect

Output Mode Sets the method used to trim the surface.

Trim Surface— The region either insideor outside the projected curve is trimmedaway. The identified portion of thesurface is retained.

Split Surface—The surface is divided into tworegions, one inside the projected profile andthe other outside the projected profile.

Project Curve—Projects a B-spline curve onthe surface. No boundary is created.

Impose Onto—The profile curve is imposedonto the surface as a boundary.

Keep Profile If on, the profile curve is retained.

To punch a hole in a surface1. Select the Project Trim tool.

2. Identify the surface to punch, on a portion of the surface thatis to remain after the punching operation.

3. Identify the curve to project.

4. Accept to create hole.



Trimming a surface(orthogonal to

profile).

Left: Identify thesurface anywhere inthe region that is tobe retained (1) and

the cutting profile (2).

Right: Accept (3) tocreate the hole.

Alternative method — To punch a hole in a surface1. Select the Project Trim tool.

2. Identify the surface to punch, on a portion of the surface thatis to remain after the punching operation.

3. Identify the curve to project.

4. If Project Along is set to Vector, enter first point to


3D Design and ModelingConvert 3D

define vector direction.

5. Enter second point to define vector direction and create hole.

Key-in: PROJECT TRIM

Convert 3D

(3D only) Used to convert a surface element to a B-spline surface,capped solid, or simple surface (Type 18).

Tool Setting Effect

Convert To Sets how the element is converted.

Solid—Converts the element to a capped solid.

Surface—Converts the element to asimple surface.


3D Design and ModelingConstruct Stitch

To convert a surface element to a capped solid1. Select the Convert 3D tool.

2. Turn on Convert To Solid by Capping.

3. Select the element.


Key-in: CONVERT 3D

Construct Stitch

(3D only) Used to stitch two open surfaces (extruded surfaces,surfaces of revolution, B-spline surfaces or shapes) into onesurface, along their abutting edges.

To stitch two surfaces together1. Select the Construct Stitch tool.

2. Identify the first surface to be stitched.

3. Identify the second surface to be stitched.

4. Accept to create the stitched surface.


3D Design and ModelingChange Normal Direction

Left: Identify the firstand second surfaces

(1 and 2). Right:Accept to create thestitched surface (3).

Key-in: CONSTRUCT STITCH

Change Normal Direction

(3D only) Used to change the surface normal direction for a surface(cone, extruded surface, surface of revolution, or B-spline surface).

Used in conjunction with other tools in the Modify Surfaces toolbox to control the way that elements are treated.


3D Design and ModelingModify Trim Boundary

To change a surface’s normal direction1. Select the Change Normal Direction tool.


The surface normals display.

3. Accept to change the direction of the surface normals.

Alternative method — To change a surface’snormal direction1. Use the Element Selection tool to select the surface(s).

2. Select the Change Normal Direction tool.

The normal direction is changed for the selected surface(s).

Key-in: CHANGE NORMAL

Modify Trim Boundary

(3D only) Used to:

• Reverse the sense of the boundaries of a B-spline surface —that is, convert holes to surfaces and vice-versa.

• Remove one or more boundaries (holes) from a B-spline surface.


3D Design and ModelingModify Trim Boundary

Tool Setting Effect

TrimBoundary

Sets the boundary area.

Reverse—Reverse the sense of the boundaries.

Remove All—Remove all boundaries.

Remove One—Remove one boundary.

To change a B-spline surface boundary1. Select the Modify Trim Boundary tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Trim Boundary to Reverse.



To remove a B-spline surface boundary1. Select the Modify Trim Boundary tool.

2. In the tool settings window, set Trim Boundary toRemove All or Remove One.


4. If Trim Boundary is set to Remove One, identify theboundary to remove.

5. Accept the removal.

Key-in: MODIFY TRIM BOUNDARY

Modify Trim Boundary is for use with B-spline surfaces only and


3D Design and ModelingChange to Active Surface Settings

does not apply to SmartSolids/SmartSurfaces.

Change to Active Surface Settings

(3D only) Used to change a B-spline surface’s B-spline attributesto the active B-spline settings, as follows:

Tool Setting Effect

Polygon If on, changes the control net’s display:

Invisible—the control net is hidden.

Visible—the control net is displayed.

Surface If on, changes the surface’s display:

Invisible—the surface is hidden.

Visible—the surface is displayed.

Closure If on in the u- or v-direction, sets the surfaceto Open or Closed in that direction(s).The appearance is not changed, only theinternal representation.


3D Design and ModelingSplit Surface

Tool Setting Effect

Order If on in the u- or v-direction, sets theorder in that direction.

Rules If on in the u- or v-direction, sets the numberof rule lines in that direction.

PreserveShape

(Order on only) Preserves the original shapeof the surface when the order is changed.

To change B-spline attributes of a surface1. Select the Change to Active Surface Settings tool.

2. Set the tool settings as desired.


4. Accept the changes.

Key-in: CHANGE SURFACE SETTINGS

Split Surface

(3D only) Used to separate a surface (cone, extruded surface,surface of revolution, or B-spline surface) into two B-splinesurfaces along its rule lines.


3D Design and ModelingExtend Surface

To split a surface1. Select the Split Surface tool.


3. Select the first end point of splitting.

4. (Optional) — Reset to change the direction of splitting.

5. Select the second end point of splitting to complete the procedure.

Key-in: SPLIT SURFACE

Extend Surface

(3D only) Used to extend a surface (cone, extruded surface, surfaceof revolution, or B-spline surface) along one of its edges.

Tool Setting Effect

Tangential If on, extension is tangent continuousat the joint of extension

By Angle If on, extension is at an angle specifiedin the Angle field.

Distance Sets the distance of the extension.


3D Design and ModelingReduce Surface Poles

Tool Setting Effect

Angle (By Angle on only) Sets the angle at whichthe extension is made. An angle of 0creates a tangential extension.

Make Copy The original surface is retained.

To extend a surface1. Extend Surface tool.

2. Identify the surface near the edge to be extended.

3. Adjust the settings if necessary.

4. Accept the extension.

Key-in: EXTEND SURFACE

Reduce Surface Poles

(3D only) Used to smooth a B-spline surface by reducing itsnumber of control points (poles). The smaller the Tolerancesetting, the fewer control points removed.


3D Design and ModelingReduce Surface Poles

Tool Setting Effect

Make Copy If on, the original surface is not deleted uponcreation of the replacement surface.

Tolerance Sets the maximum distance allowed betweenthe replacement surface and the originalsurface. To make the replacement surfaceappear identical to the original, even thoughits complexity is reduced, experiment withdifferent Tolerance values.

To reduce the number of poles in a B-spline surface1. Select the Reduce Surface Poles tool.

2. Identify a B-spline surface.

3. Accept the reduction in the number of poles.

The number of control points reduced in both parametric Uand V directions are displayed in the status field.

Identify a B-splinesurface (1).

Accept the reductionin the number of

poles (2) to modifythe surface.


3D Design and ModelingFillet Surfaces tool box

The number ofcontrol points

reduced in the Uand V directionsare displayed inthe status field.

Key-in: CONSTRUCT SURFACE REDUCE

To check the number of control points in a B-spline surface,use the Analyze Element tool in the Primary tool box or chooseInformation from the Element menu.

Fillet Surfaces tool box

The tools in the Fillet Surfaces tool box are used to create filletsbetween surfaces, and to join surfaces by blending.

To Select in the Fillet Surfacestool box

Construct a fillet of constantradius between two surfaces.

Fillet Surfaces (see page 7-178)

Construct a blend surfacefrom two surfaces.

Blend Surfaces (see page 7-179)

Construct a blend surfacebetween two B-spline surfacesalong their rail curves.

Blend Surface Between RailCurves (see page 7-181)


3D Design and ModelingFillet Surfaces

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFILLET OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Fillet Surfaces

(3D only) Used to create a 3D fillet between two surfaces (shapes,cones, extruded surfaces, surfaces of revolution, or B-splinesurfaces) by sweeping an arc of constant radius along the commonintersection curve — commonly referred to as a constant radiusrolling ball fillet. The fillet is created in the area pointed toby the surface normals of both surfaces.

Tool Setting Effect

Truncate Defines which surface(s) are to be truncated:

Both—Both surfaces are trimmed.

Single—The first surface identifiedis trimmed.

None—Neither surface is trimmed.

Radius Sets the fillet’s radius.

To place a fillet between two surfaces1. (Optional) — Use the Change Normal Direction tool to set

the normal directions for both surfaces.

2. Select the Fillet Surfaces tool.


3D Design and ModelingBlend Surfaces

3. From the Truncate option menu, choose a truncating option.

4. In the Radius field, key in the required radius.

5. Identify the first surface.

The surface normal orientation displays.

6. Identify the second surface.

The surface normal orientation displays.

7. Accept to view the fillet.

The fillet displays.

8. Accept to create the fillet.

Creating a filletbetween two surfaces.

Left: Identify the twosurfaces (1 and 2).

Right: Accept (3) toview the fillet, thenaccept (4) to create

the fillet.

Key-in: BLEND SURFACES

Blend Surfaces

(3D only) Used to construct a blend between two elements (extrudedsurfaces, surfaces of revolution, cones, or B-spline surfaces) with a


3D Design and ModelingBlend Surfaces

specified order of continuity. The resulting B-spline surface consists ofthe trimmed original elements and a transition connecting them.

The direction of the first and last tangents of the transition isthe direction of the tangents of the original elements at theirtrimmed edges. The relative magnitudes of these tangents canbe adjusted to achieve the desired blend.

Tool Setting Effect

Continuity Sets the order of continuity — Position,Tangent, or Curvature.

Factor 1 Sets the magnitude of the initial tangent.

Factor 2 Sets the magnitude of the final tangent.


3D Design and ModelingBlend Surface Between Rail Curves

To construct a blend between two surfaces1. Select the Blend Surfaces tool.

2. Identify the point on the first element where the blend is to start.

3. Identify the edge of the first element to trim.

4. Identify the point on the second element where the blend is to end.

5. Identify the edge of the second element to trim.

6. (Optional) — Adjust the settings to achieve a satisfactory blend.

7. Accept the blend.

Key-in: BLEND SURFACE

Blend Surface Between Rail Curves

(3D only) Used to construct a blending B-spline surface betweentwo surfaces (extruded surfaces, surfaces of revolution, cones,or B-spline surfaces) along their rail curves. A rail curve is anelement (line, arc, line string, ellipse, complex shape, complexchain, or B-spline curve) lying on the surface.4

4 Rail curves can be created with the Extract Surface Rule Lines tool in the Create Curves tool

box, the Extract Face or Edge Geometry (see page 7-137) tool in the 3D Utility tool box, or with

the Project Trim (see page 7-164) tool, with Project Curve on, in the Modify Surfaces tool box.


3D Design and Modeling3D Queries tool box

Tool Setting Effect

Blend Type Sets the type of blend

Round—smooth circular blend.

Chamfer—chamfer blend.

Tolerance Determines the number of (sampled) pointsused to create the blend.

To construct a blending surface between twoB-spline surfaces along their rail curves1. Select the Blend Surface Between Rail Curves tool.

2. Identify the first B-spline surface.

3. Identify the first rail curve.

4. Identify the second rail curve.

5. Enter a data point to display the blending surface.

6. Accept the blending surface.

Key-in: BLEND RAILS

If a rail curve is closed, use the Change Element Direction (see page6-106) tool in the Modify Curves tool box to re-orient the curve tomatch the direction and starting point of the other rail curve.

3D Queries tool box

Tools in the 3D Queries tool box are used to extract curvesfrom B-spline surfaces.


3D Design and ModelingEvaluate Surface

To Select in the 3D Queriestool box

Graphically and numericallyevaluate the attributes ofa B-spline surface at givenlocations on the surface. Evaluate Surface (see page

7-183)

Visualize the curvature of acurve or Gaussian curvatureof a surface.

Analyze Curvature

Key-in: DIALOG TOOLBOX EXTRACT OFF | ON | TOGGLE

Evaluate Surface

(3D only) Used to graphically and numerically evaluate attributesof a B-spline surface, other than order, poles, and knots, at givenlocations on the surface. There are four ways to define locationson a surface, and two output options.

The attributes that can be computed are points, tangents, andnormal directions. Computed attributes can be used as referencepoints or reference lines for other purposes.



Tool Setting Effect

Attribute(s)Output By

Sets the method used to output thecomputed attributes:

Display Only

Save In File—The attributes are saved in theactive design file with the same graphic groupnumber for easy manipulation.

Location(s)Input By

Sets the manner in which the locations onthe surface are defined:

Enter Data Point—interactively define a singlelocation on the surface.

Parameter—using the Parameter Value U and Vsettings. The values, which must be in the range0–1, specify the location from the domain to mapto the displayed object. Within MicroStation,the domain is from 0.0 to 1.0.

Dist[ance] Along Curve—using the Dist FromStart(%) U and V settings. The values are each apercentage of the total length of the u or v curve onthe surface. For example, to extract the tangentdirection of a surface at its middle point, set Dist.From Start(%) U and V each to 50.

Point Array option—using the Number of PointsU and V settings. The values are the number ofevenly spaced locations on the u and v curves,respectively. For example, to evaluate at 200 evenlyspaced locations on the surface, set Number ofPoints U to 10 and Number of Points V to 20.

Tangent PlotScale

Sets the scale factor applied to the magnitudedisplay. If set to 1.0, the computed tangentswill be the true derivative vector — that is, thetangent direction with the magnitude.

Normal PlotScale

Sets the scale factor applied to the perpendicularline segments in Normal output. If set to 1.0,the true normal vector is displayed — that is,the direction plus its true magnitude.



Tool Setting Effect

ParameterValue U/V

Sets the parameter values applicable to theParameter option for defining locations on thesurface; see Location(s) Input By above.

Dist[ance]FromStart(%) U/V

Sets the distance values applicable to the Dist.Along Curve option for defining locations on thesurface; see Location(s) Input By above.

Number ofPoints U/V

Sets the numeric values applicable to the PointArray option for defining locations on the surface;see Location(s) Input By above.

[Compute]Points

If on, the points on the surface at which evaluationis performed are displayed in the output.



Tool Setting Effect

[Compute]Tangents

If on, the surface’s tangents are computed. Inthe context of this tool’s operation, a tangent iscomputed as the partial derivatives of the surfacein both parametric u and v directions.

[Compute]Normal

If on, the surface’s normal directions are computed.


3D Design and ModelingUsing Cells in 3D

To evaluate a B-spline surface1. Select the Evaluate Surface tool.


If Location(s) Input By is set to Enter Data Point, this data pointalso determines the location on the surface at which to evaluate.


The surface is evaluated, and the desired attributesare computed and output.

Key-in: EVALUATE SURFACE

This tool can also be used to evaluate 3D primitive surfaces.

Using Cells in 3DCells are used in 3D design in a manner similar to 2D (see Using Cellson page 4-1). 3D-specific details are covered in this section.

You can attach a 2D cell library to a 3D design, but not vice-versa.

Creating 3D cells

The procedure for creating a cell in 3D is similar to that in 2D (seeCreating and Editing Cells on page 4-6), with these differences:

• 3D cells must be saved in a 3D cell library.

• In 3D, the cell retains the orientation in which it was created.For example, a cell created in a Top view is always placed asthough it is a Top view, regardless of the orientation of the view inwhich it is placed. Normally, cells should be created in one of theOrthogonal views (see page 7-6) to simplify future placement.

• 3D cells are created in a volume determined by the fencearea and the view’s Display Depth.

It’s a good idea to create the cell on a level(s) of its own.Before adding the cell to the cell library, the view should befitted to minimize the Display Depth.


3D Design and ModelingPatterning in 3D

Patterning in 3D

In 3D, any element that is closed, planar, and solid can bepatterned. Hole elements on the same level are not patterned ifthey are on the same plane as the solid element.

The Active Pattern Angle sets the angle of the pattern in the viewin which the element is identified. If the element is parallel to theview, the actual pattern angle and the apparent angle are the same.Therefore, it is usually preferable, although not necessary, to identifythe element to pattern in a view that is parallel to the element.


Index3D

AccuDraw’s drawing plane in . . . . . . . . 7–55creating cells in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187data points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60drawing in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54manipulating and modifying elements

in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–69panning in views in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10placing elements in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54selecting elements in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70tentative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60using the fence in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71

3D and B-splines tool frame . . . . . . . . . . 7–1403D Queries tool box

Evaluate Surface tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183tool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–182

3D View ControlChange View Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15Navigate Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35Show Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22

AAC= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13

3D operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55ACS and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18, 2–45deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18drawing plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34, 2–58Place Arc and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52Place Block and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53Place Circle and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51Place Ellipse and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53Place SmartLine and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54popup calculator for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23tolerance shortcut in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31unit roundoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–22

ACCUDRAW BUMP TOOLSETTING . . . 2–58

ACCUDRAW SETTINGS CONTEXTSENSON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34

ACCUDRAW SETTINGS INDEXTOL . . . 2–31ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61, 6–125Active Angle field

popup calculator for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26ACTIVE ANGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–96ACTIVE CELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14Active Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13Active Color Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13Active Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4, 7–54

set by key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21set by keying in distance to move . . . . . 7–21set graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19

Active Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3Active Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17Active Line Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15ACTIVE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–98Active Point

set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–64settings group component . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83

ACTIVE RCELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14Active Scale field, popup calculator for . . . 2–26ACTIVE STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19ACTIVE TERMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21ACTIVE TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–72ACTIVE TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–96ACTIVE TSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21ACTIVE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–96ACTIVE ZDEPTH ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . 7–21ACTIVE ZDEPTH RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . 7–21Add to Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20Angle

between lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74AR= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14Arc

by endpoint, center and sweep angle . . 1–75elliptical (180 sweep angle) . . . . . . . . . 1–77elliptical (90 sweep angle) . . . . . . . . . . 1–78extend or shorten to intersection . . . . . 3–102

thru 3–103modify angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80

MicroStation/J User’s Guide i–1

Index

modify axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81modify radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–79placement with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52semi-circular segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–56tangent segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–55

arcs, Fence Stretch function and . . . . . . . . 3–29Area

Active (solid/hole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26, 3–62change element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62change fence contents to Active . . . . . . . 3–62closed element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76enclosed by elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76enclosed by fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76of element difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76of element intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76of element union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26

Area Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63Array

polar coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55rectangular coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55

ARRAY ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58ARRAY POLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58ARRAY RECTANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58Arrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21Association

cell with another element . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82multi-line with another element . . . . . . 6–47point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82

Associative Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41drop (convert to lines, line strings, and/or

arcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–84Attach

Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1, 5–30reference raster file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38

ATTACH ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130Attributes

element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Auxiliary Coordinate System (ACS) . . . . . 7–61,6–122AccuDraw and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67align with element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126

align with view coordinates . . . . . . . . . 6–127attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67, 6–130by data points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126cylindrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–63define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122, 6–126defining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68make active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67move origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129plane lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68precision input using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62rotate from top orientation . . . . . . . . . 6–128save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122select and attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130spherical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–64triad display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62

Auxiliary Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–124AZ= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21

BB-spline

closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59control polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55, 6–58curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55, 6–68order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55, 6–58periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–141

B-spline curvescleaning up those with large number of

control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103data points to place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–74from data points with tangent directions 6–79to pass through element vertices . . . . . . 6–79

B-spline Curves tool frame . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–66B-spline surfaces

based on element’s vertices . . . . . . . . . 7–149creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146evaluating attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183Fence Stretch function and . . . . . . . . . . 3–29helical-shaped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–156reducing number of poles . . . . . . . . . . . 7–176

Backward Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30

i–2 MicroStation/J User’s Guide

Index

Bézier Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–60Bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44Blend

Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–108Surface Between Rail Curves . . . . . . . 7–181Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–179

BLEND CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–110BLEND RAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–182BLEND SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–181Block

3D (slab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–51place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55placement with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53

Boreline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60Boresite Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70breaks, Fence Stretch function to

manipulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29

CCalculate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61, 6–93calculator, popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26Camera

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27CAMERA NAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48Catenary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93Catmull-Rom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–57Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

associate shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7define origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20delete from library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9derived . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53designate active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10dimension-driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53display name and level (identify) . . . . . 4–20drop association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82edit name/description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6how to create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187instance of shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12levels and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11line terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1, 4–7, 4–20

orphan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27, 4–29place Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6select in design and place . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13settings group component . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83shared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11, 6–47symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21type (graphic/point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Cell Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187attach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2browse contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2

Cell SettingsActive cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18active cell (for placement) . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10active pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41

Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5, 6–47replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13

Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116Change

element attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62Multi-line to Active Definition . . . . . . . . 3–67Surface Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–169to Active Area (Solid/Hole) . . . . . . . 6–5, 3–62to Active Curve Settings . . . . . . 6–59, 6–102to Active Solid or Surface Status . . . . . 7–167to Active Surface Settings . . . . . 7–55, 7–172View Perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15

CHANGE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63CHANGE COLOR FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63CHANGE COLOR OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . 3–63CHANGE CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103CHANGE DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–107Change Element

Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19, 3–61Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–106to Active Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62


Index

to Active Fill Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63to Active Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61

CHANGE FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–64CHANGE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62CHANGE MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–67CHANGE SURFACE CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–168CHANGE SURFACE NORMAL . . . . . . . 7–170CHANGE SURFACE SETTINGS . . . . . . 7–173CHANGE VIEW PERSPECTIVE . . . . . . . 7–16Circle

by center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48by diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48by edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48by radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–52measure radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73placement with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73

Clipping Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31Clipping Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31Clipping, optimized fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20Close

element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33, 1–39CLOSE ELEMENT . . . 1–33, 1–39, 1–58, 6–82CM= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–13 thru 1–15change element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61change fence contents to Active . . . . . . . 3–61fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63fill area with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26match Active to element . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13select elements by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

Color Tableattach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

Complexchain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79

Complex Chaincreate automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11create manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11

Complex Elementdrop status (return to primitive

elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2, 3–79drop status of fence contents . . . . . . . . . 3–33

Complex Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2create automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14create manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14difference of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16flood fill to create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16intersection of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16union of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16

Coneplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–87

Configuration VariablesMS_RFDIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7

Conic Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85Construct

Active Point at Intersection . . . . . . . . . . 1–69Active Points Along Element . . . . . . . . . 1–71Active Points Between Data Points . . . . 1–67Angle Bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115Circular Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113Closed Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32Closed Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37Corner Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40Line at Active Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–46Merged Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34Merged Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39Minimum Distance Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–45Offset Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–158Open Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33Open Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38Parabolic Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6Parametric Line String . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–100Skin Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–151Surface by Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145Surface by Section or Network . . . . . . 7–143Surface or Solid of Projection . . . . . . . . . 7–93Surface or Solid of Revolution . . . . . . . . 7–97

CONSTRUCT BISECTOR ANGLE . . . . . 1–45CONSTRUCT BSPLINE CURVE . . . . . . . 6–77CONSTRUCT CURVE OFFSET . . . . . . . . 6–90CONSTRUCT CURVE REDUCE . . . . . . 6–104Construct Helical Surface tool . . . . . . . . 7–155CONSTRUCT LINE AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47CONSTRUCT LINE MINIMUM . . . . . . . . 1–46


Index

CONSTRUCT PARAMETRIC CURVE . . . 6–99CONSTRUCT PARAMETRIC

LINESTRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–100CONSTRUCT POINT ALONG . . . . . . . . . 1–72CONSTRUCT POINT BETWEEN . . . . . . 1–68CONSTRUCT POINT DISTANCE . . . . . . 1–73CONSTRUCT POINT INTERSECTION . 1–70CONSTRUCT POINT PROJECT . . . . . . . 1–69CONSTRUCT SURFACE CROSSSEC-

TION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145CONSTRUCT SURFACE EDGE . . . . . . 7–146CONSTRUCT SURFACE HELICAL . . . 7–157CONSTRUCT SURFACE OFFSET . . . . 7–159CONSTRUCT SURFACE PROJECTION . 7–97CONSTRUCT SURFACE REDUCE . . . . 7–177CONSTRUCT SURFACE REVOLUTION 7–99CONSTRUCT SURFACE SKIN . . . . . . . 7–152CONSTRUCT SURFACE TRACE . . . . . 7–155CONSTRUCT TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–164control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103CONVERT BSPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–108Convert Element to B-spline . . . . . . . . . . 6–107Coons Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145Coordinate

view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35

element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11, 3–35fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35

Copy Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35from reference file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39rectangular array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55to different level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116to polar array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55using fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35

COPY ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37COPY ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37COPY PARALLEL DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . 3–40COPY PARALLEL KEYIN . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40Corner Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40Create

cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187cell library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3Complex Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11Complex Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14Region (complex shape) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16

CREATE CHAIN AUTOMATIC . . . . . . . . 6–13CREATE CHAIN MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13Create Curves tool box

Extract Surface Rule Lines . . . . . . . . . . 6–90CREATE REGION DIFFERENCE . . . . . . 6–20CREATE REGION FLOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20CREATE REGION INTERSECTION . . . . 6–20CREATE REGION UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–20CREATE SHAPE AUTOMATIC . . . . . . . . 6–15CREATE SHAPE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14Create Surfaces tool box

Construct Helical Surface tool . . . . . . . 7–155Place Free-form Surface tool . . . . . . . . 7–146Sweep Along Two Traces tool . . . . . . . . 7–152tool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–141

Cross Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32, 6–34Crosshatch Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27, 4–40CROSSHATCH DIFFERENCE . . . . . . . . . 4–41CROSSHATCH ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41CROSSHATCH FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41CROSSHATCH FLOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41CROSSHATCH ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41CROSSHATCH INTERSECTION . . . . . . . 4–41CROSSHATCH POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41CROSSHATCH UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–54

3D B-spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–88B-spline . . . . . . . .6–55, 6–69, 6–85 thru 6–86Bézier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–54, 6–60, 6–80blend B-spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–108calculate based on formula . . . . . 6–61, 6–93Catmull-Rom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–57change to active settings . . . . . . . . . . . 6–102composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–80conic section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59convert element to B-spline . . . . . . . . . 6–107derive from existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–65digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–105, 3–110formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61, 6–93hyperbola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59least squares approximation . . . . . . . . . 6–56library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61, 6–93match settings to existing . . . . . . . . . . . 3–75non-planar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48parabola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59


Index

parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–99 thru 6–100partial ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42, 6–55pre-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93reduce B-spline pole count . . . . . . . . . . 6–103space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42, 6–134transitional spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59

curve-type elements, flattening . . . . . . . . 6–112Custom Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18

active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19point symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17scale factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17, 1–20stroke pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17, 1–19

CutAll Component Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36Single Component Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35

CUT ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37CUT SINGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36Cylinder

place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–83

DData Button

3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60Data Point

3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–66along design plane axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–67along drawing plane axes . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38along view axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–42, 2–67coordinate system for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–66distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–41, 2–67precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65preview with tentative point . . . . . . . . . 2–10relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–67

data pointsplacing free-form surface with . . . . . . . 7–148to place B-spline curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–74with tangent directions for B-spline curve

creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–78DD= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18Define

auxiliary coordinate system . . . 6–122, 6–126Cell Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7, 4–20Reference File Back Clipping Plane . . . 5–31Reference File Clipping Mask . . . . . . . . 5–31Reference File Front Clipping Plane . . . 5–32

Define ACSAligned with Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126Aligned with View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–127By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122, 6–126

DEFINE ACS ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126DEFINE ACS POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–127DEFINE ACS VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–128DEFINE CELL ORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20Delete

Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15Fence Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19, 3–32Part of Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–100Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53Reference File Clipping Mask . . . . . . . . 5–31Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112

DELETE PARTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101DELETE VERTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113deleting

AccuDraw shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36variables in popup calculator . . . . . . . . . 2–30

DEPTH ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22DEPTH DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19Design Cube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2Detach

Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24, 5–34DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DDRAWING . . . . . 7–78DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFILLET . . . . . . . 7–178DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DFREEFORM . . . 7–142DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DMODSURF . . . . 7–160DIALOG TOOLBOX 3DVIEWING . . . . . . 7–13DIALOG TOOLBOX ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–126DIALOG TOOLBOX ARC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–74DIALOG TOOLBOX BSPLINE . . . . . . . . . 6–67DIALOG TOOLBOX CHANGE . . . . . . . . . 3–60DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVECREATE . . . 6–69DIALOG TOOLBOX CURVEMODIFY . . 6–102DIALOG TOOLBOX DROP . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79DIALOG TOOLBOX EXTRACT . . . . . . . 7–183


Index

DIALOG TOOLBOX FENCE . . . . . . . . . . 3–23DIALOG TOOLBOX FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6DIALOG TOOLBOX GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . 6–9DIALOG TOOLBOX ISOMETRIC . . . . . . 6–51DIALOG TOOLBOX JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . 6–32DIALOG TOOLBOX LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . 1–30DIALOG TOOLBOX MANIPULATE . . . . 3–35DIALOG TOOLBOX MATCH . . . . . . . . . . 3–71DIALOG TOOLBOX MEASURE . . . . . . . 2–70DIALOG TOOLBOX MODIFY . . . . . . . . . 3–89DIALOG TOOLBOX PATTERNS . . . . . . . 4–33DIALOG TOOLBOX POINTS . . . . . . . . . . 1–64DIALOG TOOLBOX POLYGONS . . . . . . . 1–55DIALOG TOOLBOX REFERENCE . . . . . 5–30DIALOG TOOLBOX SELECTION . . . . . . . 3–2DIALOG TOOLBOX SURFACE . . . . . . . 7–141DIALOG VIEWROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130

curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–42, 6–134line string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40, 6–134panning while digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131

Digitizing Tabletmap to design plane coordinates . . . . . 6–133partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131

Dimensiondrop (convert to lines, arcs, and text) . . 3–86drop association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82insert extension line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110remove extension line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112

Dimension Attributesmatch Active to element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–74

Dimension-driven Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54

Display Depthset by key-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18set by keying in distance to move . . . . . 7–19set graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16

Distancealong element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70between points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70minimum between elements . . . . . . . . . 2–70

perpendicular from element . . . . . . . . . . 2–70Donut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–88DP= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18Drawing Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21

coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21, 7–65in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19lock axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–47origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19, 2–45rotate axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–48, 7–56

DropAssociation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82Associative Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–84Complex Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2, 3–79Complex Status of Fence Contents . . . . 3–33Dimension Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–86Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2, 6–9From Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21Line String/Shape Status . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29, 3–85Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–81

DROP ASSOCIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83DROP COMPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80DROP DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–87DROP ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11DROP LINESTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–84DROP MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–86DROP PATTERN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–85DROP STRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–81DROP TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82DZ= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21

EEdit

Multi-line Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45Edit Menu

Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4Select By Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3

Elementassociation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1


Index

boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2filter display of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11hole(s) in solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19, 7–70intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6keypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1midpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6modify geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3Selection . . . . . . . .3–3 thru 6–4, 3–11, 6–120selection criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1volume enclosed by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55

Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1, 3–69area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26area (solid/hole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–62change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61class (primary/construction) . . . . . . . . . 1–28color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–106fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26, 3–63level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3line style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17line weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15, 3–61match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26selection criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

Element MenuAttributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5, 6–47Multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25

Element Selection tool boxPowerSelector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

elementsB-spline curves to pass through vertices 6–78B-spline surfaces based on vertices . . . 7–149rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34rotating and stretching in fence . . . . . . 3–48

scaling and stretching in fence . . . . . . . 3–44selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5stretching in fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36

Ellipseaxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73fourth (quarter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78half . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77measure .................................................... 2–73partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85placement with AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53

Environment VariablesMS_WEBFILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11

EVALUATE CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120Evaluate Curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–114EVALUATE SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–187Evaluate Surface tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183evaluate, B-spline surface . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–186Evolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93Extend

Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–105Element to Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101multiple elements simultaneously . . . 3–105Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–174Two Elements to Intersection . . . . . . . 3–102

EXTEND CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–106EXTEND ELEMENT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103EXTEND ELEMENT INTERSECTION . 3–104EXTEND LINE DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . 3–102EXTEND LINE KEYIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102EXTEND SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–175EXTRACT SURFACE RULE LINES . . . . 6–93Extract Surface Rule Lines tool . . . . . . . . 6–90

FFence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16

accept contents for manipulation . . . . . 3–19area enclosed by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76array contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24, 3–26change attributes of contents . . . . . . . . . 3–61change contents to Active Area . . . . . . . 3–62circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16 thru 3–17contents selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17


Index

copy contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–35copy contents to new design file . . . . . . 3–21delete contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19, 3–32drop associations with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82drop complex status of contents . . . . . . 3–33drop dimensions contained in . . . . . . . . 3–86drop multi-lines contained in . . . . 6–29, 3–85extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29hatch area enclosed by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37manipulate contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29mirror contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51modify vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28move contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38move contents to new design file . . . . . . 3–22optimized clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20pattern area enclosed by . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76place block (rectangular boundary) . . . . 3–24,

3–26place shape (non-rectangular boundary) 3–25reject contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17rotate contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46scale contents of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–25 thru 3–26stretch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23use in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71void . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–16 thru 3–17

FENCE ARRAY POLAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–58FENCE ARRAY RECTANGULAR . . . . . . 3–58fence contents, rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34FENCE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–37FENCE DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33FENCE DROP ASSOCIATION . . . . . . . . . 3–83FENCE DROP COMPLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–33FENCE DROP DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . 3–86FENCE DROP MLINE . .6–29, 3–85 thru 3–86FENCE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21FENCE FREEZE . . . . . . . . . . . .3–85 thru 3–86FENCE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32FENCE MIRROR COPY HORIZONTAL . 3–53FENCE MIRROR COPY LINE . . . . . . . . . 3–53FENCE MIRROR COPY VERTICAL . . . . 3–53

FENCE MIRROR ORIGINAL HORIZON-TAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53

FENCE MIRROR ORIGINAL LINE . . . . 3–53FENCE MIRROR ORIGINAL VERTICAL 3–53FENCE MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39FENCE ROTATE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . 3–51FENCE ROTATE POINTS COPY . . . . . . . 3–51FENCE ROTATE POINTS ORIGINAL . . 3–51FENCE SCALE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46FENCE SCALE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46FENCE SCALE POINTS COPY . . . . . . . . 3–46FENCE SCALE POINTS ORIGINAL . . . . 3–46FENCE SEPARATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22FENCE STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–32Fence Stretch function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21

and arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29and B-spline surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29and multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29

FENCE TATE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51FENCE THAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–85 thru 3–86FF= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21File

curve library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1update sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46

File MenuReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130

Fillarea with color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26change element to active type . . . . . . . . 3–63display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27shape with color of outline . . . . . . . . . . . 3–63type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26with Active Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26with Active Fill Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26

Filletchamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–113horizontal parabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6parabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6symmetric parabolic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6

FILLET MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115FILLET NOMODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115FILLET SINGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115Fillet Surfaces tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–177


Index

FilletsConstruct Parabolic Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6

Filterelement display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121

FLATTEN CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–114Flatten Curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–111Flood Fill . . . . . . . 6–16, 6–19, 4–39, 4–47, 2–76FORMULA LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63FORMULA UNLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63free-form surface, placing with data

points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–148FREEZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–30, 3–85 thru 3–86

GGraphic Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11Graphic Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3

add element(s) to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3, 6–20drop status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4

Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2–61, 2–64 thru 2–65offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62orthogonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–62references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61

Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3also called orphan cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3break up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3, 6–20Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5, 6–22solid and associated hole(s) . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5

GROUP ADD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21GROUP DROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22GROUP HOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23

HHandles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–11 thru 3–12Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33area between multi-line components . . 4–36,

4–45area defined by data points . . . . . . . . . . 4–40area enclosed by bounding elements . . . 4–39area of element difference . . . . . . . . . . . 4–38area of element intersection . . . . . . . . . 4–37area of element union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40element area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–35fenced area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–37flood fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27

HATCH DIFFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40HATCH ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40HATCH FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40HATCH FLOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40HATCH INTERSECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40HATCH POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40HATCH UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–40helical-shaped B-spline surface . . . . . . . . 7–156Helix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49, 6–88Hole

in solid element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5Hyperbola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85

IIDENTIFY CELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21Image File

formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36Image File

monochrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35true color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–36types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35

Inputprecision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65

Input FocusAccuDraw window and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23

InsertVertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110

INSERT VERTEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112IntelliTrim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–105intersecting lines, selecting elements that . 3–9Intersection

extend element to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103extend two elements to . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102


Index

trim element to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–104trim multiple elements simultaneously

to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–105Involute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93Isometric

lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–49plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7, 7–23

JJOIN CORNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41JOIN CROSS CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33JOIN CROSS MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35JOIN CROSS OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34JOIN TEE CLOSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38JOIN TEE MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40JOIN TEE OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30

closed cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32closed tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–40display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–28merged cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–34merged tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23open cross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33open tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–38

KKeyboard Shortcuts

AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34, 2–58

LLC= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19Least Squares, to define B-spline surface 7–146Length

measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–75Lengthen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–3, 1–12 thru 1–13copy element to different . . . . . . . . . . . 3–116map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1–10 thru 1–11match Active to element . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69

move element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61move element to different . . . . . . . . . . 3–117move fence contents to Active . . . . . . . . 3–61name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3reference file display by . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14select elements by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15, 1–21

Level Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3Library

curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30, 1–36

angle between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74angle bisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44at Active Angle to element . . . . . . . . . . . 1–46chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115extend by adding line segment . . . . . . 3–110extend or shorten by key-in . . . . . . . . . 3–101extend or shorten graphically . . . . . . . 3–101extend or shorten to intersection . . . . . 3–102

thru 3–103minimum distance between elements . . 1–45terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21zero length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65

Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36, 1–57Line String

delete vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134drop (convert to individual line

segments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110insert vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110non-planar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6–99 thru 6–100space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40, 6–134

Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17, 3–69Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18change element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61change fence contents to Active . . . . . . . 3–61custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17drop (convert to lines, line strings and/or

arcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83match Active to element . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69modify existing element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–65


Index

select elements by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21user-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

Line Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15change element to Active . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61match Active to element . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69select elements by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15

Linear Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49Lock

ACS plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68boresite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70graphic group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61, 2–64isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–49Smart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2, 2–11

Locks Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64LT= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21LV= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

MManage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84Manipulate Fence Contents . . . . . . 3–21, 3–29Manipulate tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34Mass Properties

analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–82window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–82

MatchAll Element Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69Curve Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–75Dimension Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–74Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–68Multi-line Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73Pattern Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–70

MATCH COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69MATCH CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–76MATCH DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–74MATCH ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–70MATCH ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69MATCH LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69MATCH MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73MATCH STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69

MATCH SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77MATCH WEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69Matrix

of Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16MATRIX CELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18MDL LOAD CURVCALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–95Measure

Angle Between Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76area defined by data points . . . . . . . . . . 2–76area of element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76area of element difference . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76area of element intersection . . . . . . . . . 2–76area of element union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70distance along element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70distance between points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–70fenced area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76flood fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–75minimum distance between elements . . 2–70perpendicular distance from element . . 2–70Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81volume enclosed by element(s) . . . . . . . 2–81

MEASURE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–75MEASURE AREA DIFFERENCE . . . . . . 2–81MEASURE AREA ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . 2–81MEASURE AREA FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81MEASURE AREA FLOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81MEASURE AREA INTERSECTION . . . . 2–81MEASURE AREA POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81MEASURE AREA UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81MEASURE DISTANCE ALONG . . . . . . . . 2–73MEASURE DISTANCE MINIMUM . . . . . 2–73MEASURE DISTANCE PERPENDICU-

LAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73MEASURE DISTANCE POINTS . . . . . . . 2–73MEASURE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76MEASURE RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–74MEASURE VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–82MENU CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–98MENU DUPLICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–98MENU NEWFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–97MENU OPENCURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–97MENU OPENFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–97


Index

MENU SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–97MENU SAVETO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–98Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51

element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51Reference File About Horizontal . . . . . . 5–33Reference File About Vertical . . . . . . . . 5–34

MIRROR COPY HORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . 3–53MIRROR COPY LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53MIRROR COPY VERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53MIRROR ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53MIRROR ORIGINAL HORIZONTAL . . . . 3–53MIRROR ORIGINAL LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–53MIRROR ORIGINAL VERTICAL . . . . . . . 3–53MLINE EDIT CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–46MLINE EDIT PROFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45MLINE PARTIAL DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43Modify

Arc Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80Arc Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81Arc Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–79delete part of element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–100delete vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–89Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–28insert vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110Trim Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170using handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80

MODIFY ARC ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–81MODIFY ARC AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82MODIFY ARC RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–80Modify Curves tool box

Evaluate Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–114Flatten Curve tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–111Reduce Curve Data tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103tool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–100

MODIFY DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55MODIFY ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–99MODIFY FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29MODIFY LINESTYLE DASHSCALE . . . 3–66MODIFY LINESTYLE ENDWIDTH . . . . 3–66MODIFY LINESTYLE GAPSCALE . . . . . 3–66MODIFY LINESTYLE ICON . . . . . . . . . . 3–66MODIFY LINESTYLE SCALE . . . . . . . . . 3–66MODIFY LINESTYLE SHIFT . . . . . . . . . 3–66MODIFY LINESTYLE STARTWIDTH . . 3–66

Modify Surfaces tool boxReduce Surface Poles tool . . . . . . . . . . 7–175tool summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–159

MODIFY TRIM BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . 7–171Moments of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–83Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38

ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38Multi-line Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32

MOVE ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129Move Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11, 3–38

parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39to Active Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61to different level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–117using fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–38

MOVE ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39MOVE FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–29MOVE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–39MOVE PARALLEL DISTANCE . . . . . . . . 3–40MOVE PARALLEL ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40MOVE PARALLEL KEYIN . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–40Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23

associate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35change to active definition . . . . . . . . . . . 3–67connect component line segments . . . . . 6–41cut all component lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–36cut component line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25delete part of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42drop (convert to lines, line strings, and/or

arcs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29, 3–85drop association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–82end cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27, 6–45hatch area between components . 4–36, 4–45joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30match definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–73move profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–26Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43remove break in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41


Index

settings group component . . . . . . . . . . . 6–28start cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27uncut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41

Multi-lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25multi-lines, Fence Stretch function and . . 3–29

Nnormal direction, computing for B-spline

surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183normal plot scale, for B-spline surface . . 7–183NURBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53, 6–93

OOrphan Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3Orthogonal

shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59

PParabola . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85

as curve element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27, 4–41area defined by data points . . . . . . . . . . 4–48area enclosed by bounding elements . . . 4–47area of element difference . . . . . . . . . . . 4–47area of element intersection . . . . . . . . . 4–46area of element union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–27, 4–29delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–53element area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–43fenced area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–45flood fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–47in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–188linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49part of area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32

PATTERN AREA DIFFERENCE . . . . . . . 4–48PATTERN AREA ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . 4–48PATTERN AREA FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48PATTERN AREA INTERSECTION . . . . . 4–48PATTERN AREA POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48

PATTERN AREA UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48Pattern Attributes

angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41associative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–28, 4–41display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52match active to placed pattern . . . . . . . 4–52show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52snappable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29, 4–41

PATTERN LINE ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51PATTERN LINE MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . 4–51PATTERN LINE SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51PATTERN LINE SINGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51Patterning Settings

active cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–29, 4–41display on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26group component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31

Perimetermeasure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–76

Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6Perspective Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8Place

Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16Active Cell Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9Active Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21Active Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65, 6–133Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–52, 1–75B-spline Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–69Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–53, 1–55cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–48, 2–51Composite Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–80Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–87Conic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–85Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–83Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–51, 2–53Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24Free-form Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146Half Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77Helix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49, 6–88Isometric Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48, 6–51Isometric Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48, 6–52Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37, 6–47Orthogonal Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59Parametric Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99


Index

Parametric Line String . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99Point or Stream Curve . . . 1–42, 7–48, 6–134Quarter Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78Regular Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–57Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–78SmartLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48, 2–54Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–81Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–86Stream Line String . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40, 6–134Torus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–88Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–90

Place Active Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14, 6–47at Active Angle and Active Scale . . . . . . 4–14at graphically defined angle and scale . 4–14interactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16relative to active level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14

PLACE ARC CENTER CONSTRAINED . 1–77PLACE ARC EDGE CONSTRAINED . . . 1–75PLACE ARC ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–77PLACE BLOCK ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–56PLACE BLOCK ISOMETRIC . . . . . . . . . . 6–52PLACE BLOCK ORTHOGONAL . . . . . . . 1–55PLACE BLOCK ROTATED . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55PLACE BSPLINE CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–77PLACE CELL DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54PLACE CELL ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16PLACE CIRCLE CENTER CON-

STRAINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–50PLACE CIRCLE DIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . 1–51PLACE CIRCLE EDGE CONSTRAINED 1–50PLACE CIRCLE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–51PLACE CIRCLE ISOMETRIC . . . . . . . . . 6–54PLACE COMPOSITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–83PLACE CONE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88PLACE CONE RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88PLACE CONE RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88PLACE CONE SKEWED . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–88PLACE CONIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–86PLACE CURVE POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44PLACE CURVE SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44PLACE CURVE STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44PLACE CYLINDER ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–86PLACE CYLINDER RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . 7–86PLACE CYLINDER RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . 7–86

PLACE CYLINDER SKEWED . . . . . . . . . 7–86Place Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–75PLACE ELLIPSE CENTER CON-

STRAINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54PLACE ELLIPSE EDGE CONSTRAINED 1–53PLACE ELLIPSE HALF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–78PLACE ELLIPSE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54PLACE ELLIPSE QUARTER . . . . . . . . . . 1–79PLACE FENCE ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27PLACE FENCE ALLFILES . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27PLACE FENCE BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27PLACE FENCE CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27PLACE FENCE DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27PLACE FENCE ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27PLACE FENCE SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27Place Fence tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36PLACE FENCE UNIVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27PLACE FENCE VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27Place Free-form Surface tool . . . . . . . . . . 7–146PLACE HELIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–89PLACE LINE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37PLACE LINE CONSTRAINED . . . . . . . . . 1–37PLACE LSTRING STREAM . . . . . . . . . . . 1–41PLACE MLINE CONSTRAINED . . . . . . . 1–40PLACE PARABOLA HORIZONTAL

MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8PLACE PARABOLA HORIZONTAL

NOMODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8PLACE PARABOLA MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . 6–8PLACE PARABOLA NOMODIFY . . . . . . . 6–8PLACE PARAMETRIC CURVE ABSO-

LUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99PLACE PARAMETRIC CURVE RELA-

TIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99PLACE PARAMETRIC LINESTRING

ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99PLACE PARAMETRIC LINESTRING

RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–99PLACE POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–66PLACE POLYGON CIRCUMSCRIBED . . 1–63PLACE POLYGON EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63PLACE POLYGON ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63PLACE POLYGON INSCRIBED . . . . . . . 1–63PLACE SHAPE CONSTRAINED . . . . . . . 1–58PLACE SHAPE ORTHOGONAL . . . . . . . 1–60PLACE SLAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–81


Index

PLACE SPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83PLACE SPIRAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–88PLACE SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–151PLACE TERMINATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22PLACE TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–90PLACE WEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–92planar data points, entering, and

calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27Plot

reference raster file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46Plotter Driver File Records

RASTER_RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46Point

Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–65at intersection of two elements . . . . . . . 1–69monument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–133project onto element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–68symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17tentative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

POINT ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65POINT DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65POINT DISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65Point Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17POINT VDELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65Pointer

isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50points

computing for B-spline surface . . . . . . 7–183Points

along element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–71between data points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–67

Polararray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31

polesreducing number in B-spline curve . . . 6–104reducing number in B-spline surface . 7–176setting number for B-spline curve . . . . . 6–69to define B-spline surface . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146

Polygoncircumscribed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60inscribed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60regular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–60

polygonal area, selecting elements contained oroverlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8

Pop-up Menus

snap mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5popup calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26PowerSelector tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5Precision Input

at auxiliary coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–68Precision Input Key ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–65Precision Input Key-ins

in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60using auxiliary coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 7–68

Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50Primitive Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49

cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50

Principal Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–84Principal Moments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–84Products of Inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–83Project Active Point Onto Element . . . . . . 1–68

RRadii of Gyration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–85Radius

measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–73Raster File

attach as reference file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46

Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55Rectangular

array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–31

rectangular area, selecting elements containedor overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7

Reduce Curve Data tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–103Reduce Surface Poles tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–175Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1REFERENCE DETACH ALL . . . . . . . . . . 5–24Reference Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

attach active design file to itself . . . . . . . 5–6attach coincidentally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1attach raster file at previous location . . 5–40attach raster file interactively . . . . . . . . 5–39attach to active design file . . . 5–1, 5–4, 5–30attach using saved view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4


Index

attaching remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31clipping mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31clipping plane (back) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31clipping plane (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32configuration variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7copy elements from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24, 5–34hide part of from view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31identify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–27mirror about horizontal axis . . . . 5–33, 5–44mirror about vertical axis . . . . . . 5–34, 5–44move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32, 5–42path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46portable attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32resize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–43rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33, 5–43scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28

Reference Files Settingsdisplay on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13level display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14level symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15locate elements in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19locate file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7snap to elements in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18

Reference Raster File Settings . . . . . . . . . 5–37REFERENCE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–23Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–16relative offset, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27Reload Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32Remote Attach function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11Render (Utilities menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34RENDER ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32RENDER FENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34RENDER ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34Render Settings window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33RENDER VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34Render view control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32rendering

fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34using Utilities menu Render . . . . . . . . . 7–34views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33

rendering modeschoosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33

Replacecells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22

Reseteffect on fence operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19

RotateActive ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–128element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33view contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4, 7–23

ROTATE ACS ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129ROTATE ACS RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–129ROTATE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51ROTATE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51ROTATE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51ROTATE POINTS COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51ROTATE POINTS ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . 3–51ROTATE VIEW ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24ROTATE VIEW ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24ROTATE VIEW RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24rotating elements, and stretching in fence 3–48

SSave Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–130Saved Views

attach to drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11reference file attachments using . . . . . . . 5–4

savingvariables in popup calculator . . . . . . . . . 2–28

Scaleelement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11, 3–41fence contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–41Reference File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32

SCALE COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46SCALE ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46SCALE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46SCALE POINTS COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46SCALE POINTS ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . 3–46scaling elements, in fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–44


Index

Screenpartition of digitizing tablet . . . . . . . . . 6–132

section profile curve, sweeping along 2 tracecurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–153

Select ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68, 6–130Select All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4Select and Place Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9, 4–18Select By Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–121SELECT CELL ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20SELECT CELL ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20SELECT CELL RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20Select Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3

by area (Solid/Hole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120by class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120by color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120by level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120by line style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120by line weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120by property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120by type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–120in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70

selectingelements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

SetActive Depth (graphically) . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19Display Depth (graphically) . . . . . . . . . . 7–16

SET AUTOPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134SET CAMERA DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . 7–32SET CAMERA POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32SET CAMERA TARGET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32SET DDEPTH ABSOLUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18SET DDEPTH RELATIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18SET VALUE VARIABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–95Settings

group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134

Settings Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–83scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85working units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–85

Settings MenuDesign File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–61Level Names... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

Level Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23Locks Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–64Manage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–84Snaps Button Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3View Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122

SF= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22shading types for rendering

choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33Shape

complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2, 6–14delete vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112drop (convert to individual line

segments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–80insert vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110orthogonal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–59

Shorten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–102Show

Pattern Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–52SHOW DEPTH ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23SHOW DEPTH DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22Sinusoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93Slab

place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–78Smart Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38SmartLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54Snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2

divisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2, 2–11mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2to cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10to element keypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11to reference file elements . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18

Snap Modebisector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6button bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6, 2–50intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6, 2–50keypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6midpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6nearest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6, 2–50origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6perpendicular from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6point on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6


Index

pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6tangent from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6through point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

Solidchange to surface . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55, 7–167extruded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52of projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93of revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52, 7–97

Sphereplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50, 7–81

Spiralplanar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–93transitional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59, 6–86

Split Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–173SPLIT SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–174Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–55Start AccuDraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17STITCH SURFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–169Stream Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–134stretching elements, in fence . . . . . . . . . . . 3–36Stroke Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

shift distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20shift fraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

Styleline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–68 thru 3–69

Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55B-spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–146B-spline blending between two . . . . . . 7–181B-spline by cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . 7–143blend between two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–179boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170by edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145by skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–151change settings to active surface . . . . . 7–172change to solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55, 7–167construct by interpolating network of

elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–144control net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53Coons patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–174extruded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52free-form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53, 7–146holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170match settings of existing . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77normal direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–169

NURBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53of projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–93of revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52, 7–97primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49primitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49ruled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–145sense of boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–170separate into two along rule lines . . . . 7–173simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–167

Sweep Along Two Traces tool . . . . . . . . . 7–152Symbology

level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15, 1–21

Ttangency, setting for B-spline curve . . . . . 6–69Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6tangent directions for data points, to create

B-spline curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–78tangent plot scale

for B-spline surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–183tangents

computing for B-spline surface . . . . . . 7–183target

for rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33Tee Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39Tentative Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11

3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61Tentative Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60AccuDraw and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–45as reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13Boresite Lock and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–70snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Terminatorarrowhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21

Textdrop status (convert to individual graphic

elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–81THAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3–85 thru 3–86tolerance

for B-spline curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–69tolerance shortcut, in AccuDraw . . . . . . . . 2–31Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2


Index

3D Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–773D View Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11ACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–125Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–74Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13Change Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–59Create Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–68Create Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–141Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–77Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–47Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50Linear Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29Manipulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–34Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–70Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–69Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–87Modify Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–159Multi-line Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–63Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–54Reference Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28

Torusplace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–88

TrimElement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–54, 3–104multiple elements simultaneously . . . 3–105

TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–105TRIM MULTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–109TS= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21

UUNCUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–42Uncut Component Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3Update

sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–46URLs

downloading files from . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11User Preferences

pointer size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50

pointer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50User-Defined Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17Utilities menu

Auxiliary Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–124Render . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34

Vvariables, in popup calculator . . . . . . . . . . 2–28Vertex

delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–112insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–110

VI= . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26View

axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8clipping planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11perspective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7Right Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6zoom in or out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14

VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26View Attributes

ACS triad on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–122active depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19display depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4fill on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27grid on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–63level on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10pattern on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–26symbology (element/level) . . .1–24 thru 1–25

viewsrendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33

Volumeenclosed by element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–81

WWedge


Index

place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51, 7–90Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–61Window

Select Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–82Working Units

digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–131Workspace Menu

Digitizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–132

Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–50

ZZoom

3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14ZOOM 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14


guide micro station v7 1

Documents